Добавил:
Upload Опубликованный материал нарушает ваши авторские права? Сообщите нам.
Вуз: Предмет: Файл:
[Mark_E._Villiger]_Commentary_on_the_1969_Vienna_C(BookSee.org).pdf
Скачиваний:
21
Добавлен:
08.03.2016
Размер:
3.07 Mб
Скачать

Article 26

Pacta sunt servanda

Every treaty in force is binding upon the parties to it and must be performed by them in good faith.

Article 26 Pacta sunt servanda

Tout traité en vigueur lie les parties et doit être exécuté par elles de bonne foi.

Artikel 26 Pacta sunt servanda

Ist ein Vertrag in Kraft, so bindet er die Vertragsparteien und ist von ihnen nach Treu und Glauben zu erfüllen.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 23—Pacta sunt servanda

Every treaty in force is binding upon the parties to it and must be performed by them in good faith.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 55.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 23 , 162 , 232, 326.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 55.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 55.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 32 , 169, 314.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 23.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 150 , 427 f; OR 1969 Plenary 38 , 44 , 157 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 96:0:0

362

article

Selected Literature:

A-G

I.I. Amar, Observations sur la garantie d’exécution d’un traité en droit international. Un cas moyen-oriental, Etudes internationales (Tunis) (1984) 64 ; A. Chayes/A.H. Chayes, On Compliance, IO 47 (1993) 175 ; A.A. d’Amato, Good Faith, EPIL 2 (1995) 599 ; M. Draghici, Le respect des obligations internationales par le principe de la bonne foi ( pacta sunt servanda), Analele universitatii Bucuresti 32 (1983) 55 ; P. Fois, Il consenso degli Stati ad obbligarsi e il principio pacta sunt servanda, Rivista 84 (2001) 5 ; Th.M. Franck, Taking Treaties Seriously, AJIL 82 (1988) 67 f; W.P. Gormley, The Codification of pacta sunt servanda by the International Law Commission: The Preservation of Classical Norms of Moral Force and Good Faith, Saint Louis University Law Journal 14 (1970) 367 ;

I-M

B.O. Iluyomade, The Scope and Content of a Complaint of Abuse of Right in International Law, Harvard ILJ 16 (1975) 47 ; M. Lachs, Pacta sunt servanda, EPIL 3 (1997) 847 ; Id., Some Thoughts on the Role of Good Faith in International Law, in: R.J. Akkerman/P.J. van Krieken/Ch.O. Pannenborg (eds.), Declarations on Principles. Liber amicorum discipulorumque B.V.A. Röling (1977) 44 ; R. Lavalle, About the Alleged Customary Law Nature of the Rule pacta sunt servanda, ÖZöRV 33 (1982) 9 ; I.L. Lukashuk, The Principle pacta sunt servanda and the Nature of Obligation under International Law, AJIL 83 (1989) 513 ; J.M. Mössner, Vertrauen als Prinzip der Völkerrechtsordnung, Politik und Kultur 6 (1979) 56 ; J.P. Müller/Th. Cottier, Estoppel, EPIL 2 (1995) 116 ;

N-Z

F. Nikolayev, Law on Treaties, International A airs (Moscow) 10 (1979) 87 ; V. Paul, The Abuse of Rights and bona fides in International Law, ÖZöR 28 (1977) 107 ; A. Oddenino, “Pacta sunt servanda” e buona fede nel’ applicazione dei trattati internazionali: spunti riconstruttivi (2003); J. Salmon, Article 26, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1075 ; P. Sevastik, The Binding Force of Treaties Under International Law. Handbook for Government Lawyers and Human Rights Advocates (1997); H. Suganami, Why Ought Treaties To Be Kept? YBWA 33 (1979) 243 ; D.F. Vagts, The United States and Its Treaties: Observance and Breach, AJIL 95 (2001) 313 ; E.B. Weiss (ed.), International Compliance with Nonbinding Accords (1997); E. Zoller, La bonne foi en droit international public (1977).

 

PACTA SUNT SERVANDA

363

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 26 ............................................................

3

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

9

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

9

 

2.

Customary Basis of Article 26 ...........................................................

10

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

11

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

The rule pacta sunt servanda, i.e., that treaties must be kept, has been applied

1

since time immemorial (Preamble, N. 8) and is seen today as the cornerstone

 

of international relations. Ulpian referred to it,1 for Grotius it lay at the centre of the international legal order.2 No case is known in which a tribunal has repudiated the rule or questioned its validity.3

The Preamble of the UN Charter4 and its Article 2, para. 25 both reiterate the rule of pacta sunt servanda, though these statements apply primarily to the obligations of members under the Charter itself and only indirectly concern the validity of treaties.6

1Digest 2, 14, 7, para. 7: “[w]hat is so suitable to the good of mankind as to observe those things which parties have agreed upon”; J.F. O’Connor, Good Faith in English Law (1990) 18; J.L. Kunz, The Meaning and the Range of the Norm pacta sunt servanda, AJIL

39 (1945) 180 .

2 De Jure Belli ac Pacis, lib. III, ch. 25, sec. 1.

3Lachs, EPIL 3 (1997) 848 f; Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 977. See the examples of State and court practice, ibid., and in the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II

211, para. 2.

4 “[C]onditions under which justice and respect for the obligations arising from treaties . . . can be maintained”; see R. Wolfrum, Preamble, in: Simma (ed.), Charter of the United Nations, N. 8, with reference to the Rapporteur’s statement at the San Francisco Conference (“[t]he respect for treaties should not exclude the possibility of revision duly made”).

5 “All Members . . . shall fulfil in good faith the obligations assumed by them in accordance with the present Charter”; see A. Randelzhofer, Article 2, ibid., N. 9; J.P. Müller,/ R. Kolb, Article 2, para. 2, ibid. N. 32 and passim; also the Cuban delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 45, para. 5.

6 Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 61, para. 2.

364

article

Pacta sunt servanda is also mentioned in the Principles of International Law Concerning Friendly Relations and Co-operation Among States in Accordance With the Charter of the United Nations.7

2. History

2An early mention of pacta sunt servanda can be found in the Fitzmaurice Report I of 1956.8 The Waldock Report III of 1964 introduced the core of the rule while including further statements on interpretation, territorial applicability, third States and international responsibility.9 In 1964 the ILC mainly debated the implications of the words “in force”,10 while pairing down the text to the version as it stands today.11 In 1966 the ILC again discussed the words “in force”, and also whether there should be a reference to the rule in the preamble and where to place the rule in the future Convention.12 At the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference, a five-State-amendment unsuccessfully proposed that a treaty duly determined to be invalid would not be “in force” for the purpose of the application of pacta sunt servanda.13 Interestingly, an amendment suggested by Pakistan in the context of Article 26 gave rise to the later Article 27 (q.v., N. 2).14 Article 26 was adopted by 96 votes to none.15

The ILC saw five reasons for employing a Latin term in the Convention:16 (i) pacta sunt servanda was more succinct than other languages; (ii) it did not have negative connotations of other Latin expressions, e.g., clausula rebus sic stantibus (Article 62, q.v.); (iii ) the term had been employed in international law since Grotius (N. 1); (iv) it was universally understood by both international and domestic lawyers; and (v) as it stemmed from an extinct language, there was no danger that its meaning could change.17

7UN GA Res 2625 (XXV) of 24 October 1970: “[e]very State has the duty to fulfil in good faith its obligations under international agreements valid under the generally recognized

principles and rules of international law”.

8See Article 5, YBILC 1956 II 108: “[s]ubject to the provisions of the present Code, States are bound to carry out in good faith the obligations they have assumed by the treaty”. On

the drafting history, see also Rosenne, Developments 139 . 9 YBILC 1964 II 7.

10As the first of many speakers in the ILC, see the statement by Briggs, YBILC 1964 I 24, para. 44.

11Ibid. para. 52, though still referring to “a treaty . . .”.

12Ibid., i.e., at the beginning of Part III, rather than in Part I containing the Introduction, or in Part II concerned with the Conclusion and Entry Into Force of Treaties; see also the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 211, para. 5. See also YBILC 1966 I/2 32 .

13By Bolivia, then Czechoslovakia, Ecuador, Spain, Untied Republic of Tanzania, OR Documents 145, para. 233.

14Ibid.

15OR 1969 Plenary 157.

16T he only other Latin expression employed in the Convention is jus cogens in brackets in the title of Article 53 (q.v.).

17YBILC 1964 I 163 , statements by Lachs, de Luna, Yasseen and Ago (Chairman).

PACTA SUNT SERVANDA

365

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 26

 

 

Pacta sunt servanda lies at the heart of the Convention.18 It applies without

3

exception to every treaty including its annexes and appendices. The rule

 

holds good at all stages in a treaty’s life, e.g., in respect of its entry into force,

 

interpretation, application and termination.19 The treaty must, however, be

 

in force; pacta sunt servanda “only relates to the fulfilment of existing obliga-

 

tions”.20 While this formulation may appear tautological,21 it is pertinent in

 

that it fixes in point of time the application of pacta sunt servanda to treaties:22

 

the rule does not apply during the phases of the conclusion of the treaty

 

(though good faith has a role to play, for instance, in respect of pre-contractual

 

obligations as in Article 18, N. 5), and it ceases to apply once the treaty has

 

been lawfully terminated or is invalid or rendered inoperable.23 Whether or

 

not a treaty is in force, will be determined according to the Convention.24 As

 

regards one particular phase of a treaty’s life: pacta sunt servanda also applies

 

to the provisional application of a treaty as in Article 25 (q.v., N. 4).

 

 

A treaty, as defined in Article 2, subpara. 1, (q.v., N. 4–20), is binding upon

4

the parties to it, i.e., the treaty is obligatory. There are various qualifications

 

to the rule, in particular reservations (Articles 19–23, q.v.) and the grounds

 

of invalidity and termination of a treaty (Articles 42–68, q.v.). The fact that

 

pacta sunt servanda is occasionally breached in the international (as much

 

as in the domestic) legal order confirms its existence rather than calling it

 

in question.

 

 

The issue arises as to the legal basis of the norm.25 Its main component is good

5

faith (N. 8) which pervades the entire legal order.26 However, good faith itself

 

has no normative quality (Article 31, N. 6),27 whereas pacta sunt servanda

 

determines and o ers an authoritative regulation for the parties’ conduct.

 

18See the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 32, para. 1; Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 60, para. 1. See also Zoller, Bonne foi 78 and passim.

19See the statement in Vienna by the Romanian delegation, OR 1969 CoW 171, para. 30.

20Land and Maritime Boundary (Cameroon/Nigeria) Case, ICJ Reports 1998 301, para. 49.

21See the statement by Briggs in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 35, para. 44.

22Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 26, para. 75.

23Franck, AJIL 82 (1988) 68; Salmon, Article 16, in: Corten/Klein N. 13, and 17–19.

24See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 158, para. 71.

25On this extensively Salmon, Article 26, N. 22–30.

26See the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 977: “[a] State is bound to carry out in good faith the obligations which it has assumed by a treaty [pacta sunt servanda]”.

27See the Border andTransborder Armed Actions (Nicaragua/Honduras) Case, ICJ Reports 1988 105, para. 94; the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Ecuador, OR 1969 CoW 170, para. 23 (“a distinction . . . between a principle and a rule”); and Romania, ibid. 171, para. 30 (“the pacta sunt servanda rule represented the application of the principle of good faith to the performance of treaties”); the formulation in Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 7, para. 1 (“the obligation to observe treaties is one of good faith and not stricti juris”).

366

article

Three legal bases can be distinguished (N. 5–6): The first is contractual and can be found in the particular treaty which the parties have concluded.

Authors have mentioned as the ground for obligation arising from a particular treaty, inter alia, the underlying promise;28 the principle do ut des;29 and the mutual interest which States have in maintaining the relationship of rights and obligations in the treaty.30 Fitzmaurice circumscribed the legal basis as follows: “[t]he foundation of the treaty obligation is consent, coupled with the fundamental principle of law that consent gives rise to obligation.”31 As the Harvard Draft pointed out, however, once the obligation has been established, it is independent of the unilateral will of the parties (Article 54–64, q.v.).32

6The second legal basis, equally contractual, is the Convention itself which in Article 26 obliges all States parties to comply with their treaty obligations. The third legal basis is the customary rule underlying pacta sunt servanda (N. 11). (Incidentally, consuetudo est servanda applies also to all those treaties addressed by Article 26 containing norms declaratory of customary law.)

Does pacta sunt servanda reflect jus cogens? These legal bases do not in themselves su ce to grant it peremptory status. Clearly, the rule enshrining the binding force of treaties constitutes one of the pillars of international law, and the third preambular para. speaks of pacta sunt servanda being “universally recognised” (Preamble, N. 10). But how is it that, despite a treaty’s binding force, treaty parties may at any time agree inter se to amend, denounce or terminate the treaty (Articles 39, 54 and 56, q.v.)? Here, it can be replied, of course, that such agreements themselves depend on pacta sunt servanda. Finally, however, pacta sunt servanda is itself subject to rules of jus cogens as in Article 53 (q.v.). Tentatively, therefore, it can be concluded that pacta sunt servanda does not amount to a rule “from which no derogation is permitted” within the meaning of

Article 53 (q.v.).

7The treaty must be performed by the parties. It is to be applied by all organs of the State whereby its rights and obligations are put into e ect. The application presupposes the interpretation of the treaty which is, therefore, closely linked with pacta sunt servanda (Articles 31–33, q.v.).33

In the Gabcikovo-Nagymaros (Hungary/Slovakia) Case, the treaty at issue included an obligation to negotiate. The Court stated: “[w]hat is required . . . by the rule pacta sunt

28See, e.g., Carreau, Droit international 151 (“le respect de la parole formellement et solenellement donné”).

29Statement by Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 124, para. 30.

30Lachs, EPIL 3 (1997) 847.

31Ex consensu advenit vinculum. See Article 4 of Fitzmaurice Report I, YBILC 1956 II 108. Contra J.J. Charney, Universal International Laws, AJIL 87 (1993) 534: “[r]ather than consent . . . the real source of the treaty obligation is the fundamental international law norm of pacta sunt servanda”; also A. Pellet, The Normative Dilemma: Will and Consent in International Law-Making, Australian YBIL 12 (1988–1989) 22 , 33; on former Soviet doctrine, see Lukashuk, AJIL 83 (1989) 513 ; Nikolayev, International A airs (Moscow) 10 (1979) 87 .

32AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 989.

33See the statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 31, para. 51.

PACTA SUNT SERVANDA

367

 

servanda . . . is that the Parties find an agreed solution within the co-operative context

 

of the Treaty”.34

 

 

The parties must carry out the treaty obligations in good faith (bona fides).

8

Parties are required to the best of their abilities to observe the treaty stipula-

 

tions in their spirit as well as according to their letter.35 Good faith further-

 

more covers the narrower doctrine of the abuse of rights according to which

 

parties shall abstain from acts calculated to frustrate the object and purpose

 

and thus impede the proper execution of the treaty.36 The obligation prevails

 

throughout the performance of a treaty in force.37 It applies in particular where

 

a treaty leaves States a large discretion.38 In principle, there is a presumption

 

that a treaty party is acting in good faith.39

 

 

Various forms of estoppel are based on good faith, for instance, as the Court held in the

 

Chorzow Factory Case: “one Party cannot avail himself of the fact that the other has not

 

fulfilled some obligation . . . if the former Party has, by some illegal act, prevented the

 

latter from fulfilling the obligation in question”.40 Similarly, a party which has breached

 

a treaty no longer has the right to demand its fulfilment by the other parties ( frangenti

 

fidem, fides non est servanda; Article 60, q.v.).

 

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

Pacta sunt servanda, lying at the centre of the Convention, plays a particular

9

role in respect of a number of Convention provisions:

 

 

the Convention’s third preambular para. expressly mentions pacta sunt servanda in order to emphasise its importance (Preamble, N. 10);41

Article 25, concerning a treaty’s provisional application (q.v., N. 4);

34ICJ Reports 1997 67, para. 110; with reference to the North Sea Cases, ICJ Reports 1969 47, para. 85: “[the Parties] are under an obligation so as to conduct themselves that the negotiations are meaningful”.

35Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 981. On the topic, see also Rosenne, Developments 135 .

36See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 211, para. 4; the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 28, para. 17; also Article 55 para. 4 of Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 7; d’Amato, EPIL 2 (1995) 600.

37See the statement by the Italian delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 155, para. 43.

38See the Mutual Assistance in Criminal Matters (Djibouti/France) Case, ICJ Reports 2008 para. 145.

39Lachs, Liber amicorum Röling 49.

40PCIJ (1927), Series A, no. 9, 31, cited in the Gabcikovo-Nagymaros (Hungary/Slovakia) Case, ICJ Reports 1997 67, para. 10; on the subject, Müller/Cottier, EPIL 2 (1995) 116 .

41ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 211, para. 5.

368

article

Article 27 (q.v., N. 4) is a corollary to Article 26;42

Articles 31–33 on the interpretation of a treaty (q.v.);

pacta sunt servanda plays a part in determining relations (or the lack of them) between treaty parties and third States according to Articles 34–37 (q.v.); 43

Articles 39–41 (q.v.) on the amendment and modification of treaties, and Articles 42–64 (q.v.) on the invalidity, termination and suspension of treaties. As a corollary of pacta sunt servanda, a treaty may be amended or terminated whenever the parties so agree; however, parties may not withdraw from a treaty at will (Article 52, N. 3);

the Declaration to Article 52 reiterates Article 26 verbatim (Article 52—Declaration, N. 4);

the principle pacta sunt servanda is subject to rules of jus cogens according to Article 56 which provides that “[a] treaty is void if, at the time of its conclusion, it conflicts with a peremptory norm of general international law” (q.v., N. 20–21);

Article 56 on the denunciation of and withdrawal from treaties (q.v.);

Article 60 on the breach of treaties (q.v.);44

Article 62 on the fundamental change of circumstances (q.v.);

the Annex to Article 66: if the Conciliatory Commission finds that the claim of the applying party is unfounded, then the treaty continues in force (q.v., N. 18).

2.Customary Basis of Article 26

10There can be no doubt as to the basis in customary law of the rule pacta sunt servanda. The third preambular para. (Preamble, N. 10) emphasises that the rule is “universally recognised”. At the Vienna Conference in 1968/1969, the principle was never called in question; indeed, all States emphasised its importance.45

D. APPRECIATION

11The ILC purposely drafted a straightforward text in the simplest possible terms (a “staccato statement”)46 in order to emphasise the cardinal importance of pacta sunt servanda. The provision is forcefully, yet elegantly drafted, containing no exceptions or conditions which could lead to debates calling in question its validity.

42Judgment of the Swiss Federal Court of 1 November 1996, ATF 122 Ia 487.

43Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 32, para. 72; in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 156, para. 72.

44See the Gabcikovo-Nagimaros (Hungary/Slovakia) Case, ICJ Reports 68, para. 114; M. Fitzmaurice, The Gabcikovo-Nagimaros Case: The Law of Treaties, Leiden JIL 11 (1988) 341 .

45See the statement by Turkish delegation in Vienna OR 1968 CoW 153, para. 21 (“a rule of customary international law of very long standing”); similarly Briggs of the US delegation, ibid. 151, para. 65; Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 28, para. 26.

46Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 60, para. 1, and 61 at para. 2; see the definition employed by Lukashuk, AJIL 83 (1989) 518.

Article 27

Internal law and observance of treaties

A party may not invoke the provisions of its internal law as justification for its failure to perform a treaty. This rule is without prejudice to Article 46.

Article 27 Droit interne et respect des traités

Une partie ne peut invoquer les dispositions de son droit interne comme justifiant la non-exécution d’un traité. Cette règle est sans préjudice de l’article 46.

Artikel 27 Innerstaatliches Recht und Einhaltung von Verträgen

Eine Vertragspartei kann sich nicht auf ihr innerstaatliches Recht berufen, um die Nichterfüllung eines Vertrags zu rechtfertigen. Diese Bestimmung lässt Artikel 46 unberührt.

Materials:

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 427 f; OR 1969 Plenary 38 f, 53 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 73:2:24

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 46, q.v.): A. Schaus, Article 27, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1119 .

The basis of this commentary was prepared by Alison Wiebalck.

370

article

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 27 ............................................................

4

C. Reservations ........................................................................................

8

D. Context ...............................................................................................

9

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

9

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

10

3.

Customary Basis of Article 27 ...........................................................

11

E. Appreciation .......................................................................................

12

A. BACKGROUND

1.Introduction

1 It is a generally accepted principle of international law, going back to the Alabama Claims Arbitration of 1872,1 that in the relations between States parties to a treaty the provisions of domestic law cannot prevail over those of the treaty.2 Furthermore, it is the duty of a treaty party to ensure that the organs of internal law apply and give e ect to the treaty. The principle applies also in respect of the provisions of a constitution.3

2.History

2Within the ILC the principle in Article 27 was first mentioned in Fitzmaurice Report II in 1957 as a ground of termination excluded by general international

1 Martens, Nouveau Recueil Général de Traités 20, 767 ff. On the subject, see also A. Wasilkowski, Monism and Dualism at Present, in: J. Makarczyk (ed.), Theory of

International Law at the Threshold of the 21st Century (1996) 323 .

2See the Greco-Bulgarian Communities Advisory Opinion PCIJ (1930) Series B no. 17, 32 (“this proposition seems now to be so well understood and so generally accepted, that it is not deemed necessary to make citations or to adduce precedents in its support”). Both the Alabama and Greco-Bulgarian rulings were cited with approval in the Applicability of the Obligation to Arbitrate under Section 21 of the UN Headquarters Agreement of 26 June 1947 Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1988 34, para. 57. See also Article 23 of the Harvard

Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1036.

3 See the Treatment of Polish Nationals in Danzig Case, PCIJ (1932) Series A/B no. 44, 24.

HESTERMEYER

internal law and observance of treaties

371

 

law, though it was not taken up in the later Waldock Reports.4 Accordingly,

 

the final ILC-Draft 1966 did not include the rule in its draft articles on the

 

ground that the point fell within the law of state responsibility rather than

 

the law of treaties.5

 

 

Article 27 was tabled at the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference by Pakistan

3

as an amendment to the ILC Draft Article 23 on pacta sunt servanda (see

 

Article 26, N. 2).6 Its purpose was to prevent States from invoking their

 

internal laws to evade their treaty obligations.7 The rule was formulated by

 

the Drafting Committee as a separate provision, the Committee considering

 

it “indispensable” that pacta sunt servanda should remain a separate article.8

 

The Venezuelan delegation criticised the provision as their country could not

 

recognise the supremacy of any obligation over its constitutional law,9 the

 

Argentinean delegation questioned the compatibility of the new article with

 

constitutional reservations (N. 8).10 For the Iranian delegation, the provision

 

conflicted with today’s Article 46 (q.v.).11

 

 

Article 27 was adopted by 73 votes to two, with 24 abstentions.12 The high number

 

of abstentions reflected the hesitations of some States to recognise the supremacy of

 

international law over municipal laws and powers.13

 

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 27

 

 

The rule in the first sentence of Article 27 is based on the contractual obligation

4

binding the treaty parties. It denies that a State can invoke the provisions of

 

its internal law to avoid responsibility for the observance of its treaty obligations and in particular to justify its failure to perform a treaty.14 Article

4 Article 5, subpara. 2(ii ), YBILC 1957 II 41, paras. 30 .

5Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 (1970) 517; the statement in Vienna by Briggs of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 151, para. 69; also of the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey

Waldock in Vienna (who had had some hesitations in this respect), ibid. 158, para. 73. 6 OR Documents 145, subpara. 233(c).

7 OR 1968 CoW 53, para, 31, and 151, para. 59.

8 Article 23bis; see ibid. 427, paras. 29 . See the statement by the Chairman of the Drafting Committee, Yasseen, ibid. para. 31.

9 Ibid. 428, paras. 42, and 48.

10Ibid. 48.

11OR 1969 Plenary 54, para. 38.

12Ibid. 54, para. 40; previously OR 1968 CoW 158, para. 76.

13See, e.g., the statement by the Venezuelan delegation, ibid. 428, para. 42.

14See the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement, 1036. The Court described the rule as “self-evident” in the Exchange of Greek and Turkish Populations Advisory Opinion, PCIJ (1925) Series B no. 10, 20. See also the Belgian Court of Arbitration in the 1994 European School v. Hermans-Jacobs and Heuvelmans-Van Iersel Case, ILR 108 (1998) 643 (“[n]o rule of international law, which was the creation of States, not even Article 27 [of the

HESTERMEYER

372

article

27 thus strengthens, and indeed is a corollary of, the principle of pacta sunt servanda in Article 26 (q.v.).15

Partsch sees in Article 27 a statement “that on the international level international law is supreme and that this supremacy is valid in relation to any provision of internal law, whatever its ranking in the municipal order may be”.16

5A State’s internal law encompasses not only the constitution, but also statutory and ordinary legislation.17 To hold otherwise would result in a State being able to free itself of its treaty obligations by its own unilateral legislative action.18 The provisions of internal law encompass provisions already in force as well as those which may be enacted subsequent to the treaty. The e ective application of Article 27 obliges a State to ensure that all these provisions are compatible or brought into line with its international obligations.19

6Article 27 applies equally to federal States.20 In the absence of any intention to the contrary, Article 27, as well as Article 29 (q.v., N. 4), oblige a federal government to ensure implementation of a treaty in each constituent unit. Ultimately, it is the federation which is responsible in international law.

Where the national federal government cannot guarantee that the constituent units will enact the necessary legislation to give e ect to a State’s international obligations, or, if they should enact it, that such legislation would not be declared unconstitutional, then either that State cannot become a party to the treaty or a reservation would have to accepted by the other State parties to the treaty.21 Failing that, the federal State faces international responsibility for any breach of the provisions of the treaty.

Convention] gave the power to States to conclude treaties which were contrary to their constitutions”).

15Aust, Modern Treaty Law 180; see the judgment of the Swiss Federal Court of 1 November 1996, ATF 122 Ia 487. Zoller, Bonne foi 21 , explains in detail why Article 27 is not based on good faith. This appears open to doubt given the close relation between Articles 26 and 27 (N. 4), on the one hand, and the relevance of good faith for pacta sunt servanda (see Article 26, N. 8), on the other.

16EPIL 2 (1995) 1189.

17In the interests of consistency, the Drafting Committee in Vienna (N. 3) replaced the words “constitution” and “laws” as proposed by the Pakistani amendment with “internal law” which was the subject of Article 46 (q.v.); see the Chairman of the Drafting Committee, Yasseen, OR 1968 CoW 427, para. 32.

18Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1033; also Aust, Modern Treaty Law 180 f.

19Harvard Draft, ibid. 1041. Aust, ibid.; see the Finnish objection to the Guatemalan reservation (N. 9).

20See Fitzmaurice Report II, YBILC 1957 II 42, para. 31 at n. 30; the Swiss Federal Court in BGE 125 II 417, 424 f. On the relationship of federal States, internal law and the observance of treaties, see I. Bernier, International Legal Aspects of Federalism (1973); H. Burmester, Federal Clauses: An Australian Perspective, ICLQ 34 (1985) 522; R.C. Ghosh, Treaties and Federal Constitutions: Their Mutual Impact (1961); B. Opeskin, Federal States in the International Legal Order, NILR 43 (1996) 353.

21Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1041 . Still, States “do not look with favour

HESTERMEYER

internal law and observance of treaties

373

 

The second sentence of Article 27 contains a useful reminder, i.e., that the

7

rule in Article 27 is without prejudice to Article 46 on Provisions of Internal

 

Law Regarding Competence to Conclude Treaties (q.v.). In both provisions

 

internal and international law interface.22 Still, the rules are essentially di er-

 

ent.23 Whereas Article 46 pertains to the competence of a State to conclude

 

the treaty in the first place (and to possible grounds of invalidating that

 

State’s consent),24 Article 27 refers to the obligation of a State to perform a

 

treaty which is in force. Once the exception in Article 46 applies, little room

 

remains for Article 27 (see Article 46, N. 17).25

 

 

C. RESERVATIONS

 

 

Costa Rica and Guatemala have excluded the application of Article 27 to their

8

constitutions (though apparently not to ordinary legislation). Various States

 

raised objections, specifically to the Guatemalan reservation or generally

 

against all reservations filed by Guatemala (see Reservations and Declarations

 

to the Convention and Objections Thereto).26

 

 

D. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

The relationship between Article 27 and Articles 29 and 46 has been examined

9

above (N. 6–7). Furthermore, a change of domestic law cannot be invoked

 

as a fundamental change of circumstances within the meaning of Article 62 (q.v., N. 14). For purposes of Article 48, an error as to the internal law of a State qualifies as an error of fact, rather than of law (q.v., N. 6).

on federations which seek special treatment for their constituent units”, Aust, Modern Treaty Law 64; for other solutions to the problem, see ibid. 65.

22See the statement in Vienna by Yasseen, Chairman of the Drafting Committee, OR 1968 CoW 427, para. 32.

23Simma, AöR 100 (1975) 4 at 19; contra the statement in Vienna by the Venezuelan delegate, OR Plenary 1969 54, para. 35, for whom Article 27 was “at best redundant”, as it repeated and conflicted with Article 46, see also the Iranian delegation, ibid. 54, para. 38.

24Fitzmaurice Report II, YBILC 1957 II 41, para. 30 at n. 28.

25See the diss. op. of Judge Shafeiei in the 1983 Amoco Iran Oil Company v. Islamic Republic of Iran and Others Case, ILR (78) 1988, 647; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 315.

26Austria, Belgium, Finland, Germany, Sweden and the United Kingdom.

HESTERMEYER

374

article

2. Matters Not Dealt With

10Article 27 does not express itself on the position which international law should be given within the internal legal order.27 Nor is the rule concerned

with constitutional clauses or constitutional reservations.28 It also does not concern the application of domestic law according to international law.29

When ratifying certain human rights treaties, the US President is required by the Senate to attach a “constitutional” reservation such as that made by the United States in 1988 to the 1948 Genocide Convention: “nothing in the Convention requires or authorises legislation or other action by the United States of America prohibited by the Constitution of the United States as interpreted by the United States”.30 Prima facie, such a reservation, falling to be examined under Articles 19–23 (q.v.), is not contrary to Article 27, the latter applying at a later stage, i.e., once the reserving State’s obligations under the particular treaty have been determined.31

As the Argentinean delegate put it at the Vienna Conference, according to a constitutional clause, “certain matters governed exclusively by the constitution of the State remained outside the scope of the provisions of the treaty, under the terms of the treaty itself”; in such cases, “the relevant constitutional rules might be invoked with respect to the treaty”.32 However, Article 27 makes no exception in this respect. Under this provision, a party may not invoke constitutional (or any other internal) limitations as a justification for its failure to perform a treaty. Of course, if the parties to a treaty agree to include a constitutional clause in the treaty (N. 4), then the application of the treaty in compliance with that intention cannot incur “failure to perform” within the meaning of Article 27.

3. Customary Basis of Article 27

11Article 27 “found general favour”33 at the Conference (with only two States voting against the provision), albeit with a comparatively high number of abstaining States (N. 3). While two States entered a reservation, various other States objected thereto whereby they expressly stated that Article 27 was

27Delbrück/Wolfrum III 610 ; in respect of the 1950 European Convention on Human Rights, see the Ireland v. the United Kingdom judgment of 18 January 1978, Series A no. 25, § 239.

28See the observation by the Argentinean delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 428, para. 48.

29See the Mutual Assistance in Criminal Matters (Djibouti/France) Case, ICJ Reports 2008 para. 124.

30Cited in Aust, Modern Treaty Law 147.

31Ibid. 120 f. W.A. Schabas, Reservations to Human Rights Treaties, CYBIL 32 (1994) 59, has pointed out that Article 27 was not situated in the section of the Convention dealing with reservations and cannot serve as a basis to object against unwelcome reservations.

32OR 1968 Plenary 54, para. 36.

33Sinclair, Vienna Convention 84.

HESTERMEYER

internal law and observance of treaties

375

“solidly based on customary international law” (N. 8).34 On the whole, it can be said that Article 27 amounts to codification of a long-standing principle of customary international law.35

E. APPRECIATION

 

Article 27 expresses the principle that on the international level international

12

law is supreme. As the debate at the Conference demonstrated (N. 3), this has less to do with any monist v. dualist doctrinal victory than with the practical function of the provision to support pacta sunt servanda. Indeed, any other rule would undermine the performance of treaties. The mechanics of Article 27 also serve to ensure that a State examines its constitution and passes any necessary legislation before giving its consent to a treaty.36 By expressly referring to the provisions of international law, Article 27 (and with it general international law) in fact recognises the validity of such rules, albeit on another level.37

34See, e.g., the objection by Finland to the Guatemalan reservation (N. 8).

35Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 (1970) 517; see the statement in Vienna by the Expert consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 158, para. 73 (“the principle in the amendment . . . was one that was generally recognized in international law”); Partsch, EPIL 2 (1995) 1189 (“a well established practice of international courts”); Schaus, Article 27, N. 5.

36Aust, Modern Treaty Law 180 f; Simma, AöR 100 (1975) 20; Nguyen/Daillier/Pellet 222 (“l’article 27 n’est . . . pas inutile”).

37Partsch, EPIL 2 (1995) 1189.

HESTERMEYER

Section . Application of Treaties

Article 28

Non-retroactivity of treaties

Unless a di erent intention appears from the treaty or is otherwise established, its provisions do not bind a party in relation to any act or fact which took place or any situation which ceased to exist before the date of the entry into force of the treaty with respect to that party.

Article 28 Non-retroactivité des traités

A moins qu’une intention di érente ne ressorte du traité ou ne soit pas ailleurs établie, les dispositions d’un traité ne lient pas une partie en ce qui concerne un acte ou fait antérieur à la date d’entrée en vigueur de ce traité au regard de cette partie ou une situation qui avait cessé d’exister à cette date.

Artikel 28 Nichtrückwirkung von Verträgen

Sofern keine abweichende Absicht aus dem Vertrag hervorgeht oder anderweitig festgestellt ist, binden seine Bestimmungen eine Vertragspartei nicht in bezug auf eine Handlung oder Tatsache, die vor dem Inkrafttreten des Vertrags hinsichtlich der betre enden Vertragspartei vorgenommen wurde oder eingetreten ist, sowie in bezug auf eine Lage, die vor dem genannten Zeitpunkt zu bestehen aufgehört hat.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 24—Non-retroactivity of treaties

Unless a di erent intention appears from the treaty or is otherwise established, its provisions do not bind a party in relation to any act or fact which took place or any situation which ceased to exist before the date of the entry into force of the treaty with respect to that party.

380

article

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 57.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 40 , 165 , 232 f, 326 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 54.

Waldock Report IV: Article 56.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 38 , 169 f, 315, 327.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 24.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 158 , 428; OR 1969 Plenary 38 f, 54 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 97:0:1

Selected Literature:

A. Bleckmann, Die Nichtrückwirkung völkerrechtlicher Verträge. Kommentar zu Art. 28 der Wiener Vertragsrechtskonvention, ZaöRV 33 (1973) 38 ; H.W. Briggs, Reflections on Non-Retroactivity ofTreaties, Revista 21 (1968) 320 ; A. Chua/R. Hardcastle, Retroactive Application of Treaties Revisited: Bosnia-Herzegovina v. Yugoslavia, NILR 44 (1997) 414 ; G.E. do Nascimento e Silva, Le facteur temps et les traités, RC 154 (1977 I) 221 , 273; F. Dopagne, Article 29, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1163 ; T.O. Elias, The Doctrine of Intertemporal Law, AJIL 74 (1980) 285 ; E. Orihuela Calatayud, Los tratados internacionales y su aplicación en el tiempo: Consideraciones sobre el efecto inicial de las disposiciones convencionales (2004); P. Tavernier, Recherches sur l’application dans le temps des actes et des règles en droit international public (1970).

 

non-retroactivity of treaties

381

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 28 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Principle of Non-Retroactivity ..........................................................

3

 

2.

Retroactivity as the Exception ...........................................................

6

 

3.

Declaratory Treaty Rules ...................................................................

9

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

10

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

10

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

12

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 28 ...........................................................

13

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

14

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

The non-retroactivity of law in general is a well-established principle both in

1

domestic and in international law. Exceptionally, international treaties have

 

endowed certain of their provisions with retroactive e ect, for instance, Article

 

17 of the Peace Treaty of Lausanne of 1923 which provided that Turkey’s

 

renunciation of certain rights concerning Egypt and Sudan applied as from 1914.1 Before international courts the matter has played an important role in connection with jurisdictional clauses providing for the submission to an international tribunal of disputes between the parties.2 The former European Commission and the present European Court of Human Rights in Strasbourg have occasionally been called upon to examine the applicability of the European Convention on Human Rights to “continuing situations”.3 The ICJ dealt with the matter more generally in the Ambatielos Case (Preliminary Objection), where the Greek Government had contended that under a treaty of 1926 it was entitled to present a claim on acts which had taken place in 1922 and 1923. In a statement which provided the nucleus for the present Article 28, the Court considered:

1 Verdross/Simma N. 717.

2 ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 212, para. 2.

3 Ibid. paras. 2 f; see Villiger, Manual N. 108, 120 (exhaustion of domestic remedies).

382

article

“to accept this theory would mean giving retroactive e ect to Article 29 of the Treaty of 1926, whereas Article 32 of this Treaty states that the Treaty . . . shall come into force immediately upon ratification. Such a conclusion might have been rebutted if there had been any special clause or any special object necessitating retroactive interpretation. There is no such clause or object in the present case. It is therefore impossible to hold that any of its provisions must be deemed to have been in force earlier”.4

2. History

2The ILC took up discussion of the matter in 1964, albeit in the wider context of the general applicability ratione temporis of a treaty. Thus, Article 56 of the ILC Draft 1964 provided that a treaty should govern the relations of the parties with respect to all facts, acts or situations occurring or arising during the period while it was in force and which fell within its provisions.5 Only in 1966 was the second part of the provision—concerning the intertemporal situation after a treaty’s termination—dropped.6 In Vienna in 1968 an Austrian amendment proposed the clear statement in the treaty itself as a requirement for its retroactive application.7 However, this amendment and all other proposals were eventually rejected, and the final ILC Draft 1966 remained unchanged. Article 28 was adopted in 1969 by 97 votes to none, with one abstention.8 Article 24 of the ILC Draft 1966 also provided the basis for Article 4 (q.v., N. 1).

B. INTERPRETATION

1. Principle of Non-Retroactivity

3Article 28 commences with the exception (N. 6) and then goes on to enunciate the principle, namely that a treaty’s provisions do not bind a party to the treaty before the date of the entry into force of the treaty. The term “entry into force” is explained in Article 24 (q.v.).9 The date at issue applies

4 ICJ Reports 1952 40, see the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 212, para. 1.

5See the ILC Report 1964, YBILC 1964 II 177, para. 1; Article 24 of Fitzmaurice Report IV, YBILC 1959 II 47, 71; on the history of Article 28, see Bleckmann, ZaöRV 33 (1973)

38 .

6See the comment by the Chairman of the Drafting Committee, YBILC 1966 I/2 169, para. 4.

7T he Austrian amendment proposed the terms “unless the treaty so provides”, OR Documents 146, para. 242; see the statement by Verosta of the Austrian delegation, OR 1968

CoW 159, para. 1.

8 OR Plenary 1969 55, para. 48.

9 Statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 160, para. 23.

non-retroactivity of treaties

383

 

only with respect to that party; in the case of multilateral treaties, a di erent

 

date of entry into force may apply for other parties.

 

 

No contractual obligations arise for the State party in particular in two situ-

4

ations: first, in relation to any act or fact which took place, i.e., an event

 

which was completed,10 before the date of the entry into force of the treaty.

 

Past facts and situations are as a matter of course governed by a di erent law

 

in force at the earlier time.

 

 

Second, even acts or facts the e ects of which extended over a longer period

5

of time, i.e., any continuing situation, do not fall under the treaty, if they ceased to exist before the date of the entry into force of the treaty.11 More important, however, is the implication here e contrario: if the situation, commencing in the past, continues to exist after the treaty’s entry into force, it is “caught” by the treaty.12 This latter case is not truly an exception to the principle of non-retroactivity, since the treaty’s binding force commences solely as from the date of the entry into force of the treaty and does not concern earlier parts of the continuing situation.13

For instance, if a human rights treaty provides for international jurisdiction in respect of alleged unfairness of a trial, any complaint will be incompatible ratione temporis with the provisions of the treaty if the conviction and sentence following the trial became final before the treaty’s entry into force. (The mere serving of the sentence cannot as a rule su ce to activate the treaty’s provisions.) If, on the other hand, at least the decision of the final judicial instance is given after the treaty’s entry into force, the complaint may be entertained in respect of that part, as well as the outcome, of the proceedings.14

10ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 212, para. 4.

11T he second situation di ers in its temporal implications from the first and does not therefore appear to be tautologous, as Rosenne of the Israeli delegation implied at the Vienna Conference in 1968, OR 1968 CoW 162, plara. 39.

12See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Iraq (Yasseen), ibid. para. 44 (“the acts could have been performed before the date of entry into force, but the situation could continue after that date, and if so, the provisions of the treaty must apply even if the situation commenced before entry into force”; and Portugal, ibid. 160, para. 17 (“situations, namely events which continued in time, would . . . be subject to any changes in the legal situation made by a new treaty if they had not ceased to exist before its entry into force”); also Bleckmann, ZaöRV 33 (1973) 45, 47.

13Contra Sinclair of UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 161, para. 33 (“very broad exceptions to the non-retroactivity rule”).

14ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 212, paras. 2 f; Villiger, Handbuch N. 108. L.G. Loucaides, The Concept of “Continuing” Violations of Human Rights, in: Protecting Human Rights: The European Perspective. Studies in Memory of R. Ryssdal (2000) 803 .

384

article

2. Retroactivity as the Exception

6Article 28 provides for the principle of non-retroactivity (N. 3) unless the parties, being masters of their own treaty, intend otherwise in respect of the entire treaty, or parts of it. There is thus a presumption for non-retroactiv- ity,15 retroactivity being the exception. A fragmentation of treaty relations is conceivable in that certain parties agree inter se to retroactivity.

7By declaring treaty provisions retroactive, States extend the applicability backwards in time to a given moment or period before the treaty’s entry into force. Retroactivity amounts to a “legal fiction”;16 treaty rules are always applied pro futuro, but with respect to facts and situations existing before the treaty’s entry into force.

For instance, two States may enter an agreement regulating the calculation and compensation of social security costs of their citizens residing in the other country. The parties may then agree to adapt the new regulations also to certain previous hardship cases having arisen before entry into force of the agreement.

8States can rebut the presumption in Article 28 (N. 6) and declare treaty provisions retroactive by expressly stating this in the treaty itself. In this case, their di erent intention appears from the treaty. However, the intention may also be otherwise established, in particular by having regard to the nature of the treaty,17 i.e., its object and purpose, and to any other separate agreements concluded expressly or impliedly between the parties.18 Whether or not such a di erent intention prevails is a matter of interpretation according to Articles 31 and 32 (q.v.).19

Dopagne insists, with reference to the travaux préparatoires, that the “di erent intention” can only be found in the nature of the treaty, not elsewhere.20 With respect, this overlooks, on the one hand, that Article 28 is formulated so as to distinguish an intention appearing from the treaty or otherwise, i.e. within or outside the treaty text; and, on the other, that the parties to a treaty can at any moment agree to abrogate Article 28—indeed, even without such a possibility being mentioned in the treaty text.21

15See the Spanish delegation at the Vienna Conference, OR 1968 CoW 160, para. 19; Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/II 43, para. 51.

16See the statement in Vienna by Bindschedler of the Swiss delegation, OR 1969 CoW 330.

17ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 212 f, para. 4; di erently Bleckmann, ZaöRV 33 (1973) 51.

18See the Australian High Court in 1997 Victrawl Pty. Ltd. v. Telstra Corporation Ltd. et al.

Case, ILR 107 (1997) 142 .

19See the comment by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 40, para. 12; in respect of the relevance of bona fides, see thestatement by the Thai delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 159, para. 15.

20Article 28, N. 31 (“si l’intention de conférer un e et rétroactif doit être ‘par ailleurs’ établie, c’est par référence à la nature du traité, à l’exclusion d’autres éléments”).

21See also the same formulation in Article 29 (q.v., N. 5), with further references.

non-retroactivity of treaties

385

 

3. Declaratory Treaty Rules

 

 

Independently of any contractual retroactivity (N. 6), declaratory treaty rules

9

apply qua customary law regardless of the entry into force of the treaty, if and

 

when the conditions for their existence have been established. Customary

 

law is only “active”, not “retroactive”. This principle has been stated in Article

 

4 (q.v., N. 3) in respect of the Convention itself and applies a fortiori to all

 

declaratory treaty rules (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 34–48).22

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

Article 4 reiterates the principle of non-retroactivity in respect of the Con-

10

vention itself (q.v., N. 7). Article 18 deals with the obligation not to defeat

 

the object and purpose of a treaty prior to its entry into force (q.v.).23 Finally,

 

the principle of non-retroactivity essentially underlies the pacta tertiis-rule

 

in Article 34 (q.v.).

 

 

The relationship to Article 25 raises further issues which were discussed in

11

the ILC though never entirely resolved.24 On the one hand, the provisions

 

di er in that Article 25 concerns a treaty’s provisional application, whereas

 

retroactivity according to Article 28, if there is any (N. 6), presupposes “definitive” entry into force (Article 25, N. 5). On the other hand, Article 25 views the treaty’s application pro futuro, though before its entry into force, whereas the perspective of Article 28 is that of looking backwards in time after the treaty’s entry into force to the period beforehand.

A certain overlapping may nevertheless be noted: if State parties declare certain provisions retroactive according to Article 28 before a treaty’s entry into force (N. 6), there is in e ect little di erence with the treaty’s provisional application according to Article 25.

22See, e.g., the Case Concerning Application of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (Bosnia-Herzegovina v. Yugoslavia) (Preliminary Objections), ICJ Reports 1996 617, para. 34, together with 616, para. 31, where the Court quotes the Reservations to Genocide Case according to which “the principles underlying the Convention are . . . binding on States, even without any conventional obligation”, ICJ Reports 1951 23; also the Armed Activities on the Territory of the Congo (Democratic Republic of the Congo v. Rwanda) Case, ICJ Reports 2006 44, para. 125. Di erently Chua/Hardcastle, NILR 44 (1997) 418 and passim; Delbrück/Wolfrum III 590.

23In 1968 in Vienna a proposal to link Article 28 with Article 18 was not accepted as the two provisions related to separate issues; see the statement by the Chairman of the Drafting Committee, Yasseen, OR 1968 CoW 428, para. 51.

24YBILC 1966 II 62, and YBILC 1966 I/2 39, para. 2.

386

article

2. Matters Not Dealt With

12Article 28 reflects one aspect of the intertemporal application of a treaty, i.e., retroactive application. Originally, the ILC also dealt with, but then dropped, intertemporal issues arising after the treaty’s termination (N. 2). The respective customary implications are dealt with in Article 43 (q.v.).

3. Customary Basis of Article 28

13The rules enshrined in Article 28 appear generally accepted and reflect customary international law.25

D. APPRECIATION

14While the principles enunciated in Article 28 appear quite straightforward and in fact complete,26 the ILC regarded the provision as particularly com- plex27—possibly on account of the broader range of intertemporal issues which it originally attempted to resolve in its drafts (N. 2). There remains one conceptual di culty relating to non-retroactivity, not raised in the travaux préparatoires, namely the conflict which arises with the principle of legal certainty: before the treaty’s entry into force, the situation was governed (and enforceable) by other then prevailing legal rules which, with the “retroactive” advent of the treaty, may suddenly become obsolete.

25See the statements in Vienna by the Thai delegation, OR 1968 CoW 159, para. 13; and in the ILC by el-Erian, YBILC 1966 I/2 43, para. 48. The provision was expressly invoked by Judge ad hoc Kreca in his diss. op. in the Case Concerning Application of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (Bosnia-Herzegovina v. Yugoslavia) (Preliminary Objections) Case, ICJ Reports 1996 494 f, para. 120 (albeit as Article 24 of the ILC Draft 1966).

26Di erently Chua/Hardcastle, NILR 44 (1997) 420.

27See the statements in the ILC by Amado, YBILC 1966 I/2 44, para. 65; and Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 40, para. 2. In the Land and Maritime Boundary (Cameroon v. Nigeria) Case, ICJ Reports 2002 502, para. 15, Judge al-Khasawneh considered in his sep. op. that the “rule [of intertemporal law] was incapable of finding a place in the 1969 Vienna Convention”.

Article 29

Territorial scope of treaties

Unless a di erent intention appears from the treaty or is otherwise established, a treaty is binding upon each party in respect of its entire territory.

Article 29 Application territoriale des traités

A moins qu’une intention di érente ne ressorte du traité ou ne soit par ailleurs établie, un traité lie chacune des parties à l’égard de l’ensemble de son territoire.

Artikel 29 Räumlicher Geltungsbereich von Verträgen

Sofern keine abweichende Absicht aus dem Vertrag hervorgeht oder anderweitig festgestellt ist, bindet ein Vertrag jede Vertragspartei hinsichtlich ihres gesamten Hoheitsgebiets.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 25—Application of treaties to territory

Unless a di erent intention appears from the treaty or is otherwise established, the application of a treaty extends to the entire territory of such party.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 58.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 46 , 167 , 233 f, 327.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 57.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 57.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 46 , 170, 315, 327.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 25.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 162 , 428 f; OR 1969 Plenary 55.

Vienna Conference Vote: 97:0:0

388

article

Selected Literature:

M.B. Akehurst, Treaties, Territorial Application, EPIL 4 (2000) 990 ; S. Karagiannis, Article 29, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1189 ; W. Wengler, Die Geltung völkerrechtlicher Verträge der beiden “deutschen Staaten” für West-Berlin und Ost-Berlin, ROW 30 (1986) 149 .

 

territorial scope of treaties

389

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 29 ............................................................

3

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

3

2.

Intentions of the Parties ....................................................................

4

3.

Principal Rule ...................................................................................

6

C. Context ...............................................................................................

8

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

8

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

9

3.

Customary Basis of Article 29 ...........................................................

10

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

11

A. BACKGROUND

 

1. Introduction

 

In the 20th century, colonial powers, including the United Kingdom, France

1

and the Netherlands, as well as other States such as Australia, New Zealand, Denmark, Norway and the United States, were confronted with issues of the application of international treaties to their territories beyond the metropolitan area.1 The concomitant State practice was often unsettled. In the United Kingdom, for instance, treaties were regarded as applying automatically to overseas territories in the absence of a provision to the contrary; whereas French practice usually adopted the opposite approach, i.e., that treaties did not apply to colonies.2 After 1945 the formulation, later termed the “colonial clause” and employed, for instance, in Article XII of the 1948 Genocide Convention, came into frequent use:

1See the list of overseas territories in Aust, Modern Treaty Law 513 ; on the subject also J.E.S. Fawcett, Treaty Relations of British Overseas Territories, BYBIL 26 (1949) 86 ;

on UK practice, see Sinclair, Vienna Convention 88.

2See Sinclair, ibid. 88 f; Akehurst, EPIL 4 (2000) 991; di erently Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 14, para. 7; the ILC Draft 1966, YBILC 1966 II 213, para. 2, with reference to McNair, Law of Treaties 111 ; contra Ch. Rousseau, Principes généraux du Droit international public, vol. I (1944) 381.

390

article

“[a]ny Contracting Party may at any time, by notification addressed to the Secretary General of the United Nations, extend the application of the present Convention to all or any of the territories for the conduct of whose foreign relations that Contracting Party is responsible”.3

2. History

2Article 29 goes back to Article 58 of the Waldock Report III of 1964.4 By drawing on the “colonial clause” (N. 1) and by referring to “territories for which the parties are internationally responsible”, the Rapporteur attracted much criticism in the ILC in 1964.5 The article also listed various means (later deleted) in which States’ “contrary intention” could be discerned which, interestingly, stimulated less discussion in the ILC or later in Vienna. As a result, the ILC Report 1964 considerably pruned the provision to “something almost lapidary”,6 i.e., Article 57 on the Territorial Scope of a Treaty, containing the core of the present Article 29.7 Governments thereupon submitted often lengthy observations on the extraterritorial reach of treaties, resulting in proposals which in fact reiterated what the ILC had already suggested.8 These observations preoccupied the ILC at its session in 1966 until Ago pointed out that it was impossible to draft a residual rule for treaties relating to such diverse objects as the territory of another State, the high seas, Antarctica or the moon.9 The resulting Article 25 of the ILC Draft 1966 spoke of the “application of treaties to territory”.10 Based on an amendment by the then Ukrainian SSR, the provision was slightly amended to its final version at the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference.11 Article 29 was adopted by 97 votes to none.12

3UNTS 79 277. See also Article 56, para. 1 of the European Convention on Human Rights. It is doubtful whether the Declaration on Principles of International Law Concerning Friendly Relations and Co-operation among States of 1970, emphasising that “the territory of a colony . . . has . . . a status separate and distinct from the territory of the State

administering it”, plays a part here; but see Akehurst, EPIL 4 (2000) 991.

4 YBILC 1964 II 12; see also Fitzmaurice Report IV, YBILC 1959 II 47 ; 74 .

5See the comments in the ILC, inter alia, by el-Erian, Tunkin, Elias, Yasseen, Tsuruoka and Bartos, YBILC 1964 I 47 ; so much so that the Chairman (Ago) had to come to the Rapporteur’s defence, ibid. 51, para. 59. Use of the “colonial clause” was seen as an

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

acknowledgment of colonialism, Aust, Modern Treaty Law 203. Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/II 46, para. 86.

YBILC 1964 II 179.

See, e.g., the observations by the Netherlands, YBILC 1966 II 65; the statement in the ILC by Rosenne, YBILC 1966 I/2 48, para. 3.

YBILC 1966 I/2 52, para. 42; see the debate, ibid. 46 . YBILC 1966 II 213.

OR Documents 147, para. 251; OR 1968 CoW 428, para. 52. OR 1969 Plenary 55, para. 48.

territorial scope of treaties

391

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 29

 

 

1. Scope

 

 

Article 29, concerning a treaty’s application ratione loci, is intended to provide

3

certainty and security as to the territorial scope of the various States’ under-

 

takings with regard to a treaty.13 The provision determines the territory with

 

regard to which the treaty is binding and creates rights and obligations, and

 

thus falls to be distinguished from the territory or area in which the treaty is

 

to be performed, though the two notions may coincide.14

 

 

The two notions do not coincide, for instance, if the treaty is to be performed extrater-

 

ritorially (i.e., if States enter a treaty assuring mutual assistance on the high seas)15 or if

 

the treaty’s e ects are directed towards one of the States parties (e.g., the Treaty of 1923

 

between Switzerland and Liechtenstein on the Incorporation of Liechtenstein Within

 

the Swiss Customs Territory).16

 

 

2. Intentions of the Parties

 

 

The position of the opening sentence of Article 29 emphasises that it falls

4

primarily on the States parties to a treaty as sovereign entities themselves to

 

determine the scope of application of the treaties they conclude17—in par-

 

ticular whether the treaty shall apply to the State’s entire territory or only to certain parts.18 The parties may wish to extend a treaty’s application beyond the territory of each party, for instance, with respect to such areas as the high seas. Or they may wish to include a federal clause listing specific conditions of application of a treaty to the constituent parts of a federal State or to the federal union (confederation).19

13See Waldock Report III, YBILC 1966 II 13, para. 4.

14Ibid. 12, para. 1. See the statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 46, para. 2; and Jiménéz de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 50, para. 23. The example given by Wengler, ROW 30 (1986) 149, of a treaty supposedly not concerned by Article 29—i.e., that States’ foreign ministers agree to meet regularly—overlooks the performance of this treaty.

15See K. Widdows, The Application of Treaties to Nationals of a Party Outside Its Territory, ICLQ (1986) 724 .

16Swiss Systematic Legislative Collection (RS/SR) 0.631.112.514 (example mentioned in Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 15, para. 2).

17Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 51, para. 39.

18Jennings/Watts N. 621 (“such clauses . . . all have the e ect of a State to limit the apparent territorial scope of the treaty”).

19See the ILC Repöort 1966, YBILC 1966 II 213, para. 4; the observation by the US Government to the ILC, ibid. 65; Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 14, para. 5; the statement by Jiménéz de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 50, para. 24.

392

article

5A State party’s intention may transpire in di erent ways.20 It may appear from the treaty inasmuch as the latter contains an express territorial application clause. Or the intention may be otherwise established, for instance, in that a State makes a declaration upon signature or ratification, not contested by the other parties, as to the territorial e ect or extent of the treaty. States may also enter reservations dealing with the territorial scope of the treaty.21 There may even be implied exceptions, e.g., where the regional character of a treaty creates a presumption that territorial units outside the region are excluded. Of course, States may at any time agree to revoke or alter their intentions.

3. Principal Rule

6Unless a di erent intention appears (N. 5), Article 29 provides the principal (and residual) rule that a treaty is binding upon each party in respect of its entire territory. Thus, the notion of the unity of the territory of a State is set forth.22 A general presumption is established that, when a State concludes a treaty, the latter applies to the entire territory of the State, and individual areas and territories need only be mentioned when there is a special reason for doing so, in particular to exclude them from the treaty’s application.23 Any party considering that the treaty has a di erent territorial reach bears the onus of proving the existence of such an intention.24

7The territory covers the area over which a party to the treaty exercises sovereignty and thus embraces all that State’s land, territorial waters and air space, whether or not these areas are part of the metropolitan area (though not the continental shelf, the exclusive economic zone and the fishery zones).25 Recognition under international law of the State and its territory is not required.26

20See here Sinclair, Vienna Convention 90 f; and Art. 58 of Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 12 .

21In the ILC, Rosenne doubted whether reservations, concerning substantive provisions of a treaty, were pertinent here, YBILC 1964 I 48, para. 26. However, the treaty’s territorial application may very well concern “substance”; see also Waldock, ibid. 46, para. 5.

22Statement by Yasseen in the ILC, ibid. 50, para. 48.

23Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 13, paras. 3 f.

24Statement by Jiménéz de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 52, para. 67.

25See the statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 429, para. 54; the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 213, para. 3; Elias in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 49, para. 38; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 200 f.

26Judgment of 26 October 1989 of the German Federal Social Court (Bundessozialgericht), in: Th. Giegerich (ed.), Deutsche Rechtsprechung zum Völkerrecht und Europarecht 1986–1993, Nr. 410, 89/1. See also R.P. Schaffer, The Extension of South African Treaties to the Territories of South West Africa and the Prince Edward Islands, South African LJ 25 (1973) 63 .

territorial scope of treaties

393

If there are territorial changes, the treaty continues, in principle, to apply to the entire territory; di erent intentions would have to be renegotiated with, or at least be tacitly approved by, the other parties.

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

To the extent that Article 29 plays a part in respect of federal States (N. 5),

8

it should be read together with Article 27 (q.v., N. 5).

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Issues of State succession fall outside Article 29 and, indeed, outside the

9

Convention (Article 73, N. 6).27

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 29

 

Doctrine and State practice were not entirely uniform when the subject was

10

taken up by the ILC which was also caught up in the discussion on decolo-

 

nisation (N. 1). Nevertheless, the ILC considered from the outset that there

 

was a “general understanding”28 that a treaty in principle applied to a State’s

 

entire territory, and throughout the deliberations members considered that

 

the provision reflected an established principle of international law.29 Further-

 

more, given the unanimous acceptance of Article 29 by States at the Vienna

 

Conference, and the fact that the “colonial clause” has become largely obsolete,

 

it can be assumed that the provision reflects customary international law.

 

D. APPRECIATION

Article 29 may appear self-evident, though it is by no means superfluous. 11 The provision determines which part of a State’s territory is concerned with

a treaty (thus opening the door to the application of international law in the internal sphere), and how to assess the States parties’ various intentions

27ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 214, para. 6.

28Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 14 f, para. 7; the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 213, para. 3.

29See the statements in the ILC by Briggs, YBILC 1966 I/2 50, para. 27; and el-Erian, YBILC 1964 I 234, para. 40.

394

article

in this respect. As such, its value lies there where a treaty chooses to remain silent on the subject.30 As demonstrated by the discussions in the ILC and at the Vienna Conference, the straightforward formulation in Article 29 in fact covers a wide range of situations.

30 Statement by Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 51, para. 62.

Article 30

Application of successive treaties relating to the same subject-matter

1.Subject to Article 103 of the Charter of the United Nations, the rights and obligations of States parties to successive treaties relating to the same subject-matter shall be determined in accordance with the following paragraphs.

2.When a treaty specifies that it is subject to, or that it is not to be considered as incompatible with, an earlier or later treaty, the provisions of that other treaty prevail.

3.When all the parties to the earlier treaty are parties also to the later treaty but the earlier treaty is not terminated or suspended in operation under Article 59, the earlier treaty applies only to the extent that its provisions are compatible with those of the later treaty.

4.When the parties to the later treaty do not include all the parties to the earlier one:

(a)as between States parties to both treaties the same rule applies as in paragraph 3;

(b)as between a State party to both treaties and a State party to only one of the treaties, the treaty to which both States are parties governs their mutual rights and obligations.

5.Paragraph 4 is without prejudice to Article 41, or to any question of the termination or suspension of the operation of a treaty under Article 60 or to any question of responsibility which may arise for a State from the conclusion or application of a treaty, the provisions of which are incompatible with its obligations towards another State under another treaty.

Article 30 Application de traités successifs portant sur la même matière

1.Sous réserve des dispositions de l’article 103 de la Charte des Nations Unies, les droits et obligations des Etats parties à des traités successifs portant sur la même matière sont déterminés conformément aux paragraphes suivants.

396

article

2.Lorsqu’un traité précise qu’il est subordonné à un traité antérieur ou postérieur ou qu’il ne doit pas être considéré comme incompatible avec cet autre traité, les dispositions de celui-ci l’emportent.

3.Lorsque toutes les parties au traité antérieur sont également parties au traité postérieur, sans que le traité antérieur ait pris fin ou que son application ait été suspendue en vertu de l’article 59, le traité antérieur ne s’applique que dans la mesure où ses dispositions sont compatibles avec celles du traité postérieur.

4.Lorsque les parties au traité antérieur ne sont pas toutes parties au traité postérieur:

a)dans les relations entre les Etats parties aux deux traités, la règle applicable est celle qui est énoncée au paragraphe 3;

b)dans les relations entre un Etat partie aux deux traités et un Etat partie à l’un de ces traités seulement, le traité auquel les deux Etats sont parties régit leurs droits et obligations réciproques.

5.Le paragraphe 4 s’applique sans préjudice de l’article 41, de toute question d’extinction ou de suspension de l’application d’un traité aux termes de l’article 60 ou de toute question de responsabilité qui peut naître pour un Etat de la conclusion ou de l’application d’un traité dont les dispositions sont incompatibles avec les obligations qui lui incombent à l’égard d’un autre Etat en vertu d’un autre traité.

Artikel 30 Anwendung aufeinanderfolgender Verträge über denselben Gegenstand

1.Vorbehaltlich des Artikels 103 der Charta der Vereinten Nationen bestimmen sich die Rechte und Pflichten von Staaten, die Vertragsparteien aufeinanderfolgender Verträge über denselben Gegenstand sind, nach den folgenden Absätzen.

2.Bestimmt ein Vertrag, dass er einem früher oder später geschlossenen Vertrag untergeordnet ist oder nicht als mit diesem unvereinbar anzusehen ist, so hat der andere Vertrag Vorrang.

3.Sind alle Vertragsparteien eines früheren Vertrags zugleich Vertragsparteien eines späteren, ohne dass der frühere Vertrag beendet oder nach Artikel 59 suspendiert wird, so findet der frühere Vertrag nur insoweit Anwendung, als er mit dem späteren Vertrag vereinbar ist.

4.Gehören nicht alle Vertragsparteien des früheren Vertrags zu den Vertragsparteien des späteren,

a)so findet zwischen Staaten, die Vertragsparteien beider Verträge sind, Absatz 3 Anwendung;

application of successive treaties

397

b)so regelt zwischen einem Staat, der Vertragspartei beider Verträge ist, und einem Staat, der Vertragspartei nur eines der beiden Verträge ist, der Vertrag, dem beide Staaten als Vertragsparteien angehören, ihre gegenseitigen Rechte und Pflichten.

5.Absatz 4 gilt unbeschadet des Artikels 41 sowie unbeschadet aller Fragen der Beendigung oder der Suspendierung eines Vertrags nach Artikel 60 und aller Fragen der Verantwortlichkeit, die sich für einen Staat aus Abschluss oder Anwendung eines Vertrags ergeben können, dessen Bestimmungen mit seinen Pfl ichten gegenüber einem anderen Staat auf Grund eines anderen Vertrags unvereinbar sind.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 26—Application of Successive Treaties Relating to the Same Subject-Matter

1.Subject to Article 103 of the Charter of the United Nations, the rights and obligations of States parties to successive treaties relating to the same subject-matter shall be determined in accordance with the following paragraphs.

2.When a treaty specifies that it is subject to, or that it is not to be considered as inconsistent with, an earlier or later treaty, the provisions of that other treaty prevail.

3.When all the parties to the earlier treaty are parties also to the later treaty but the earlier treaty is not terminated or suspended in operation under Article 56, the earlier treaty applies only to the extent that its provisions are compatible with those of the latter treaty.

4.When the parties to the later treaty do not include all the parties to the earlier one:

(a)as between States parties to both treaties the same rule applies as in paragraph 3;

(b)as between a State party to both treaties and a State party only to the earlier treaty, the earlier treaty governs their mutual rights and obligations;

(c)as between a State party to both treaties and a State party only to the later treaty, the later treaty governs their mutual rights and obligations.

5.Paragraph 4 is without prejudice to Article 37, or to any question of the termination or suspension of the operation of a treaty under Article 57 or to any question of responsibility which may arise for a State from the conclusion or application of a treaty, the provisions of which are incompatible with its obligations towards another State under another treaty.

398

article

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Articles 14 and 19.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 78 , 86 , 114 , 196 , 243. WALDOCK Report III: Article 65.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 119 , 205 f, 332 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 63.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 63.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 94 , 211 f, 327 f, 347.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 26.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 164 , 476; OR 1969 CoW 221 f, 252 f; OR 1969 Plenary 55 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 90:0:14

Selected Literature:

B-R

R. Bernhardt, Article 103, in: B. Simma (ed.), Charter of the United Nations, 1295 ; Ch.J. Borgen, Resolving Treaty Conflicts, George Washington International Law Review 37 (2005) 573 : W. Czaplinski/G. Danilenko, Conflicts of Norms in International Law, NYBIL 21 (1990) 4 ; K.N. Dahl, The Application of Successive Treaties Dealing with the Same Subject-Matter, Indian YBIA 17 (1974) 279 ; W. Karl, Treaties, Conflicts Between, EPIL 4 (2000) 935 ; N. Matz, Wege zur Koordinierung völkerrechtlicher Verträge. Völkervertragsrechtliche und institutionelle Ansätze (2005); J.B. Mus, Conflicts Between Treaties in International Law, NILR 45 (1998) 208 ; F. Paolillo, Article 30, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1247 ; J. Pauwelyn, Conflict of Norms in Public International Law: How WTO Law Relates to Other Rules of International Law (2003); E. Roucounas, Engagements parallèles et contradictoires, RC 206 (1987 VI) 13 ;

S-Z

S.A. Sadat-Akhavi, Methods of Resolving Conflicts Between Treaties (2003); S. Safrin, Treaties in Collision? The Biosafety Protocol and the World Trade Organization Agreements, AJIL 96 (2002) 606 ; E. Sciso, On Article 103 of the Charter of the United Nations in the Light of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, ÖZöRVR 38 (1987) 161 ; I. Sinclair, Problems Arising from a Succession of Codification Conventions on a Particular Subject, Preliminary Exposé Presented to the Institute of International Law, Annuaire IDI 66 (1984 I) 39 ; E.W. Vierdag, The Time of the “Conclusion” of a Multilateral Treaty: Article 30 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties and Related Provisions, BYBIL 59 (1988) 75 ; E. Vranes, Lex superior, lex specialis, lex posterior—zur Rechtsnatur der “Konfliktlösungsregeln”, ZaöRV 65 (2005) 391 ; W. Wilting, Vertragskonkurrenz im Völkerrecht (1996); M. Zuleeg, Vertragskonkurrenz im Völkerrecht:Teil I. Verträge zwischen souveränen Staaten, GYBIL 20 (1977) 246 ; Id., Teil II: Verträge zwischen beliebigen Völkerrechtssubjekten. GYBIL 27 (1984) 367 .

 

 

application of successive treaties

399

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 30 ............................................................

5

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

5

 

a)

Priority among Successive Treaties ...............................................

5

 

b)

Role of Interpretation ..................................................................

7

 

c)

Residual Nature of Article 30 .......................................................

8

2.

Article 103 of the UN Charter (Para. 1) ...........................................

9

3.

Conflict Clauses (Para. 2) .................................................................

11

4.

Lex posterior-Rule (Para. 3 and Subpara 4[a]) ....................................

13

 

a)

Para. 3 .........................................................................................

13

 

b)

Subpara. 4(a) ...............................................................................

14

5.

Pacta tertiis-Rule (Subpara. 4[b]) ......................................................

15

6.

Relevance of Other Convention Provisions (Para. 5) .........................

16

C. Context ...............................................................................................

17

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

17

2.

Havana Convention on Treaties ........................................................

18

3.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

19

4.

Customary Basis of Article 30 ...........................................................

21

D. Proposal for Revision ........................................................................

22

E. Appreciation .......................................................................................

23

A. BACKGROUND

 

1. Introduction

 

International law has traditionally distinguished four principles serving to

1

resolve conflicts between successive treaties:1 (i) according to the hierarchical

 

principle, a treaty of higher rank—namely Article 103 of the UN Charter

 

1On the topic, see generally Karl, EPIL 4 (2000) 937; do Nascimento e Silva, RC 154 (1977 I) 246; the Report of the ILC Study Group on Article 30, YBILC 2006 416 ; For pre-Convention literature, see Ch. Rousseau, De la compatibilité des normes juridiques contradictoires dans l’ordre international, RGDIP 39 (1932) 133 ; H. Aufricht, Supersession of Treaties in International Law, Cornell LQ 37 (1951–52) 655 ; C.W. Jenks, The Conflict of Law-Making Treaties, BYBIL 30 (1953) 401 .

6
7
8
9
10

400

article

(N. 9) and treaties incorporating jus cogens (Article 53, q.v.)—shall prevail over a treaty of lower rank; (ii) the rule lex posterior derogat legi priori provides that later treaties supersede earlier treaties; (iii) conversely, the principle lex prior in tempore, potior in jure, aiming in particular at conflicting treaties with diverging membership, grants priority to the earlier treaty; (iv) the rule lex specialis derogat legi generali provides that the special provision shall prevail over the more general one. (Authors have developed this rule further and postulate lex posterior generalis non derogat legi priori speciali.)2 The lex prior-rule found support in dissenting opinions in the Oscar Chinn (Belgium/ United Kingdom) Case3 and the Jurisdiction of the European Commission of the Danube Advisory Opinion,4 both of the Permanent Court which itself, in the latter case, seemed rather to support the lex posterior-rule.5 Lex posterior also lay at the basis of the 1935 Harvard Draft on the Law of Treaties.6

2. History

2Article 16 of Lauterpacht Reports I and II took up the topic in 1953/1954. Proceeding from good faith and public policy, it provided for the invalidity of the later treaty, if it entered into force with the intention to breach the earlier treaty.7 The ILC found no time to discuss this provision, nor did it subsequently deal with Articles 18 and 19 of the Fitzmaurice Report III of 1958.8 The latter presented complex proposals according to which the later treaty would only be invalid in certain types of cases, namely where it conflicted with earlier “interdependent” or “integral” treaties, such as human rights and disarmament treaties.9

3Waldock prepared three Reports on the matter. In 1963 the ILC discussed Waldock Report II,10 though it encountered some di culties with the topic, not least with the issue where the subject should be placed in the future Convention. There was even a tendency to drop examination of the matter

2 References in Villiger, Customary International Law N. 88.

3Of Judges van Eysinga and Schücking, PICJ Series A/B no. 63, 132 , and 148 . See also Zuleeg, GYBIL 20 (1977) 249, according to whom the lex prior-rule prevailed before

1966.

4 Of Judges Nyholm and Negulesco, PCIJ Series B no. 14, 73 , and 129.

5 Ibid. 23. This was also the rule preferred by McNair, Law of Treaties 219; see also Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 57, para. 18.

AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1024.

YBILC 1954 II 133 ; Karl, EPIL 4 (2000) 937.

YBILC 1958 II 27 ; on this report, see Feist, Kündigung 52 .

Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 56, para. 14, and 55, para. 8 (“somewhat elaborate”). See also Karl, EPIL 4 (2000) 937 f.

YBILC 1963 II 62 , amounting to a veritable treatise on the matter.

application of successive treaties

401

 

altogether.11 In lengthy discussions, consensus was eventually found on the

 

principle that a conflict between successive treaties raised questions of priority

 

rather than of invalidity and nullity.12 Based thereupon, Waldock Report III

 

made new proposals in 1964, containing the structure of paras. 1–4 of the

 

present Article 30,13 to be placed in the Convention where it stands today,

 

namely in Part III of the Convention. Following further debate, the ILC

 

inserted the future para. 5 into its Draft of 1964.14 The Waldock Report

 

VI of 1966 analysed various observations by Governments. After further

 

lengthy discussions the ILC adopted Article 26 of its final Draft in 1966 by

 

18 votes to none.

 

 

The 1968/1969 Vienna Conference adopted an amendment proposed by

4

Sweden and Romania which condensed subparas. 4(b) and (c) of the ILC

 

Draft 1966 to the present subpara. 4(b).15 While the Conference adopted

 

Article 30 unanimously by 90 votes to none, the comparatively high number

 

of 14 abstentions reflected certain doubts, voiced for instance by Sinclair

 

of the UK delegation, as to whether Article 30 “would prove adequate in

 

practice”.16

 

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 30

 

 

1. Scope

 

 

a) Priority among Successive Treaties

 

 

Conflicts of norms—in particular of treaty provisions—are a common feature

5

of international law in view of its decentralised structure, the concomitant

 

absence of common norm-setting agencies,17 the rise of international coopera-

 

tion and, as a result, the considerable number of new treaties concluded by

 

the international community each year. Article 30 sets out to resolve conflicts

 

arising from successive treaties, i.e., an earlier and a later treaty both of which

 

11See the statements in the ILC by Bartos and Ago, YBILC 1963 I 200; and by Tunkin, ibid. 93, para. 70.

12E.g., the statement by Waldock, ibid. 196, para. 2.

13YBILC 1964 II 34 f.

14Ibid. 185.

15OR Documents 148, para. 259; the Cambodian proposal, ibid., aiming at introducing the lex prior-rule, found no favour. See also the statement by Blix of the Swedish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 164, para, 6.

16OR 1968 CoW 165, para. 13. The delegation of Switzerland, then not a UN member, stated, ibid. 164, para. 9, that it would not consider Switzerland bound by Article 103 of the UN Charter which is referred to in Article 30, para. 1 (N. 9–10). The vote is at OR 1969 Plenary 57, para. 59.

17Karl, EPIL 4 (2000) 936; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 93.

402

article

are in force. No distinction is made as to the types of treaties. A conflict arises where in a particular case the treaty provisions of the earlier and the later treaty, while concerning the same subject-matter, are incompatible with each other in that they cannot be applied simultaneously.18 (Thus, the mere conclusion of a subsequent inconsistent treaty does not raise an issue under Article 30).19 However, when establishing the conflict in time, the relevant date is that of the adoption of the respective treaties, not of their entry into force.20

6Article 30 extends in its scope beyond the notion of conflicts and incompatibility by addressing more generally the rights and obligations of States parties to successive treaties relating to the same subject-matter (para. 1) and in particular the priority among them.21 Paras. 3 and 4, for instance, make no direct reference to incompatibility (N. 13). Moreover, Article 30 leaves room for harmonising interpretation (N. 7), aimed at avoiding conflicts in the first place. Above all, Article 30 refrains from stating that States may unilaterally terminate their obligations under the previous treaty by concluding a new treaty; or, conversely, that the earlier treaty implies the invalidity of the later one.22

Article 30 thus di ers, for instance, from Article 53 (q.v.) which envisages the invalidity of one treaty in view of another treaty on the same subject-matter containing a rule of jus cogens with a di ering content.

b) Role of Interpretation

7When confronted with successive treaties and before attempting to resolve a confl ict, the starting point must be to aim at attaining a harmonising interpretation of the various treaty provisions. Wherever possible, a meaning avoiding conflict between the successive treaties should be found and given to the provisions concerned.

18See the observation by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/2 99, para. 55, and the definition in Article 59, subpara. 1(b) (q.v., N. 11). Nguyen/Daillier/Pellet, N. 173, see in the terms “same subject-matter” the requirement of the “same degree of generality” (italics added ); otherwise, the lex specialis-rule shall apply.

19See the Report of the ILC Study Group on the Fragmentation of International Law of 2004, YBILC 2004 II 294, para. 332.

20See the statements in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1969 CoW 253, paras. 39 f; and by the delegations of the UK (Sinclair), ibid. 222, para. 40, and Ceylon, OR 1969 Plenary, 56, para. 50. Aust, Modern Treaty Law 229, refers here pertinently to Article 59, para. 1 (q.v., N. 9–11). Also Mus, NILR 45 (1998) 221 f; contra Vierdag, BYBIL 59 (1988) 75 .

21See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 214, para. 1; the comment by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 95, para. 10.

22Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 56, para. 14. See also the observation by Bartos, YBILC 1966 I/2 101, para. 73 (“[the ILC] should leave matters there”). The obvious exception is Article 59 (q.v.; see also N. 13).

application of successive treaties

403

 

It has been criticised that no mention is made in the Convention of the role of inter-

 

pretation for resolving such conflicts.23 This overlooks three points: (i) the treaties’

 

object and purpose, as in Article 31, para. 1 (q.v., N. 11–14), ensures in particular the

 

e ectiveness of the terms and provisions of the various treaties and, therefore, requires

 

a harmonising interpretation between them; (ii) Article 31, subpara. 3(a) equally covers

 

successive treaties, as in Article 30, by referring to subsequent agreements between the

 

parties (q.v., N. 21); and (iii) the close relationship between Articles 30, 31 and 32 is

 

demonstrated by their juxtaposition in the Convention.

 

 

c) Residual Nature of Article 30

 

 

What is the position of Article 30 towards other rules and principles on

8

conflicting treaty provisions, and in particular towards conflict clauses in

 

other treaties which envisage di erent rules to resolve a conflict?24 Article 30

 

is silent on this matter and di ers from other Convention provisions contain-

 

ing express saving clauses.25 However, as Sir Humphrey Waldock pointed

 

out at the Vienna Conference, paras. 3–5 were conceived as residual rules,

 

giving way to other conflict clauses chosen by the parties to a treaty to govern

 

the relations of a particular succession of treaties.26 Still, little explanation

 

has since been given as to where the legal basis for the residual character of

 

Article 30 may be found. Two situations may be distinguished:

 

 

(i) to the extent that the lex specialis-rule, not dealt with in Article 30 (N. 19), con-

 

tinues to exist qua customary law alongside Article 30 (N. 18), it serves to confirm

 

the residual character of Article 30 (itself customary in nature, N. 21) vis-à-vis any

 

particular conflict clause (N. 11) in another treaty. Conversely, other contradictory

 

conflict rules not dealt with in Article 30 (e.g., the lex prior-rule, N.1) would not

 

have priority over the rules in Article 30 on account of the lack of required, general

 

State practice (N. 18) to support them;

 

 

(ii) on the contractual level, the residual character of Article 30 vis-à-vis the conflict

 

clause of another treaty may be based on its own para. 2—but only when that

 

conflict clause grants priority to other treaties (N. 11) and with the notable excep-

 

tion of Article 103 of the UN Charter (N. 9).

 

 

2. Article 103 of the UN Charter (Para. 1)

 

 

According to para. 1, the provisions and rules in Article 30 are subject to

9

Article 103 of the Charter of the United Nations which provides as follows:

 

“[i]n the event of a conflict between the obligations of the Members of the United Nations under the present Charter and their obligations under any other international agreement, their obligations under the present Charter shall prevail”.

23Zuleeg, GYBIL 20 (1977) 273.

24Sinclair, Vienna Convention 97; see also his statement as a member of the UK delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 165, para. 13 (N. 4).

25E.g. Article 22, para. 1 and Article 33, para. 1 (q.v.).

26OR 1969 CoW 253, para. 41.

404

article

10Article 103 is a hierarchical conflict clause (N. 1), propounding the overriding character of the UN Charter as the constitution of the international legal community vis-à-vis all other (conflicting) treaties, including the Convention and its Article 30.27 Para. 1 intentionally gives no further indication as to how Article 103 is to be interpreted.28 On the whole, Article 30 resembles Article 103 of the UN Charter in that the latter, while establishing a priority in case of conflict with other treaties, takes no stand on the invalidity, if any, of a conflicting treaty.29

3.Conflict Clauses (Para. 2)

11Para. 2 addresses so-called conflict clauses (or savings clauses) in a treaty regulating the relations between the provisions of that treaty and another treaty concerning the same subject-matter. As such, Article 30 does not express itself on the validity of two inconsistent treaties, only on their relative priority.30 The clause may concern past or future treaties, or both,31 and the various treaties may have the same or a divergent number of parties. The clause may appear in the treaty itself, in its preamble, or in an annex.32 Di erent formulations may be envisaged, and indeed, a rich variety of such clauses can be found in international treaty practice.33 Para. 2, although perhaps self-evident, has been included in Article 30 precisely because conflict clauses are so frequently employed.34

12For the purposes of Article 30, two main types of conflict clauses may be distinguished. A first type (e.g., Article 311, para. of the UN Law of the Sea Convention of 1982)35 assumes priority for the treaty itself in which it is

27Bernhardt, Article 103, in: Simma (ed.), Charter of the United Nations, N. 23. On the

subject, see also Zemanek, RC 266 (1997) 229 ; do Nascimento e Silva, RC 154 (1977 I) 259 . As to the “prevailing” character of Article 103, see the Questions of Interpretation and Application of the 1971 Montreal Convention Arising from the Aerial Incident at Lockerbie (Libya/USA) (Provisional Measures), ICJ Reports 1992 114, 123.

28ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 214, para. 3; Wilting, Vertragskonkurrenz 54 .

29Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 55, para. 10; Zemanek, RC 266 (1997) 230; contra Sciso, ÖZöRV 38 (1987) 169; McNair, Law of Treaties 217.

30See the Report of the ILC Study Group on the Fragmentation of International Law of 2004, YBILC 2004 II 294, para. 332.

31See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 214, para. 2.

32Safrin, AJIL 96 (2002) 619, with further references. While this follows from the text of para. 2 (“where a treaty specifies . . .”), parties would appear free to agree upon a conflict clause also in a separate agreement, or even informally.

33For examples of such clauses, see Aust, Modern Treaty Law 218 ; Roucounas, RC 206 (1987 VI) 88 ; Sadat-Akhavi 84 ; on the relations between successive codification treaties, see Sinclair, Annuaire IDI 66 (1995–I) 65 .

34Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 99, para. 57.

35On this Vukas, Law of the Sea Convention 647 .

application of successive treaties

405

incorporated vis-à-vis other treaties. This situation has not been addressed by para. 2 and lies outside the Convention (with the exception of Article 103 of the UN Charter, N. 9).36 Para. 2 concerns solely the second type of conflict clause in a treaty which aims at granting priority to another treaty;37 in particular, it specifies that the treaty is subject to, or that it is not to be considered as incompatible with, an earlier or later treaty. Any such clause must be taken into account when assessing priorities among successive treaties. As a result, the provisions of that other treaty will prevail. The position of para. 2 in Article 30 demonstrates that any such conflict clause will also have priority over paras. 3 and 4 (N. 8).

For all practical purposes, the possibility of inserting a conflict clause enables States parties to a treaty to grant priority to the earlier treaty and thus to maintain the lex prior-rule.38 Priority of the later treaty (lex posterior-rule) follows from para. 3 and subpara. 4(a) (N. 13).

It has been argued that Article 30 does not su ciently address conflicts between successive human rights treaties, for instance, between the European Convention on Human Rights and the UN Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.39 However, the European Convention contains its own conflict clause in Article 53, providing for priority of the instrument o ering the wider protection of human rights. Reference may also be made to Article 44 of the UN Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.40 In any event, the judicial and other monitoring bodies set up under the various conventions will be called upon to resolve the conflict in accordance with para. 5 and the rules on State responsibility (N. 16).

4. Lex posterior-Rule (Para. 3 and Subpara. 4[a])

a) Para. 3

Para. 3 relates to the infrequent case where all the parties to the earlier 13 treaty are parties also to the later treaty.41 After attempts at harmonising interpretation to avoid a conflict have failed (N. 7),42 two situations must be distinguished. In the first situation, the later treaty contains provisions which

are incompatible with the provisions of the earlier treaty in that they cannot be applied simultaneously. Here, Article 59, subpara. 1(b) (q.v., N. 12) enters the picture and provides that the earlier treaty shall be considered terminated

36ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 215, paras. 5 f; Wilting, Vertragskonkurrenz 65.

37Zuleeg, GYBIL 20 (1977) 252.

38Safrin, AJIL 96 (2002) 613.

39Zemanek, RC 266 (1997) 227 f; also Sadat-Akhavi 83.

40Sinclair, Vienna Convention 97 f.

41Sinclair, Annuaire IDI 6 (1995–I) 56. E.g., States X, Y and Z conclude treaty no. 1 and later also treaty no. 2. The lex posterior-rule is based on the principle that States possess the contractual freedom to “change their minds”, J. Pauwelyn, The Role of Public International Law in the WTO: How Far Can We Go? AJIL 95 (2001) 535 , 545.

42See also the statement by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 13.

406

article

or suspended. In the second situation covered by para. 3, the provisions of the earlier treaty are compatible with those of the later treaty. To this extent, the earlier treaty is not terminated or suspended under Article 59, and the two treaties co-exist.43 Viewed in the wider context of these two situations, para. 3 enshrines the rule lex posterior derogat legi priori: States entering into a new agreement are presumed to intend that its provisions shall apply, rather than those of any earlier agreement between them regarding the same matter.44

It thus transpires that para. 3 does not contain a conflict clause (providing for a particular treaty which shall prevail), since it presupposes successive treaties which are not incompatible with each other.45 Its value lies elsewhere: To begin with, para. 3 is essential for the understanding of Article 59; viewed together, the two provisions confirm the lex posterior-rule. Moreover, para. 3 neatly confirms that Article 30 is about priorities, not the invalidity of a treaty (N. 6)—and that para. 3 aims where possible at “saving” the earlier treaty.

b) Subpara. 4(a)

14Para. 4 concerns the more frequent situation where the parties to the later treaty do not include all the parties to the earlier one. Again, two situations must be distinguished (N. 14–15). The first situation is covered by subpara. 4(a): It concerns those States which are parties to both treaties.46 Here, the same rule applies as in paragraph 3 (N. 13), namely that the two treaties co-exist to the extent that their provisions are not incompatible with each other. If the provisions cannot be applied simultaneously, the earlier treaty will be terminated or suspended according to Article 59 (lex posterior-rule, N. 13).

5. Pacta tertiis-Rule (Subpara. 4[b])

15This is the second situation (see N. 14) where the parties to the later treaty do not include all the parties to the earlier one, concerning in particular the situation as between a State party to both treaties and a State party to only one of the treaties.47 In this case, subpara. 4(b) distinguishes between the two treaties by providing that the treaty to which both States are parties

43See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 216, para. 9.

44Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 76, para. 5; Nguyen/Daillier/Pellet, N. 173, speak of a “règle de bon sens”.

45See also Sadat-Akhavi 70 .

46E.g., the parties X, Y and A conclude the earlier treaty no. 1, and X, Y and B the later treaty no. 2. Subpara. 4(a) concerns the relations between X and Y inter se in respect of both treaties.

47E.g. the parties X, Y and A conclude the earlier treaty no. 1, and X, Y and B conclude the later treaty no. 2. Subpara. 4(b) addresses, on the one hand, the relations arising out of

application of successive treaties

407

governs their mutual rights and obligations.48 Subpara. 4(b) thus states which treaty relations apply between which parties. It refrains from stating whether or not one of the treaties becomes invalid on account of the other.49

It reflects the rule pacta tertiis nec nocent nec prosunt (Article 34, q.v.): A party to a treaty cannot be a ected by any agreement which other parties of the treaty conclude with third States.50 Conversely, these third States cannot be a ected by the original treaty.51

Article 30 thus stops short at regulating the relations between the various “other” parties. In order to assess the situation and in particular the limits of subpara. 4(b), let us assume:

an earlier treaty no. 1 is concluded between parties X, Y and A; and

a later treaty no. 2 is concluded between parties X, Y and B; and

the two treaties have incompatible provisions.

Subpara. 4(b) provides that A is not a ected by treaty no. 2, nor is B a ected by treaty no. 1. However, subpara. 4(b) does not deal with the situation where party X (or Y) can no longer simultaneously comply with its obligations arising from both treaties nos. 1 and 2. To be fair, Article 30 never intended to provide an explicit solution hereto. For the resolution of these di culties, Article 30 is complemented by para. 5 and there in particular by the rules of State responsibility which transgresses the law of treaties (N. 16).52

6. Relevance of Other Convention Provisions (Para. 5)

 

According to para. 5, para. 4 is without prejudice to Article 41 (q.v., N. 14)

16

which lays down the conditions under which an agreement may be made to

 

treaty no. 1 between X, Y and A, and, on the other, the separate relations arising out of treaty no. 2 between X, Y and B.

48T his complex formulation becomes clearer upon perusal of subparas. 4(b) and (c) of Article 26 of the ILC Draft 1966 which led to the present subpara. 4(b) (N. 3).

49Statement by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 101, para. 84.

50See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 217, para. 10, also 215, para. 6; the observation by Crawford in the Institut, Annuaire IDCI 66 (1995–I) 164; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 229; Vukas, Law of the Sea Convention 649 f, in respect of Article 311, para. 2 of the UN Law of the Sea Convention of 1982.

51Originally, Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 35, distinguished in Article 65, subpara. 4(c), whether or not a third State “was aware of the existence of the earlier treaty”, though this was dropped as being di cult to prove; see the comment in the ILC by the Chairman (Briggs), YBILC 1964 I 131, para. 55.

52See the comments in the ILC byTsuruoka, YBILC 1966 I/2 100, para. 70; and Waldock, ibid. 103, para. 9 (“in the present state of . . . treaty law, regrettable though it might be, the statement of the law set out in paragraph 4 [is] correct”); also Mus, NILR 45 (1998) 227 ; Sinclair, Annuaire IDI 66 (1984–I) 60; the observations by Torres-Bernárdez, ibid. 136.

408

article

modify the operation of a multilateral treaty as between some of its parties only.53 Para. 5 further makes a reservation in respect of an injured party with regard to any question of the termination or suspension of the operation of a treaty under Article 60 (q.v).54 Thus, if the conclusion or application of a treaty constitutes an infringement of the rights of parties to another treaty, all the normal consequences of the breach of treaty as in Article 60 follow with respect to that other treaty.55 Finally, para. 5 equally acts as a saving clause in respect of any question of responsibility which may arise for a

State from the conclusion or application of a treaty, the provisions of which are incompatible with its obligations towards another State under another treaty. Para. 5 thus continues where para. 4 stops short in respect of the situation of “other” parties (N. 15). It is also within the framework of the rules of State responsibility, not covered by the Convention (Article 73, N. 6), that a judicial resolution of the conflict may follow (N. 12 i.f.).

It is doubtful whether these reservations in para. 5 concern solely paragraph 4 (as stated in para. 5). Situations calling for the application of Articles 41 and 60 and of the rules of State responsibility may also occur under (and cannot be excluded by) paras. 2 and

3.This would be another facet of the residual character of Article 30 (N. 8).

C. CONTEXT

1.Relationship to Other Provisions

17Para. 3 of Article 30 (N. 13) refers to Article 59 (q.v.), and para. 5 (N. 16) to Articles 41 and 60 (q.v.). Conversely, Article 40 para. 4 (q.v., N. 10) refers to Article 30, subpara. 4 (b). Furthermore, subpara. 4(b) (N. 15) reflects the pacta tertiis-rule as in Article 34 (q.v.). Issues of harmonising interpretation are governed by Articles 31 and 32 (q.v.). Finally, while para. 1 confirms the overriding position of Article 103 of the UN Charter, any rule of jus cogens as in Article 53 (q.v.) enjoys the same hierarchical priority.

2.Havana Convention on Treaties

18An issue arises in respect of the Convention’s relationship to the 1928 Havana Convention onTreaties.56 The latter was concluded at the sixth Inter-American

53See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 217, para. 11; Zemanek, RC 266 (1997) 228,

sees a contradiction between Article 30 and Article 41 (q.v.).

54See the ILC Report 1966, ibid.

55Ibid.

56Text in AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1222.

application of successive treaties

409

Conference held in 1928 and is currently in force for eight American States.57 The considerations in Article 30 would appear to govern the relationship between the two instruments for those States which have ratified both.58

3. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Article 30 does not express itself on the rule lex specialis derogat legi generali.To

19

the extent that this rule appertains to customary law (which appears likely),

 

it continues to exist independently alongside Article 30, as confirmed by the

 

eighth preambular para. (Preamble, N. 16).59 Other principles not dealt with

 

in Article 30, e.g., the lex prior-rule and lex posterior generalis non derogat legi

 

priori speciali (N. 1), may well continue to exist as customary rules alongside

 

Article 30, though it appears unlikely that they will attract the required general

 

State practice (see Issues of Customary International Law, N. 7) in view of the

 

strong position of Article 30 qua customary law (N. 21).

 

A number of further matters are not dealt with. Article 30 does not regulate

20

conflicting treaties concluded simultaneously (rather than successively),60 nor does it cover treaties concluded between completely di erent parties (rather than between the same, or some same ones, as in Article 30).61 Furthermore, para. 2 does not envisage conflict clauses asserting priority of the treaties in which they are incorporated (N. 12). On the other hand, since Article 30 is formulated in a general manner and does not distinguish between particular treaties (N. 5), it appears di cult to argue that it does not cover certain types of treaties (e.g., human rights treaties), though of course, Article 30 is primarily aimed at multilateral treaties which can be applied in “bilateral” relationships.62 Finally, it has been pointed out that para. 4 stops short at regulating certain situations which are nevertheless addressed in para. 5 (N. 16).63

57Brazil, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, Haiti, Honduras, Nicaragua, Panama and Peru; see the oral comment by Vierdag in Pasil 78 (1984) 280. Also Villiger, Customary International Law N. 109 f.

58But see the statement by the Observer of the Inter-American Juridical Committee in the ILC, YBILC 1970 I 120, para. 81, for whom the 1928 Convention is superseded; also Rosenne, Law of Treaties 31, n. 7. Di erently the comments by the delegation of Costa Rica in the 6th Committee, GAOR 22 (1967) 6th SR 982nd 140, para. 5; and the Brazilian delegation at the 1969 Vienna Conference, OR 1969 Plenary 174, para. 63; Vierdag, ibid. 280 f.

59Sinclair, Vienna Convention 96; Delbrück/Wolfrum III 695 .

60Mus, NILR 45 (1998) 222.

61Roucounas, RC 206 (1987 VI) 79, N. 120.

62Karl, EPIL 4 (2000) 939 f; Klein, Statusverträge 275 f.

63See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 217, para. 12 f.

410

article

4. Customary Basis of Article 30

21The main principles underlying Article 30—the lex posterior-rule (N. 13) and the pacta tertiis-rule (N. 15)—certainly predate the Convention,64 though Article 30 cast them anew. Since its adoption in Vienna, the provision has rarely been contested and may be considered as being customary as a whole.65 When the Institut later took up the matter of successive codification conventions and dealt with it over a number of years, the result cast no doubts on Article 30.66

D. PROPOSAL FOR REVISION

22Sadat-Akhavi has criticised Article 30 to the extent that the words “later treaty” and “compatibility” are ambiguous. In order to take account of all possible manifestations of the intention of the Parties, he proposes the following modifications of paras. 2 and 3 of Article 30:67

“2. [w]henever it appears from the terms of a treaty, its preparatory work or the subsequent attitude of the Parties that their intention was that it should be subject to, or that it is not to be considered as incompatible with, an earlier or later treaty, the provisions of that other treaty prevail.

3.When all the parties to the treaty adopted earlier are parties also to the later treaty but the earlier treaty is not terminated or suspended in operation under article 59, the earlier treaty applies only to the extent that its provisions can be complied with at the same time as those of the later treaty”.

E.APPRECIATION

23In 2002 the ILC set up a study group on the Fragmentation of International Law. In this context it discussed, inter alia, Article 30.

The study group concluded that Article 30 was “based on relevant concerns” and “did not pose dramatic problems of fragmentation”; the provisions in Article 30 “reflected largely acceptable and reasonable considerations”.68

64Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 76, para. 5; Delbrück/Wolfrum 686.

65Mus, NILR 45 (1998) 213; Safrin, AJIL 96 (2002) 612; Paolillo, Article 30, N. 18; contra the Dutch Government’s observations to the ILC, YBILC 1966 II 75; Matz 316; apparently Sinclair, Vienna Convention 98, for whom this is an area where State practice is continually developing. See the criticism voiced by Zemanek, RC 266 (1997) 225 . On the matter, also Vranes, ZaöRV 65 (2005) 391 .

66See, e.g., the observations by Schindler, Annuaire IDI 66 (1995–I) 229.

67At 249. The original italics reflect the proposed changes.

68ILC Report 2004, YBILC 2004 II 294–296, paras. 332, 334, and 337, respectively. See also N. 24.

application of successive treaties

411

Article 30 is among the most complex of the provisions of the Convention, 24 and its subject-matter has indeed been called “a particularly obscure aspect

of the law of treaties”.69 The substance of the Article is to be found in paras. 3 and 4 which provide for straightforward, practical and elegantly drafted solutions to situations arising from a succession of treaties.70 The rules pertain to the corpus of international law which has changed little over the decades. The ILC intentionally avoided regulating certain situations in Article 30, o ering the complete picture instead by referring, inter alia, to the rules on State responsibility (N. 16). On the whole, Article 30 provides an apt example of the possible fragmentation of a treaty between the parties, o ering flexible, tailor-made treaty relations.

69Sinclair, Vienna Convention 93.

70See Nguyen/Daillier/Pellet, N. 174 (“contribution utile”). Contra Sadat-Akhavi 62 (“serious uncertainty as to its applicability in concrete cases”); also N. 4; Fitzmaurice/Elias 312 “([Article 30 has] not well withstood the passage of time”). For Sinclair, ibid. 94, the simplicity of the rules may give rise to concern.

Section . Interpretation of Treaties

ZACHARIAS

Article 31

General rule of interpretation

1.A treaty shall be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in the light of its object and purpose.

2.The context for the purpose of the interpretation of a treaty shall comprise, in addition to the text, including its preamble and annexes:

(a)any agreement relating to the treaty which was made between all the parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty;

(b)any instrument which was made by one or more parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty and accepted by the other parties as an instrument related to the treaty.

3.There shall be taken into account together with the context:

(a)any subsequent agreement between the parties regarding the interpretation of the treaty or the application of its provisions;

(b)any subsequent practice in the application of the treaty which establishes the agreement of the parties regarding its interpretation;

(c)any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties.

4.A special meaning shall be given to a term if it is established that the parties so intended.

Article 31 Règle générale d’interprétation

1.Un traité doit être interprété de bonne foi suivant le sens ordinaire à attribuer aux termes du traité dans leur contexte et à la lumière de son objet et de son but.

2.Aux fins de l’interprétation d’un traité, le contexte comprend, outre le texte, préambule et annexes inclus:

416

article

a)tout accord ayant rapport au traité et qui est intervenu entre toutes les parties

àl’occasion de la conclusion du traité;

b)tout instrument établi par une ou plusieurs parties à l’occasion de la conclusion du traité et accepté par les autres parties en tant qu’instrument ayant rapport au traité.

3.Il sera tenu compte, en même temps que du contexte:

a)de tout accord ultérieur intervenu entre les parties au sujet de l’interprétation du traité ou de l’application de ses dispositions;

b)de toute pratique ultérieurement suivie dans l’application du traité par laquelle est établi l’accord des parties à l’égard de l’interprétation du traité;

c)de toute règle pertinente de droit international applicable dans les relations entre les parties.

4.Un terme sera entendu dans un sens particulier s’il est établi que telle était l’intention des parties.

Artikel 31 Allgemeine Auslegungsregel

1.Ein Vertrag ist nach Treu und Glauben in Übereinstimmung mit der gewöhnlichen, seinen Bestimmungen in ihrem Zusammenhang zukommenden Bedeutung und im Lichte seines Zieles und Zweckes auszulegen.

2.Für die Auslegung eines Vertrags bedeutet der Zusammenhang ausser dem Vertragswortlaut samt Präambel und Anlagen:

a)jede sich auf den Vertrag beziehende Übereinkunft, die zwischen allen Vertragsparteien anlässlich des Vertragsabschlusses getro en wurde;

b)jede Urkunde, die von einer oder mehreren Vertragsparteien anlässlich des Vertragsabschlusses abgefasst und von den anderen Vertragsparteien als eine sich auf den Vertrag beziehende Urkunde angenommen wurde.

3.Ausser dem Zusammenhang sind in gleicher Weise zu berücksichtigen:

a)jede spätere Übereinkunft zwischen den Vertragsparteien über die Auslegung des Vertrags oder die Anwendung seiner Bestimmungen;

b)jede spätere Übung bei der Anwendung des Vertrags, aus der die Übereinstimmung der Vertragsparteien über seine Auslegung hervorgeht;

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

417

c)jeder in den Beziehungen zwischen den Vertragsparteien anwendbarer einschlägiger Völkerrechtssatz.

4.Eine besondere Bedeutung ist einem Ausdruck beizulegen, wenn feststeht, dass die Vertragsparteien dies beabsichtigt haben.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 27—General rule of interpretation

1.A treaty shall be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in the light of its object and purpose.

2.The context for the purpose of the interpretation of a treaty shall comprise, in addition to the text, including its preamble and annexes:

(a)any agreement relating to the treaty which was made between all the parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty;

(b)any instrument which was made by one or more parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty and accepted by the other parties as an instrument related to the treaty.

3.There shall be taken into account together, with the context:

(a)any subsequent agreement between the parties regarding the interpretation of the treaty;

(b)any subsequent practice in the application of the treaty which establishes the agreement of the parties regarding its interpretation;

(c)any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties.

4.A special meaning shall be given to a term if it is established that the parties so intended.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Articles 56, 70, 71 and 72.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 33 , 275 , 308 , 340 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Articles 69, 70 and 71.

ZACHARIAS

418

article

WALDOCK Report VI: Articles 69 and 70.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 183 , 267 , 328 , 346 .

ILC Draft 1966: Article 27.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 166 , 441 f; OR 1969 Plenary 57 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 97:0:0

Selected Literature:

A-C

C.F. Amerashinge, Interpretation of Texts in Open International Organizations, BYBIL 65 (1994) 175 ; R.Sh. Aryal, Interpretation of Treaties: Law and Practice (2003); D.J. Bederman, Classical Canons: Rhetoric, Classicism and Treaty Interpretation (2001); Id., Revivalist Canons and Treaty Interpretation, UCLALR 41 (1994) 953 ; F. Berman, Treaty “Interpretation” in a Judicial Context, Yale JIL 29 (2004) 315 ; R. Bernhardt, Evolutive Treaty Interpretation, Especially of the European Convention on Human Rights, GYBIL 42 (1999) 11 ; Id., Interpretation and Implied (Tacit) Modification of Treaties. Comments on Arts. 27, 28, 29 and 38 of the ILC’s 1966 Draft Articles on the Law of Treaties, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 491 ; Id., Interpretation in International Law, EPIL 2 (1995) 1416 ; A. Bredimas, Methods of Interpretation and Community Law (1978); M. Bos, A Methodology of International Law (1984); Id., Theory and Practice of Treaty Interpretation, NILR 27 (1980) 3 , 135 ; H.W. Briggs, The travaux préparatoires of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, AJIL 65 (1971) 705 ; L. Condorelli, Interpretazione giurisdizionale e interpretazione autentica di trattati nell’ordinarmento internazionale, RDI 56 (1973) 224; E. Criddle, The Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties in U.S. Treaty Interpretation, Virginia JIL 44 (2004) 431 .

D-G

C.F. de Casadevante Romani, Sovereignty and Interpretation of International Norms (2007); G. Distefano, La pratique subséquente des parties à un traité, AFDI 40 (1994) 41; C.C. Emmanuelli/S. Slosar, L’application et l’interprétation des traités internationaux par le juge canadien, RJT 13 (1978) 69 ; D. French, Treaty Interpretation and the Incorporation of Extraneous Legal Rules, ICLQ 55 (2006) 281 ; M.-F. Furet, L’interprétation des traités par le législateur, RGDIP 81 (1977) 5 ; R. Gardiner, Treaty Interpretation (2008); Id., Treaty Interpretation in the English Courts since Fothergill v. Monarch Airlines (1980), ICLQ 44 (1995) 620 ; A. Glashausser, Di erence and Deference in Treaty Interpretation, Villanova Law Review 50 (2005) 25 ; Id., What we Must Never Forget When it is a Treaty we are Expounding, University of Cincinnati Law Review 73 (2005) 1243 ; H. Golsong, Interpreting the European Convention on Human Rights Beyond the Confines of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties? in: R.St.J. Macdonald/ F. Matscher/H. Petzold (eds.), The European System for the Protection of Human Rights, Dordrecht etc. (1993) 147 ; H. Gutiérrez Posse, La maxime ut res magis valeat quam pereat (interprétation en fonction de “l’e et utile”); les interprétations “extensives” et “restrictives”, ÖZöR 23 (1972) 229 .

H-L

M. Heymann, Einseitige Interpretationserklärungen zu multilateralen Verträgen (2005); W. Hummer, “Ordinary” versus “Special” Meaning”, ÖZöR 26 (1975) 87 ; Id., Problemas juridico-linguisticos de la dicotomia entre el sentido “ordinario” y el “especial” de conceptos convencionales segun la Convención de Viena sobre el Derecho de los Tratados de 1969, Revista 28 (1975) 97 ; F.G. Jacobs, Varieties of Approach to Treaty Interpretation: With Special Reference to the Draft Convention on the Law of Treaties before the Vienna Dip-

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

419

lomatic Conference, ICLQ 18 (1969) 318 ; S.J. Jain, Indian Trends in the Interpretative Use of Legislative History, Statute Law Review 24 (2003) 63 ; I. Johnstone, Treaty Interpretation: The Authority of Interpretive Communities, Michigan JIL 12 (1991) 371; W. Karl, Vertragsauslegung, Vertragsänderung, in: Ch. Schreuer (ed.), Autorität und internationale Ordnung (1979) 9 ; J. Klabbers, Some Problems Regarding the Object and Purpose of Treaties, Finnish YBIL 8 (1997) 138 ; H.F. Köck, Vertragsinterpretation und Vertragsrechtskonvention (1976); Id., Zur Interpretation völkerrechtlicher Verträge, ZöR 53 (1998) 217 ; A. Koziowski, Interpretation of Treaties in the Light of the Relationship between International Law and the Law of the European Communities (European Union), Polish YBIL 26 (2002/2003) 115 ; W. Lang, Les règles d’interprétation codifiées par la Convention de Vienne sur le Droit des Traités et les divers types de traités, ÖZöR 24 (1973) 113 ; M. Leibiger, Die souveränitätsfreundliche Auslegung im Völkerrecht (2005).

M

F. Matscher, Vertragsauslegung durch Vertragsrechtsvergleichung in der Judikatur internationaler Gerichte, vornehmlich von den Organen der EMRK, in: R. Bernhardt et al. (eds.), Völkerrecht als Rechtsordnung. Internationale Gerichtsbarkeit. Menschenrechte, Festschrift für H. Mosler ( ), 545 ; J. McHugo, The Judgments of the International Court of Justice in the Jurisdiction and Admissibility Phase of Qatar v. Bahrain: An Example of the Continuing Need for “Fact-Scepticism”, Netherlands YBIL 28 (1997) 171 ; G.P. McGinley, Practice as a Guide to Treaty Interpretation, Fletcher Forum 9 (1985) 211 ; C. McLachlan, The Principle of Systemic Interpretation and Article 31(3)(c) of the Vienna Convention, ICLQ 54 (2005) 279 ; D.M. McRae, Approaches to the Interpretation of Treaties: The European Court of Human Rights and the WTO Appellate Body, in: St. Breitenmoser et al. (eds.), Human Rights, Democracy and the Rule of Law. Liber amicorum L. Wildhaber (2006), 1407 ; Id., The Legal E ect of Interpretative Declarations, BYBIL 49 (1978) 155 ; J.G. Merrills, Two Approaches to Treaty Interpretation, Australian YBIL 4 (1968–1969) 55 ; S. Moyano Bonilla, La interpretación de los tratados internacionales (1985); Id. La interpretación de los tratados internacionales según la Convención de Viena de , Integración Latinoamericana 10 (1985) 32 ; B.S. Murty, The Content of Treaty Prescriptions—The Problems of Interpretation, Indian YBIL 19 (1986) 169 .

N-R

S.E. Nahlik, L’interprétation des traités internationaux à la lumière de la codification du droit des traités, Archivum Iuridicum Cracoviense 9 (1976) 99 ; A. Nastase, The Role of Interpretation in the Application of Treaties, Revue Roumaine 33 (1989) 49 ; R. Nieto Navia, Aplicación por la Core Interamericana de Derechos Humanos de las Normas de la Convención de Viena sobre el Derecho de los Tratados sobre Interpretación en Diversos Idiomas, in: The Modern World of Human Rights. Essays in Honour of Th. Buergenthal (1996) 397 ; A. Orakhelashvili, Restrictive Interpretation of Human Rights Treaties in the Recent Jurisprudence of the European Court of Human Rights, EJIL 14 (2003) 529 ; J. Pambou Tchivounda, Le droit international de l’interprétation des traités à l’épreuve de la jurisprudence (réflexions à partir de la sentence rendue le 15 février 1985 par le tribunal arbitral pour la délimitation de la frontière entre la Guinée et la Guinée-Bissau), Clunet 113 (1986) 627 ; D. Pratap, Interpretation of Treaties, in S.K. Agrawala (ed.), Essays on the Law of Treaties (1971) 55 ; F. Reindl, Auslegung menschenrechtlicher Verträge (1998); Sh. Rosenne, Interpretation of Treaties in the Restatement and the International Law Commission’s Draft Articles, Columbia JTL 5 (1966) 205 .

S

R. Sapienza, Les déclarations interprétatives unilatérales et l’interprétation des traités, RGDIP 103 (1999) 601 ; K. Schmalenbach, Die rechtliche Wirkung der Vertragsauslegung durch

ZACHARIAS

420

article

IGH, EuGH und EGMR, ZöR 59 (2004) 213 ; Ch. Schreuer, The Interpretation of Treaties by International Courts, BYBIL 45 (1971) 255 ; G. Schwarzenberger, Myths and Realities of Treaty Interpretation. Articles 27–29 of the Vienna Draft Convention on the Law of Treaties, Virginia JIL 9 (1968) 1 ; S.S. Scott, The Political Interpretation of Multilateral Treaties (2004); Sh.V. Scott, The Political Interpretation of Treaties (2004); I. Seroin, L’application des règles d’interprétation de la Convention de Vienne sur le droit des traits dans le cadre de l’ALÉ, de l’ALENA, du GATT et de l’OMC, RJT 34 (2000) 227; R. Sharma Aryal, Interpretation of Treaties: Law and Practice (2003); S.P. Sharma, The ILC Draft and Treaty Interpretation, IJIL 8 (1968) 367 ; D. Simon, L’interprétation judiciaire des traités d’organisations internationales (1981); K. Skubiszewski, Implied Powers of International Organizations, in: Y. Dinstein/M. Tabory (eds.), International Law at a Time of Perplexity. Essays in Honour of Sh. Rosenne (1989) 855 ; Id., Remarks on the Interpretation of the United Nations Charter, in: R. Bernhardt et al. (eds.), Völkerrecht als Rechtsordnung. Internationale Gerichtsbarkeit. Menschenrechte, Festschrift für H. Mosler (1983) ; L.B. Sohn, Settlement of Disputes Relating to the Interpretation and Application of Treaties, RC 150 (1976 II) 195 ; J.-M. Sorel, Article 31, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1289 ; S. Sur, L’interprétation en droit international public (1974).

T-Y

G.P. Tchivounda, Le droit international de l’interprétation des traités à l’épreuve de la jurisprudence, JDI 113 (1986) 627 ; H.W.A. Thirlway, The Law and Procedure of the International Court of Justice, BYBIL 62 (1991) 15 ; S. Torres Bernárdez, Interpretation of Treaties by the International Court of Justice Following the Adoption of the 1969 Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, in: B. Hafner (ed.), Liber Amicorum I. SeidlHohenveldern (1998) 721 ; D. Vagts, Treaty Interpretation and the New American Ways of Law Reading, EJIL 4 (1993) 472 ; K.J. Vandevelde, Treaty Interpretation from a Negotiator’s Perspective, Vanderbilt JTL 21 (1988) 281 ; M.E. Villiger, Articles 31 and 32 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties in the Case-Law of the European Court of Human Rights, in: J. Bröhmer et al. (eds.), Internationale Gemeinschaft und Menschenrechte. Festschrift für G. Ress (2005) 317 ; B. Vitanyi, L’interprétation des traités dans la théorie du droit naturel, RGDIP 84 (1980) 525 ; Id., Treaty Interpretation in the Legal Theory of Grotius and its Influence on Modern Doctrine, NYBIL 14 (1983) 41 ; I. Voicou, De l’interprétation authentique des traités internationaux (1968); G. White, The Vienna Convention “Code” as Applied by the World Trade Organization Judiciary, Australian YBIL 20 (1999) 319 ; J.C. Wolf, The Jurisprudence of Treaty Interpretation, UCDLR 21 (1988) 1023 ; E.S. Yambrusic, Treaty Interpretation: Theory and Reality (1987); M.K. Yasseen, L’interprétation des traités d’après la Convention de Vienne sur le Droit des Traités, RC 151 (1976 III) 1 .

ZACHARIAS

 

 

general rule of interpretation

421

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

4

 

B. Interpretation of Article 31 ............................................................

6

 

1.

Good Faith (Para. 1) .........................................................................

6

 

2.

Ordinary Meaning in Context (Para. 1) ............................................

9

 

3.

Object and Purpose (Para. 1) ............................................................

11

 

4.

Authentic Interpretation (Paras. 2 and Subparas. 3[a] and [b]) .........

15

 

 

a)

Scope ..........................................................................................

15

 

 

b)

Upon Conclusion of the Treaty (Para. 2) .....................................

17

 

 

c) After Conclusion of the Treaty (Subparas. 3[a] and [b]) ..............

20

 

5.

Other Rules of International Law (Subpara. 3[c]) .............................

24

 

6.

Special Meanings (Para. 4) ................................................................

26

 

7.

Manner of Employing Means of Interpretation .................................

28

 

 

a) “General Rule of Interpretation” .................................................

28

 

 

b)

Practice .......................................................................................

32

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

35

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

35

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

36

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 31 ...........................................................

37

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

40

 

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

Five methods have traditionally played a role in the theory of interpretation:

1

(i) the subjective or historical method, of which Sir Hersch Lauterpacht

 

was a prominent exponent,1 seeks to identify, when interpreting a treaty, the

 

“real” intentions of the drafters and, consequently, encourages recourse to the treaty’s travaux préparatoires;2 (ii) the latter have less significance for the textual or grammatical method. This method concentrates on the treaty text

1 See, e.g., H. Lauterpacht, Development of the Law of International Organization (1976) 26 , 116 ; and his reports to the Institut, inter alia, in Annuaire IDI 43 (1950 I) 366 .

2 E.g., Guggenheim, Traité I 252; Sørensen, Sources 214.

ZACHARIAS

422

article

which is, in Max Huber’s words, “la seule et la plus récente expression de la volonté commune des parties”;3 (iii) the contextual or systematic method, reflected in the 1956 resolution of the Institut, appreciates the meaning of terms in their nearer and wider context;4 (iv) the teleological or functional method was most clearly stated in Article 19, para. (a) of the 1935 Harvard Draft on the Law of Treaties.5 It concentrates on the object and purpose of a treaty and will, if necessary, transgress the confines of the treaty text; (v) finally, the logical method favours rational techniques of reasoning and such abstract principles as per analogiam, e contrario, contra proferentem, ejusdem generis and expressio unius est exclusio alterius.6

2Authors seldom adhere to single methods, and indeed, some have propounded combinations of various means of interpretation.7 Others have denied altogether the existence or legal character of rules of interpretation.8

The New Haven-approach has criticised textualism in interpretation “as a violation of the human dignity to choose freely”.9 This approach aims at elucidating, against the whole background of international relations, shared expectations that the parties to the relevant communication succeeded in creating in each other. Müller’s Vertrauensschutztheorie seeks to protect legitimate expectations of parties arising out of their reasonable interpretation of the treaty text.10

3Pre-1969 case-law supports an equally wide variety of approaches to interpretation.11 The World Court, at times, permitted recourse to the travaux préparatoires, but did not usually follow the subjective approach.12 The

3

Annuaire IDI 44 (1952 I) 199; Rousseau, Droit international public I 269.

4

Annuaire IDI 46 (1956) 317 , 364 ; and YBILC 1964 II 55; McNair, Law of Treaties

 

365.

5

AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 937 .

6

Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 54, para. 5.

7

For instance, Schwarzenberger, International Law I 491 , mentions seven techniques.

8

J.Stone, Fictional Elements in Treaty Interpretation, Sydney LR 1 (1955) 344 .

9

M.S. McDougal/H.D. Lasswell/J.C. Miller, The Interpretation of Agreements and

 

World Public Order. Principles of Content and Procedure (1967), xvii, xix, 44, 111, and

 

passim; see also R. Falk, On Treaty Interpretation and the New Haven Approach, Virginia

 

JIL 8 (1968) 323 ; critically G. Fitzmaurice, Vae victis or Woe to the Negotiators! Your

 

Treaty or our “Interpretation” of it? AJIL 65 (1971) 358 .

10Vertrauensschutz 134 , and passim.

11Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 54, paras. 5 .

12See, inter alia, the Lotus Case, PCIJ (1927) Series A no. 10, 16 (“there is no occasion to have regard to preparatory work if the text of a convention is su ciently clear in itself”).

Per contra its Advisory Opinions on the Admission of a State to UN Membership, ICJ Reports 1950 8 f; and in Employment of Women during the Night, PCIJ (1932) Series A/B no. 50, 378, and 380.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

423

Court often adhered to the contextual method,13 while emphasising the teleological approach in the interpretation of constitutions of international organisations.14

Sir Gerald Fitzmaurice’s study of the major principles of interpretation which the Court employed, qualified its approach to interpretation as being mainly contextual, since he established the following three primary principles of interpretation: (i) actuality (or textuality); (ii) the natural and ordinary meaning of a term; and (iii) integration. The principles of e ectiveness (emphasising the treaty’s object and purpose), subsequent practice, and contemporaneity were subject to the primary means and, hence, appeared to be of a supplementary nature.15

2. History

 

The ILC took up the subject at a relatively late stage in 1964. After a prelimi-

4

nary debate in which it acknowledged the legal quality of rules on interpretation and the desirability of their written formulation, Waldock Report III introduced draft articles Articles 70–72 which were clearly inspired by the 1957 articles on interpretation of the Institut (N. 1).16 These provisions proceeded from the “primacy of the text” and granted a certain discretion in the choice of approach to interpretation. In the opinion of most Commission members in 1964, these rules found support in international law and embodied the contextual approach to interpretation.17 Articles 69–71 of the ILC Draft 1964 contained the nucleus of the present Articles 31 and 32.18 It was only at this stage that the “objects and purposes” and the “subsequent practice” came to constitute integral parts of the “General Rule”.19 In 1966 there was a consensus in the ILC that the ordinary meaning of terms was relevant, but constituted only the starting point of a wider inquiry. The discussion focused on the arrangement of means listed in the General Rule,

13See its Admission to UN Membership Advisory Opinion, ibid. (“[i]f the relevant words in their natural and ordinary meaning make sense in their context, that is an end to the matter”).

14See, typically, its Advisory Opinions on the Judgment of the ILO Administrative Tribunal, ICJ Reports 1956 98 (“the Court has relied on the wording of the texts in question as well as on their spirit, namely, the purpose for which they were adopted”); and, with regard to “implied powers”, on Reparation for Injuries, ICJ Reports 1949 182.

15BYBIL 33 (1957) 203 , 211 f; also in YBILC 1964 II 55, para. 12; Thirlway, BYBIL 62 (1991) 15 .

16YBILC 1964 II 8 , 52 ; i.e., Article 70 on the General Rule; Article 71 on the Application of General Rules; Article 72 on the E ective Interpretation of the Terms; Article 56 on Intertemporal Law; and Article 73 on the E ects of a Later Customary Rule or a Later Agreement on Interpretation of a Treaty. The preliminary debate is reproduced at YBILC 1964 I 20 .

17YBILC 1964 I 275 .

18Ibid. 308 .

19T he ILC Report 1964 is reproduced at YBILC 1964 II 199 .

ZACHARIAS

424

article

and on questions of context and the special meaning of terms.20 The ILC then adopted Articles 27 and 28 of the ILC Draft 1966.21

These materials suggest three conclusions: (i) the ILC clearly acknowledged the legal quality of rules on interpretation;22 (ii) the ILC found substantial support in case-law for some means of interpretation;23 (iii) the ILC materials indicate considerable uncertainty on the part of the ILC, at least originally, on other means such as the position and function of subsequent practice; the treaty’s object and purpose; and the equal value and interrelation of all the means of the General Rule; this would indicate the originally innovative nature of these means.

5At the 1968 Vienna Conference the US delegation tabled an amendment suggesting eight “relevant factors” to be considered in the interpretation of treaty terms.24 McDougal of the delegation directed trenchant criticism towards the alleged textuality of Articles 27 and 28 of the ILC Draft 1966 which in his view “would prove totally unworkable”,25 whereas the US amendment would restore a well established process of interpretation, permitting recourse to factors extrinsic to the treaty text. The amendment was rejected by 66 votes to eight with ten abstentions.26 In 1969 the Conference adopted today’s Articles 31 and 32 (which had remained unchanged in Vienna), respectively, with 97 votes to none, and 101 votes to none.27

Of the 38 delegations which commented on ILC Draft Articles 27 and 28, 31 favoured these articles, and seven criticised them. Most delegations endorsed the legal quality of rules of interpretation, their remarks concentrating principally on the merits of various approaches to interpretation. Seven delegations deemed the articles to reflect international law, five regarded them as being new. Seven delegations concurred with the ILC that Article 27 established a parity of all means of interpretation, whereas 19 delegations viewed the article as entrenching the classical textual approach. Similar patterns can be detected with regard to Article 28 where eight delegations supported

20YBILC 1966 I/2 183 , 267 , 328 f, and 346 f.

21Ibid. 270; Article 27 was adopted by 16 votes to none; Article 28 by 15 votes to none. The articles are reproduced at YBILC 1966 II 217 .

22E.g., the statement by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 21, para. 15.

23E.g., Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 206, para. 38; Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 95, para. 5.

24Reproduced in OR Documents 149 f. Altogether 15 States submitted amendments, ibid.

25OR 1968 CoW 167, para. 44, and ibid. paras. 38 . But see the statement by the UK delegation in Vienna, ibid. 178, para. 10, for whom the US text “actually placed primary emphasis on the text of the treaty” (see N. 41 i.f.).

26Ibid. 185, para. 75.

27OR 1969 Plenary 57 f. See the statement by the Chairman of the Vienna Conference, Ago, ibid. 59, para. 7 (“the Conference had successfully disposed of the most controversial and di cult subject in the whole field of the law of treaties”).

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

425

 

the ILC’s intention to admit liberal recourse to the “supplementary means”, whereas

 

for 15 delegations the use of these means was restricted.28

 

 

On the whole, it is significant that in Vienna no State proposed the deletion of the ILC

 

Draft articles on interpretation. In fact, a substantial majority of States endorsed the ILC

 

Draft articles, though it may be noted that claims emphasising the declaratory nature

 

of these rules were balanced by statements that the rules were innovatory. Opinions

 

of States on the content of the respective rules were equally divided. It is thus doubt-

 

ful whether the unanimity of vote in Vienna su ced per se to corroborate a communis

 

opinio juris upon the respective articles.

 

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 31

 

 

1. Good Faith (Para. 1)

 

 

Article 31 gives pride of place in its opening sentence in para. 1 to good faith

6

(bona fides) which is “one of the basic principles governing the creation and

 

performance of legal obligations”.29 The notion is also referred to in the third

 

preambular para. (Preamble, N. 10) and in Article 26 on pacta sunt servanda

 

(q.v., N. 5, 8). The crucial link is thus established between the interpreta-

 

tion of a treaty and its performance.30 However, good faith as such has no

 

normative quality (Article 26, N. 5).31

 

 

When interpreting a treaty, good faith raises at the outset the presumption

7

that the treaty terms were intended to mean something, rather than nothing.32

 

Furthermore, good faith requires the parties to a treaty to act honestly, fairly and reasonably, and to refrain from taking unfair advantage.33 Legitimate

28See on this section Villiger, Customary International Law N. 482. The minutes are reproduced at OR 1968 CoW 166 , and 441 f; and OR 1969 Plenary 57 f.

29Nuclear Tests Cases, ICJ Reports 1974 268, para. 46.

30See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 221, para. 12.

31See the UK Government’s Memorandum of 31 May 1990 in the US/UK Arbitration Concerning Heathrow Airport User Charges, BYBIL 63 (1992) 707 f (“[g]ood faith is not . . . an independent legal principle so much as a standard against which the conduct of a subject of the law can be measured . . . [T]he concept of good faith, as a general principle of law, has only marginal value as an autonomous source of rights and duties”); the Border and Transborder Armed Actions (Nicaragua/Honduras) Case, ICJ Reports 1988 105, para. 94; see also the 1981 Interpretation of the Algerian Declarations of 19 January 1981 by the

Iran-US Claims Tribunal, ILR 62 (1982) 605 f (“good faith is not only a rule of morality but a part of codified international law”).

32See the Minority Opinion in the Iran-US Claims Arbitration (1981), ILR 62 (1982) 603; Jacobs, ICLQ 18 (1969) 333.

33See the 1981 Interpretation of the Algerian Declarations of 19 January 1981 by the IranUS Claims Tribunal, ILR 62 (1982) 605 f (“spirit of honesty and respect for law”). See generally A. d’Amato, Good Faith, EPIL 2 (1995) 599 .

ZACHARIAS

426

article

expectations raised in other parties shall be honoured (Vertrauensschutz).34 A right which has been forfeited may no longer be claimed (venire contra factum proprium). The prohibition of the abuse of rights, flowing from good faith, prevents a party from evading its obligations and from exercising its rights in such a way as to cause injury to the other party.35

8Article 31 envisages good faith as being at the centre of the application of the General Rule. The notion prevails throughout the process of interpretation.36

Good faith prevents an excessively literal interpretation of a term by requiring consideration of its context (N. 9) and of other means of interpretation.37 In particular, good faith implies consideration of the object and purpose of a treaty (N. 12). It plays a part in establishing the “acceptance” in subpara. 2(b) (N. 19) and in evaluating subsequent practice as in subpara. 3(b) (N. 22). Finally, good faith assists in determining recourse to the supplementary means of interpretation in Article 32 (q.v., N. 11).

2. Ordinary Meaning in Context (Para. 1)

9According to Article 31, para.1, a treaty shall be determined in accordance with the ordinary meaning. The ordinary meaning is the starting point of the process of interpretation. This is its current and normal (regular, usual) meaning. A term may have a number of ordinary meanings, which may even change over time.38 This relativist view of hermeneutics underlies Article 31 which in para. 1 requires the ordinary meaning to be given by the interpreter in good faith (N. 6–8) to the terms of the treaty.39 In other words, that particular ordinary meaning will be established which is the common intention of the parties.40 The relativity of the meaning of a term is confirmed by para. 4 which envisages the possibility of a “special” meaning going beyond the ordinary meaning of terms (N. 26–27).

34Müller, Vertrauensschutz 128 “[good faith] fordert ein an objektiven Massstäben gegenseitiger Rücksichtnahme orientiertes Verhalten”.

35See the avis de droit of the Swiss Federal Department of Foreign A airs, SJIR 32 (1976) 79 , 82; the Swiss Federal Court, ibid. 28 (1972) 214.

36Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 22 f.

37ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 211, para. 2; di erently Zoller, Bonne foi 214, N. 231.

38T his intertemporal aspect is essentially a matter of good faith, depending on the intentions of the parties; see Waldock Report VI, 1966 II 96, para. 7; 97, para. 13; per contra the 1980 Young Loan Arbitration, ILR 59 (1980) 530, para. 19; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 27, para. 7 (but see para. 9). It may have been the intention of the parties to “freeze” the meaning of the terms; see Thirlway, BYBIL 62 (1991) 57.

39Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 94, paras. 2 f.

40See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 220, para. 11.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

427

 

The limits of this means of interpretation lie “in a meaning incompatible with the spirit,

 

purpose and context of the clause or instrument in which the words are contained”.41

 

Para. 1 envisages the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty

10

in their context. Treaty terms are not drafted in isolation, and their meaning

 

can only be determined by considering the entire treaty text. The context

 

will include the remaining terms of the sentence and of the paragraph; the

 

entire article at issue; and the remainder of the treaty, i.e., its text, including

 

its preamble (Preamble N. 5) and annexes (e.g., maps) and the other means

 

mentioned in paras. 2 and 3.42 The annexes to the Convention are listed in

 

the Final Act (q.v.; see also Article 85, N. 1). Article 31 thus embodies the

 

contextual or systematic means of interpretation which aims at avoiding

 

inconsistencies of the individual term with its surroundings.43 Reference to the

 

context in para. 1 confirms the relativity of the ordinary meaning (N. 9).44

 

3. Object and Purpose (Para. 1)

 

 

Next, the ordinary meaning of a term of the treaty will be determined in

11

the light of its (i.e., the treaty’s) object and purpose.45 The terms are used

 

as a combined whole46 and include a treaty’s aims, its nature and its end.

 

Indeed, a treaty may have many objects and purposes.47 One of the objects

 

and purposes will certainly be to maintain the balance of rights and obligations created by the treaty.48 Article 31 thus also entrenches the teleological or functional approach.49 It enables consideration of the di erent aims of particular types of treaties.

For instance, the intentions of the parties are often emphasised when interpreting bilateral, “contractual” treaties. By contrast, teleological interpretation has traditionally played a part in the interpretation of constitutions of international organisations (and

41South West Africa (Preliminary Objections) Cases, ICJ Reports 1962 335 f; Jennings/Watts N. 632.

42Delbrück/Wolfrum III 642; for Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 498, reference to the “preamble and annexes” would not have been “absolutely necessary”.

43Bleckmann, Völkerrecht N. 354.

44Emphatically the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 221, para. 12: “the ordinary meaning of a term is not to be determined in the abstract but in the context of the treaty”.

45See on the topic Crnic-Grotic, Asian YBIL 7 (1997) 155 ; Buffard/Zemanek, Austrian RIEL 3 (1998) 311 , 322 ; Linderfalk, Nordic JIL 72 (2003) 429 ; J. Klabbers, Some Problems Regarding the Object and Purpose of Treaties, Finnish YBIL 8 (1997) 138 .

46Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 57; Linderfalk, ibid. 433 (“perfectly synonymous”); Carreau, Droit international public N. 363 (“di cile à préciser”).

47See the statement by Tusuruoka in the ILC 1966, YBILC 1966 I 326, para. 91 (“both singular and plural had the same meaning”).

48Treviranus, GYBIL 25 (1982) 520.

49O’Connell, International Law I 255.

ZACHARIAS

428

article

their implied powers) and other multilateral, “legislative” conventions.50 The object and purpose also plays a particular part in the interpretation of human rights treaties.51

12Consideration of a treaty’s object and purpose together with good faith will ensure the e ectiveness of its terms (ut res magis valeat quam pereat, the e et utile).

As the ILC Report 1966 expounded: “[w]hen a treaty is open to two interpretations one of which does and the other does not enable the treaty to have appropriate e ects, good faith and the objects and purposes of the treaty demand that the former interpretation should be adopted”.52

13Article 31 does not state where the object and purpose may be sought. Traditionally, the preamble (Preamble, N. 1–2) is resorted to, or a general clause at the beginning of the treaty. The structure of Article 31 as a General Rule leaves no doubt that all the elements of Article 31 as well as the supplementary means of interpretation in Article 32 contribute to this end.53

14Interpretation in the light of a treaty’s object and purpose finds its limits in the treaty text itself. One of the (originally many possible) ordinary meanings will eventually prevail. In other words, Article 31 avoids an extreme functional interpretation which may, in fact, lead to “legislation” or the revision of a treaty.54

50Nuclear Weapons Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1996 74 f, para. 18.

51See the case-law of the European Court of Human Rights cited in Villiger, Festschrift Ress 325 f; the Inter-American Human Rights Court in the 1987 Velasquez Rodriguez (Preliminary Objection) Case, ILR 95 (1994) 243 f, para. 30 (“[the Inter-American Human Rights] Convention must . . . be interpreted so as to give it its full meaning”); and in the 1984 Costa Rica Naturalization Provisions Advisory Opinion, ILR 79 (1989) 292, para. 24 (“the interpretation to be adopted may not lead to a result that weakens the system of protection established by the [Inter-American Human Rights Convention]”).

52YBILC 1966 II 219, para. 6.

53In the Sovereignty Over Pulau Ligitan and Pulau Sipadan (Indonesia/Malaysia) Case, the ICJ had recourse to the “very scheme” of the convention at issue, ICJ Reports 2002 652, para. 51. See Müller, Vertrauensschutz 130 f; similarly (but with emphasis on the text), Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 57, para. 6; Bleckmann, Völkerrecht N. 362; the comment by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1966 1/2 186, para. 14. Contra McDougal, AJIL 61 (1967) 993 f.

54ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 219, para. 6, and 220, para. 11; the Interpretation of Peace Treaties Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1950 229; also the statement in Vienna by Jiménez de Aréchaga of the Uruguayan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 170, para. 67; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 57, para. 4.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

429

 

4. Authentic Interpretation (Para. 2 and Subparas. 3[a] and [b])

 

 

a) Scope

 

 

Article 31 lists additional means for the purpose of the interpretation of

15

a treaty which are defined as part of the context (para. 2), or shall be taken

 

into account together with the context (para. 3). These means of interpreta-

 

tion serve together with the means of para. 1 to establish the meaning of a

 

particular treaty term. The means in paras. 2 and 3 can only be invoked if all

 

the parties to the treaty have been involved in the interpretation of a par-

 

ticular meaning of a treaty term by means of an agreement (N. 18, 21); or if

 

one or more of the parties have been involved by means of an instrument

 

(N. 19) or subsequent practice (N. 22) to which the other parties have

 

agreed. Article 31, paras. 2 and 3 thus envisage a uniform interpretation of

 

the treaty by the parties and for the parties.

 

 

The situation may arise that only some treaty parties inter se reach an agreement, or

 

establish a practice. Neither paras. 2 and 3 nor other provisions of the Convention can

 

exclude such agreements or such practice (Article 41, q.v.). On the other hand, the agree-

 

ment or practice remains res inter alios acta for the other States which are not bound

 

(Article 34, q.v.) as long as they do not expressly or tacitly agree thereto. However, an

 

agreement or practice of States inter se may play a role under Article 32 (q.v., N. 5).

 

Para. 2 and subparas. 3(a) and (b) represent forms of authentic interpretation

16

whereby all parties themselves agree on (or at least accept) the interpretation

 

of treaty terms by means which are extrinsic to the treaty. As a result, the

 

parties’ authentic interpretation of the treaty terms is not only particularly

 

reliable,55 it is also endowed with binding force. It provides ex hypothesi the

 

“correct” interpretation among the parties in that it determines which of the

 

various ordinary meanings shall apply. It has been argued above that Article

 

31, para. 1 does not permit the interpreter to legislate or to revise the treaty

 

(N. 14). Authentic interpretation presents a di erent situation, since the

 

parties to the treaty are their own masters. Thus, the parties may by means of

 

the instruments, agreements or practice mentioned in para. 2 and subparas.

 

3(a) and (b) not only give a special meaning to the term at issue (N. 26–27)

 

but also amend, extend or delete a text.

 

 

b) Upon Conclusion of the Treaty (Para. 2)

 

 

The agreement or instrument mentioned in para. 2 as a means of interpreta-

17

tion will concern a subject-matter of the treaty (and in particular the treaty

 

term to be interpreted) and are, or were, “germane” to the treaty,56 i.e., they

 

55Carreau, Droit international public N. 374 (“l’un des moyens les plus classiques et les plus sûrs pour déterminer le sens exact des dispositions d’un traité”).

56Statements by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 313, para. 53; and by the Australian delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 169, para. 59, and 442, para. 30. These terms have

ZACHARIAS

430

article

stand in some connection with the conclusion of the treaty (but need not necessarily have eventuated at the time of the conclusion of the treaty).57 Statements at a diplomatic conference appear irrelevant in this context,58 as it is then not clear whether the treaty will be concluded and which States will become parties.

18Subpara. 2(a) mentions any agreement relating to the treaty which was made between all the parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty. The agreement may, for instance, relate to the treaty’s implementation or even have as its object the interpretation of certain treaty terms.59 The agreement, implying a contract, may correspond with the notion of a “treaty” in Article 2, subpara. 1(a) (q.v., N. 4–20), but the term “agreement” is clearly wider and covers any contractual instrument, in particular also agreements not in written form.60

19Subpara. 2(b) refers as a further means of interpretation to any instrument which was made by one or more parties in connection with the conclusion of the treaty. The instrument will include agreements inter se between certain parties or unilateral statements, e.g., interpretative declarations upon ratification or accession.61 Final acts of a conference and explanatory reports would fall to be considered under subpara. 2(b), if prepared by governmental experts.62 As a particular condition, the instrument must have been accepted by the other parties as an instrument related to the treaty. The other parties need at least to have acquiesced in the instrument.63 (In the case of a contractual agreement, subpara. 2[a] applies, N. 18.) Whether or not the parties have acquiesced, will be determined, inter alia, in good faith (N. 6–8).

been criticised as being unclear by Bernhardt, ZaRV 27 (1967) 498 f. Agreements made before the conclusion of the treaty are covered by Article 31, subpara. 3(c) (N. 24–25).

57Jennings/Watts N. 632.

58T hey may be relevant as State practice, Villiger, Manual N. 20 , or as travaux préparatoires (Article 32, N. 5), Bernhardt, GYBIL 42 (1999) 14.

59See the examples in Aust, Modern Treaty Law 236 .

60Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 311, para. 23; Ago (Chairman), ibid. 287, para. 63; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 37, para. 13. Per contra the comments in Vienna by the delegations of Kenya, OR 1968 CoW 180, para. 30 (“only written documents”);

Sierra Leone, ibid. 174, para. 29; and the Federal Republic of Germany, OR 1969 Plenary 57, para. 64; also Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 498 f.

61Sapienza, RGDIP 103 (1999) 601 .

62As opposed to reports of an independent drafting body, such as the ILC. See Aust, Modern Treaty Law 237 f.

63With reference to Article 31 para. 2, the German Federal Constitutional Court viewed, in the 1975 case concerning the Ostverträge with the USSR and Poland, as relevant Poland’s passive conduct in relation to a declaration of the German Federal Foreign Minister, BVerfGE 40, 176.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

431

 

The acceptance by the other parties is directed towards two points: (i) the content of

 

the particular instrument (concerning the treaty term to be interpreted); and (ii) the

 

particular instrument relates to the treaty.64

 

 

The Declaration appended to Article 52 (Article 52—Declaration, N. 3), providing a

 

“supplementary” interpretation of Article 52, serves as an example of an authentic means

 

of interpretation according to subpara. 2(b).

 

 

c) After Conclusion of the Treaty (Subparas. 3[a] and [b])

 

 

The means of interpretation mentioned in subparas. 3(a) and (b) di er from

20

para. 2 (N. 17–19) in that they originate after the conclusion of the treaty,65

 

while equally concerning a subject-matter of the treaty.

 

 

Subpara. 3(a) mentions any subsequent agreement between the par-

21

ties regarding the interpretation of the treaty or the application of its

 

provisions.66

 

 

Subpara. 3(b) concerns any subsequent practice in the application of the

22

treaty.67 This provision resembles subpara. 2(b) (N. 19) in that it requires

 

active practice of some parties to the treaty. The active practice should be

 

consistent rather than haphazard and it should have occurred with a certain frequency.68 However, the subsequent practice must establish the agreement of the parties regarding its interpretation. Thus, it will have been acquiesced in by the other parties; and no other party will have raised an objection.69

64Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 98, para. 16, as to acquiescence; but see Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 498 f; the comments in the ILC by Castren, YBILC 1966 I/2 189, para. 54; and Rosenne, YBILC 1964 I 313, para. 52.

65See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 221, para. 14. As to the written form, see the comments in Vienna by the Federal Republic of Germany, OR 1969 Plenary 57, paras. 64 f; Sierra Leone, OR 1968 CoW 174, para. 29; also Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 45, para. 5.

66See N. 18 as to the term “agreement”; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 191 f (“[p]rovided the purpose is clear, the agreement can take varius forms, including a decision adopted by a meeting of the parties”, footnotes omitted ).

67T he application of a treaty always presupposes its interpretation. See Distefano, AFDI 40 (1994) 41 ; Karl, Vertrag 188 . Aust, ibid. 242 f, refers to the well known example of subsequent practice in respect of Article 27, para. 3 of the UN Charter; R. Kolb, La modification d’un traité par la pratique subséquente des parties. Note sur l’a aire relative au régime fiscal des pensions versées aux fonctionnaires retraités de l’UNESCO résidant en France; sentence du 14 janvier 2003, Revue Suisse 14 (2004) 9 .

68See the statement in Vienna by the delegation of Argentina, OR 1968 CoW 180, para. 23; Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 59, para. 24; the avis de droit of the Swiss Federal Department for Foreign A airs, SJIR 38 (1982) 86, according to which two règlements of the WHO were insu cient in this respect. On the subject also J.-P. Cot, La conduite subséquente des parties à un traité, RGDIP 70 (1966) 632 .

69Emphatically Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 99, para. 18; the ILC Report 1966, ibid. 222, para. 15; the observation by the US Government to the ILC, ibid. 359. See the 1977 Beagle Channel Arbitration, ILR 52 (1979) 224, para. 172, and 169; the 1980 Young Loan Arbitration, ibid. 59 (1980) 541, para. 31 (“tacit subsequent understanding”); the

ZACHARIAS

432

article

(If these conditions are not met, such practice may still serve as a supplementary means of interpretation according to Article 32, q.v.).70

This means of interpretation is well established in the practice of the Court. The latter employed the subsequent practice of the parties as a means of interpretation in the

Nulear Weapons Advisory Opinion; and in the Kasikili/Sedudu Island (Botswana/Namibia) Case.71

23Authentic interpretation in subpara. 3(b) is of a dynamic nature in that it may alter the original ordinary meaning of a term by both contractual and customary means: (i) subsequent practice may modify a treaty provision contractually qua authoritative interpretation (Article 39, N. 14). The ILC foresaw that there was no preconceived delimitation between the old and the new rule;72 and (ii) parties may in their practice gradually wander from interpretation (as in subpara. 3[b]) to customary modification of the treaty (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 30–33).

5. Other Rules of International Law (Subpara. 3[c])

24Subpara. 3(c) envisages treaty interpretation against the whole background of international law. Thus, the meaning of a treaty term will correspond with any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties. These rules need have no particular relationship with the treaty other than assisting in the interpretation of its terms. On the whole, they will provide a contemporary interpretation of the ordinary meaning of a term.73

As the Court pointed out in its Namibia Advisory Opinion with regard to the concepts embodied in Article 22 of the League of Nations Covenant: “[m]indful as the Court is of the primary necessity of interpreting an instrument in accordance with the intentions of the parties at the time of its conclusion, the Court must take into consideration the changes which have occurred in the supervening half-century, and its interpretation cannot remain una ected by the subsequent development of law, through the Charter

1963 Air Transport Arbitration (France/US), ibid. 38 (1969) 249 f. This qualified passive conduct approximates to customary law, Müller, Vertrauensschutz 132.

70Torres Bernárdez, Liber Amicorum Seidl-Hohenveldern 726 f.

71Respectively, ICJ Reports 1996 75, para. 19, and 76, para. 22; and ICJ Reports 1999 1075, para. 48.

72Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 499. See the German Federal Constitutional Court in the 1994 International Military Operations Case, ILR 106 (1997) 338 f (“[i]n practice, international law is characterized by a fluid transition from treaty interpretation to treaty amendment . . . [I]n certain cases this practice can have the same e ect on a treaty as a proper amendment”); see also the 1982 Aminoil Arbitration, ILM 21 (1982) 1023, paras. 97 .

73On the subject, see also the Report of the ILC Study Group on the Fragmentation of International Law, which includes a Section on Article 31, subpara. 3(c), YBILC 2006 II 413 , para. 251, subparas. (17) .

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

433

of the United Nations and by way of customary law. Moreover, an international instrument has to be interpreted and applied within the framework of the entire legal system prevailing at the time of the interpretation”.74

The rules of international law are one of the means of interpretation of the 25 General Rule in Article 31 (N. 29).75 They correspond with the notion of

the sources of international law as in Article 38 para. 1 of the ICJ-Statute.76

Furthermore, they are applicable in the relations between the parties, i.e., binding on all the parties to the treaty at issue.77 The term “applicable” leaves no room for doubt: non-binding rules cannot be relied upon. The rules to be resorted to may be general, regional or local customary rules, as well as bilateral or multilateral treaties, and even general principles of international law.78 It is assumed that in entering treaty obligations, the parties did not intend to act inconsistently with other previous obligations.79 The applicable rules are those in force at the time of the interpretation of the treaty.80 Furthermore, the rules will have to be relevant, i.e., concern the subject-matter of the treaty term at issue.81 In the case of customary rules, these may even be identical with, and run parallel to, the treaty rule. Non-identical customary rules on the same subject-matter may lead to a modification of the treaty term as a result of subsequent practice running counter to the treaty provision (N. 23).82

74ICJ Reports 1971 31; see also Thirlway, BYBIL 62 (1991) 60 ; the case-law cited in McLachlan, ICLQ 54 (2005) 293 .

75McLachlan, ibid. 290.

76Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 97, para. 10; Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 310, para. 10; and 316, paras. 13 and 17; Verdross, YBILC 1966 I/2 91 f, para. 74 (i.e., that the provision only envisaged customary law); Amado, ibid. 191, para. 80; Bartos, ibid. 192, para. 92 (apparently only jus cogens); Yasseen, ibid. 197, para. 52.

77See the position of the delegation of the Federal Republic of Germany in Vienna, OR 1969 CoW 172, para. 395. In the Interpretation of the Agreement of 25 March 1951 between the WHO and Egypt Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1980 126, Judge Mosler considered in his sep. op. other agreements which shared with the WHO/Egypt Agreement of 1951 the same, or a similar, object and purpose.

78ILC Report 1964, YBILC 1964 II 202 f, para. 11 (“general rule”); statement by Castren in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 188, para. 49; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 62 , 66 .

79McLachlan, ICLQ 54 (2005) 290; Jennings/Watts N. 632.

80T he ILC deleted in 1966 the words “in force at the time of its conclusion” previously included in its 1964 Draft (N. 4) YBILC 1966 II 222, para. 167; see the Declaration by Judge Robinson in the 2000 Prosecutor v. Furundzija Case of the International Criminal Court for Former Yugoslavia, ILR 121 (2001) 360 f.

81See the Mutual Assistance in Criminal Matters (Djibouti/France) Care, ICJ Reports 2008 para. 112. See also the statements in the ILC by Tunkin, YBILC 1964 I 310; Waldock, ibid. para. 10; versus Reuter, YBILC 1966 I/2 195, para. 22; by the German delegation in Vienna, OR 1969 CoW 172, para. 10. In 1977, the German Federal Constitutional Court stated that, in doubt, a treaty text had to be interpreted in the light of the relevant rules and principles of international law, BVerfGE 46, 342 .

82See Villiger, Manual N. 302 .

ZACHARIAS

434

article

In the Oil Platforms (Iran/US) Case, the Court was confronted with Article XX, subpara. 1(d) of the US/Iran Treaty of amity, economic relations and consular rights of 1955 which “[did] not preclude the application of measures . . . necessary to fulfill the obligations of a High Contracting Party for the maintenance or restoration of international peace and security”. The US had maintained that in view of this provision it was unnecessary to examine issues of self-defence under general international law. The Court, on the other hand, considered with reference to subpara. 3(c) that it “[could not] accept that [Article XX] was intended to operate wholly independently of the relevant rules of international law on the use of force, so as to be capable of being successfully invoked, even in the limited context of a claim for a breach of the Treaty, in relation to an unlawful use of force”.83

In the 2004 Mamatkulov and Askarov v. Turkey Case, the European Human Rights Court was confronted with the question whether interim measures issued under Rule 39 of its Rules of Procedure were endowed with binding force. For its a rmative reply it had recourse, inter alia, to subpara. 3(c) and, in this context, to such measures of other human rights instruments. The Court concluded: “the International Court of Justice, the Inter-American Court of Human Rights, the Human Rights Committee and the Committee against Torture of the United Nations, although operating under di erent treaty provisions to those of the Court, have confirmed in their reasoning in recent decisions that the preservation of the asserted rights of the parties in the face of the risk of irreparable damage represents an essential objective of interim measures in international law”.84 In fact, the European Court regarded these means of interpretation as subsidiary (“confirmed”, as in Article 32, N. 8), rather than primary and mandatory as in Article 31 (N. 29).

6. Special Meanings (Para. 4)

26Para. 4 provides that a special meaning shall be given to a term if it is established that the parties so intended. The special meaning goes beyond, and no longer corresponds with, the apparent ordinary meanings of the term (N. 9). Special meanings are often found in technical or historical contexts

83ICJ Reports 2003 182, para. 41. See the sep. op. of Judge Higgins, ibid. 237, para. 46, namely, that the context of the treaty at issue was “clearly that of an economic and commercial treaty” rather than one of self-defence under general international law; critically, Berman, Yale JIL 29 (2004) 320, and passim.

84ECHR—2004. On the European Court’s case-law on subpara. 3(c) generally, see Villiger, Festschrift Ress 326 f. See also the 1983 Esphahanian Claimant v. Bank Tejarat Case, in which the Iran-US Claims Tribunal stated with reference to subpara. 3(c): “[t]here is a considerable body of law, precedents and legal literature, anlysed herein, which leads to the conclusion that the applicable rule of international law is that of dominant and e ective nationality”; ILR 72 (1987) 483 f; in the 1986 La Bretagne (Canada/France) Arbtiration, the parties to the dispute invoked within the context of subpara. 3(c) the provisions of the UN Law of the Sea Convention of 1982, ibid. 82 (1990) 627, para. 429.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

435

 

or in specialised treaties.85 The catalogue of definitions in Article 2 (q.v., N.

 

1) provides an example of such special meanings.86

 

 

This provision does not per se provide for a burden of proof.87 It merely recalls

27

the autonomy of the parties according to which the parties may have intended

 

a special meaning. The latter will be established in the same manner as the

 

ordinary meaning.88 (For these reasons, some ILC members even regarded

 

para. 4 as redundant.)89 It is likely that the required intention of the parties

 

to employ a special term will transpire in good faith from one of the authentic

 

means of interpretation in para. 2 or subparas. 3(a) and (b) (N. 15–23).

 

7. Manner of Employing Means of Interpretation

 

 

a) “General Rule of Interpretation”

 

 

Having examined the various means of interpretation in Article 31 (N. 6–27),

28

their general position in the process of interpretation must now be considered.

 

The text gives the following indications as to the manner in which they shall

 

be employed. Its title speaks of the general rule of interpretation. Para. 1

 

states that “a treaty shall be interpreted . . . in accordance with . . . and in

 

the light of . . .”. According to para. 2, “the context shall comprise . . .”.

 

According to para. 3, “there shall be taken into account together with the

 

context . . .”.

 

 

It transpires from these formulations that the various means mentioned in

29

Article 31 are all of equal value; none are of an inferior character.90 As the

 

singular in the heading “General Rule” indicates, all means will be considered

 

in one and the same, single process of application. No one particular means mentioned in Article 31 dominates the others.91 There is no hierarchy of

85Possibly in human rights treaties. But see the criticism of Golsong, in Macdonald/ Matscher/Petzold, 147 , 151, and passim, as regards the “exorbitant interpretation” given to the ordinary meaning of certain terms of the European Human Rights Convention; Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 500 f, who finds para. 4 “particularly disturbing”.

86Delbrück/Wolfrum III 635.

87See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 222, para. 17; the Western Sahara Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1975 44 f, para. 116.

88See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 184, paras. 70 f; Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 493; contra the Austrian delegation, ibid. 178, para. 14; see also the joint diss. op. in the Young Loan Arbitration, ILR 59 (1980) 552, para. 2.

89Waldock in Vienna, ibid. para. 70.

90Jennings/Watts N. 632.

91ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 219 f, para. 8; 220, para. 9; Delbrück/Wolfrum III 640 (“unter sich nicht in einer festen Rangordnung”).

ZACHARIAS

436

article

rules in Article 31.92 In particular, it does not entrench the “in claris non fit interpretatio” or textual method of interpretation.93

This interpretation of Article 31 is confirmed by the ILC Report 1966 which stated: “[t]he application of the means of interpretation in the article would be a single combined operation. All the elements, as they were present in any given case, would be thrown into the crucible, and their interaction would give the legally relevant interpretation . . . [T]he article, when read as a whole, cannot properly be regarded as laying down a legal hierarchy of norms for the interpretation of treaties”.94

30In what order should the various means be considered for the process of interpretation? The ordinary meaning of a term serves as a natural starting point, since interpretation turns on the meaning and scope of written words (N. 9).95 There follow on an equal level consideration of the context; the object and purpose; any authentic means of interpretation; and any relevant rules of international law. All means in Article 31 should be considered (N. 9–27). However, not every means will necessarily yield a result as to the interpretation of the treaty term.

States parties to a treaty are free to agree in the treaty or subsequently to select only some of the means of interpretation mentioned in Articles 31 and 32 and/or to employ di erent means of interpretation (N. 35).

31The order chosen in Article 31 among the various means appears to be that of logic, proceeding from the intrinsic to the extrinsic, from the immediate to the remote.96 A majority of means in Article 31 are in fact extrinsic to the treaty text.

b)Practice

32Practice of States and courts disclose di erent approaches as to the means of interpretation in Article 31.97 As the list below indicates, only some instances of practice confirm the single process of application of all the means of the General Rule (N. 9–27). Other instances of State practice, and even the practice of the ICJ, are ambivalent. At times, the General Rule in Article 31 is reduced to its para. 1, or even to the ordinary meaning of a term, the other means being regarded as discretionary or supplementary.

International Court of Justice. In the Territorial Dispute (Libya/Chad) Case, it held that “[according to Article 31] a treaty must be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to its terms in their context and in the light of its

92Jennings/Watts N. 632 and ibid. at n. 6.

93Torres Bernárdez, Liber Amicorum Seidl-Hohenveldern 733.

94ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II. 219, para, 8; and 220, para. 9, respectively.

95Ibid. 220, para. 9.

96Ibid; see Aust, Modern Treaty Law 234 (“logical progression”).

97Similarly. Torres Bernárdez, Liber Amicorum Seidl-Hohenveldern 721 .

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

437

object and purpose. Interpretation must be based above all upon the text of the treaty”.98

A similar statement can be found in the Maritime Delimitation and Territorial Questions (Qatar v. Bahrain) (Jurisdiction and Admissibility) Case.99 In the Nuclear Weapons Advisory Opinion, the Court examined subsequent practice as in subpara. 3(b).100 In the

Oil Platforms (Iran/US) (Preliminary Objections) Case, the Court resorted again to para. 1: “a treaty must be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to its terms in their context and in the light of its object and purpose”.101 In the Kasikili/Sedudu Island (Botswana/Namibia) Case, the Court invoked paras. 1 and 2 and then examined subparas. 3(a) and (b).102 But in the Legality of Use of Force (Serbia and Montenegro/Belgium) (Preliminary Objections) Case, the Court again considered that “interpretation must be based above all upon the text of the treaty”.103

Other international courts.104 The European Human Rights Court has consistently employed all means of interpretation in Articles 31 and 32.105 Conversely, the InterAmerican Human Rights Court has traditionally referred solely to the means of Article 31, para. 1.106 Similarly, the Court of Arbitration in the 1977 Beagle Channel Arbitration (Argentina v. Chile) resorted “in the first place [to] an analysis of the text”,107 and the Arbitral Tribunal in the 1986 La Bretagne (Canada/France) Arbitration referred to the means in Article 31, para. 1.108 In the 1985 Maritime Delimitation (Guinea/GuineaBissau) Arbitral Award, the Court of Arbitration found that “[the text] must be interpreted in good faith, with each word being given its ordinary meaning within the context and in the light of the object and purpose of the Convention”.109

98ICJ Reports 1994 21, para. 41. On the development of the Court’s case-law on Article 31, see generally Torres Bernárdez, ibid. passim, for whom the Court’s judgments indicate a development from a textually oriented interpretation to one of “unreserved recognition” of Articles 31 and 32.

99Ibid. 1995 18, para. 33.

100Ibid. 1996 75, para. 19.

101Ibid. 1996 812, para. 23.

102Ibid. 1999 1059 .

103Ibid. 2004 318, para. 100.

104See also the instances of judicial practice mentioned in Villiger, Customary International Law N. 501–505.

105Villiger, Festschrift Ress passim. See, e.g., the 1975 Golder v. UK judgment, Series A, no. 18, para. 30, in which the European Court referred to the means of interpretation in Article 31 as constituting a “unity”.

106See, e.g., the 1984 Costa Rica Naturalization Provisions Advisory Opinion, ILR 79 (1989) 292, para. 22; the 1986 Right to Reply Advisory Opinion, ibid. 79 (1989) 342; the 1985

Meaning of “Laws” Advisory Opinion, ibid. 79 (1989) 329, para. 13; the 1987 Velasquez Rodriguez (Preliminary Objections) Case, ibid. 95 (1994) 243 f, para. 30; and the 1987 Habeas Corpus in Emergency Situations Advisory Opinion, ibid. 96 (1994) 396 f, para. 14.

107Ibid. 52 (1977) 127; see also Villiger, Customary International Law N. 503.

108ILR 82 (1990) 620, para. 37.

109ILR 77 (1988) 658, para. 46; see ibid. para. 57, the reference to paras. 2 and 3.

ZACHARIAS

438

article

State practice is inconsistent.110 Some examples—e.g., courts of Canada111—seem to confirm a broad use of all means of interpretation in Article 31. Other examples—e.g., practice from Israel,112 Italy,113 Switzerland,114 the UK 115 and apparently also the US116—appear to indicate that courts rely mainly on para. 1 of Article 31.

33The predominance of the treaty text is confirmed by the comparatively small number of cases on interpretation reported in the compilations of domestic practice.

Since every treaty application presupposes treaty interpretation, reported cases should actually be abundant. The fact that they are not suggests that, in most cases, courts view the treaty terms as “clear” and, in the light of the clear (i.e., ordinary) meaning-rule, do not consider that the case in question calls for interpretation.

34Three reasons appear to account for these developments:

(i)various approaches can be read into Articles 31 and 32 precisely because the ILC intended them to serve as a compromise to satisfy textualists, subjectivists and teleologists; (ii) the original Waldock Report III did indeed have a certain textual predisposition (N. 4); (iii) somewhat unfortunately, the forceful US campaign in Vienna led to this conclusion (N. 5): Because the US delegation criticised the alleged textuality of Articles 31 and 32, a rejection of the US amendment implied that the articles were textual (N. 5).

110See Villiger, Customary International Law N. 484–498.

111See, e.g., the 1990 Hagermann v. US and Others Case, Canadian Court of Appeal, ILR 92 (1993) 725; Emmanuelli/Slosar RJT 13 (1978) 69 (“le juge canadien . . . tient compte de la pratique des Etats qui a trait au texte interprété, conformément aux dispositions de l’art. 31 al. 2 et 3”).

112See, e.g., the 1988 judgment of the Israel Supreme Court, ILR 83 (1990) 131 f.

113See, e.g., the 1987 judgment of the Italian Court of Cassation, ibid. 101 (1995) 377, 379.

114See, e.g., the 1986 and 1997 judgments of the Swiss Federal Court, BGE 112 V 341, and 123 I 121, respectively. While the latter judgment refers to the means in subparas. 3(b) and (c), it qualifies them (only) as “d’importants moyens auxiliaries d’interprétation”.

115See, e.g., the statement of the Minister of State, Foreign and Commonwealth O ce in Parliament, BYBIL 57 (1986) 559 f; the UK Government’s Memorandum of 31 May 1990 in the US/UK Arbitration Concerning Heathrow Airport User Charges, BYBIL 63 (1992) 709, referred to the “object and purpose of a treaty [as] a secondary or ancillary process in the application of the general rule”.

116See Bedermann, UCLALR 41 (1994) 972, for whom “[t]here is greater conflict today than ever before between U.S. practice and more international approaches to treaty interpretation”; see also ibid. 973: “resort to extrinsic evidence of the parties’ intent . . . is meant to be only an exceptional occurrence”.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

439

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

All other Convention provisions must be interpreted according to Article 31,

35

including this provision itself (Issues of Customary International Law N. 26).117

 

Article 32 (q.v.) is part of the General Rule in that it provides for supplemen-

 

tary means of interpretation. Article 33 concerns the interpretation of treaties

 

authenticated in two or more languages. According to its para. 4 (q.v., N.

 

11), resort may be had, inter alia, to Articles 31 and 32 when attempting to

 

remove a di erence of meanings of the di erent languages.

 

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

 

Article 31 does not list all possible means of interpretation. In particular, the

36

rational techniques of logical interpretation (N. 1) have not been included.118

 

Furthermore, agreements and practice among a subgroup of parties fall outside

 

para. 2 and subparas. 3(a) and (b) (N. 17–23). These means may nevertheless

 

play a part under Article 32 (q.v., N. 6). Finally, subpara. 3(b) (N. 23) must

 

be distinguished from the modification of a treaty by subsequent practice, as

 

originally envisaged by the ILC in Article 38 of its ILC Report 1966 (Article

 

39, N. 14).

 

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 31

 

 

In view of the unsettled pre-ILC situation, in particular the various methods

37

of interpretation, a customary rule on interpretation could not have arisen

 

before the ILC took up the matter (N. 4). The ILC, while attempting to

 

“isolate and codify the basic rules of interpretation”, reached consensus only

 

at an advanced stage on the (hence originally innovative) structure of the General Rule in Article 31.119 At the Vienna Conference, the provision was adopted unanimously (N. 5). Since 1969 there has been a growing conviction among States and courts120 that Article 31 is declaratory of customary

117T hus, Article 31 applies to all treaties within the meaning of Article 2, subpara. 1(a) (q.v., N. 4–20), but not, for instance, to declarations of acceptance of the compulsory jurisdiction of the Court (Optional Clause) or only “analogously to the extent compatible with the sui generis character of the unilateral acceptance of the Court’s jurisdiction”, Fisheries Jurisdiction (Spain/Canada) Case, ICJ Reports 1998 453, para. 46.

118See the various means listed in Verdross/Simma N. 493 . For Bernhardt, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 495, the relationship between Article 31 and these maxims is unclear.

119YBILC 1966 II 219, para. 7.

120See, in addition to the references in Villiger, Customary International Law N. 484–506, the 1987 Habeas Corpus in Emergency Situations Advisory Opinion of the Inter-American Court of Human Rights, ILR 96 (1994) 3967 f, para. 14 (“rules of interpretation set out

ZACHARIAS

440

article

law. The Court has been adamant in its view that Articles 31 and 32 reflect customary international law.121 Authors di er in their views.122

38It can be concluded that there is indeed emerging customary law on the means of interpretation in Article 31 which originated in Vienna in 1968/1969 on the basis of the 1966 ILC Draft articles. However, the picture is not su ciently unequivocal, particularly since Article 31 leaves considerable flexibility to the interpreting agency.

39A di erent conclusion may be drawn in respect of the customary nature of the structure of the General Rule. The ILC intended the General Rule as a “crucible” in which the text served as a starting point, and all means were of equal value and had to be equally employed (N. 28–31). In actual fact, States and courts have at times come to see in Article 31 a predominance of the text and a relatively subsidiary position of other means (N. 32–34). Hence, the important qualification is that the emerging customary rule does not appear to conform to the text of Article 31. If and when such a customary rule will have developed, there is even the possibility that it may actually have modified the original provision (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 26). Whatever customary rule emerges, it is doubtful that it will settle soon in view of the fact that the practice itself is, as yet, comparatively inconsistent.

in the [Convention] may be deemed to state the relevant international law principles”); the Australian High Court in the Commonwealth of Australia et al. v. Tasmania et al. Case

(Gibbs C.J.), ibid. 68 (1985) 304 (“[Articles 31 and 32] do no more than endorse or confirm the existing practice”); and the Swiss Federal Court, ATF 122 II 238, for whom Article 31 is codificatory. According to Gardiner, ICLQ 44 (1995) 620 , 622, British court practice accepts Articles 31 and 32 as customary. Contra Vandevelde, California JTL 21 (1988) 296 (“it is unclear that courts in practice really adhere to international law as codified in articles 31 and 32”):

121See, e.g., the Legality of Use of Force (Serbia and Montenegro/Belgium)(Preliminary Objections) Case, ICJ Reports 2004 318, para. 100 (“customary international law, reflected in Article 31”); the LaGrand (Germany/USA) Case, ICJ Reports 2001 501, para. 99 (“customary international law . . . reflected in Article 31”); the Kasikili/Sedudu Island (Botswana/Namibia) Case, ibid. 1999 1059, para. 18 (“neither Botswana nor Nambia are parties to the [Convention], but . . . both of them consider that Article 31 . . . is applicable inasmuch as it reflects customary international law”); the 1991 Arbitral Award of 31 July 1989 (Guinea-Bissau/Senegal) Case, ibid. 1991 69 f, para. 48 (“Articles 31 and 32 . . . may in many respects be considered a codification of existing customary international law on the point”).

122For instance, Köck, Vertragsinterpretation passim; Vitzthum, in: Vitzthum (ed.), Völkerrecht N. 123; Barile, RC 161 (1978 III) 86, and Ress, Berichte DGVR 23 (1982) 12 f, regard Article 31 as customary. Schwarzenberger, Virginia JIL 9 (1968) 8 , 19 para. 1, sees therein a departure from customary concepts; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 16, para. 24, sees progressive development in Article 31.

ZACHARIAS

general rule of interpretation

441

D. APPRECIATION

The ILC can be commended for its courage in devising norms on interpreta- 40 tion the codification of which remains unknown even to many domestic legal orders. Articles 31 and 32 lie at the center of the Convention; arguably, they

are its most important provisions. Thanks to Articles 31 and 32, “the doctrinal discussion on the utility and even the existence of rules of international law governing the interpretation of treaties is now a thing of the past”.123 Article 31 transpires as a masterpiece of precise drafting,124 combining the various important means of interpretation. States remain free to agree to employ other means of interpretation. The General Rule provides the interpreting agency with considerable flexibility, enabling it in particular to adapt the various means of interpretation to the type of treaty (biand multilateral treaties, human rights treaties, etc.).125 This flexibility would nevertheless not appear to erode the legal certainty which jus scriptum is intended to provide.

As Sinclair has aptly put it, “[Articles 31 and 32] reflect an attempt to assess the relative value and weight of the elements to describe the process of interpretation rather than to describe the process of interpretation itself ”.

Courts have only with di culty accepted the various means in Articles 31 41 and 32 as constituting the mandatory rule of interpretation.126 The interesting development, that States and courts may come to regard the General Rule as corresponding with Article 31, para. 1, or even Article 31 as embodying solely

the textual approach (N. 32–34), goes back to the US delegation’s forceful intervention in Vienna and can only be explained, as Briggs has noted, with an overly textual interpretation of Article 31 itself.127

123Torres Bernárdez, Liber Amicorum Seidl-Hohenveldern 721; contra and critical of the legal nature of such rules, Köck, ZöR 53 (1998) 217 .

124See the UK Government’s Memorandum of 31 May 1990 in the US/UK Arbitration Concerning Heathrow Airport User Charges, BYBIL 63 (1992) 707 (“lapidary formula”). For a di erent line of argument, see Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 (1970)520 (“[t]he adoption by the [Vienna] Conference of [Articles 31 and 32] which the [US] viewed as somewhat archaic and unduly rigid does not seriously weaken the value of the convention”).

125McLachlan, ICLQ 54 (2005) 291.

126On the ICJ, seeTorres Bernárdez, Liber Amicorum Seidl-Hohenveldern 722 (“initial silence”). See Johnstone who in 1991 in a learned article on the interpretation of international treaties did not appear to refer to Articles 31 and 32, Michigan JIL 12 (1991) 371 .

127AJIL 65 (1971) 709 f.

ZACHARIAS

Article 32

Supplementary means of interpretation

Recourse may be had to supplementary means of interpretation, including the preparatory work of the treaty and the circumstances of its conclusion, in order to confirm the meaning resulting from the application of Article 31, or to determine the meaning when the interpretation according to Article 31:

(a)leaves the meaning ambiguous or obscure; or

(b)leads to a result which is manifestly absurd or unreasonable.

Article 32 Moyens complémentaires d’interprétation

Il peut être fait appel à des moyens complémentaires d’interprétation, et notamment aux travaux préparatoires et aux circonstances dans lesquelles le traité a été conclu, en vue, soit de confirmer le sens résultant de l’application de l’article 31, soit de déterminer le sens lorsque l’interprétation donnée conformément à l’article 31:

a)laisse le sens ambigu ou obscur; ou

b)conduit à un résultat qui est manifestement absurde ou déraisonnable.

Artikel 32 Ergänzende Auslegungsmittel

Ergänzende Auslegungsmittel, insbesondere die vorbereitenden Arbeiten und die Umstände des Vertragsabschlusses, können herangezogen werden, um die sich unter Anwendung des Artikels 31 ergebende Bedeutung zu bestätigen oder die Bedeutung zu bestimmen, wenn die Auslegung nach Artikel 31:

a)die Bedeutung mehrdeutig oder dunkel lässt; oder

b)zu einem o ensichtlich sinnwidrigen oder unvernünftigen Ergebnis führt.

supplementary means of interpretation

443

ILC Draft 1966

Article 28—Supplementary means of interpretation

Recourse may be had to supplementary means of interpretation, including the preparatory work of the treaty and the circumstances of its conclusion, in order to confirm the meaning resulting from the application of Article 27, or to determine the meaning when the interpretation according to Article 27:

(a)Leaves the meaning ambiguous or obscure; or

(b)Leads to a result which is manifestly absurd or unreasonable.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 71 para. 2.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 33 , 275 , 308 , 340 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 70.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 70.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 183 , 267 , 328 , 346 .

ILC Draft 1966: Article 28.

Minutes: OR 1968 166 , 441 f; OR 1969 Plenary 58.

Vienna Conference Vote: 101:0:0

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 31, q.v.):

H.W. Briggs, The travaux préparatoires of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, AJIL 65 (1971) 705 ; R. Gardiner, Treaties and Treaty Materials: Role, Relevance and Accessibility, ICLQ 46 (1997) 643 ; J. Klabbers, International Legal Histories: The Declining Importance of travaux préparatoires in Treaty Interpretation, NILR 50 (2003) 267 ; Y. le Bouthillier, Article 32, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1339 ; N. Mehrish, Travaux préparatoires as an Element in the Interpretation of Treaties, IJIL 11 (1971) 30 ; M. Ris, Treaty Interpretation and ICJ Recourse to travaux préparatoires: Towards a Proposed Amendment of Articles 31 and 32 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, Boston College ICLR 14 (1991) 111 ; M. Sassòli, Bedeutung von “travaux préparatoires” zu Kodifikationsverträgen für das allgemeine Völkerrecht, ÖZöRVR 41 (1990) 109 ; St.M. Schwebel, May Preparatory Work be Used to Correct Rather than Confirm the “Clear” Meaning of a Treaty Provision? in: J. Makarczyk (ed.), Theory of International Law at the Threshold of the 21st Century. Essays in Honour of K. Skubiszewski (1996) 541 ; also in Svensk Juristtidning 82 (1997) 10, 797 .

ZACHARIAS

444

 

article

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction ....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History (see Article 31, N. 4–5)

 

B.

Interpretation of Article 32 ...........................................................

2

 

1.

Types of Supplementary Means of Interpretation .............................

2

 

2

Recourse to Supplementary Means ...................................................

7

C. Context ..............................................................................................

12

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions .....................................................

12

 

2.

Customary Basis of Article 32 ..........................................................

13

D. Proposal for Amendment ..................................................................

14

E.

Appreciation .......................................................................................

15

A. BACKGROUND

1.Introduction

1 A treaty’s preparatory work (travaux préparatoires) and the other means of interpretation mentioned in Article 32 play di erent roles according to the various methods of interpretation (Article 31, N. 1). Thus, the subjective method regularly emphasises the travaux préparatoires of a treaty in order to establish the “real” intentions of the drafters. The textual and the contextual methods, concentrating on the written text, have traditionally regarded these means as supplementary. The teleological method, on the other hand, seeks a treaty’s object and purpose in all materials available and does not, therefore, distinguish between primary and secondary means of interpretation. The New Haven Approach equally regards travaux préparatoires as a valid source of interpretation among many others.1

2.History of Article 32

(see Article 31, N. 4–5)

1 On this section, see also Ris, Boston College ICLR 14 (1991) 111 .

ZACHARIAS

supplementary means of interpretation

445

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 32

 

 

1. Types of Supplementary Means of Interpretation

 

 

Article 32 refers to supplementary means of interpretation, including the

2

preparatory work of the treaty and the circumstances of its conclusion.

 

It follows that the means mentioned therein serve as examples and do not

 

exclude other supplementary means of interpretation.2

 

 

The preparatory work of the treaty is the most important supplementary

3

means. It includes all documents relevant to a forthcoming treaty and gen-

 

erated by the parties during the treaty’s preparation up to its conclusion.3

 

(Agreements and instruments made in connection with the conclusion of the

 

treaty may fall to be examined under Article 31, para. 2, N. 15–19.) These

 

travaux préparatoires include memoranda and other statements and obser-

 

vations of governments transmitted to each other or to the drafting body;

 

diplomatic exchanges between the parties; treaty drafts; negotiation records;

 

and minutes of commission and plenary proceedings. The preparatory work

 

of the Convention is described in History of the Convention (q.v.).

 

 

Article 32 mentions, next, the circumstances of its conclusion.4 These

4

include the political, social and cultural factors—the milieu—surrounding

 

the treaty’s conclusion.

 

 

Among other supplementary means included but not listed in Article 32

5

(N. 2), the following may be mentioned:5

 

 

travaux préparatoires of an earlier version of the treaty;

interpretative declarations made by treaty parties which do not qualify as reservations (Article 2, subpara. 1(d), N. 37);

documents not strictly qualifying as travaux préparatoires (N. 4), e.g., a State’s internal documents upon preparation of a treaty unknown to other States at the time;6

the rational techniques of interpretation, such as per analogiam, e contrario, contra proferentem, eiusdem generis, expressio unius est exclusio alterius, lex posterior derogat legi priori, lex specialis derogat legi speciali, in dubio mitis, interpretatio in favorem debitoris,

2 ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 223, para. 20. On the topic generally, Jennings/Watts N. 633.

3 Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 84; Sur, L’interprétation 279; the example given by Aust, Modern Treaty Law 245 .

4Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 59, para. 22; Yasseen, RC 151 (1976 III) 92, para. 11.

5See the ILC Report 1964, YBILC 1964 II 204; the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 347, para. 173; critically J.-P. Cot, La conduite subséquente des parties

à un traité, RGDIP 70 (1966) 632 .

6 See the examples mentioned by Ris, Boston College ICLR 14 (1991) 111 .

ZACHARIAS

446

article

etc. (Article 31, N. 1). Nevertheless, to the extent that these techniques amount to rules of international law, they would have to be considered as part of the General Rule under Article 31, para. 3 (c) (q.v., N. 24–25; Article 30, N. 1);

agreements and practice among a subgroup of parties to a treaty not falling within the ambit of authentic interpretation in Article 31, para. 2 and subparas. 3(a) and

(b) (q.v., N. 15–23);7

non-authentic translations of the authenticated text (Article 33, N. 7).

6These supplementary means of interpretation are by their very nature notoriously heterogeneous, di erent documents at times even contradicting each other. (Of course, all the treaty parties concerned must have been aware of these supplementary means of interpretation—e.g., the treaty’s travaux préparatoires—if they are to be invoked in respect of a treaty’s interpretation.)8 They can only serve as means to aid the process of interpretation.9 The extent to which they are able to do so will depend on their cogency, in particular on their accessibility;10 their direct relevance for the treaty terms at issue, the consistency among the means found, the number of parties involved in the evolution of the particular means,11 and the reactions of other parties thereto.

As the ILC stated in its Report of 1966: “[w]hen a possible occasion for [the application of these means] may appear to exist, their application is not automatic but depends on the conviction of the interpreter that it is appropriate in the particular circumstances of the case. In other words, recourse to [these means] is discretionary rather than obligatory and the interpretation of documents is to some extent an art, not an exact science”.12

2. Recourse to Supplementary Means

7According to Article 32, recourse may be had to the supplementary means of interpretation after employing the means of the General Rule of Interpretation in Article 31 (q.v., N. 28). These means serve as further evidence of, or will shed further light on, the intentions of the parties, and their common understanding regarding the meaning of treaty terms.13 The term “supplementary” corresponds with the French term complémentaire, rather than implying “subsidiary” means.14 Three cases are envisaged:

7 Torres Bernárdez, Liber amicorum Seidl-Hohenfeldern 726 f. 8 Seidl-Hohenveldern/Stein, Völkerrecht N. 358.

9 See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 223, para. 19.

10Young Loan Arbitration, ILR 59 (1980) 544 f, para. 34.

11See here the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 223, para. 20.

12YBILC 1966 II 218, para. 4, mutatis mutandis, in the context of the usefulness of rational techniques of interpretation at n. 6.

13Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 58, para. 21.

14See the statements by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 206, para. 41, and at 270, para. 35.

ZACHARIAS

supplementary means of interpretation

447

(i) the supplementary means may be employed in order to confirm the

8

meaning resulting from the application of Article 31. Thus, if the means of

 

Article 31 have produced a result, its validity may be established by resorting

 

to the supplementary means in Article 32.

 

Greig has seen a logical di culty in this provision: “[o]ne can hardly decide whether

 

preparatory work, or indeed any other ‘supplementary means’, confirms [or even fails

 

to confirm] a particular interpretation unless one has recourse to it first”.15 However,

 

this apparent petitio principii is resolved if it is agreed that Article 32 envisages liberal

 

recourse to the supplementary means (N. 11). Moreover, a result arrived at by the

 

use of primary means of Article 31 will always prevail over solutions suggested by the

 

supplementary means.

 

(ii) the drafters of the Convention also envisaged the situation where the

9

various means of Article 31 do not lead to a clear result. Here, Article 32 may

 

be resorted to in order to determine the meaning when the interpretation

 

according to Article 31 leaves the meaning ambiguous or obscure (para.

 

[a]).16

 

(iii) recourse may be had to Article 32 in the unlikely event that the “General

10

Rule” in Article 31 leads to a result which is manifestly absurd or unrea-

 

sonable (para. [b]).

 

In the light of these conditions, it is di cult to imagine situations where the

11

means of Article 32 may not be employed.17 In particular, “unclear” mean-

 

ings are covered by para. (a). In other words, Article 32 permits use of these

 

means in most situations and does not restrict the manner in which they may be employed. The only restriction in Article 32 is that its means may not be invoked first, at the outset of interpretation18—a not unreasonable proposition if one remembers the pitfalls inherent in the use of these materials (N. 6) which lack the authentic element present in the means of Article 31. Throughout, recourse to the supplementary means in Article 32 is governed by good faith (Article 31, N. 8).

15Greig, International Law 481.

16See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 222 f, in particular 223, para. 19; the Commonwealth of Australia et al. v. Tasmania et al. Case of the Australia High Court (Gibbs C.J.), ILR 68 (1985) 304 (“[i]f there is an ambiguity, the travaux préparatoires may help to resolve it”); also in Australian LJ 57 (1983) 592 f.

17Torres Bernárdez, Liber amicorum Seidl-Hohenfeldern 739; di erently Sinclair, Vienna Convention 142 (“recourse is permissible in carefully controlled circumstances”).

18See the avis de droit of the Swiss Federal Department for Foreign A airs, SJIR 35 (1979) 137 (“opérations . . . distinctes dans le temps”).

ZACHARIAS

448

article

The ILC materials confirm this interpretation of Article 32. As Sir Humphrey Waldock pointed out in Vienna, “[t]here had certainly been no intention of discouraging automatic recourse to preparatory work for the general understanding of the treaty”.19

The Court has routinely referred to the possibility of resorting “[a]s a supplementary measure . . . to means of interpretation such as the preparatory work of the treaty and the circumstances of its conclusion”.20

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

12The relationship to Article 31 has been discussed above (N. 7). According to Article 33, para. 4, regard may be had, inter alia, to Article 32 when attempting to remove a di erence of meanings of the di erent languages. If the di erence is then not removed, the object and purpose of the treaty may be resorted to (q.v., N. 10–13).

2.Customary Basis of Article 32

13The conclusions as to the customary nature of Article 31 (Article 31, N. 37–39) can be extended to Article 32, namely that a customary rule is equally emerging in respect of the latter provision, not least in view of the unanimous adoption of the provision in Vienna in 1969. A di erent conclusion may again be drawn in respect of the customary nature of the particular relationship between Articles 32 and 31. The ILC envisaged automatic resort to the supplementary means. In actual fact, States and courts have come to see Article

32as providing a limited recourse to its means (Article 31, N. 30–34).

19OR 1968 CoW 184, para. 69; see also his statement in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 201; Waldock Report VI, 1966 II 99 f, para. 20 (“frequent and quite normal recourse to travaux prépatatoires”); the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 223 para. 18 (“[i]n practice, international tribunals, as well as States and international organizations, have recourse to subsidiary means of interpretation . . . for the purpose of confirming the meaning that appears to result from an interpretation of the treaty”).

20Legality of Use of Force (Serbia and Montenegro v. Belgium) (Preliminary Objections) Case, ICJ Reports 2004 318, para. 100; Kasikili/Sedudu Island (Botswana/Namibia) Case, ibid. 1059, para. 60, with reference to the Territorial Dispute (Libya/Chad) Case, ibid. 21 f, para. 41. In the Arbitral Award of 31 July 1989 (Guinea-Bissau v. Senegal) Case, ibid. 71, para. 53, the Court had recourse to the “circumstances in which the Arbitration Agreement was drawn up”. In the 1985 Maritime Delimitation (Guinea/Guinea-Bissau) Arbitral Award, the Court of Arbitration considered that “Article 32 . . . defines, and generally circumscribes, by setting forth conditions, the legal value to be attributed to the preparatory work of a Convention as ‘supplementary means of interpretation’”, ILR 77 (1988) 658, para. 41.

ZACHARIAS

supplementary means of interpretation

449

D. PROPOSAL FOR AMENDMENT

Ris has identified various inadequacies in Article 32 and proposes three main 14 amendments:21

(i) use of the travaux préparatoires should be made dependent on the request of a party. In fact, this would considerably limit the freedom and scope of the interpreting agency, which today may itself decide if and when recourse to the supplementary means is called for. Parties to proceedings remain free to express their views on the quality of certain supplementary means of interpretation;

(ii) the Court determines which travaux préparatoires may be employed. However, a contradiction transpires here, since no such limitations are suggested in respect of the other supplementary means. In any event, it is di cult to decide in advance and in abstracto on the relevance of particular preparatory materials;

(iii) the travaux préparatoires should reasonably be regarded as part of the “context” of the treaty as in Article 31, para. 2 (q.v., N. 15–19). This overlooks the di culties of primary recourse to such materials (N. 6).

E. APPRECIATION

Schwebel, for whom Article 31 reflects the textual method of interpretation 15 (q.v., N. 28–34), has criticised Article 32 as “essentially without purpose”:

“the reference to preparatory work is unnecessary; the ordinary meaning stands without it. Why have recourse to that which is merely confirmatory of what is already so plain”.22

By contrast, this study has argued that the General Rule in Article 31 embod- 16 ies various means of interpretation all of which play a (primary) part in the process of interpretation (Article 31, N. 28–31); and that Article 32 permits recourse to the supplementary means in a wide variety of situations (N.

11). As such, Article 32 provides for a valuable complement to the means in Article 31. Article 32 further o ers welcome clarification as to the conditions and circumstances of resorting to the travaux préparatoires and other supplementary means of interpretation. On the whole, the strength of both provisions is their flexibility.

21Ris, Boston College ICLR 14 (1991) 135.

22Essays Skubiszewski 545.

ZACHARIAS

Article 33

Interpretation of treaties authenticated in two or more languages

1.When a treaty has been authenticated in two or more languages, the text is equally authoritative in each language, unless the treaty provides or the parties agree that, in case of divergence, a particular text shall prevail.

2.A version of the treaty in a language other than one of those in which the text was authenticated shall be considered an authentic text only if the treaty so provides or the parties so agree.

3.The terms of the treaty are presumed to have the same meaning in each authentic text.

4.Except where a particular text prevails in accordance with paragraph 1, when a comparison of the authentic texts discloses a di erence of meaning which the application of Articles 31 and 32 does not remove, the meaning which best reconciles the texts, having regard to the object and purpose of the treaty, shall be adopted.

Article 33 Interprétation de traités authentifiés en deux ou plusieurs langues

1.Lorsqu’un traité a été authentifié en deux ou plusieurs langues, son texte fait foi dans chacune de ces langues, à moins que le traité ne dispose ou que les parties ne conviennent qu’en cas de divergence un texte déterminé l’emportera.

2.Une version du traité dans une langue autre que l’une de celles dans lesquelles le texte a été authentifié ne sera considérée comme texte authentique que si le traité le prévoit ou si les parties en sont convenues.

3.Les termes d’un traité sont présumés avoir le même sens dans les divers textes authentiques.

4.Sauf le cas où un texte déterminé l’emporte conformément au paragraphe 1, lorsque la comparaison des textes authentiques fait apparaître une di érence de sens que l’application des articles 31 et 32 ne permet pas d’éliminer, on adop-

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

451

tera le sens qui, compte tenu de l’objet et du but du traité, concilie le mieux ces textes.

Artikel 33 Auslegung von Verträgen mit zwei oder mehr authentischen Sprachen

1.Ist ein Vertrag in zwei oder mehr Sprachen als authentisch festgelegt worden, so ist der Text in jeder Sprache in gleicher Weise massgebend, sofern nicht der Vertrag vorsieht oder die Vertragsparteien vereinbaren, dass bei Abweichungen ein bestimmter Text vorgehen soll.

2.Eine Vertragsfassung in einer anderen Sprache als einer der Sprachen, deren Text als authentisch festgelegt wurde, gilt nur dann als authentischer Wortlaut, wenn der Vertrag dies vorsieht oder die Vertragsparteien dies vereinbaren.

3.Es wird vermutet, dass die Ausdrücke des Vertrags in jedem authentischen Text dieselbe Bedeutung haben.

4.Ausser in Fällen, in denen ein bestimmter Text nach Absatz 1 vorgeht, wird, wenn ein Vergleich der authentischen Texte einen Bedeutungsunterschied aufdeckt, der durch die Anwendung der Artikel 31 und 32 nicht ausgeräumt werden kann, diejenige Bedeutung zugrunde gelegt, die unter Berücksichtigung von Ziel und Zweck des Vertrags die Wortlaute am besten miteinander in Einklang bringt.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 29—Interpretation of treaties in two or more languages

1.When a treaty has been authenticated in two or more languages, the text is equally authoritative in each language, unless the treaty provides or the parties agree that, in case of divergence, a particular text shall prevail.

2.A version of the treaty in the language other than one of those in which the text was authenticated shall be considered an authentic text only if the treaty so provides or the parties so agree.

3.The terms of the treaty are presumed to have the same meaning in each authentic text. Except in the case mentioned in paragraph 1, when a comparison of the texts discloses a di erence of meaning which the application of Articles 27 and 28 does not remove, a meaning which as far as possible reconciles the texts shall be adopted.

ZACHARIAS

452

article

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Articles 74 and 75.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 298 f, 318, 341.

ILC Draft 1964: Articles 72 and 73.

WALDOCK Report V: Articles 72 and 73.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 208 , 270 f, 329, 341 f.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 29.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 188 . 442 f; OR 1969 Plenary 57 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 101:0:0

Selected Literature:

G-M

P. Germer, Interpretation of Plurilingual Treaties: A Study of Article 33 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, HILJ 11 (1970) 400 ; M. Hilf, Die Auslegung mehrsprachiger Verträge (1973); C. Kuner, The Interpretation of Multilateral Treaties: Comparison of Texts versus the Presumption of Similar Meaning, ILCQ 40 (1991) 953 ; J.M.T. Labuschagne, Interpretation of Multilateral Treaties, South African YBIL 24 (1999) 323 ; M. Marletta, L’interpretazione dei trattati plurilingue nella prassi delle comunità Europee, RDE 25 (1985) 224 ; J. McHugo, The Judgments of the International Court of Justice in the Jurisdiction and Admissibility Phase of Qatar v. Bahrain: An Example of the Continuing Need for “Fact-Scepticism”, NYBIL 38 (1997) 171 ; J.M. Mössner, Die Auslegung mehrsprachiger Staatsverträge. Bemerkungen zu Artikel 33 der Wiener Konvention über das Recht der Verträge vom 23. Mai 1969, AVR 15 (1972) 273 .

N-R

L.D.M. Nelson, The Drafting Committee of the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea: The Implications of Multilingual Texts, BYBIL 57 (1986) 169 ; R. Nieto Navia, Aplicación por la Corte Interamericana de Derechos Humanos de las Normas de la Convención de Viena sobre el Derecho de los Tratados sobre Interpretación en Diversos Idiomas, in: The Modern World of Human Rights. Essays in Honour of Th. Buergenthal (1996) 397 ; A. Papaux, Article 33, in: Corten/Klein (eds.), 1373 ; Sh. Rosenne, Conceptualism as a Guide to Treaty-Interpretation, in: International Law at the Time of Its Codification. Essays in Honour of R. Ago (1987) 417 ; Id., The Meaning of “Authentic Text” in Modern Treaty Law, in: R. Bernhardt et al. (eds.), Völkerrecht als Rechtsordnung. Internationale Gerichtsbarkeit. Menschenrechte, Festschrift für H. Mosler (1983), 759; W. Rudolf, Die Sprache in der Diplomatie und internationalen Verträgen (1972); Id., Posibilidades de la redacción del texto de los tratados internacionales en disintas lenguas, Revista 30 (1977) 257 .

S-Y

D. Shelton, Reconcilable Di erences? The Interpretation of Multilingual Treaties, Hastings ICLR 20 (1997) 611 ; M. Tabory, Multilingualism in International law and Institutions (1980); B. Tuzmukhamedov, Interpretation of Discrepancies in Russian and English Tests of International Treaties and Possible Impact on Implementation (A Case Study of the ABM Treaty), Polish YBIL 21 (1994) 213 ; R. Urue a. El problema de la interpretación de tratados redactados en diversos idiomas, según el derecho internacional, Language Problems and Language Planning 14 (1990) 209 ; E. Verougstraete, De l’inteprétation terminologique des conventions internationales multilingues, JT 90 (1975) 421 ; R.D. Vock, Bilateral Agreements in the Petroleum Industry, Journal of Energy and Natural Resources

ZACHARIAS

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

453

Law 4 (1986) 188 ; D.A. Wirth, Multilingal Treaty Interpretation and the Case of Salt II, Yale StWPO 6 (1980) 429 ; A. Yokaris, L’utilisation des standards dans les traités et les textes plurilingues/The Standards in Treaties and Multilingal Texts, Revue de la recherche juridique 13 (1988) 929 .

ZACHARIAS

454

article

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction ....................................................................................

1

2.

History ............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 33 ............................................................

4

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

4

2.

Equal Authority of Di erent Languages (Para. 1) .............................

5

3.

Other Language Versions (Para. 2) ...................................................

7

4.

Presumption of Same Meaning (Para. 3) ..........................................

8

5.

Di ering Meanings (Para. 4) ............................................................

10

C. Context ...............................................................................................

14

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions .....................................................

14

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ..................................................................

15

3.

Customary Basis of Article 33 ..........................................................

16

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

17

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

1 With the conclusion of the 1919 Peace Treaties, international law was for the first time confronted with the manner and means of interpreting plurilingual treaties—international instruments until then having mainly been drafted in French and, earlier still, in Latin.1 In the 1924 Mavrommatis Concessions Cases the Permanent Court seemingly sought the lowest common denominator when stating:

“when two versions possessing equal authority exist one of which appears to have a wider bearing than the other, [the Court] is bound to adopt the more limited interpretation which can be made to harmonise with both versions and which, as far as it goes, is doubtless in accordance with the common intention of the parties”.2

The relevant provision of the 1935 Harvard Draft on the Law of Treaties, once again the nucleus of the future ILC Draft, considered that a treaty with di erent language versions (or texts) was “to be interpreted with a view

1 Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 279. See also the examples in Blix/Emerson 254 . 2 PCIJ, Series A, no. 2, 19.

ZACHARIAS

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

455

to giving to corresponding provisions in the di erent versions a common meaning which will e ect the general purpose which the treaty is intended to serve”.3 Problems were compounded with the advent of the UN Charter and subsequent multilateral conventions drafted within the UN framework in five (as in Article 85, N. 2) and later in six language versions. By the time the ILC took up the matter (N. 2), various rules had evolved, for instance, that all texts were of equal value while assuming that they had only one common meaning; or that the interpreting agency had to determine a (clear) common denominator providing an equilibrium of rights and duties of the parties to the treaty.4 A further rule, expounded by McNair, considered that the “two or more texts should help one another, so that it is permissible to interpret one text by reference to another”.5

2. History

In 1964 Waldock Report III introduced two provisions on the subject 2 which as yet made no separate mention of the treaty’s object and purpose.6 They were largely taken over into the ILC Draft of 1964, the ILC having devoted comparatively little time on the matter.7 (While the ILC did request

its Secretariat to compile the UN practice on the matter, the results were to present few new elements.)8 Waldock Report VI proposed to combine the two previous provisions to one single article which the ILC now amply discussed and eventually accepted in 1966.9 The resulting Article 29 of the ILC Draft 1966 contained three paragraphs,10 its title being “Interpretation of Treaties in Two or More Languages”.

3AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 971 . See also the European Court of Human Rights in the 1968 Wemho Case, Series A no. 18, p. 23, para. 8 (“given that it is a law-making treaty, it is also necessary to seek the interpretation that is most appropriate in order to realise the aim and achieve the object of the treaty”); on this case Germer, HILJ 11 (1970) 416

f; further references to the Strasbourg case-law in Rosenne, Essays R. Ago 426 .

4 Extensively Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 281 ; J. Hardy, The Interpretation of Plurilingual Treaties by International Courts and Tribunals, BYBIL 37 (1961) 71 .

5 Law of Treaties 433.

6Article 74 on Treaties Drawn Up in Two or More Languages (leading to paras. 1 and 2 of the present Article 33); and Article 75 on the Interpretation of Treaties Having Two

7

8

9

10

or More Texts or Versions (subsequently paras. 3 and 4), YBILC 1964 II 62 .

YBILC 1964 II 206 ; see the debate at YBILC 1964 I 298 . For a summary of the ILC history, see Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 291 ; Germer, HILJ 11 (1970) 403 . Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 101 f, para. 1; di erently Rosenne, Festschrift Mosler 761.

YBILC 1966 II 103.

YBILC 1966 II 224 ; for the debate, see YBILC 1966 I/2 208 ; 270 f; 329; and 341 f.

ZACHARIAS

456

article

3This title was considered ambiguous11 and therefore changed to the present one at the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference which also divided para. 3 of the ILC Draft 1966 into the present paras. 3 and 4 of Article 33.12 By way of compromise, an amendment proposed by the Vietnamese Government was adopted which introduced the “object and purpose”-test in para. 4 (N. 11).13 Altogether, the provision attracted little discussion at the Conference; it was adopted by 101 votes to none.14

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 33

1. Scope

4It cannot be excluded that a plurilingual treaty contains some discrepancies among the authentic language texts (or language versions).15 Di culties are compounded if two or more systems of law are involved with the same terms implying di erent legal concepts.16 In addition, political sensitivities may lead States to wish to rely on one, in particular their own, treaty language and disregard others.17 In this context, two questions arise. The first is which language texts fall to be considered when interpreting the treaty. The answer hereto can be found in paras. 1 and 2 of Article 33 which circumscribe what is to be interpreted (N. 5–7). The second question is how to proceed if the various pertinent language texts do not coincide. Here, paras. 3 and 4 provide rules of interpretation which aim at resolving these discrepancies (N. 8–13).

2. Equal Authority of Di erent Languages (Para. 1)

5Para. 1 concerns treaties which have been authenticated in two or more languages. The term “authenticated” stems from Article 10 (q.v.) which views the authentication of the text as a distinct procedural step in the conclusion of a treaty.18 In the case of the Convention, Article 85 (q.v., N. 2) expressly

11In the words of Yasseen, Chairman of the Drafting Committee, it was not clear whether the words “in two or more languages” applied to the treaties or to their interpretation, OR 1969 Plenary 57, para. 61.

12See the US amendment, OR Documents 151, para. 277.

13See the statement by the Vietnamese delegation, OR 1968 CoW 189, para. 45.

14OR 1969 Plenary 59, para. 76.

15ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 225, para. 6. There was some discussion in the ILC as to the correct term to be used. In Vienna the US Government, preferred the term “version” (OR Documents 151, para. 277); see, e.g., Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 102 f, paras. 3 .

16Statement by Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 189, para. 41.

17See the statement by the Australian delegation, ibid. paras. 49 f.

18See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 224, para. 2.

ZACHARIAS

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

457

 

lists the five language texts which are authentic. Nevertheless, in respect of

 

the various authenticated languages, the text is equally authoritative in each

 

language. The authoritative texts are those which will primarily be taken into

 

consideration when interpreting a plurilingual treaty. Para. 1 thus states as the

 

general rule the presumption of the equality of all authenticated languages,

 

and of the equal authenticity of the texts.19

 

 

Para. 1 appears to state what is now the established rule. As the Arbitral Tribunal held in

 

the Young Loan Arbitration: “the habit occasionally found in earlier international practice

 

of referring to the basic or original text as an aid to interpretation is now, as a general

 

rule, incompatible with the principle, incorporated in Article 33 [of the Convention],

 

of the equal status of all authentic texts in plurilingual treaties. The interpretational

 

maxim of the special importance or precedence . . . of the original text would relegate

 

the other authentic texts again to the status of subordinated translations”.20

 

 

Only exceptionally are the authenticated texts not equally authoritative for

6

the interpretation of the treaty, namely if (and to the extent that) the treaty

 

provides or the parties agree that, in case of divergence, a particular text

 

shall prevail, in which case other authenticated texts shall not be taken into

 

consideration. Parties may even agree that some language texts are authori-

 

tative between some parties, and other texts between others.21 The parties’

 

agreement is a wider notion and covers any contractual instrument, in

 

particular also agreements not in written form.22

 

 

Mössner has criticised the “failed drafting” (missglückte Fassung) of para. 1 inasmuch

 

it rules out the possibility of States agreeing to provide for a particular text to prevail

 

without there being a divergence of meanings.23 However, Article 33 is like most Con-

 

vention provisions residuary, and States remain free to choose whatever language texts

 

they wish to prevail. The second part of para. 1 (discussed in N. 6) concerns solely those

 

specific cases where States expressly anticipate discrepancies between the meanings of

 

the various texts.

 

 

3. Other Language Versions (Para. 2)

 

 

Para. 2 complements para. 1 (N. 5–6).24 Whereas the latter provision

7

declares authenticated texts as being authoritative, para. 2 proceeds from the

 

inverse consideration that a version of the treaty in a language other than

 

one of those in which the text was authenticated will not be considered

 

19Ibid.

20ILR 59 (1980) 495, para. 17.

21See the examples in the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 224, para. 3.

22See also V. Haak, “Unless the Treaty Otherwise Provides” and Similar Clauses in the International Law Commission’s 1966 Draft Articles on the Law of Treaties, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 540 .

23AVR 15 (1972) 299.

24Mössner, ibid., regards para. 2 as self-evident.

ZACHARIAS

458

article

authoritative for the interpretation of a plurilingual treaty.25 It is thus unnecessary to aim at reconciling authentic and non-authentic texts.26 Such other versions may carry di erent names. For instance, they may appear as “o cial” texts signed by the negotiating States (though not regarded as authentic), or they may have been prepared as “o cial translations” by the parties or an individual Government.27 They may nevertheless serve as subsidiary means of interpretation under Article 32 (q.v., N. 5) and, therefore, also under para. 4 of Article 33 (N. 11).28 Again, the exception is envisaged that such other language versions shall be considered an authentic (and therefore authoritative) text only if the treaty so provides or the parties so agree.29

4. Presumption of Same Meaning (Para. 3)

8Paras. 3 and 4 provide the actual rules of interpretation in two distinct steps. Para. 3 reiterates the principle of equality of all authenticated texts (N. 5) by stating, as a first step, that the terms of the treaty are presumed to have the same meaning in each authentic text. This rule proceeds from the consideration that the various language texts of a treaty amount to a unity, constituting a single treaty with a single set of terms reflecting a single intention of the parties.30 It follows that each authentic text is equally authoritative and, therefore, that it is in principle possible to consult one single text and to assume that it reflects the will of the parties as expressed in all the other texts.31 It is thus unnecessary at the outset to consult and compare the various authentic texts—as was required by some before the ILC took up the

25See critically Aust, Modern Treaty Law 255, on the relevance of a non-authentic language (English) for the Court in the Maritime Delimitation and Territorial Questions (Qatar v. Bahrain) Case, ICJ Reports 1995 18 , paras. 34–40, with reference to McHugo, NYBIL 28 (1997) 171 .

26Given the straightforward principle formulated in para. 2, the ILC Report 1966 states, somewhat surprisingly, that it did not intend to formulate a general rule in this respect, YBILC 1966 II 224, para. 4.

27Ibid., para. 1.

28Ibid. 226, para. 8

29Ibid. 225, para. 5. Rosenne has pointed out that a language text which is designated as being authentic and yet was not adopted by the treaty making body, “carries in itself little if any weight”, Festschrift Mosler 782.

30See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 225, para. 6. In the Kaslikili/Sedudu Island (Botswana/Namibia) Case, ICJ Reports 1999 1062, para. 25, the Court considered, with reference to para. 3, that the terms “centre of the main channel” and “Thalweg” had the same meaning, particularly since the parties “did not themselves express any real di erence of opinion on this subject”.

31See the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 211, para. 35.

ZACHARIAS

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

459

 

subject (N. 1).32 The presumption in para. 3 is refutable in two senses:33

 

either, the parties wished a particular version to prevail, as in para. 1 (N. 6);34

 

or it transpires that there are in fact di erences of meaning, in which case

 

para. 4 applies (N. 10–13).

 

 

Para. 3 reflects important practical considerations. Few foreign ministries are

9

in a position to work with all the various authentic languages and to compare

 

them. Moreover, it appears natural that States, whose language constitutes

 

an authentic text of the treaty, will rely on that particular language.35

 

 

5. Di ering Meanings (Para. 4)

 

 

The rule in para. 3 (N. 8) may lead to the situation where the authentic text

10

consulted discloses an unclear or obscure meaning calling, in a second step,

 

for a comparison and reconciliation of the meanings of the various authentic

 

texts.36 Such discordance may transpire in particular where there is an error

 

within the meaning of Article 79, para. 3 (q.v., N. 14). If despite comparison

 

a reconciliation is not possible and the meaning remains unclear, two pos-

 

sibilities arise:37 (i) the particular provision is equally obscure in all languages,

 

in which case this is no longer a matter of plurilingual interpretation, and

 

Articles 31 and 32 (q.v.) may be resorted to; or (ii) a comparison of the

 

authentic texts discloses a di erence of meaning38 between one language

 

text and the others which do not therefore all have the same meaning, in

 

which case para. 4 applies as follows (N. 11–12).

 

 

At the outset, it must be examined whether the application of Articles 31

11

and 32, in particular the rules of interpretation and the subsidiary means

 

therein, will remove the di erence of meaning.39 If not, para. 4 departs from

 

32In the ILC, Rosenne unsuccessfully proposed the comparison of languages before commencing any process of interpretation, YBILC 1966 I/2 209, para. 11; see also Id., Festschrift Mosler 784; and Id., AJIL 81 (1987) 694; similarly Kuner, ILCQ 40 (1991) 955, 957 and passim. For Mössner, AVR 15 (1972), para. 3 does not contain a true rule of interpretation. See also the discussion in Germer, HILJ 11 (1970) 413 f.

33Kuner, ibid. See also D. Shelton, Hastings ICLR 20 (1997) 633.

34And indeed the opening words of para. 4.

35See the examples in Kuner, ILCQ 40 (1991) 956 f.

36See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 225, para. 7.

37Ibid.

38Para. 4 speaks of “di erence”, para. 1 of “divergence”. The notions seem interchangeable; see Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 300 n. 130. “Discrepancy” would be a further possible term.

39E.g., as a subsidiary means according to Article 32: the principle that the language should be considered in which the treaty was drawn up; see the statements by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 208 , paras. 5, 22 and 33, referred to by D. Shelton, Hastings ICLR 20 (1997) 633.

ZACHARIAS

460

article

the principle of the equality of all authentic texts (N. 8) in that the meaning of that language version has to be chosen which best reconciles the texts, having regard to the object and purpose of the treaty.40 It is at this stage that all authenticated language texts will have to be compared (N. 9). A treaty’s object and purpose may transpire in many ways: it may be found, inter alia, in original treaty drafts or in non-authentic o cial language texts (see Article 31, N. 11–14).41 This teleological test, hailing back to the 1935 Harvard Draft (N. 1), asks which meaning serves the treaty’s purpose best. It ensures the treaty’s e ectiveness, having regard in particular to the type of treaty at issue.

12While the treaty’s object and purpose must of course be considered under Article 31 para. 1, its renewed and explicit mention here emphasises its overriding importance if a reconciliation of the texts is otherwise not possible.42 Para. 4 thus di ers from Article 31 where teleological interpretation is only one of a number of means of interpretation all of which are a priori of equal importance.43 As in Article 31, teleological interpretation finds its limits in para. 4 in the written text of the various authenticated languages (q.v., N. 14).

In the LaGrand (Germany/US) Case, the Court was called upon to examine the binding nature of provisional measures within the meaning of Article 41 of the ICJ-Statute. When confronted with a divergence of text in Article 41, para. (inter alia, “doivent être prises/ought to be taken”), the Court applied Article 33, para. 4. After considering that recourse to Articles 31 and 32 did not remove the di erence of meaning, it considered the object and purpose of the ICJ-Statute within the context of its Article 41. The Court found that its conclusion—that such orders are binding—was in conformity with the travaux préparatoires of Article 41.44

In the Elettronica Sicula S.p.A. (ELSI) Case, the Italian Government argued that the narrower of the two authentic texts (English and Italian) was the correct one on the basis of Article 33 para. 4 of the Convention. This question, reminiscent of the Mavrommatis Concessions case-law (N. 1), was left open by the Court;45 indeed, it would have been incompatible with the teleological interpretation enshrined in para. 4.

40See the application of this principle in the LaGrand (Germany/US) Case, ICJ Reports 2001 36, para. 101; the Young Loans Arbitration, ILR 50 (1080) 497 , paras. 31 and 39–41; and in the Maritime Delimitation and Territorial Questions (Qatar v. Bahrain) Case, ICJ Reports 1995 19, para. 35. See also McHugo, NYBIL 28 (1997) 186 f.

41But see R. Bernhardt, Interpretation in International Law, EPIL 2 (1995) 1422.

42But see Germer, HILJ 11 (1970) 425, for whom this dichotomy is “artificial”.

43On the relations between para. 4 of Article 33 and Articles 31 and 32, see Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 300 f.

44ICJ Reports 2001 501 , paras. 100–109.

45ICJ Reports 1989 70 f.

ZACHARIAS

treaties authenticated in two or more languages

461

Para. 4 finally reiterates the exception that the treaty may provide, or States

13

may agree, that a particular text prevails in accordance with paragraph 1

 

(N. 5).

 

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

The relevance for Article 33 of Articles 10, 31 and 32 has been discussed above

14

(N. 5, 11). Article 33 may play a useful role within the context of Article 79

 

(q.v., N. 10).

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Article 33 sets out a limited number of rules for the interpretation of pluri-

15

lingual treaties. Various principles playing a role until 1966 (N. 1) have not

 

been included, e.g., the presumptions in favour of the language version in

 

which the treaty was drawn up, or in favour of the version which has a clear

 

meaning.46

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 33

 

For Rosenne, Article 33 cannot generally be regarded as innovative,47 and

16

Mössner considers that the provision does not go beyond principles which

 

were already known before 1969.48 This study draws a more di erentiated

 

picture. For purposes of Article 33, the ILC and the Vienna Conference dis-

 

tilled a limited number of rules out of the many, occasionally contradictory principles covering plurilingual interpretation. It is doubtful whether until 1966 customary rules had developed in this particular constellation on the subject. On the other hand, Article 33 is today generally viewed as reflecting a rule of customary international law which, therefore, came about at the Vienna Conference in 1968/1969 and thereafter.49

46See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 226, para. 9; the statement by Verdross in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 208, para. 5.

47Festschrift Mosler 785.

48AVR 15 (1972) 302.

49See the LaGrand (Germany/USA) Case, ICJ Reports 2001 502, para. 101.

ZACHARIAS

462

article

D. APPRECIATION

17Article 33 has its share of weaknesses. For instance, it is surprisingly repeti- tive—possibly because the subject was originally treated in two provisions which were eventually joined (N. 2). The provision also lacks the density of drafting of its sister provisions in Articles 31 and 32 (together with which provisions it has, of course, to be read, N. 10–12). Still, it would be failing to do justice to Article 33 by dismissing it, in Mössner’s terms,50 as being neither helpful nor harmful. The provision is certainly useful for the resolution of plurilingual conflicts inasmuch as it o ers as a last resort the “object and purpose”-test in para. 4 (N. 11–12). On the whole, a complete, perfect harmony between treaty texts in di erent languages will never be possible. In practice, many treaties (including the Convention) have been translated on a professional basis by expert linguistic services, and it is often di cult to find any serious discrepancies between the di erent texts.

50 Mössner, AVR 15 (1972) 302.

ZACHARIAS

Section . Treaties and Third States

ZACHARIAS

Article 34

General rule regarding third States

A treaty does not create either obligations or rights for a third State without its consent.

Article 34 Règle générale concernant les Etats tiers

Un traité ne crée ni obligations ni droits pour un Etat tiers sans son consentement.

Artikel 34 Allgemeine Regel betre end Drittstaaten

Ein Vertrag begründet für einen Drittstaat ohne dessen Zustimmung weder Pflichten noch Rechte.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 30—General rule regarding third States

A treaty does not create either obligations or rights for a third State without its consent.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 61.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 64 , 173 , 181 , 235 f, 327 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 58.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 58.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 54 , 170, 315, 329.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 30.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 191 , 443; OR 1969 Plenary 59.

Vienna Conference Vote: 97:0:0

466

article

Selected Literature:

H. Ballreich, Treaties, E ect on Third States, EPIL 4 (2000) 945 ; R.M. Bestellu, Efectele tratatelor internationale fata de statele terte, Studii Cercetari Juridice 34 (1989) 231 ; P. Braud, Recherches sur l’État tiers en droit international public, RGDIP 39 (1968) 17 ; Ph. Cahier, Le problème des e ets des traités à l’égard des Etats tiers, RC 143 (1974 III) 589 ; Ch. Chinkin, Third Parties in International Law (1993); E. David, Article 34, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1403 ; L.T. Lee, The Law of the Sea Convention and Third States, AJIL 76 (1982) 779 ; S.L.N. Mathur, Treaties and Third States, in: S.K. Agrawala (ed.), Essays on the Law of Treaties (1972) 41 ; G. Napoletano, Some Remarks on Treaties and Third States under the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 75 ; H. Neuhold, Völkerrechtlicher Vertrag und “Drittstaaten”, Berichte DGVR 28 (1987) 51 ; J.-F. Prévost, Les e ets des traités conclus entre Etats à l’égard des tiers (1973); Ch.L. Rozakis, Treaties and Third States: A Study in the Reinforcement of the Consensual Standards in International Law, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 1 ; Th. Schweisfurth, International Treaties and Third States, ZaöRV 45 (1985) 667 ; Ch. Tomuschat, Obligations Arising for States With or Against Their Will, RC 241 (1993 IV) 195 ; Id., Völkerrechtlicher Vertrag und Drittstaaten, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 9 ; R. Wetzel, Verträge zugunsten und zu Lasten Dritter nach der Wiener Vertragsrechtskonvention (1973).

ZACHARIAS

 

general rule regarding third states

467

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 34 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Principle ...........................................................................................

3

 

2.

Qualifications ...................................................................................

8

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

10

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

10

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

11

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 34 ...........................................................

12

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

13

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

The principle that agreements neither impose obligations nor confer rights

1

upon third parties hails back to Roman law (pacta tertiis nec nocent nec prosunt;

 

res inter alios acta nec prodest nec nocet). In international law, the principle is

 

traditionally viewed as a corollary of the principles of the sovereignty, equality and independence of States ( par in parem non habet imperium).1 The rule was frequently invoked by the Permanent Court which in the Certain German Interests in Polish Upper Silesia Case held that “a treaty only creates law as between States which are parties to it; in case of doubt, no rights can be

1ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 226, para. 1. See on the topic also R.F. Roxburgh, International Conventions and Third States (1917); J. Wunschik, Die Wirkung der völkerrechtlichen Verträge für dritte Staaten (1930); C.-H. Winkler, Verträge zu Gunsten und zu Lasten Dritter im Völkerrecht (1932); H. Kelsen, Traités internationaux à la charge d’Etats tiers, in: Mélanges E. Mahaim II (1935) 164 ; H. Ballreich, Völkerrechtliche Verträge zu Lasten Dritter, in: C. Bilfinger zum 75. Geburtstag (1954) 1 ; E. Jiménez de Aréchaga, Treaty Stipulations in Favour of Third States, AJIL 50 (1956) 338 ; E.J. Roucounas, Le traité et les États tiers (Quelques approaches subjectives et objectives), RHDI 17 (1964) 299 ; P.-F. Smets, Les e ets des traités internationaux à l’égard des États tiers (1965/1966).

ZACHARIAS

468

article

deduced from it in favour of third States”.2 In the Free Zones Case of Upper Savoy and the District of Gex Case, it was found that Article 435 of the Versailles Treaty had not created obligations for Switzerland against her will.3 The principle was confirmed by the Court in the North Sea Cases4 and in the

Aerial Incident of 27 July 1955 (Israel/Bulgaria) (Preliminary Objections) Case.5

Authors have long been in singular agreement on the rule in general.6

Traditionally, views have di ered as to the manner in which in particular rights were granted to third States (Article 36, q.v.). It was undisputed that no State was obliged to accept a right against its will (invito beneficium non datur).7 However, if a State was willing to accept, one view required in all cases a separate agreement between the treaty parties and the third State.8 The other view considered that the treaty parties were free to create a right in favour of another State if they so intended and the third State obtained this right without having to accept it.9

2. History

2In an elaborate draft of 21 articles, Fitzmaurice Report V introduced in 1960 a host of principles and exceptions on the subject, though the ILC did not discuss the matter.10 The matter was again taken up by Waldock Report III in 1964. The ILC was unanimous in that a treaty could not create obligations for third States (Article 35, N. 1), though it was divided as to whether (and if so, how) a treaty could eo ipso create rights for third States (Article 36, N. 1). The final ILC Draft of 1966 employed the neutral formulation of the present Article 34 so as to cover the di erent doctrinal views.11 The Conference in 1968/1969 only briefly discussed the provision which remained unchanged. A

2

PCIJ (1926) Series A no. 7, 30; see also the Territorial Jurisdiction of the International

 

Commission of the River Oder Case, PCIJ (1929) Series A no. 23, 19 .

3

PCIJ (1932) Series A/B no. 46, 141. See also the 1928 Island of Palmas Case, RIAA 2

 

(1928) 831; for further case-law of arbitral tribunals, see Waldock Report III, YBILC

 

1964 II 19, para. 5.

4ICJ Reports 1969 25 f (“[the State] would simply be told that, not having become a party to the convention, it could not claim any rights under it until the professed willingness

and acceptance had been manifested in the prescribed form”).

5ICJ Reports 1959 138; the Court considered that its Statute was “without legal force so far as non-signatory States were concerned”.

6E.g., McNair, Law of Treaties 309; Id, A Note on pacta tertiis, in: Liber amicorum J.A. François (1959) 188 ; the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 918 (Article

18); the authors mentioned in n. 1.

7 Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 87, para. 3. 8 McNair, Law of Treaties 309 .

9 Brierly/Waldock 251 f; Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 81 (Article 22).

10YBILC 1960 II 69 . From 1964–1966 the ILC no longer referred to this draft (but see, in the context of objective régimes, Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 27, para. 1).

11See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 227, para. 5.

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding third states

469

proposal by the Venezuelan delegation to combine Articles 34–37 in a single article was withdrawn.12 Article 34 was adopted by 97 votes to none.13

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 34

 

1. Principle

 

Articles 34–37 relate to the e ects of a treaty on third States. A third State

3

is according to the definition in Article 2, subpara. 1(h), “a State not a party

 

to the treaty” (q.v., N. 51). It is irrelevant whether such States participated

 

in the treaty negotiations or are entitled to become a party.

 

Article 34 contains the general rule regarding third States. The principle

4

stated in this rule applies equally to Articles 35–37 which nevertheless contain

 

qualifications (N. 8). The fact that these provisions have all been placed in

 

Section 4 of Part III of the Convention confirms that they have to be read

 

as a whole.14

 

According to Article 34, a treaty does not create either obligations or

5

rights for a third State without its consent. A treaty binds solely its parties

 

which cannot impose “their” treaty on non-parties (Article 26, N. 9). The lat-

 

ter are only bound if and to the extent that they have expressed their consent

 

to the treaty (or part of it).15 The manner in which consent is to be expressed

 

di ers in Articles 35 (q.v., N. 4) and 36 (q.v., N. 4–7). Without such consent,

 

the treaty remains simply res inter alios acta for third States. This stipulation

 

is rebuttable: while there is a presumption in favour of the pacta tertiis-rule,

 

a third State’s consent may be demonstrated in a given case.

 

Even if a third State consents to certain rights or obligations arising out of the

6

treaty, it does not become a party to the treaty; rather it concludes a separate

 

agreement with the treaty parties. (If the third State becomes a party to the treaty, Articles 34–37 no longer apply.)16 The ILC coined the term “collateral”

12OR 1968 CoW 191, para. 2; for the amendment, see OR Documents 152, para. 285. On the history, Wetzel 42 .

13OR 1969 Plenary 59, para. 4.

14See the statements in the ILC by Yasseen and Lachs, YBILC 1966 I/2 54, para. 74, and 57, para. 20.

15See the statements in Vienna by the Venezuelan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 191, para. 2; and in the ILC by de Luna, YBILC 1966 I/2 56, paras. 5, 8; Yasseen, ibid. 57, para. 14; and Ago, YBILC 1964 I 174, para. 76; also Reuter, Introduction N. 158. Of course, it has traditionally been disputed whether there is an agreement at all (N. 1).

16Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 66, para. 5; YBILC 1966 II 227, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

470

article

agreement herefor.17 While in theory the two contracts are distinct, in practice there is no clear borderline between the collateral agreement and the treaty itself. Thus, the third State’s rights and obligations may be directed at individual provisions, at groups of provisions, or at the whole treaty. In the last mentioned case, there will be little to distinguish the position of the third State from that of the parties to the treaty.18

7Article 34 is formulated negatively, i.e., it states what a treaty cannot achieve.19 The provision thus leaves open whether under general international law rights and obligations may arise under a treaty for third States (N. 6).

For instance, authors have postulated as a corollary of the pacta tertiis-rule that third States must respect treaties concluded among other States and “should not interfere with [their] operation between the parties”.20 Whatever the position under general international law, certainly no such e ects can be seen in the text of Article 34.

2. Qualifications

8The pacta tertiis-rule is qualified by Articles 35–37 (q.v.) which provide for rights and obligations for third States, and the revocation thereof, with their consent.

The ILC discussed at length whether a treaty could eo ipso confer rights on third States, or whether the parties were in all cases required to make an o er in the treaty calling for the acceptance for its completion by other States (N. 2).21 Article 34 as it stands today is clear in that it expressly stipulates consent, also in respect of Articles 35–37 (for which reason some ILC members even regarded the text of Article 34 as “biased”).22 On the whole, it appears more precise to speak here of “qualifications” of, rather than “exceptions” to, Article 34.23

9Among other qualifi cations of the pacta tertiis-rule, there may be mentioned:24

Article 2, para. 6 of the UN Charter provides: “the Organisation shall ensure that States which are not Members of the United Nations act in accordance with these

17See, e.g., the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 227, para. 1.

18Napoletano, ItalYBILC 3 (1977) 83.

19Ibid. 76.

20Jennings, Essays Friedmann 160; Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 598; also Article 17 of Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 80; contra Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 26; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 99; Schweisfurth, ZaöRV 45 (1985) 664.

21Statement by Briggs in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 182, para. 99.

22Briggs, YBILC 1966 I/2 57, para. 17.

23Statement by Tunkin in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 182, para. 113; Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 76.

24Sinclair, Vienna Convention 99; Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 597 ; Tomuschat, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 18 ; the summary of the Swiss Government in its Message on the Convention to Parliament, dated 17 May 1989, BBl 1989 II 775.

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding third states

471

principle”. This provision has lost its relevance in view of the quasi-universality of UN membership. Even so, it is di cult to see it as a legal basis creating actual obligations for third States.25 While Article 38 (q.v.) could be invoked in order to establish a customary basis of Article 2, para. 6, non-members would be required at least to have acquiesced in this provision (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 11);

Article 18 (q.v.) provides for certain obligations before a treaty enters into force;26

Article 38 (q.v.) envisages a treaty becoming binding on all States qua customary law;

Article 53 (q.v.), concerning jus cogens;27

State succession is not covered by the Convention (Article 73, q.v.), nor is the situation of an aggressor State (Article 75, q.v.);

treaties may create factual situations (e.g., boundaries, as in Article 62, subpara. 2[b], N. 18–19) which indirectly a ect third parties;28 and

objective régimes (N. 11).

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

The relationship with other provisions—namely Articles 18 and 35–37—has 10 been explained above (N. 5–6). The pacta tertiis-rule is also reflected in the principle of non-retroactivity in Articles 4 and 28 (q.v.) as well as in Article 52 (q.v.), prohibiting coercion of a State by the threat or use of force. Moreover,

the assumption of rights and obligations by third States by means of a “collateral” agreement (N. 6) has to be distinguished from a State’s accession to the treaty (Article 15, q.v.). Finally, a certain deviance from the pacta tertiis- rule can be found in Article 75 (q.v., N. 4, 6).

25Discussed by Vitzthum, Article 2, para. 6, in: Simma (ed.), Charter of the United Nations (2002), N. 18 ; Tomuschat, ibid. 28 (1988) 14 ; Malanczuk, Akehurst’s Modern Introduction 137; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 67, para. 6.

26See Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 19, para. 6.

27Neuhold, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 61 .

28See Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 67, para. 2 (“[Article 34] does not concern the general question of the e ects of treaties on third States; it concerns only the e ect of a treaty in creating obligations and rights for third States under the treaty”); the statements in the ILC by Yasseen, YBILC 1966 I/2 57, para. 13; and Jiménez de Aréchaga, ibid. 58, para. 35.

ZACHARIAS

472

article

2. Matters Not Dealt With

11Waldock Report III also contained a provision (Article 63) on treaties setting up objective régimes.29 However, the ILC had misgivings about the proposal, considering that such régimes were based on acquiescence and customary international law, rather than on the e ects of a treaty, and decided to delete the provision.30

According to Article 63 of Waldock Report III, objective régimes “[created] in the general interest general obligations and rights relating to a particular region, State, territory, locality, river, waterway, or to a particular area of sea, sea-bed, or air-space”.31 A third State was considered to have accepted the treaty, if it consented to the creation or the application of the objective régime; or at least if it did not manifest its opposition to the régime within a certain period of time after the treaty had been registered with the UN Secretary General.

3. Customary Basis of Article 34

12Neither during the rule’s drafting nor thereafter did a State call Article 34 in question. Indeed, there is little practice on the provision.32 The ILC itself saw in it a rule of customary international law.33

29On the subject also David, Article 34, N. 7–11; Ballreich, EPIL 4 (2000) 946 ; Tomuschat, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 13 f; Feist, Kündigung 96 ; E. Klein, Statusverträge im Völkerrecht (1980).

30YBILC 1964 I 109, para. 38. See, e.g., the statements in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, ibid. 100, para. 17; and Briggs, ibid. 103, para. 48. See also Klein, ibid. 209 .

31YBILC 1964 II 26 f; see on the history also M. Ragazzi, The Concept of International Obligations erga omnes (1997), 37 .

32See, e.g., the diss. op. of Padilla Nervo in the Fisheries Jurisdiction (UK v. Iceland) Case, ICJ Reports 1973 42; and his sep. op. in the North Sea Cases, ICJ Reports 1969 112 f; the diss. op of Judge Sorensen, ibid. 217; the Opinion No. 12 of the Arbitration Commission of the International Conference on the Former Yugoslavia, ILR 96 (1994) 725, para. 3; the Rejoinder of the USA of 17 December 2001 in Methanex Corporation v. USA, at 5 (Arbitration under Chapter IX of NAFTA and UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules); the response by the USA in the Loewen Group Inc v. USA of 19 July 2002 at I/A, pursuant to NAFTA Article 1128; Communication to the WTO by the EC of 19 November 2002 (WT/WGTCP/W/222), N. 5 at para. 17; the statement of the UK representative in the 3rd Committee of the UN GA, reproduced in BYBIL 57 (1986) 560.

33See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 226, para. 1; the statement by Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 55, para. 84; also Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 616; Neuhold, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 54; Wetzel 70 ; Tomuschat, RC 241 (1993 IV) 244; Delbrück/Wolfrum III 614.

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding third states

473

D. APPRECIATION

In 1966 the ILC worked hard at a neutral text which encompassed the various 13 doctrinal views. The resulting Article 34 is a model of brevity and clarity.34

The rule enunciated therein is important in that it is based on, and continues to confirm, the principle of the sovereignty of States.35 Still, the rule’s relevance may be diminishing in view of the growing role of international organisations and the e ects of their resolutions.36 While Article 34 applies in principle also to the Convention itself (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 24), particularly as regards its position towards non-parties, the matter may now be considered moot in view of the customary character of most Convention provisions.37

34See the statement by Reuter in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 56, para. 11; the observation by the Greek Government to the ILC which explained that Article 34 “[stated] a very simple rule too forcefully”, YBILC 1966 II 67; Tomuschat, ibid. (“axiomatic purity of the system”).

35See the statements by el-Erian in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 57, para. 21. Interestingly, Prévost 36, 76, sees in Article 34 a rule of interpretation.

36See el-Erian ibid. 65, para. 14; Ballreich, EPIL 4 (2000) 949.

37But see Vierdag, AJIL 76 (1982) 786 .

ZACHARIAS

Article 35

Treaties providing for obligations for third States

An obligation arises for a third State from a provision of a treaty if the parties to the treaty intend the provision to be the means of establishing the obligation and the third State expressly accepts that obligation in writing.

Article 35 Traités prévoyant des obligations pour des Etats tiers

Une obligation naît pour un Etat tiers d’une disposition d’un traité si les parties à ce traité entendent créer l’obligation au moyen de cette disposition et si l’Etat tiers accepte expressément par écrit cette obligation.

Artikel 35 Verträge zu Lasten von Drittstaaten

Ein Drittstaat wird durch eine Vertragsbestimmung verpflichtet, wenn die Vertragsparteien beabsichtigen, durch die Vertragsbestimmung eine Verpflichtung zu begründen, und der Drittstaat diese Verpflichtung ausdrücklich in Schriftform annimmt.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 35—Treaties providing for obligations for third States

An obligation arises for a State from a provision of a treaty to which it is not a party if the parties intend the provision to be a means of establishing the obligation and the third State has expressly accepted that obligation.

treaties providing for obligations for third states

475

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 62, para. 1.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 66 , 173 , 176, 236 f, 318, 328.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 59.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 59.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 60 , 171 f, 315 f, 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 31.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 193 , 443; OR 1969 Plenary 59 f, 157 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 99:0:1

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 34, q.v.):

C. Laly-Chevalier/F. Rezek, Article 35, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1425 .

ZACHARIAS

476

article

 

CONTENTS

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction (see Article 34, N. 1)

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

1

B. Interpretation of Article 35 ............................................................

2

C. Context ...............................................................................................

5

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

5

2.

Matters Not Dealt With (see Article 34, N. 11)

3.

Customary Basis of Article 35 ...........................................................

6

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

7

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

(see Article 34, N. 1)

2. History

1 Fitzmaurice Report V of 1960 listed various means by which an obligation under a treaty could become binding on a third State, i.e., (i) through a separate treaty concluded with the treaty parties; (ii) by means of a unilateral declaration resulting in legally binding obligations; and (iii) by the State taking benefits or exercising rights under the same treaty.1 In 1964 Waldock Report III introduced in its Article 62, para. 1 the nucleus of the present Article 35, though only requiring a third State’s “implied consent” to the obligation.2 In its discussion in 1964 the ILC concentrated on other, albeit related issues, such as Article 2, para. 6 of the UN Charter and the participation of all interested States in a conference preparing a treaty.3 The surprisingly political debate continued in 1966 when the ILC digressed

1Articles 11–13, YBILC 1960 II 79 . On the travaux préparatoires, see Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 9 ; Cahier RC 143 (1974 III) 644 ; Wetzel 74 ; on the pre-ILC situation

generally, K.-P. Gellermann, Völkerrechtliche Verträge zu Lasten Dritter (1963). 2 Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 19.

3See the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1964 I 69, para. 27; Lachs, ibid. 70, para. 44.

ZACHARIAS

treaties providing for obligations for third states

477

into Article 75 (q.v., N. 2).4 Still, Article 35 was adopted unanimously by the ILC, its Report of 1966 considering the rule to be “one of the bulwarks of the independence and equality of States”.5 The provision attracted little attention in Vienna. The Mongolian delegation unsuccessfully proposed to reverse the order between Articles 35 and 36, though the Conference did accept a last-minute Cambodian proposal stipulating that the obligation had to be accepted “in writing”.6 Article 35 was adopted by 99 votes to none, with one abstention.7

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 35

 

Article 35 concerns the situation where an obligation arises for a third State

2

(and very likely a concomitant right for the treaty parties). The situation would appear to be infrequent which may explain the use of the singular (“a third State”) whereas Article 36, concerning rights for all States, refers to a “group of States” or even “all States” (q.v., N. 3).8 However, also in respect of the obligation in Article 35 the treaty may be directed towards a particular third State, any third State, or even a number of States. The obligation will arise from a provision of a treaty, though it is the separate, “collateral” agreement between the treaty parties and the third State rather than the treaty itself which provides the legal basis for the obligation (see Article 34, N. 6). The third State wishing to accept the obligation will be interested in one, or certain, or even all the provisions of a treaty, but has no wish to become a party thereto.9 Article 35 also applies if the treaty provision combines obligations with rights (e.g., the obligation to pay dues for the right to use an international waterway).10 Indeed, the treaty parties may well grant the third State some benefit in order to entice it also to accept the obligation.11

4 T he debate is at YBILC 1966 I/2 60 .

5 ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 227, para. 1; the vote is at YBILC 1966 I/2 171.

6For the Mongolian proposal, see OR Documents 153, para. 294. See also the statement by Yasseen of the Drafting Committee, OR 1968 CoW 443, para. 41 (the reversal being refused as Article 35 contained stricter conditions than Article 36). On the Cambodian proposal, see OR 1969 Plenary 59 f, para. 5 (adopted by 44 votes to 19, with 31 absten-

tions, ibid. para. 8).

7 OR 1969 Plenary 60, para. 8, and 158, para. 49. 8 Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 77.

9 Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 68, para. 24.

10See the example given by the Greek delegation at the Conference, OR 1968 CoW 196, para. 62; the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, ibid. 63. See also Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 647.

11Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 77; Cahier, ibid. 647 f.

ZACHARIAS

478

article

3Two conditions must be met for the (contractual) obligation to arise: the o er and the acceptance (N. 3–4). First, the parties to the treaty intend the provision to be the means of establishing the obligation. The intention, expressed in the treaty provision itself, is to be understood as a written invitation, or proposal, to a third State to participate in a provision of the treaty.12 The term “intend” removes any impression that an obligation is being imposed on a third State.13

4The second condition is consent, (Article 34, N. 5) i.e., that the third State expressly accepts that obligation in writing. The strict requirement of written consent—introduced in Vienna in 1969 (N. 1)14 and in fact corresponding with the “written form” required by Article 2, subpara. 1(a) (q.v., N. 15)—is explained by the fact that Article 35 concerns obligations and thus contrasts with Article 36 which, as it concerns rights, merely requires implied assent (q.v., N. 5).15 Written consent can be given in a variety of ways (e.g., notes, memoranda), including the enactment of domestic legislation.16 Naturally, the acceptance will be directed towards the obligation expressed in the provision of the treaty and as a rule—though not invariably—towards all treaty parties. The third State will, therefore, exercise the obligation in compliance with the conditions for its exercise provided for in the treaty (see mutatis mutandis, Article 36, para. 2, N. 8).17

This condition of the written form has been strongly criticised.18 However, does Article 35 really preclude a third State from accepting an obligation informally, e.g., orally, as suggested by the Cambodian delegation in Vienna?19 The third preambular para. (Preamble, N. 10) envisages the “free consent of States”; according to Article 3, para.

(a) (q.v., N. 5) the legal force of agreements is not excluded if they are not e ected in writing. Indeed, in practice it is perfectly conceivable that a third State informally accepts an obligation (which may also have been proposed informally by the treaty parties)—particularly if the treaty envisages rights and obligations for a third State

12ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 227, para. 1; statement by Yasseen in the ILC, 1964 I 70, para. 33.

13Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 237, para. 87.

14After some discussion, the ILC accepted “express” acceptance; see the statements by Lachs, YBILC 1964 I 71, paras. 45, 48; Reuter, ibid. 72, para. 60; and Waldock, ibid. 77, para. 44.

15See the statement in Vienna by the Cambodian delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 59 f, para. 5.

16In its 1997 Blaksic judgment, the Appeals Chamber of the ICTY found, with reference to Article 35, that Switzerland, then a non-member of the UN, had accepted Article 29 of the ICTY-Statute by enacting the required legislation, ILR 110 (1998) 700, para. 26.

17Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 646 f; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 102.

18Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 13, sees in Article 35 a serious blow to, and a “radical departure” from, the scheme of informalism in international law; Delbrück/Wolfrum III 615, view this condition as impractical (“diese Formerfordernisse [entsprechen] den praktischen Bedürfnissen der Staaten kaum”).

19OR 1969 Plenary 59 f, para. 5.

ZACHARIAS

treaties providing for obligations for third states

479

(N. 2).20 As a result, the relevance of Article 35 lies in its residual character: Written acceptance will become topical once a dispute arises and the treaty parties intend to request a third State to fulfil its obligation and therefore need to demonstrate the existence of their legal claim.

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

Article 35 has to be read together with Articles 34 (q.v., N. 10), 36 and 37.

5

The last mentioned provision plays a particular part in respect of the revoca-

 

tion of an obligation. Furthermore, Article 75 (q.v., N. 4) shares certain roots

 

with Article 35 (N. 1).

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

(see Article 34, N. 11)

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 35

 

Like Article 34 (q.v., N. 12), Article 35 indubitably codified a pre-existing

6

customary rule. Exceptionally, the requirement of written consent may have

 

appeared innovative when it was introduced at the Conference in 1969.21 In

 

view of the unanimous adoption in Vienna of Article 35, this requirement has

 

most likely come to share the customary basis of the provision as a whole.22

 

D. APPRECIATION

 

Somewhat surprisingly, Article 35 was the cause in the ILC for at times heated

7

political controversy (N. 1). In the context of decolonisation, the provision

 

was viewed as an important protection in particular for developing countries.23

 

Conversely, other authors consider the provision to be irrelevant.24 On the

 

whole, as Article 34 (q.v., N. 13) before it, Article 35 reduces to comparatively

 

20Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 87–89.

21See the statement by the UK delegation (Vallat) in Vienna, OR 1969 Plenary 60, para. 6; Wetzel 83 .

22See the 1997 Blaksic judgment of the Appeals Chamber of the ICTY of 29 October 1997 which refers to the “general principle” embodied in Article 35, ILR 110 (1998) 700, para. 26.

23See the statement in Vienna by the Cambodian delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 59 f, para. 5.

24Ballreich, EPIL 4 (2000) 946 (“it is usually felt that there is no need for treaties imposing obligations on third parties”).

ZACHARIAS

480

article

simple terms a quite complex principle of the law of treaties.25 Requiring express acceptance in writing of the obligation is a rigorous condition, though understandable in view of past emotions linked to “pacta in odium26 and certainly mitigated by the residual character of Article 35 (N. 4).

25Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 68, para. 25.

26Statement by Ago in the ILC, ibid. 67, para. 7.

ZACHARIAS

Article 36

Treaties providing for rights for third States

1.A right arises for a third State from a provision of a treaty if the parties to the treaty intend the provision to accord that right either to the third State, or to a group of States to which it belongs, or to all States, and the third State assents thereto. Its assent shall be presumed so long as the contrary is not indicated, unless the treaty otherwise provides.

2.A State exercising a right in accordance with paragraph 1 shall comply with the conditions for its exercise provided for in the treaty or established in conformity with the treaty.

Article 36 Traités prévoyant des droits pour des Etats tiers

1.Un droit naît pour un Etat tiers d’une disposition d’un traité si les parties à ce traité entendent, par cette disposition, conférer ce droit soit à l’Etat tiers ou à un groupe d’Etats auquel il appartient, soit à tous les Etats, et si l’Etat tiers y consent. Le consentement est présumé tant qu’il n’y a pas d’indication contraire, à moins que le traité n’en dispose autrement.

2.Un Etat qui exerce un droit en application du paragraphe 1 est tenu de respecter, pour l’exercice de ce droit, les conditions prévues dans le traité ou établies conformément à ses dispositions.

Artikel 36 Verträge zugunsten von Drittstaaten

1.Ein Drittstaat wird durch eine Vertragsbestimmung berechtigt, wenn die Vertragsparteien beabsichtigen, durch die Vertragsbestimmung dem Drittstaat oder einer Staatengruppe, zu der er gehört, oder allen Staaten ein Recht einzuräumen, und der Drittstaat dem zustimmt. Sofern der Vertrag nichts anderes vorsieht, wird die Zustimmung vermutet, solange nicht das Gegenteil erkennbar wird.

2.Ein Staat, der ein Recht nach Absatz 1 ausübt, hat die hierfür in dem Vertrag niedergelegten oder im Einklang mit ihm aufgestellten Bedingungen einzuhalten.

482

article

ILC Draft 1966

Article 32—Treaties providing for rights for third States

1.A right arises for a State from a provision of a treaty to which it is not a party if the parties intend the provision to accord that right either to the State in question, or to a group of States to which it belongs, or to all States, and the State assents thereto. Its assent shall be presumed so long as the contrary is not indicated.

2.A State exercising a right in accordance with paragraph 1 shall comply with the conditions for its exercise provided for in the treaty or established in conformity with the treaty.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 62, paras. 2 and 4. Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 80 , 173 , 237 f, 328.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 60.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 60.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 73 , 171 , 316, 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 32.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 193 , 443; OR 1969 Plenary 60 , 157 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 100:0:0

Selected Literatur (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 34, q.v.):

P. d’Argent, Article 36, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1465 .

ZACHARIAS

 

 

 

treaties providing for rights for third states

483

 

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

 

1.

Introduction (see Article 34, N. 1)

 

 

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

1

 

B. Interpretation of Article 36 ............................................................

2

 

 

1.

Position of the Third State ................................................................

2

 

 

2.

Issues of Consent ..............................................................................

4

 

 

3.

Residual Character ...........................................................................

7

 

 

4.

Conditions for Exercise of Right (Para. 2) ........................................

8

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

9

 

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

9

 

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

10

 

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 36 ...........................................................

11

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

12

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

(see Article 34, N. 1)

 

 

2. History

 

 

In 1964 Waldock Report III introduced fi rst elements of the present

1

Article 36.1 As Sir Gerald Fitzmaurice before him,2 Sir Humphrey con-

 

sidered in the light of the Free Zones Case that a right could under certain

 

circumstances be conveyed on a third State even without its acceptance (rather

 

than by virtue of a separate agreement).3 Accordingly, his Report required as

 

a condition for a right to be created for a third State merely that “the right

 

[had] not been rejected, either expressly or impliedly” by the third State.

 

Not surprisingly, the ILC was divided on the manner in which the right was

 

to be conveyed. In 1964 it had its first, long discussion on the topic.4 In its

 

 

 

 

 

1

YBILC 1964 II 19 f, 21 . On the topic also G.G. Riz à Porta, Der Vertrag zu Gunsten

 

 

Dritter im Völkerrecht (1942).

 

 

2

YBILC 1960 II 81 (Article 20).

 

 

3

PCIJ (1932) Series A/B, no. 46, 141.

 

 

4

YBILC 1964 I 67 , 80 ; Wetzel 92 ; Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 15 .

 

 

ZACHARIAS

484

article

Report of 1964 the ILC employed as a compromise the formulation that the third State had to “expressly or impliedly” assent to the right, though its assent was to be “presumed”.5 However, this was criticised by various Governments.6 In 1966 the ILC embarked on another long discussion.7 Eventually, a further compromise—the present second sentence of para. 1 of Article 36—emerged.8 At the 1968/1969 Conference Article 36 was subject to some textual amendments. The only major change—the introduction of the words “unless the treaty otherwise provides”—was brought about by a Japanese proposal.9 A Finnish proposal, aiming at deleting the second sentence in para. 1, was rejected by 46 votes to 25, with 17 abstentions.10 Article 36 was adopted by 100 votes to none.11

B.INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 36

1.Position of the Third State

2Article 36 envisages the situation where a right arises for a third State (and very likely a concomitant obligation for the treaty parties). An example would be where treaty parties agree to open a canal or river to freedom of navigation. Whether the treaty actually grants a right or merely an unintentional benefit, depends on the interpretation of the particular treaty provision by the third State as well as on the intentions of the treaty parties.12 If a right is acquired, the third State is entitled to claim the benefit of the provision in question—and to have recourse against the treaty parties, if the treaty provision is not carried out.13 Naturally, conditions may be attached to the right, even amounting to obligations, e.g., that the third State undertakes, or to the contrary refrains from, a particular action (N. 8).14 If the treaty provisions

5 YBILC 1964 II 182; YBILC 1964 I 176 f, para. 9; YBILC 1966 II 229, para. 6, the consideration being that there was no practical di erence between the two points of view.

6 See Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 69 f.

7 Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 80, para. 8 (the discussion during the past meetings having been “on a high level, but not much fresh ground had been broken”).

8 See the statements in the ILC by Ago, YBILC 1966 I/2 81, para. 18 ; and Waldock, ibid. 174, para. 50.

9 OR Documents 153, para. 294.

10See OR 1968 CoW 196, para. 65.

11OR Plenary 63, para. 36, and 158, para. 49.

12ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 229, para. 7; the statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 85, para. 54; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 257; also Article 34, N. 8.

13See Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 82 (Article 20 paras. 1 and 3).

14Sinclair, Vienna Convention 102.

ZACHARIAS

treaties providing for rights for third states

485

 

contain both rights and obligations, the stricter standards of Article 35 apply,

 

in particular as regards the requirement of express consent (q.v., N. 4).15

 

The treaty right can be accorded to a single third State, or to a group of

3

States to which it belongs, or to all States. It follows from this formulation

 

that the beneficiary State must not be designated by name, provided that

 

the context or the surrounding circumstances make it clear which States are

 

intended.16

 

 

2. Issues of Consent

 

 

As in Article 35 (q.v., N. 3), two conditions must be met for the right to arise:

4

the o er and the acceptance (N. 4–5). First, the parties to the treaty must

 

intend the provision to accord that right. The intention is to be under-

 

stood as a written invitation, or proposal, to a third State to participate in the

 

operation of a provision of the treaty. Once the right has been enunciated in

 

the treaty, the parties are estopped from individually refusing to accord the

 

right to the third State.17

 

 

The second condition is that the third State assents to the right so granted.

5

No State is bound to exercise the right.18 Indubitably, assent means consent

 

which, therefore, constitutes the basis for the right, rather than the treaty itself.19 Thus, Article 36 (as Article 35, N. 2) again introduces the notion of a “collateral” agreement in respect of the right accorded by the treaty parties to the third State. A confirmation herefor can be found in Article 34 which requires consent also in respect of the creation of rights for third States (q.v., N. 8). However, consent can take many forms, it may be express, informal or even tacit.20 As one particular form, Article 36 envisages that the third State’s assent shall be presumed. The third State may at any time, subject to the

15See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 196, para. 63; left open by Reuter, Introduction N. 161.

16Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 25, para. 21; Sir Humphrey Waldock‘s statement in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 196, para. 61; Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 81 (Article 20, para. 2); see also Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 637.

17Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 194 I 86, para. 65; Cahier, ibid.; Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 90.

18Sir Humphrey Waldock in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 196, para. 55.

19YBILC 1966 II 229, para. 7; also Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 18 f; Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 76; Schweisfurth, ZaöRV 45 (1985) 664 (“rigid consensualism”); contra Sinclair, Vienna Convention 102; Jiménez de Aréchaga, RC 159 (1978 I) 50 .

20See the statement in Vienna by the then USSR delegation, OR 1968 CoW 194, para. 38; Waldock, ibid. 196, para. 55; Rozakis, ibid. 19, who writes here of the “most rudimentary” character of consent.

ZACHARIAS

486

article

conditions explained (N. 6), avail itself of the right which, in the meantime, remains inactive.21

6The third State may only avail itself of the right so long as the contrary is not indicated, the burden of proof falling on the treaty parties.22 The third State may indicate the contrary by outrightly rejecting the right, by waiving it, or by not complying with the conditions stated in the treaty for the exercise of the right (N. 8). Can the lapse of time amount to an indication to the contrary? In principle, no such limitation transpires from Article 35;23 the test would rather appear to be whether the State refrains from using the right when a particular occasion herefor arises.24 Any danger of abuse is counterbalanced by the requirement of good faith according to which, inter alia, a right which has been forfeited may no longer be claimed (venire contra factum proprium).25 Once the third State has rejected the right, the latter no longer exists and can only be re-established by a new agreement.26

3. Residual Character

7Article 36 is residual in that the conditions in particular as to consent only apply unless the treaty otherwise provides.27 Thus, the treaty may express itself on the manner in which assent shall be shown, including tacit consent and the actual exercise of the right, and whether the third State shall avail itself of the right within a particular time-limit.

4. Conditions for Exercise of Right (Para. 2)

8A State non-party is not obliged to exercise a right established in the treaty. However, a State exercising a right in accordance with paragraph 1 shall

21Rozakis, ibid.; the statement by Lachs in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 78, para. 95. The third State’s consent is assumed and exists, until the contrary is indicated (N. 6); see Aust, Modern Treaty Law 257; contra Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 90.

22Napoletano, ibid. 84.

23Statement by Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 81, para. 24. In 1966 the ILC proposed a limitation in time (“unless after becoming aware of the provision [the third State] indicates the contrary, its assent shall be presumed”), ibid. 171, para. 2, though this was dropped, ibid. 173, para. 26.

24Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 26, para. 22; Waldock’s statement in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 81, para. 14; contra Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 84.

25See Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 19; statement by Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 85, para. 48.

26Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 26, para. 22; Rozakis, ibid. 24. The new agreement may be informal.

27Rozakis, ibid. 19; the statement in Vienna by the Polish delegation, OR 1969 CoW 195, para. 42.

ZACHARIAS

treaties providing for rights for third states

487

comply with the conditions for its exercise provided for in the treaty.28

Indeed, if the third State does not comply, or no longer complies, with the conditions, this would indicate a lack of consent (N. 6).29 In practice, these conditions may often be laid down outside the treaty, i.e., during the treaty’s negotiations or after its conclusion (for instance, in an understanding or an agreement), in which case the conditions shall be established in conformity with the treaty.30 The third State may refuse the right on the grounds that the subsequent conditions no longer comply with the treaty in that, for instance, they curtail or amend the right.31

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

Article 36 has to be read together with Articles 34 (q.v., N. 10), 35 and 37.

9

The last mentioned provision plays a particular part in respect of the revoca-

 

tion of a right.

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Article 36 does not deal with the most-favoured-nation clause. Such a clause

10

is a treaty provision under which a State undertakes the obligation towards

 

another State to accord it, or to persons, the most-favoured-nation treatment in an agreed sphere.32

The di erence to Article 36 lies therein that, while a third State may appear to be a beneficiary of a right under a treaty concluded between two other States, the benefit in fact does not arise from the treaty which contains the substance of the benefit in question, but from the agreement containing the most favoured-nation clause.33 A proposal

28T his formulation appears self-evident, but needed to be stated, Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 26, para. 24; see also Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 81 (Article 20, para. 3); statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 179, para. 55.

29Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 20; Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 77; statement by Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 179, para. 58.

30See the examples in the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 229, para. 8; statements by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 178, para. 38; and Lachs, ibid. para. 41.

31See the ILC Report 1966, ibid.

32E. Ustor, Most-Favoured-Nation Clause, EPIL 3 (1997) 469 . On the subject also Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 20 f; Verdross/Simma N. 763.

33See the statement in Vienna by the Japanese delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 61, para. 22.

ZACHARIAS

488

article

in Vienna to include the clause in Article 36 was withdrawn.34 In 1978 the ILC adopted its Draft Articles on Most-Favoured-Nation Clauses.35

3. Customary Basis of Article 36

11Like Article 34 (q.v., N. 12), Article 36 without doubt codified a pre-existing customary rule.36 Its customary basis is not called in question by the fact that it resolves a pre-1969 doctrinal dispute by requiring consent as the basis of the right to be granted to the third State (N. 1).37

D. APPRECIATION

12It is striking how Articles 35 and 36, seemingly parallel in content, follow di erent structures. They are the results of long discussions in the ILC as to the legal basis in particular of the right to be granted to the third State (N. 1). The looser requirements as to consent in Article 36 can be explained by the fact that ex hypothesi a right cannot be imposed on a third State.38 The conditions of assent (N. 5–6) appear useful in cases where a treaty proposes rights to a large group of States, or all States, and it cannot be expected from each individual State expressly to articulate its consent.39

34On the express understanding of the Conference that Article 36, para. 1, “did not a ect the interests of States under the most-favoured-nation system”, OR 1969 Plenary 63, para. 36.

35Draft articles and commentary reproduced in YBILC 1978 II/2 33 .

36Ballreich, EPIL 4 (2000) 947.

37Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 637; Jennings/Watts N. 626 at n. 16. A confirmation herefor can be seen in the rejection of the Finnish amendment in Vienna in 1968 (N. 1 i.f.).

38See the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 87; di erently Neuhold, DGVR 28 (1988) 56.

39Statement in Vienna by the Polish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 195, para. 43.

ZACHARIAS

Article 37

Revocation or modification of obligations or rights of third States

1.When an obligation has arisen for a third State in conformity with Article 35, the obligation may be revoked or modified only with the consent of the parties to the treaty and of the third State, unless it is established that they had otherwise agreed.

2.When a right has arisen for a third State in conformity with Article 36, the right may not be revoked or modified by the parties if it is established that the right was intended not to be revocable or subject to modification without the consent of the third State.

Article 37 Révocation ou modification d’obligations ou de droits d’Etats tiers

1.Au cas où une obligation est née pour un Etat tiers conformément à l’article 35, cette obligation ne peut être révoquée ou modifiée que par le consentement des parties au traité et de l’Etat tiers, à moins qu’il ne soit établi qu’ils en étaient convenus autrement.

2.Au cas où un droit est né pour un Etat tiers conformément à l’article 36, ce droit ne peut pas être révoqué ou modifié par les parties s’il est établi qu’il était destiné

àne pas être révocable ou modifiable sans le consentement de l’Etat tiers.

Artikel 37 Aufhebung oder Änderung der Pflichten oder

Rechte von Drittstaaten

1.Ist nach Artikel 35 einem Drittstaat eine Verpflichtung erwachsen, so kann diese nur mit Zustimmung der Vertragsparteien und des Drittstaats aufgehoben oder geändert werden, sofern nicht feststeht, dass sie etwas anderes vereinbart hatten.

2.Ist nach Artikel 36 einem Drittstaat ein Recht erwachsen, so kann dieses von den Vertragsparteien nicht aufgehoben oder geändert werden, wenn feststeht, dass

490

article

beabsichtigt war, dass das Recht nur mit Zustimmung des Drittstaats aufgehoben oder geändert werden kann.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 33—Revocation or modification of obligations or rights of third States

1.When an obligation has arisen for a third State in conformity with Article 31, the obligation may be revoked or modified only with the mutual consent of the parties to the treaty and of the third State, unless it is established that they had otherwise agreed.

2.When a right has arisen for a third State in conformity with Article 32, the right may not be revoked or modified by the parties if it is established that the right was intended not to be revocable or subject to modification without the consent of the third State.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 62, para. 3.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 80 , 173 , 179 , 238, 331.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 61.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 61.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 82 , 174 , 316, 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 33.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 197, 443; OR 1969 Plenary 63.

Vienna Conference Vote: 100:0:0

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 34, q.v.):

P. d’Argent, Article 36, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1493 .

ZACHARIAS

 

modification of obligations or rights of third states

491

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction (see Article 34, N. 1)

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

1

B. Interpretation of Article 37 ............................................................

2

1.

Common Terms ..............................................................................

2

2.

Obligations (Para. 1) ........................................................................

4

3.

Rights (Para. 2) ................................................................................

6

C. Context ...............................................................................................

10

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

10

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

11

3.

Customary Basis of Article 37 ...........................................................

12

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

13

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

(see Article 34, N. 1)

2. History

At the outset, Waldock Report III of 1964 concerned only the revocation 1 and modification of rights conferred on a third State.1 In the ILC a discussion arose as to whether the treaty parties could withdraw a right without the third State’s consent (Article 36, N. 1). The resulting ILC Draft 1964 contained

a single rule covering both obligations and rights as well as stipulating that revocation or modification depended on the consent of the third State unless the treaty provision itself was intended to be revocable.2 This was criticised by Governments as factually granting a right of veto to the third State.3 In 1966 the ILC aimed at combining two concerns: the rule should allow the treaty parties su cient room to revoke or modify a right which they had conveyed in the first place; and the rule should not foster uncertainty in the relations

1 YBILC 1964 II 19 , 26, para. 23; see Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 81 (Article 20, para. 4); YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 1.

2 YBILC 1964 II 184; see YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 1. 3 YBILC 1966 II 71 .

ZACHARIAS

492

article

between the treaty parties and the third State.4 The resulting compromise, today’s version, emerged late in the debate.5 The ILC Draft 1966 attracted two statements in Vienna in 1968, and none at all in 1969.6 Article 37 was adopted by 100 votes to none.7

B.INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 37

1.Common Terms

2Article 37 concerns the revocation or modification of obligations or rights of third States. In the case of revocation, the obligations or rights are repealed or cancelled and cease to exist;8 in the case of modification they are amended though they remain in force. In practice, it is conceivable that the treaty parties may wish to grant an irrevocable right to the third State.9 Revocation or modification may become topical after a particular period of time, or if a particular condition has been fulfilled, or at any time if the third State or the treaty parties so wish. Article 37 mentions in paras. 1 and 2 only few requirements as to the procedures thereby to be followed (N. 4–9) which for the rest, it can be assumed, may be informal. The revocation or modification concern the obligations and rights themselves (enshrined in the original “collateral” agreement between the treaty parties and the third States, Article 34, N. 6), rather than the treaty provisions in respect of which the treaty parties remain the masters.10

The use of the term “modification” in Article 37 thus di ers, for instance, from that employed in Article 41 which implies an amendment inter se (q.v., N. 5).11

3Article 37 assumes that an obligation or a right has arisen for a third State in conformity with Articles 35 and 36, respectively. In other words, which-

4 Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 24; the debate is reproduced at YBILC 1966 I/2 82 .

5YBILC 1966 I/2 174 f; the debate can be found ibid. 82 . Para. 1 was adopted by 16 votes to none, with two abstentions; para. 2 by 15 votes to one, with two abstentions,

ibid. 176, para. 79.

6 OR 1968 CoW 197, paras. 67 f; OR 1969 Plenary 63. The ILC Draft 1966 is at YBILC 1966 II 230.

7 OR 1969 63, para. 36.

8 T he expression “termination” was considered as being legally too complex; see Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 180, para. 71.

9 Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 26, para. 23.

10See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 2.

11T he term “amend” was dropped in view of its connexion with Articles 39 and 40 (q.v.); see Rosenne, YBILC 1966 I/2 89, para. 20. The term “modification” appears unclear since the obligation or right to be amended necessarily involves the third States as well as all treaty parties.

ZACHARIAS

modification of obligations or rights of third states

493

ever State invokes Article 37 must demonstrate that the obligation or right exists, i.e., the treaty parties have made their o er and the third State has duly given its consent thereto in the manner prescribed by these provisions: according to Article 35 (q.v., N. 3) express consent is required, whereas according to Article 36 (q.v., N. 5–6) consent may under certain conditions even be presumed.12

2. Obligations (Para. 1)

 

Para. 1 provides that the obligation may be revoked or modified only

4

with the consent of the parties to the treaty and of the third State. Thus,

 

para. 1 places all States concerned on an equal level in that general consent

 

is required.13 The initiative to revoke or modify may well come from the

 

third State itself rather than from the treaty parties14 (which, on the other

 

hand, need to act jointly).15 In contrast to Article 35, consent need not be

 

given in writing.16

 

In practice, it appears unlikely that the third State, faced with the proposal to revoke

 

or modify an obligation, will fail to give its consent.17 Indeed, since the third State’s

 

obligation usually amounts to a right for the treaty parties which they will be then

 

renouncing, it was even argued in the ILC that the third State’s consent was superflu-

 

ous.18 If, on the other hand, the treaty parties or the third State refuse to agree and the

 

other side nevertheless proceeds with the revocation or modification, this would amount

 

to a breach of the collateral agreement between the treaty parties and the third State.

 

These conditions apply unless it is established that they, i.e., the treaty parties

5

and the third State, had otherwise agreed. Para. 1 is, therefore, residual in

 

nature.19 It may be agreed, e.g., that the obligation can be revoked or modified

 

unilaterally by either the treaty parties or the third State. Such conditions may

 

transpire from the treaty provisions, from the collateral agreement between the treaty parties and the third State, or from any other document, such as correspondence between the di erent States.20 In order to establish the States’ intention, resort may be had to the means of interpretation in Articles 31 and 32 (q.v.; see also N. 7).

12Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 23.

13ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 3.

14Ibid., para. 2; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 175, para. 56.

15See the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 175, para. 60.

16Very likely, this was overlooked at the Conference where the requirement of written consent in Article 35 was introduced at a late stage (see Article 35, N. 1).

17But see Wetzel 126.

18Ibid.

19Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 23.

20For this reason, the narrower formulation “if it appears from the treaty” was eventually dropped in the ILC, as texts other than the treaty might also be taken into account to establish the agreement; see Ago, YBILC 1966 I/2 88, paras. 23 and 25.

ZACHARIAS

494

article

3. Rights (Para. 2)

6Para. 2 deals with the negative situation where the right may not be revoked or modified by the parties. It follows that the right at issue may be changed in all other cases not covered by the further two conditions of para. 2 (N. 7–8). Importantly, para. 2 addresses solely the treaty parties (acting jointly),21 the third State is not implicated22—which is not surprising since the latter cannot be obliged to exercise the right.23 In particular, the third State is at any time free unilaterally to indicate that it does not wish to avail itself of the right (Article 36, N. 6).24

7The two conditions listed in para. 2 for the right to be irrevocable or not subject to modification are again mentioned negatively (N. 7–8). First, it must be established that the right was intended not to be revocable or subject to modification. In other words, if a right is to continue to remain unchanged, it must be established that this was indeed the intention of all States concerned.25 (If, on the other hand, all States intended the right to be revocable or subject to modification, then the States can proceed to revoke or modify the right as envisaged.)

This intention can be established within the framework of the means of interpretation in Articles 31 and 32 (q.v.), i.e., the treaty provisions, the collateral agreement and any other relevant document, and bearing in mind the treaty’s object and purpose and any subsequent practice.26

8Second, it must also be established by these means that all States concerned intended the right not to be altered without the consent of the third State. In other words, if the right is to be changed, it must be shown that the third State’s consent was necessary herefor.27 (If, on the other hand, it transpires that no such consent is required, the treaty parties may proceed to revoke or modify the right on their own.) Finally, only once these conditions have been established, does the question arise whether or not the third State will actually consent to the right’s revocation or modification. In this specific situation,

21Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, ibid. 175, para. 60. See the application of the principle in Article 37, para. 2 to individuals in Commission of the European Communities v. Council of the European Communities, BYBIL 49 (1974–1975) 404 f.

22See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 4.

23Wetzel 126. These considerations presume that the third State has already availed itself of the right under Article 36 and that there is a “collateral” agreement between the States concerned (N. 2).

24Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 175, para. 57.

25Also of the third State, since its consent has been presumed (Article 36, N. 5).

26See also Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 640.

27See the “positive” formulation of Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 23; the nuances in Napoletano, ItalYBIL 3 (1977) 79 f.

ZACHARIAS

modification of obligations or rights of third states

495

the consent amounts to a “right of veto”; for if the third State refuses, the treaty parties may not revoke or modify the right.

The third State’s “right of veto” must be seen in its wider context. As Fitzmaurice pointed out, if the parties have undertaken to maintain the treaty in force indefinitely or not to terminate or modify it without the consent of the third State, then this is part of the very right which the third State enjoys objectively in consequence of the treaty. This expectation stands on the same footing as the substantive content of the right.28

In view of these particular conditions, para. 2 equally appears residual (N. 5)

9

and in fact stipulates a presumption in favour of revocation or modification

 

without consent of the third State.29 The third State wishing to maintain

 

the contrary will need to demonstrate both that the right was intended to be

 

revocable or subject to modification and that its consent was required.

 

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

As its text suggests (N. 3), Article 37 complements Articles 35 and 36

10

(q.v.) in the important respects of revocation or modification of rights and

 

obligations.30

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Article 37 does not cover the suspension of obligations and rights a orded to

11

third States or the situation where there is a change of circumstances.31

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 37

 

Article 37 (as Articles 34–36, q.v.) sets out novel details which do not, how-

12

ever, appear to call in question the conclusion that this provision generally

 

codified a pre-existing customary rule.32

 

28Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 104, p. 90. Schweisfurth, ZaöRV 45 (1985) 665, speaks in this context of “rigid consensualism”.

29Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 23; Neuhold, Berichte DGVR 28 (1988) 57; di erently Wetzel 129.

30Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I/2 82, para. 33; Yasseen, YBILC 1966 I/2 54, para. 74.

31Statements by Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 89, para. 20; and Bartos, ibid. 92, para. 50.

32Cahier, RC 143 (1974 III) 640; Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 24.

ZACHARIAS

496

article

D. APPRECIATION

13Paras. 1 and 2 of Article 37, although seemingly parallel in content, follow di erent structures: the considerations a ecting revocation or modification of an obligation are not identical with those applicable in the case of a right (see Article 36, N. 1).33 Para. 1 of Article 37 contains a comparatively straightforward formulation, whereas the triple negative34 employed in para. 2 makes for inelegant drafting and a rather complex provision. Of course, para. 2 is the direct result of a compromise in the ILC (N. 1) which also explains why, exceptionally, the early ILC materials are less helpful in the interpretation of Article 37. Still, at least three positive assets transpire: (i) para. 2 corresponds neatly with the condition in Article 36 that the third State may tacitly assent to the right; (ii) the solution chosen provides for a measure of “solidity and firmness”35 while balancing the interest of the treaty parties in creating rights in favour of third States;36 and (iii) para. 2 o ers treaty parties the necessary flexibility when a ording rights for groups of third States, or for all States.

33See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 2.

34I.e., “may not be revoked”; “was intended not to be revocable” and “without the consent”.

35See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230, para. 4.

36Ibid.

ZACHARIAS

Article 38

Rules in a treaty becoming binding on third States through international custom

Nothing in Articles 34 to 37 precludes a rule set forth in a treaty from becoming binding upon a third State as a customary rule of international law, recognised as such.

Article 38 Règles d’un traité devenant obligatoires pour des Etats tiers par la formation d’une coutume internationale

Aucune disposition des articles 34 à 37 ne s’oppose à ce qu’une règle énoncée dans un traité devienne obligatoire pour un Etat tiers en tant que règle coutumière de droit international reconnue comme telle.

Artikel 38 Vertragsregeln, die für Drittstaaten durch internationale Gewohnheit verbindlich werden

Keine Bestimmung der Artikel 34 bis 37 schliesst aus, dass eine in einem Vertrag festgelegte Regel für einen Drittstaat als eine Regel des Völkergewohnheitsrechts verbindlich wird, wenn sie als solche anerkannt ist.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 34—Rules in a treaty becoming binding through international custom

Nothing in Articles 30 to 33 precludes a rule set forth in a treaty from becoming binding upon a third State as a customary rule of international law.

498

article

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 64.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 109 , 204, 331 f.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 62.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 62.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 91 , 176 , 316 f, 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 34.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 197 , 444; OR 1969 Plenary 58, 63 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 83:13:7

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 34 and in Issues of Customary International Law, q.v.):

B-M

R.R.Baxter, Treaties and Custom, RC 129 (1970 I) 25 ; R. Bernhardt, Custom and Treaty in the Law of the Sea, RC 205 (1987 V) 247 ; H. Caminos/M.R. Molitor, Progressive Development of International Law and the Package Deal, AJIL 79 (1985) 871 ; K. Doehring, Gewohnheitsrecht aus Verträgen, ZaöRV 36 (1976) 77 ; G.E. do Nascimento e Silva, Treaties as Evidence of Customary International Law, in: Essays in Honour of R. Ago ( 987) 387 ; G. Gaja, Article 38, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1505 ; M. Mendelson, The International Court of Justice and the Sources of International Law, in: V. Lowe/M. Fitzmaurice (eds.), Fifty Years of the International Court of Justice. Essays in Honour of Sir Robert Jennings (1996) 63 ; Th. Meron, The Geneva Conventions as Customary Law, AJIL 81 (1987) 348 ; Id., The Continuing Role of Custom in the Formation of International Humanitarian Law, AJIL 90 (1996) 238 .

S-T

M. Sassòli, Bedeutung einer Kodifikation für das allgemeine Völkerrecht mit besonderer Berücksichtigung der Regeln zum Schutze der Zivilbevölkerung vor den Auswirkungen von Feindseligkeiten (1990); O. Schachter, Entangled Treaty and Custom, in: Y. Dinstein/ M. Tabory (eds.), International Law at a Time of Perplexity. Essays in Honour of Sh. Rosenne (1989) 717 ; S.P. Sharma, Treaties as a Source of International Law, IJIL 19 (1979) 500 ; L.B. Sohn, Unratified Treaties as a Source of Customary International Law, in: A. Bos/ H. Siblesz (eds.), Realism in Law-Making. Essays on International Law in Honour of W. Riphagen (1986) 231 ; H. Torrione, L’influence des conventions de codification sur la coutume en droit international public (1989).

ZACHARIAS

 

rules in a treaty becoming binding on third states

499

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 38 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Relationship to the pacta tertiis-Rule .................................................

3

 

2.

Generation of Customary Law .........................................................

4

 

3.

Function of Article 38 ......................................................................

8

 

C. Reservations .......................................................................................

10

 

D. Context ...............................................................................................

11

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

11

 

2.

Customary Basis of Article 38 ...........................................................

12

 

E. Appreciation .......................................................................................

13

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

Authors have long recognised that written rules may create or generate new

1

customary law (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 28–29).1 Courts

 

have approached the matter more cautiously. An early and well-known case is the 1946 judgment of the International Military Tribunal at Nuremberg which found that, although several belligerents of the Second World War had not become parties to the 1907 Hague Convention (IV), certain of its articles “were recognized by all civilized nations, and were regarded as being declaratory of the laws and customs of war”.2 The richest contribution to a theory of generation can be found in the 1969 North Sea Continental Shelf Cases in which Denmark and the Netherlands had contended, inter alia, that Article 6, para. 2 of the 1958 Continental Shelf Convention, enunciating the equidistance principle for the delimitation of continental shelves, had generated new customary law and was, as such, binding on Germany which was not a party to that Convention. The Court depicted the process of generation as follows:

1See the early authors F. Pollock, The Sources of International Law, Columbia LR 2 (1902) 51 ; E. Roxburgh, Third Parties and International Convention (1917); G. Scelle, Précis

de droit des gens, principes et systematique (1932) II 367 , 374. 2 Reproduced in AJIL 41 (1947) 248.

ZACHARIAS

500

article

“[a] norm-creating provision which has constituted the foundation of, or has generated a rule which, while only conventional or contractual in its origin, has since passed into the general corpus of international law, and is now accepted as such by the opinio juris, so as to have become binding even for countries which have never, and do not, become parties to the Convention”,3

though it went on to conlude that in casu “the subsequent e ect [of Article 6, para. 2 had not been] constitutive of such a rule; and that State practice up-to-date [had] equally been insu cient for the purpose”.4 The Court again referred to the concept of generation in the 1982 Continental Shelf (Tunisia/Libya) Case.5

2. History

2Fitzmaurice Report V of 1960 contained a provision dealing with the combined e ects of codification and the creation, or generation, of new customary international law.6 Waldock Report III introduced a similar concept in 1964, albeit restricted to generation.7 The ILC gave near-unanimous approval to this provision while again extending it beyond generation so as to cover all treaty rules declaratory of customary law.8 Late in 1966 the ILC reverted to Waldock’s original proposal.9 In 1968 in Vienna most delegations accepted the concept. Negative comments considered the provision to be ill-placed in a convention on the law of treaties. In 1969 the discussions concerned, inter alia, whether or not the notion of general principles of law should be included.10 Article 38 was adopted by 88 votes to 13, with seven abstentions.11

3 ICJ Reports 1969 41, para. 71.

4 Ibid. 45, para. 81.

5Where the Court stated, inter alia: “multilateral conventions may have an important role to play in recording . . . rules deriving from custom, or indeed in developing them” (italics added ), ICJ Reports 1985 29, para. 27. The Military and Paramilitary Activities (Nicaragua/USA) Case, ICJ Reports 1987 14, 98–102, 106–109, appears less pertinent here since the principles of the non-use of force and of non-intervention paralleled the UN Charter qua customary law, whereas Article 38 concerns the generation of new customary law; but

see Tomuschat, RC 241 (1993 IV) 259. 6 YBILC 1960 II 80 .

7 YBILC 1964 II 34.

8 Ibid. 184.

9 YBILC 1966 I/2 91 ; 1966 II 230 f.

10OR 1968 CoW 197 ; and OR 1969 Plenary 63 ; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 9 f.

11OR 1969 Plenary 71, para. 34.

ZACHARIAS

rules in a treaty becoming binding on third states

501

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 38

 

 

1. Relationship to the pacta tertiis-Rule

 

 

Article 38 falls to be distinguished from Articles 34 to 37 (q.v.). Article 34

3

enshrines the general rule pacta tertiis nec nocent nec prosunt. Articles 35

 

to 37 list qualifications to Article 34 in cases where the treaty provides for

 

rights and duties of a third State. Articles 34 to 37 focus upon third States as

 

non-parties and thus di er from Article 38 which concerns the formation of

 

customary law binding on all States, whether parties or non-parties, occur-

 

ring through treaty rules.12

 

 

2. Generation of Customary Law

 

 

Article 38 indicates the process of generation, namely that a rule set forth in

4

a treaty becomes binding on third States as a customary rule of interna-

 

tional law.13 A new customary rule will arise with the same substance as the

 

treaty rule. The process thus di ers from codification, where the written rule

 

is, already at the outset, declaratory of, and reflects, customary law (Issues of

 

Customary International Law, N. 19). It is irrelevant in this context whether

 

or not the treaty itself has entered into force.

 

 

Article 38 appears imprecise insofar as it refers to rules becoming binding

 

on third States. Obviously, the provision is referring to States which are not

 

parties to the treaty concerned.14 However, general customary law is necessarily

 

binding on all States and applicable also to the parties of a treaty.15

 

 

The term “generation” or “creation” by means of a treaty provision of a

5

customary rule may neatly illustrate the formative process of customary law.

 

The treaty rule nevertheless has only a stimulating function and will not per se engender a customary rule. It is State practice and opinio juris which give rise to the new customary rule.16 These constituent elements of customary law can

12Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 27, para. 2; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 91, para. 62; the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 924.

13For more details on this section, see Villiger, Manual N. 255 , and passim.

14See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 230 (“binding upon other States by way of custom”, italics added).

15For instance, among the parties in the case of reservations (see the situation in the Continental Shelf Arbitration [France/UK], ILR 54 [1979] 2 ff ) or in the relations between parties and non-parties; Tomuschat, RC 241 (1993 IV) 257.

16Article 16, para. 1 of Fitzmaurice Report V, YBILC 1960 II 94, para. 58; Baxter, RC 129 (1970 I) 73; Weil, RGDIP 86 (1982) 36; Ballreich, EPIL 4 (2000) 947; the criteria listed in the North Sea Continental Shelf Cases, ICJ Reports 1969 42 .

ZACHARIAS

502

article

be found in particular where non-parties, even without express reference to the treaty rule, continuously apply inter se or vis-à-vis the parties the substance of the treaty rule qua customary law (or qua emerging customary law.)

6A Syrian amendment at the 1968 Vienna Conference introduced the terms “recognised as such”.17 It has been suggested that these words reflect a voluntarist approach to customary law (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 11).18

However, the formulation would indicate, at most, that the alleged existence of a customary rule must be ascertained. It is not stipulated that every State need recognise the rule (and even if it were, it would not be made clear whether the acceptance need be express or tacit). The formulation di ers little from Article 38, subpara. 1(b) of the ICJ-Statute and corresponds with the traditional formula of “generally recognised” customary law. Finally, Article 38 does not define the conditions of the customary process (N. 9).19

7Generation cannot be viewed as a “short cut”20 to customary law, and the process was never depicted as such in the North Sea Cases (N. 1). However, the present conditions of the preparation of multilateral conventions, inter alia, the relations of the drafting body with the States, and the incidence of diplomatic conferences, may contribute to an accelerated development of customary law. The merits of jus scriptum, such as the accessibility of the written word, also facilitate the process.21 For the same reasons, the formation of new customary law is not limited to any particular stage in the evolution of a written rule, as the North Sea Cases aptly illustrate.22

3. Function of Article 38

8Customary law, like any source of law, requires norms establishing the manner in which its rules evolve, change or fall into desuetude (“rules on rules”). Hence, the conditions of generation can themselves be circumscribed in a rule which indubitably exists qua customary law. The question arises whether such a rule has been codified in Article 38.

17OR Documents 155, para. 311; OR 1968 CoW 197 ; the amendment was adopted by 59 votes to 15, with 17 abstentions.

18H. Neuhold, Die Wiener Vertragsrechtskonvention 1969, AVR 15 (1971) 34.

19See Rozakis, ZaöRV 35 (1975) 32, 34; di erently Schweisfurth, ZaöRV 45 (1985) 662 .

20Jennings, Essays Friedmann 168.

21Villiger, Manual N. 63, 169 .

22T he Court distinguished in ICJ Reports 1969 37, para. 60, three conceivable situations: “[i]t is necessary to examine the status of the principle [in Article 6, para. 2 of the 1958 Convention] as it stood when the Convention was drawn up, as it resulted from the e ect of the Convention, and in the light of State practice subsequent to the Convention”.

ZACHARIAS

rules in a treaty becoming binding on third states

503

 

The text of Article 38, in particular the terms “nothing . . . precludes”,

9

discloses no intention of stating how customary law can be generated, and

 

indeed, apart from a reference to the original written rule, Article 38 men-

 

tions no prerequisites for the process.23 Consequently, Article 38 merely

 

serves as a saving clause (see the eighth preambular para., Preamble, N. 16)

 

and reminder that the process is feasible, without entering into the matter in

 

any detail. The provision possesses no normative quality and does not enjoy

 

binding force qua contractual obligation. The travaux préparatoires confirm

 

the view that this provision is intended solely as a “general reservation”

 

regarding customary law.24

 

 

C. RESERVATIONS

 

 

Upon signing the Convention on 23 May 1969, Costa Rica and Guatemala

10

made reservations to Article 38. Objections filed by various States did not,

 

however, intend to preclude the entry into force of the Convention between the various States (Reservations and Declarations to the Convention and Objections Thereto, q.v.).25

It appears di cult to understand Guatemala’s general reservation in view of the manner in which customary international law comes about (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 2–17). In respect of Costa Rica’s reservation, it can indeed not be excluded that regional international law has priority as lex specialis over general international law.26

D. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

The relationship with Articles 34–37 has been discussed above (N. 3). Articles 11 4 and 43 (q.v.) also contain a “saving clause” in respect of customary law.

23Wetzel 152.

24See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 201, para. 43; Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 27, paras. 2 ; Article 34 of the ILC Draft 1966, YBILC 1966 II 231, para. 3.

25See e.g., by Austria, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Sweden and the United Kingdom.

26Villiger, Manual N. 81–83.

ZACHARIAS

504

article

2. Customary Basis of Article 38

12At the Vienna Conference, it was suggested that Article 38 codified the rule on the creation of new customary law via treaty rules.27 However, it has been argued here that Article 38 possesses no normative quality and merely serves as a “general reservation” of the conditions of the formation of customary law, without entering into the matter in any detail (N. 8).

E. APPRECIATION

13The fact that Article 38 merely serves as a “general reservation” (N. 9) does not imply its irrelevance. To the contrary, the provision confirms that the process of generation must be regarded as feasible. The near-unanimous support which Article 38 received from the State community and the ILC (N. 2) demonstrates that the process of generation is well established among States.

27See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Colombia, OR 1968 CoW 200, para. 34; and Hungary, ibid. 199, para. 26. Waldock Report VI considered that the “article does not establish any new rule. It merely states . . . what is certainly the law”.

ZACHARIAS

PART IV

AMENDMENT AND

MODIFICATION OF TREATIES

ZACHARIAS

Article 39

General rule regarding the amendment of treaties

A treaty may be amended by agreement between the parties. The rules laid down in Part II apply to such an agreement except in so far as the treaty may otherwise provide.

Article 39 Règle générale relative à l’amendement des traités

Un traité peut être amendé par accord entre les parties. Sauf dans la mesure où le traité en dispose autrement, les règles énoncées dans la partie II s’appliquent à un tel accord.

Artikel 39 Allgemeine Regel über die Änderung von Verträgen

Ein Vertrag kann durch Übereinkunft zwischen den Vertragsparteien geändert werden. Teil II findet auf eine solche Übereinkunft insoweit Anwendung, als der Vertrag nichts anderes vorsieht.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 35—General rule regarding the amendment of treaties

A treaty may be amended by agreement between the parties. The rules laid down in Part II apply to such agreement except in so far as the treaty may otherwise provide.

Materials on Articles 39 and 40:

WALDOCK Report III: Articles 67–69.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 132 , 189 , 267 .

ILC Draft 1964: Article 65.

508

article

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 65.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 112 , 213 f, 330. ILC Draft 1966: Articles 35–36.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 201 , 453, 476; OR 1969 CoW 213, 333, 253 f; OR 1969 Plenary 59, 72.

Vienna Conference Vote:

Article 39: 86:0:0

Selected Literature:

A-D

A.O. Adede, Amendment Procedures for Conventions with Technical Annexes: The IMCO Experience, Virginia JIL 17 (1977) 201 ; R.B. Bilder, Managing the Risks of International Agreement (1981); M.J. Bowman, The Multilateral Amendment Process—A Case-Study, ICLQ 44 (1995) 540 ; B. Carnahan, Treaty Review Conferences, AJIL 81 (1987) 226; R. Churchill/G. Ulfstein, Autonomous Institutional Arrangements in Multilateral Environment Agreements: A Little-Noticed Phenomenon in International Law, AJIL 1994 (2000) 623 ; B. de Witte, Rules of Change in International Law: How Special is the European Community? NYBIL 25 (1994) 299 ; R.K. Dixit, Amendment or Modification of Treaties, IJIL 10 (1970) 37 ; Id., Amendment or Modification of Treaties, in: S.K. Agrawala (ed.), Essays on the Law of Treaties (1972) 25 .

F-S

J.A. Frowein, Are there Limits to the Amendment Procedures in Treaties Constituting International Organizations? in: G. Hafner et al. (eds.), Liber Amicorum I. Seidl-Hohen- veldern (1998) 201 ; W.G. Grewe, Treaties, Revision, EPIL 4 (2000) 980 ; G. Guarino, La revisione dei trattati (1971); N. Kontou, The Termination and Revision of Treaties in the Light of New Customary International Law (1994); B. Koremenos, Loosening the Ties that Bind: A Learning Model of Agreement Flexibility, International Organization 55 (2001) 289 ; E.J. Pan, Authoritative Interpretation of Agreements: Developing More Responsible International Administrative Regimes, Harvard LJ 38 (1997) 503 ; V.M. Rangel, Emendas de tratados internacionais, Revista trimestral de direito publico 8 (1994) 5 ; Ph. Sands, Article 39, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1523 .

ZACHARIAS

 

general rule regarding the amendment of treaties

509

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 39 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

3

 

2.

Agreement ........................................................................................

6

 

3.

Amendment Procedures (Relationship to Part II) .............................

9

 

C. Amendment of the Convention .......................................................

12

 

D. Context ...............................................................................................

13

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

13

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

14

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 39 ...........................................................

15

 

E. Appreciation .......................................................................................

16

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

Traditionally, the amendment of a treaty required the agreement of all treaty

1

parties.1 Eventually, more flexibility was achieved when practices developed

 

enabling some parties to a treaty to modify multilateral treaties inter se, the original treaty remaining in force for the other parties which did not accept the amendment (Article 41, N. 1). Also, certain multilateral treaties—namely the constituent instruments of international organisations—could be modified by a qualified majority of the parties (e.g., Article 108 of the UN Charter).2 A distinction was regularly made between the amendment of certain provisions of the treaty and the revision of the entire treaty. Over time, however, the term “revision” obtained di erent overtones. In the 19th century some of the treaties concluded at the 1815 Vienna Congress were subsequently “revised” by the Great Powers without the consent of the signatories to the

1On pre-ILC literature, see P.H. von Escher, Die Revision der internationalen Vereinbarungen (1947); R. Yakemtchouk, La révision des traités multilatéraux en droit international,

RGDIP 60 (1956) 337 .

2Aust, Modern Treaty Law 262 f; Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 48 f, paras. 4, 6; Grewe, EPIL 4 (2000) 981.

ZACHARIAS

510

article

Final Act.3 Again, in the first half of the 20th century, the revision of treaties was closely associated with the (ultimately failed) concept of peaceful change which, as implied in Article 19 of the Covenant of the League of Nations, aimed at the revision of unjust or unequal treaties.4 On the whole, the amendment and modification of treaties have attracted comparatively little interest among authors, not least as these issues are often considered matters for politics and diplomacy.5 Often, amendment and modification are seen mainly as technicalities of procedure.6 The Institut, which addressed the matter in 1961, concluded that there were no specific rules regarding the process of amending treaties in international law.7

2. History

2Somewhat surprisingly, Fitzmaurice did not take up the topic in his reports. It was first broached in Articles 67–69 of the Waldock Report III in 1964.8 These early provisions followed a di erent structure and had little resemblance to today’s Articles 39–41. The ensuing debate in the ILC in 1964 concentrated on the main procedural issues and conditions, touching on elementary aspects of stability and change.9 It was during this debate that the nucleus of the present Article 39 appeared.10 The ILC Draft of 1964 attracted comments by five Governments which criticised, inter alia, the priority granted to “established rules of an international organisation”.11 This reference was dropped in Waldock Report VI, the latter leading only to a short discussion in the ILC in 1966.12 Discussions at the Vienna Conference were equally brief;

3Grewe, EPIL 4 (2000) 981, 985; examples in Waldock Report III, ibid. 50, para. 13 at n. 243.

4Article 19 stated: “[t]he Assembly may from time to time advise the reconsideration by Members of the League of treaties which have become inapplicable and the consideration

of international conditions whose continuance might endanger the peace of the world”. 5 McNair, Law of Treaties 534; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 262.

6 See Blix/Emerson 223 , for various amendment clauses. See also Article 79 on the Correction of Errors in Texts or in Certified Copies of Treaties.

7 E. Giraud, Modification et terminaison des traités collectifs, Annuaire IDI 49 (1961 I) 5–297; Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 48, para. 3.

8 YBILC 1964 II 47 .

9E.g., the statement by Lachs in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 147, para. 5. In 1964 Waldock took a particularly active role in the discussions; see his statements at ibid. 154–157.

10Ibid. 189.

11Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 I/2 80 f, paras. 2 f.

12Ibid.; the discussion is reproduced in YBILC 1966 II 112 , and 213 .

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding the amendment of treaties

511

two amendments proposed by Ceylon and Chile were eventually withdrawn.13 Article 39 was adopted in Vienna by 86 votes to none.14

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 39

 

1. Scope

 

Part IV of the Convention (Articles 39–41) refers in its title to the amend-

3

ment and modification of treaties. An amendment, as in Articles 39 and

40, implies changes in the text of the treaty; it can concern parts of the treaty or its entirety. Modification, as in Article 41, relates to an agreement concluded inter se between some of the parties and intended to vary treaty provisions solely between them.15 In either case, changes may occur in respect of the treaty’s content or of its amending procedures (though Articles 39–41 themselves provide only procedural rules). While the terms in Articles 39–41 are employed uniformly, the parties are free to attach a special meaning to these terms.16

The purpose of the amendment or modification will be contra legem, if it intends to reverse a rule or principle contained in the original treaty. It it will be secundum legem, if the e ect of the amendment is to add something to the treaty which is consistent with it. Amendment praeter legem has the purpose of removing doubts which have arisen in respect of the interpretation or application of the treaty.17

Articles 39–41 thus refrain from using the term “revision” (as in Article 109 of the UN Charter) which is often employed for a general review of the entire treaty.18 Other terms falling outside these provisions are the “replacement” of the treaty (the old treaty is substituted by a new one); its “renewal” (the treaty is prolonged before its expiration) and its “reconfirmation” (requiring an express statement in the new treaty that a previous treaty remains valid).19 “Supplementary” treaties broaden or widen the original treaty.20 The “correction” of a treaty, as in Article 79 (q.v.), relates to any errors in the text.

13OR 1968 CoW 201 ; OR 1969 Plenary 72, para. 1 (no discussion). Ceylon wished to emphasise the relevance of any procedure envisaged by the treaty for its own amendment, OR Documents 156, para. 320. Chile proposed stating that a bilateral treaty could be amended “only by agreement between the parties”, ibid.

14OR 1969 Plenary 72, para. 1.

15See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 232, para. 3. Note that the term “modification” is employed in a di erent context in Article 37 (q.v., N. 2).

16Statement in the ILC by Rosenne, YBILC 1964 I 147, para. 10.

17Waldock in the ILC, ibid. para. 104.

18T he ILC was adamant that there was no uniform State practice in this respect; see its ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 323, para. 3. But see Karl, Vertrag 18 , 20.

19Dixit, IJIL 10 (1970) 38.

20Aust, Modern Treaty Law 273 f.

ZACHARIAS

512

article

4Article 39 contains the general rule regarding the amendment of treaties and must be read together with Articles 40 and 41 (q.v.). No specification as to the type of treaties is made in Article 39. Thus, Articles 39–41 all relate to multilateral treaties, whereas Article 39, in addition, concerns bilateral treaties.21

5The first sentence of Article 39 provides that a treaty may be amended. There are no unchangeable treaties.22 Where a treaty makes no provision for the duration of its existence (e.g., in terms of time, or depending on particular conditions),23 it can be amended at any time. Even where the treaty states conditions, e.g., a time-limit as to its amendment, the subsequent unanimous agreement of the parties can override this condition (Article 30, para. 3, N. 13).24

2. Agreement

6The amendment occurs by means of an agreement between the parties (occasionally called a Protocol). Strictly speaking, it is not the former treaty which is altered, rather a new treaty is concluded which supersedes (but does not substitute itself for) the previous one.25 The conception that a treaty may only be amended by a new and separate agreement derives from the notion of pacta sunt servanda according to which treaties remain in force during their existence (Article 26, N. 3).26 The agreement is between the parties, but not a priori—as for instance in Article 54, para. (b) (q.v., N. 7)—between all parties. (Only in the case of the amendment of bilateral treaties does Article 39 necessarily require the agreement of both—all—parties.)

This agreement between the parties has a threefold implication: (i) the original treaty may stipulate a qualified majority of treaty parties for its amendment; only where no such provision has been made, will the agreement of all parties be required; (ii) Article

21Statements by Waldock and Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 189, para. 58, and 195, para. 60, respectively; and by Briggs, YBILC 1966 I/2 114, para. 29.

22But see Issues of Customary International Law, N. 30–34.

23Examples in Blix/Emerson 223 ; e.g., Article 7 of the 1951 ANZUS Pact (“this treaty shall remain in force indefinitely”), in Grewe, EPIL 4 (2000) 982.

24Statements in the ILC in 1964 by Tunkin and de Luna, YBILC 1964 I 137, para. 55, and 146, paras. 71 f., respectively; see also I. Seidl-Hohenveldern, Hierarchy of Treaties, in: J. Klabbers/R. Lefeber (eds.), Essays on the Law of Treaties. A Collection of Essays in Honour of B. Vierdag (1998), 7 , 11 f.

25Statements in the ILC in 1964 by Tunkin, Rosenne and Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 145, para. 61; 148, para. 14; and 154, para. 23, respectively. But see Reuter, Introduction N. 204. For Grewe, EPIL 4 (2000) 982, the treaty’s amendment entails “for a logical second” the termination of the original treaty. But see Sinclair, Vienna Convention 108, for whom “the conclusion of a new treaty [is] opposed to the revision of an existing treaty”.

26Statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 143, para. 40.

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding the amendment of treaties

513

 

39 envisages the tacit acceptance of the amendment (N. 7); and (iii) Article 39 leaves

 

room for inter se-agreements as in Article 41 (q.v.).27

 

 

Article 39 does not require an equal act, an acte contraire, for the amendment

7

of the former treaty. It also does not stipulate that the treaty be amended

 

by the same authority. The term agreement serves as a common denomina-

 

tor of all forms of amending a treaty.28 It transpires in particular from the

 

materials of the Vienna Conference that the agreement need not be in writ-

 

ing;29 it may—notwithstanding any constitutional di culties30—be oral or

 

even tacit (Article 3, para. (b), N. 6)31 and can occur, for instance, by means

 

of subsequent practice (N. 14).32 As with any agreement, the amendment

 

agreement has no retroactive e ect (Article 28, q.v.). Treaty amendments

 

take e ect ex nunc.

 

 

In view of the two separate instruments, it may at times be di cult to establish whether

 

the subsequent agreement is at all modifying the original treaty (and, hence, requiring

 

compliance with the conditions in Articles 39–41), particularly if the later agreement

 

makes no reference to the treaty. In such a case, the substance of the two instruments

 

will have to be examined and compared in order to establish any di erence (N. 3).

 

The requirement of an agreement corresponds with the notion that a State

8

party not willing to amend the treaty will not be a ected by an amending

 

instrument33 which remains res inter alios acta (Articles 34, q.v.). Unilateral

 

action of a treaty party is irrelevant, though it may qualify as a breach of treaty (Article 60, q.v.).34 As Articles 40 and 41 readily confirm (and not unlike reservations, Article 19, N. 7), the amendment or modification of treaties may lead to a fragmentation of treaty relations.35 The relations between the parties to the various treaties are governed by Article 30 (q.v.).36

27ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 232, para. 4.

28Statements in the ILC by its Chairman, Ago, YBILC 1964 I 190, para. 69; and by Yasseen, ibid. 193, para. 23.

29E.g., the statements by the delegation of Australia, OR 1968 CoW 202, para. 65; and the US (Kearney), ibid. 203, para. 77; also by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, ibid. 204, para. 15.

30Adede, Virginia JIL 17 (1977) 201 .

31ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233, para. 4; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 107; Verdross/Simma N. 792; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 263. Contra Karl, Vertrag 341, 355.

32Amendment may also occur by means of customary law (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 30); di erently Delbrück/Wolfrum III 664.

33Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 142, para. 30; 155 f, para. 32; and 194, para. 41. Exceptions are, e.g., constituent instruments of international organisations requiring a qualified majority for their amendment.

34Dixit, IJIL 10 (1970) 37 .

35Sinclair, Vienna Convention 106. The result is not unlike the situation resulting from reservations to a treaty, Reuter, Introduction N. 205.

36But see the particular relationship between Articles 41 and 30, para. 5 (Article 41, N. 14).

ZACHARIAS

514

article

3. Amendment Procedures (Relationship to Part II)

9The issue arises which procedural rules apply to the amending agreement required in Article 39 (N. 6). The second sentence of Article 39 apparently proceeds from two situations (in fact, there are three, N. 10–11): first, the treaty in question may be silent and not specify the procedure to be chosen for its own amendment. In this case, the rules laid down in Part II apply to such an agreement. Since the rules in Part II relate to (written) “treaties” within the meaning of Article 2, subpara. 1 (a) (q.v., N. 15), the reference in Article 39 (N. 7) to Part II relates solely to those amending agreements which were concluded in writing.37

Articles 6–25 (q.v.) of Part II, governing the conclusion and entry into force of the amending agreement, are of particular relevance to bilateral treaties. In respect of multilateral treaties attention may also be drawn to the following provisions: Article 9 (stipulating in para. 2 a two-thirds majority for the adoption of the amendment at an international conference, thus avoiding the possibility of a veto of a treaty party); Article 24 (requiring in para. 2 the consent of all the negotiating States for the amendment’s entry into force); and Article 25 (concerning the provisional application of the amending agreement).38

10Second, the treaty to be amended may provide otherwise. In particular, it may contain specific provisions, often enshrined in final clauses, as to its amendment (which may occur, for instance, after a particular period of time or if a condition intervenes; there may be periodic review conferences; the majorities for accepting an amendment may be qualified, etc.).39 The conditions of amendment in those provisions will then apply; they may be stricter or less strict than the conditions required for the adoption of the original treaty.40 Articles 40 and 41 list further details as to the procedure for amending multilateral treaties. It follows that in all these respects Article 39 is of a residual nature. (The rules in Part II will nevertheless apply to the extent that the treaty to be amended does not regulate the entire amendment procedure.)

11Upon closer scrutiny, it transpires that Article 39 fails to consider a third situation, namely amending “agreements” not in writing (N. 7) in respect of a treaty to be amended containing no specific provisions as to its amendment (N. 10). In this case, the rules in Part II, tailor-made for written agreements (N. 9), patently cannot apply. It will then be up to the States concluding

37See the statements by Ago and Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 267, paras. 4 f and 7.

38ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 232, para. 4.

39Examples in Blix/Emerson 223 ; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 155, para. 27.

40Statement in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1964 I/2 115, para. 44; YBILC 1966 I/2 113, para. 19.

ZACHARIAS

general rule regarding the amendment of treaties

515

the oral or tacit agreement to amend the treaty to decide in addition—infor- mally—on how they wish the amendment to occur.

C. AMENDMENT OF THE CONVENTION

 

The Convention itself contains no provisions as to its amendment. Thus,

12

Articles 39–41 shall apply (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 24). It

 

follows from the above, inter alia, that the Convention may at any time be

 

amended by agreement (N. 6) to which its Articles 6–25 shall apply (N. 9).

 

D. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

Article 39 must be read together with Articles 40 and 41. Furthermore, it has

13

been seen that there are particular relations between Article 39 and Articles

 

6–25 (N. 9), Article 26 (N. 6), Article 30 (N. 5, 8), Article 34 and Article 60

 

(N. 8). In the case of the amendment of a treaty providing for obligations

 

or rights of third States, the consent of the latter will be required according

 

to Article 37 (q.v.).41

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

The ILC Draft 1966 provided in its Article 38 as follows:

14

“Modification of treaties by subsequent practice

A treaty may be modified by subsequent practice in the application of the treaty establishing the agreement of the parties to modify its provisions.”42

This provision attracted little support in Vienna in 1968/1969 and was eventually deleted.43 It nevertheless serves as a reminder that States, when

41Dixit, IJIL 10 (1970) 39.

42YBILC 1966 II 236 f. See also Aust, Modern Treaty Law 263; Verdross/Simma N. 506; de Witte, NYBIL 25 (1994) 306 f; G. Distefano, La pratique subséquente des parties à un traité, AFDI 40 (1994) 41 ; R. Bernhardt, Völkerrechtliche und verfassungsrechtliche Aspekte konkludenter Verfassungsänderungen, in: H.-W. Arndt et al. (eds.), Völkerrecht und Deutsches Recht. Festschrift für W. Rudolf (2001), 15 ; F. Capotorti, Sul valore della prassi applicativa dei trattati secondo la Convezione di Vienna, in: A. Giu ré (ed.), International Law at the Time of Its Codification. Essays in Honour of R. Ago (1987) I 197; O. Casanovas La Rosa, La modificacion de los accuerdos internacionales par la pratica posterior, in: Estudios de derecho internacional Homenaje A.D. Antonio de Luna (1968) I 180 .

43For the debate, see OR 1968 CoW 207 .

ZACHARIAS

516

article

interpreting a treaty, may in their subsequent practice (Article 31, subpara. 3 [b], N. 23) gradually move away from the treaty text in their interpretation thereof and eventually amend the treaty. The provision, reflecting a customary rule,44 focuses on the contractual practice of States parties among which the treaty may eventually be modified. Article 38 of the ILC Draft 1966 has thus to be distinguished from the modification of a treaty rule via customary international law as in Article 68, para. (a) of the ILC Draft 1964 (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 30–33).45

3. Customary Basis of Article 39

15The first sentence of Article 39 no longer stipulates the express agreement of all parties to a treaty for its amendment (N. 6), as was traditionally required by international law (N. 1). Moreover, the procedures laid down in the second sentence of Article 39 were not clearly established before 1969.46 Nevertheless, the provision was undisputed in Vienna in 1968, and in 1969 it attracted no discussion (N. 2). Since then, States do not appear to have called in question Article 39. As a result, it can be concluded that the provision now reflects customary international law.47

E. APPRECIATION

16With its relations to various other Convention provisions, Article 39 occupies a central position in the Convention.48 Elegantly drafted as a “general rule”, its flexibility and residual nature duly consider the notorious di culties of amending multilateral treaties and give the treaty parties full liberty to agree on their own procedures for amendment.49 Only one situation—that of the amendment procedures in case of an oral or tacit agreement (N. 11)—remains open-ended. On the whole, the amendment procedures envisaged in Articles 39–41 correspond with the dynamic nature of international law, while striking a fair balance between stability and change.

44Karl, Vertrag 292, 295; Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 519.

45Di erently Akehurst, BYBIL 47 (1974/75) 276.

46Waldock Report III (N. 1) formulated for the first time basic rules on the subject, YBILC 1964 I 132 f, para. 2; see the statement by Castrén in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 135, para. 14.

47Dixit, IJIL 10 (1970) 39 (“a well known customary principle”).

48See the references to other provisions in Waldock Report III, YBILC 1963 II 47, para. 1.

49Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 115, para. 48. Aust, Modern Treaty Law 262 f.

ZACHARIAS

Article 40

Amendment of multilateral treaties

1.Unless the treaty otherwise provides, the amendment of multilateral treaties shall be governed by the following paragraphs.

2.Any proposal to amend a multilateral treaty as between all the parties must be notified to all the contracting States, each one of which shall have the right to take part in:

(a)the decision as to the action to be taken in regard to such proposal;

(b)the negotiation and conclusion of any agreement for the amendment of the treaty.

3.Every State entitled to become a party to the treaty shall also be entitled to become a party to the treaty as amended.

4.The amending agreement does not bind any State already a party to the treaty which does not become a party to the amending agreement; Article 30, paragraph 4(b), applies in relation to such State.

5.Any State which becomes a party to the treaty after the entry into force of the amending agreement shall, failing an expression of a di erent intention by that State:

(a)be considered as a party to the treaty as amended; and

(b)be considered as a party to the unamended treaty in relation to any party to the treaty not bound by the amending agreement.

Article 40 Amendement des traités multilatéraux

1.A moins que le traité n’en dispose autrement, l’amendement des traités multilatéraux est régi par les paragraphes suivants.

2.Toute proposition tendant à amender un traité multilatéral dans les relations entre toutes les parties doit être notifiée à tous les États contractants, et chacun d‘eux est en droit de prendre part :

518

article

a)à la décision sur la suite à donner à cette proposition ;

b)à la négociation et à la conclusion de tout accord ayant pour objet d’amender le traité.

3.Tout État ayant qualité pour devenir partie au traité a également qualité pour devenir partie au traité tel qu’il est amendé.

4.L‘accord portant amendement ne lie pas les États qui sont déjà parties au traité et qui ne deviennent pas partie à cet accord ; l’alinéa b du paragraphe 4 de l‘article 30 s‘applique à l’égard de ces États.

5.Tout État qui devient partie au traité après l’entrée en vigueur de l’accord portant amendement est, faute d‘avoir exprimé une intention di érente, considéré comme étant :

a)partie au traité tel qu’il est amendé ; et

b)partie au traité non amendé au regard de toute partie au traité qui n’est pas liée par l’accord portant amendement.

Artikel 40 Änderung mehrseitiger Verträge

1.Sofern der Vertrag nichts anderes vorsieht, richtet sich die Änderung mehrseitiger Verträge nach den folgenden Absätzen.

2.Vorschläge zur Änderung eines mehrseitigen Vertrags mit Wirkung zwischen allen Vertragsparteien sind allen Vertragsstaaten zu notifizieren; jeder von ihnen ist berechtigt,

a)an dem Beschluss über das auf einen solchen Vorschlag hin zu Veranlassende teilzunehmen;

b)am Aushandeln und am Abschluss einer Übereinkunft zur Änderung des Vertrags teilzunehmen.

3.Jeder Staat, der berechtigt ist, Vertragspartei des Vertrags zu werden, ist auch berechtigt, Vertragspartei des geänderten Vertrags zu werden.

4.Die Änderungsübereinkunft bindet keinen Staat, der schon Vertragspartei des Vertrags ist, jedoch nicht Vertragspartei der Änderungsübereinkunft wird; auf einen solchen Staat findet Artikel 30 Absatz 4 lit. b Anwendung.

5.Ein Staat, der nach Inkrafttreten der Änderungsübereinkunft Vertragspartei des Vertrags wird, gilt, sofern er nicht eine abweichende Absicht äussert,

ZACHARIAS

amendment of multilateral treaties

519

a)als Vertragspartei des geänderten Vertrags und

b)als Vertragspartei des nicht geänderten Vertrags im Verhältnis zu einer Vertragspartei, die durch die Änderungsübereinkunft nicht gebunden ist.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 36—Amendment of multilateral treaties

1.Unless the treaty otherwise provides, the amendment of multilateral treaties shall be governed by the following paragraphs.

2.Any proposal to amend a multilateral treaty as between all the parties must be notified to every party, each one of which shall have the right to take part in:

(a)the decision as to the action to be taken in regard to such proposal;

(b)the negotiation and conclusion of any agreement for the amendment of the treaty.

3.Every State entitled to become a party to the treaty shall also be entitled to become a party to the treaty as amended.

4.The amending agreement does not bind any State already a party to the treaty which does not become a party to the amending agreement; Article 26, paragraph 4(b), applies in relation to such State.

5.Any State which becomes a party to the treaty after the entry into force of the amending agreement shall, failing an expression of a di erent intention by that State:

(a)be considered as a party to the treaty as amended; and

(b)be considered as a party to the unamended treaty in relation to any party to the treaty not bound by the amending agreement.

Materials: see the materials mentioned in Article 39.

Vienna Conference Vote: 91:0:0

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 39, q.v.): K. Ardault/D. Dormoy, Article 40, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1547 .

ZACHARIAS

520

article

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 40 ............................................................

3

1.

Scope (Para. 1) .................................................................................

3

2.

Amendment Procedures (Paras. 2 and 3) ..........................................

5

3.

Relations Between the Various Parties (Paras. 4 and 5) .....................

10

C. Context ...............................................................................................

13

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

13

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

14

3.

Customary Basis of Article 40 ...........................................................

15

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

16

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1.Introduction

1 The increase in the number of multilateral treaties since 1945, their growing complexity and the changing requirements of the international community have all resulted in a great variety of amendment mechanisms.1 The respective amendment clauses may contain many specific conditions, e.g.:

whether the treaty may be amended before its entry into force;2

whether individual contracting States and parties, respectively, have a right to demand a treaty’s amendment and to participate in the amendment procedures;3

the number of parties or votes required to support an amendment before it is put to the parties;

the majority necessary for the adoption of the amendment;

the number of parties needed to ratify or accept the amendment for its entry into force;4

1 ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 232, para. 2; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 215. See also Polakiewicz, Treaty Making 161 ; the examples in Blix/Emerson 225 .

2 See the example of the UN Law of the Sea Convention of 1982 in N. 5.

3 See McNair, Law of Treaties 534 (“no State has a legal right to demand the revision of a treaty in the absence of some provision to that e ect contained in the treaty”).

4 E.g., Article 108 of the UN Charter.

ZACHARIAS

amendment of multilateral treaties

521

whether amendment can occur by means of tacit agreement;

whether those parties which do not accept the amendment are nevertheless bound.5

2.History

The core of today’s Article 40 developed in the course of the ILC’s debate in

2

1964 (Article 39, N. 2).6 The ILC Draft 1964 attracted comments of altogether seven States.7 The profile of Article 40 became clearer during the discussion in 1966 in the ILC during which the present paras. 3 and 5 were added,8 the latter paragraph causing particular drafting di culties.9 At the Vienna Conference in 1968, the ILC Draft 1966 underwent only minor changes and attracted little discussion.10 In retrospect, the ILC had considerable difficulties conceptualising the subject and, as the intricacies of para. 2 (N. 5) demonstrate,11 dealing with the negative experiences of revising multilateral treaties in the 19th and 20th centuries (Article 39, N. 1).12 Article 40 was adopted in Vienna by 91 votes to none.13

5 T hese examples are listed in Aust, Modern Treaty Law 267. 6 YBILC 1964 I 189.

7 YBILC 1964 II 193; Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 81 . 8 YBILC 1966 I/2 214, para. 42.

9 Statement by Briggs in the ILC in 1966, YBILC 1966 I/2 214, para. 47.

10Based on a Dutch amendment, the terms “all the contracting States” in para. 2 replaced the term “every party” of the ILC Draft of 1966. A French amendment, OR Documents 156, para. 330, proposing to introduce a clause on restricted multilateral treaties, was not adopted on the ground that it was superfluous; see the statement by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 203, para. 74.

11Dixit, IJIL 10 (1970) 41.

12E.g., the statements in the ILC by Verdross, YBILC 1964 I/2 133, para.7 (“it was rather dangerous to provide . . . that a party to a treaty might ‘at any time’ propose its amendment to the other parties”); Amado, ibid. 139, para. 77 (“instead of proposing arrangements to facilitate the revision of treaties, the [ILC] would do better to provide for a sanction in the event of denunciation of a treaty”); Ruda, ibid. para. 82 (“circumstances could and frequently did arise, in which it was better not to negotiate at all [i.e., a proposal for amendment] than to negotiate under unsatisfactory circumstances”); and Tsuruoka, ibid. 153, para. 11 (“why [should] some of the parties to the first treaty . . . be entitled to conclude a second treaty conflicting with the first”).

13OR 1969 Plenary 72, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

522

article

B.INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 40

1.Scope (Para. 1)

3Article 40 concerns the amendment of multilateral treaties which shall be governed by its paragraphs 2–5 (N. 5–12). These rules are relevant, unless the treaty to be amended (in particular any amendment clause in the treaty) otherwise provides.14 Article 40 is, therefore, of a residual nature. Indeed, the constituent instruments of international organisations and other treaties frequently provide details as to their amendment (N. 1) which have priority. The importance of Article 40 lies therein that these amendment clauses often only regulate certain aspects of the treaty. Where Article 40 is also silent on a matter, the general rule regarding the amendment of (bior multilateral) treaties in Article 39 applies (q.v., N. 4).

4Article 40, para. 2 expressly envisages the treaty’s amendment “as between all the parties” (N. 5),15 even if the amending agreement will not eventually enter into force for each of them. There is thus an essential—and clear—conceptual di erence between Articles 40 and 41 (q.v., N. 3), the latter envisaging from the outset only an inter se modification of the treaty by some of its parties.16

2. Amendment Procedures (Paras. 2 and 3)

5Para. 2 lists certain minimal conditions governing the procedures when amending a multilateral treaty.17 Thus, any proposal to amend a multilateral treaty as between all the parties must be notified to all the contracting States. It follows that all contracting States are to be treated on an equal level18 and that the amendment procedures must be transparent. By employing the term “contracting States”, as in Article 2, subpara. 1( f ) (q.v., N. 45), Article 40, para. 2 excludes States which participated in the preparation and adoption of the original treaty without becoming bound by the treaty.19 By preferring in para. 2 the term “contracting States” to “parties” as in Article 2, subpara. 1(h) (q.v., N. 48),20 the Vienna Conference intended Article 40 to

14See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233, para. 7; V. Haak, “Unless the Treaty Otherwise Provides” and Similar Clauses in the International Law Commission’s Draft Articles on the Law of Treaties, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 540 .

15Italics added.

16ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233, para. 78; contra Sinclair, Vienna Convention 107, for whom the di erence is not clear cut; also Id., Annuaire IDI 66 (1995 I) 61.

17Nguyen/Daillier/Pellet, Droit international public N. 189 .

18Dupuy, Droit international public N. 298; Reuter, Introduction N. 208.

19ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233 f, para. 10.

20T he term “parties” was employed in Article 36, para. 2 of the ILC Draft 1966.

ZACHARIAS

amendment of multilateral treaties

523

enable the amendment of a multilateral treaty at any time, even before its entry into force.21

States wishing to exclude a particular treaty party or contracting State, e.g., an aggressor, from becoming a party to the amending agreement must negotiate inter se a new treaty in which they incorporate the amendments, and withdraw from the original treaty.22

A further condition—that of good faith—is inherent in these provisions (N. 2).23 For instance, the proposal to amend a treaty cannot a priori be viewed as an attempt to evade the treaty’s obligations.

It is to be assumed that the notification of the States concerned will be

6

undertaken by the depositary of the multilateral treaty at issue (Article 77,

 

subpara. 1[e], q.v., N. 9) and that the notification—or at least its receipt by

 

the State to which it was transmitted—will be in writing (Article 78, para.

 

[b], N. 4).24

 

Once the amendment proposal has been notified (N. 5), the entering sentence

7

of para. 2 grants to each contracting State the right to take part in the

 

amendment procedures mentioned in subparas. 2(a) and (b) (N. 8), though

 

States may choose not to avail themselves thereof. No obligation is involved

 

other than, possibly, arising from good faith to give due consideration to the

 

proposal for amendment.25

 

In this context, two rights arise for each contracting State: (i) it shall be

8

consulted on, and eventually be able to participate in, the decision as to the

 

action to be taken in regard to such proposal (subpara. 2[a]), in particular

 

by expressing its opinion on the necessity of an amendment and the procedures

 

to be employed; and (ii) once this decision has been taken, all contracting

 

States may participate in the negotiation and conclusion of any agreement

 

for the amendment of the treaty (subpara. 2[b]). This includes, inter alia,

 

an invitation to participate at any conference on the treaty amendment.

 

After adoption of the amendment, every State entitled to become a party to

9

the treaty shall also be entitled to become a party to the treaty as amended

 

( para. 3). This includes, inter alia, States which took part in the conclusion

 

21See Riphagen of the Dutch delegation, OR 1968 CoW 204, para. 9; See the example of the 1994 Agreement Relating to the Implementation of Part XI of the 1982 UN Law of the Sea Convention, mentioned in Aust, Modern Treaty Law 275 f.

22Aust, ibid. 273. This also follows from the circle of States in Article 40, para. 3 (N. 9).

23E.g., the statements by Briggs and el-Erian in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 137, para. 51, and 144, para. 54, respectively.

24See the statement in Vienna by Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 203, para. 77. State succession may provide general di culties for the depositary and not only in respect of Article 40; but see Sinclair, Vienna Convention 108.

25ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233, para. 5.

ZACHARIAS

524

article

of the original treaty but had not expressed their consent to be bound.26 The broader circle of States in para. 3 is often circumscribed in the treaty’s final clauses.27 It provides a counter-balance to the more limited circle envisaged for participation in the amendment procedures in para. 2 (N. 5).28 Treaty parties can restrict the entitlement in para. 3, e.g., by means of a regional clause, in the original treaty or in the amending agreement.

3. Relations Between the Various Parties (Paras. 4 and 5)

10Treaty parties are not obliged to become a party to the amending agreement (Article 39, N. 8). Accordingly, para. 4 provides that the amending agreement does not bind any State already a party to the treaty which does not become a party to the amending agreement. Henceforth, there will be two categories of States: (i) the States parties to the original agreement; and (ii) those States which have become a party to the amending agreement.29 In the relations between these two categories of States, Article 30, subpara. 4(b) (q.v., N. 15) applies: Thus, it is the unamended treaty which will govern the mutual rights and obligations between the two categories of States.

On the whole, para. 4 ably combines three elements, i.e., pacta sunt servanda, the principle of the equality of States, and the requirement of a certain flexibility in these matters.30 Para. 4 duly preserves the position of the original treaty, in particular so as not to jeopardise the benefit of the ratifications slowly accumulated over the years.31

By referring to subpara. 4(b) of Article 30, Article 40, para. 4 also takes over the fine line separating the regular treaty relations between the di erent parties from the situation where, possibly, State responsibility arises if the parties applying the amending agreement can no longer comply with their obligations under the original treaty (Article 30, N. 15).

It will not always be easy to distinguish between the positions of the parties to the amending agreement and those of the original treaty. For instance, the 1994 Agreement Relating to the Implementation of Part XI of the 1982 Law of the Sea Convention amends its Part XI insofar as both the latter and the Agreement “shall henceforth be interpreted and applied as a single instrument” (Article 2, para. 1 of the Agreement).32 As a result, however, it will become increasingly di cult for the parties to the Convention alone to maintain their original interpretation of Part XI vis-à-vis the new interpretation of the 1994 Agreement.

26Aust, Modern Treaty Law 273.

27Statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 204, para. 17.

28ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 233 f, para. 10.

29Ibid. 234, para. 12.

30Reuter, Introduction N. 205.

31Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 154, para. 23.

32See J. Borek, Book Review (i.e., of A. Aust, Modern Treaty Law and Practice [2000]), AJIL 95 (2001) 468 at 469.

ZACHARIAS

amendment of multilateral treaties

525

 

There remains the situation, covered by para. 5, where a State becomes a

11

party to the treaty after the entry into force of the amendment agreement.

 

Here the di culty arises in practice (in particular in respect of “technical

 

treaties”33 with numerous amending protocols) that the State does not specify

 

in its instrument of ratification whether it wishes to become a party only

 

to the original treaty, or only to the amending agreements, or to all these

 

instruments.34 First, it must be considered whether this State has expressed

 

a particular intention as to which one of these three possibilities will prevail.

 

Failing an expression of a di erent intention, para. 5 raises the presump-

 

tion, drawn from the practice of the UN Secretary General in his capacity

 

as a depositary,35 that the State becomes a party to both the treaty and its

 

amendments.36 The presumption appears justified in that States are hardly

 

likely to wish to become parties to a treaty where the text has already been

 

overtaken by events or has undergone amendment.37

 

 

Based on this presumption (N. 11), subparas. 5 (a) and (b) define this State’s

12

twofold treaty relations in respect of the various categories of parties as fol-

 

lows: (i) the State shall be considered as a party to the treaty as amended

(subpara. 5[a]) and, at the same time, (ii) it shall be considered as a party to the unamended treaty in relation to any party to the treaty not bound by the amending agreement (subpara. 5[b]).38

In practice, treaty parties may go a step further and decide that any State becoming a party to the original treaty shall be obliged also to become a party to the amending agreement. This particular situation is “saved” by Article 40, para. 1 (N. 3), whereby para. 5 is residual to any such provision in a treaty.39

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

Article 40, para. 4 expressly refers to Article 30, subpara. 4(b) (N. 10). A 13 reference to Article 18 (q.v.) was considered unnecessary in the ILC.40

33Neuhold/Hummer/Schreuer N. 365.

34ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 234, para. 13. Thus, it might happen that new or smaller States with only limited facilities would overlook any amending protocols to the treaty; see the statement in Vienna by the New Zealand delegation, OR 1968 CoW 202, para. 65.

35Aust, Modern Treaty Law 273.

36ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 234, para. 12.

37See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 204, para. 18.

38ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 234, para. 13.

39See the question put by the US delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 203, para. 79.

40See the debate in the ILC in 1966, YBILC 1966 I/2 118 .

ZACHARIAS

526

article

2. Matters Not Dealt With

14 Article 40 purposely does not deal with a number of issues.

In 1964 the ILC dropped a reference to good faith in the amendment procedures.41 In 1966 it decided not to refer to venire contra factum proprium, i.e., that States participating in the drawing up of the amending agreement but not later ratifying it were prevented from objecting to the amendment agreement being brought into force.42 Article 40 also does not regulate the amendment of a treaty containing rights and obligations for third States (Articles 34–37, q.v.); in particular no mention is made as to their participation in the amendment procedures.43

3. Customary Basis of Article 40

15In view of the not infrequent politicisation surrounding amending procedures until well after 1945, the principles enshrined in Article 40, in particular the equality of all contracting States in para. 2 (N. 5)44 and the entitlement of States to become a party to the treaty in para. 3 (N. 9), appeared innovatory before 1969 and amounted to progressive development.45 However, States unanimously accepted these principles at the 1968/1969 Conference, and no State seems to have called them into question since. Article 40, therefore, appears to reflect recently crystallised customary law.

D. APPRECIATION

16Early predecessors of Article 40 in the ILC were very much drafted in the form of a code (Issues of Customary International Law N. 22),46 and only gradually did its normative character evolve. Exceptionally, the ILC debates in 1964 and 1966 often digressed and contribute little to its interpretation. The distinction in paras. 2 and 3 between the entitlement of di erent groups of States may appear somewhat artificial; moreover, paras. 4 and 5 rephrase to some extent what is stated in Articles 30 and 34–37 (q.v.). Nevertheless, seen

41Article 67, para. (b) of Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 47; see the observation by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 136, para. 47 (“modest obligation”).

42Article 66, para. 3 of the ILC Draft 1964, YBILC 1964 II 193, and 197, para. 13; see eventually the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 234 f, para. 14; the criticism by Governments in Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 85 f; the debate in the ILC in 1966, YBILC 1966 I/2 116 .

43Waldock Report VI, ibid. para. 9.

44See the discussion in Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 50, para. 13.

45See the statements in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 203, para. 76; and in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 274, para. 102.

46E.g., Article 67, para. (b) of Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 47 (“the other parties are bound to consider in good faith . . . what action, if any, should be taken in regard to the proposal”); see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 154, para. 19.

ZACHARIAS

amendment of multilateral treaties

527

as a whole, Article 40 comes across as clearly and determinedly positioning the cornerstones of the amendment process of multilateral treaties.47 Article 40 thus serves as a counterbalance to the dynamics of Article 39 (q.v., N. 5) which provides for the amendment of treaties at any time. Its value must also be seen against the backdrop of the many (and quite heterogeneous) amendment clauses of multilateral treaties in current international treaty law (N. 1).

47Contra the statement by Sinclair of the UK delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 203, para. 70; Id, Vienna Convention 107.

ZACHARIAS

Article 41

Agreements to modify multilateral treaties between certain of the parties only

1.Two or more of the parties to a multilateral treaty may conclude an agreement to modify the treaty as between themselves alone if:

(a)the possibility of such a modification is provided for by the treaty; or

(b)the modification in question is not prohibited by the treaty and:

(i) does not a ect the enjoyment by the other parties of their rights under the treaty or the performance of their obligations;

(ii) does not relate to a provision, derogation from which is incompatible with the e ective execution of the object and purpose of the treaty as a whole.

2.Unless in a case falling under paragraph 1(a) the treaty otherwise provides, the parties in question shall notify the other parties of their intention to conclude the agreement and of the modification to the treaty for which it provides.

Article 41 Accords ayant pour objet de modifier des traités multilatéraux dans les relations entre certaines parties seulement

1.Deux ou plusieurs parties à un traité multilatéral peuvent conclure un accord ayant pour objet de modifier le traité dans leurs relations mutuelles seulement:

a)si la possibilité d’une telle modification est prévue par le traité; ou

b)si la modification en question n’est pas interdite par le traité, à condition qu’elle:

i) ne porte atteinte ni à la jouissance par les autres parties des droits qu’elles tiennent du traité ni à l’exécution de leurs obligations; et

agreements to modify multilateral treaties

529

ii) ne porte pas sur une disposition à laquelle il ne peut être dérogé sans qu’il y ait incompatibilité avec la réalisation e ective de l’objet et du but du traité pris dans son ensemble.

2.A moins que, dans le cas prévu à l’alinéa a) du paragraphe 1, le traité n’en dispose autrement, les parties en question doivent notifier aux autres parties leur intention de conclure l’accord et les modifications que ce dernier apporte au traité.

Art. 41 Übereinkünfte zur Modifikation mehrseitiger

Verträge zwischen einzelnen Vertragsparteien

1.Zwei oder mehr Vertragsparteien eines mehrseitigen Vertrags können eine Übereinkunft schliessen, um den Vertrag ausschliesslich im Verhältnis zueinander zu modifizieren,

a)wenn die Möglichkeit einer solchen Modifikation in dem Vertrag vorgesehen ist oder

b)wenn die betre ende Modifikation durch den Vertrag nicht verboten ist und

i) die anderen Vertragsparteien in dem Genuss ihrer Rechte auf Grund des Vertrags oder in der Erfüllung ihrer Pflichten nicht beeinträchtigt und

ii) sich nicht auf eine Bestimmung bezieht, von der abzuweichen mit der vollen Verwirklichung von Ziel und Zweck des gesamten Vertrags unvereinbar ist.

2.Sofern der Vertrag in einem Fall des Absatzes 1 lit. a nichts anderes vorsieht, haben die betre enden Vertragsparteien den anderen Vertragsparteien ihre Absicht, eine Übereinkunft zu schliessen, sowie die darin vorgesehene Modifikation zu notifizieren.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 37—Agreements to modify multilateral treaties between certain of the parties only

1.Two or more of the parties to a multilateral treaty may conclude an agreement to modify the treaty as between themselves alone if:

ZACHARIAS

530

article

2(a) the possibility of such a modification is provided for by the treaty; or

(b)the modification in question:

(i) does not a ect the enjoyment by the other parties of their rights under the treaty or the performance of their obligations;

(ii) does not relate to a provision, derogation from which is incompatible with the e ective execution of the object and purpose of the treaty as a whole; and

(iii) is not prohibited by the treaty.

2.Unless in a case falling under paragraph 1(a) the treaty otherwise provides, the parties in question shall notify the other parties of their intention to conclude the agreement and of the modification to the treaty for which it provides.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report III: Article 68, para. 2.

Minutes: YBILC 1964 I 140 , 189, 197 , 271 , 334.

ILC Draft 1964: Article 67.

WALDOCK Report VI: Article 67.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 123 , 217 , 330, 336.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 37.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 205 , 476; OR 1969 CoW 213, 222 , 254; OR 1969 Plenary 59, 72.

Vienna Conference Vote: 91:0:0

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 39, q.v.):

A. Rigaux/D. Symon, Article 41, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1561 .

ZACHARIAS

 

 

 

agreements to modify multilateral treaties

531

 

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 41 ............................................................

3

 

 

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

3

 

 

2.

Conditions for Modifying a Treaty ...................................................

6

 

 

 

a) Stipulations in the Treaty (Subparas. 1[a] and ([b]) .....................

6

 

 

 

b) Substantive Conditions (Subpara. 1 [b]) ......................................

7

 

 

 

c) Notification of Other Parties (Para. 2) .........................................

10

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

14

 

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

14

 

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

16

 

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 41 ...........................................................

18

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

The modification by certain parties of a treaty inter se, a particular form of

1

“contracting out” from the original agreement,1 is well established in inter-

 

national law, the technique being employed, inter alia, to adjust a treaty to

 

changing requirements or to ensure particular (e.g., higher) standards among

 

some of the parties.2 The 1928 Havana Convention on Treaties provided in

 

Article 19, para. 1 that “two or more States may agree that their relations are

 

to be governed by rules other than those established in general conventions

 

celebrated by them with other States”.3 The principle was confirmed by the

 

Court in the Oscar Chinn Case.4 The 1935 Harvard Draft authorised such

 

agreements only “if this [was] not forbidden by the provisions of the earlier

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 2.

 

 

2

Ibid. para. 1; see the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 150,

 

 

para. 35; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 274 f.

 

 

3

Cited in the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1203 .

 

 

4Concerning the relationship between the 1885 General Act of Berlin and the 1919 Treaty of Saint-Germain-en-Laye, PCIJ (1934) Series A/B no. 63, 80 ; see the sep. ops. of Judges van Eysinga and Schücking, ibid. 131, and 148, respectively.

ZACHARIAS

532

article

treaty and if the later treaty [was] not inconsistent with the general purpose of the earlier treaty as to be likely to frustrate that purpose”.5 Such agreements raise certain di culties, for instance, they collide with the principle of unanimity for the amendment of treaties (see Article 39, N. 1), or they are not always brought to the attention of all States.6

Article 4 of the 1907 (IV) Hague Convention on the Laws and Customs of War provided an example of such modification,7 as did Article 20, para. 1 of the Covenant of the League of Nations.8 Article 73, para. 2 of the 1963 Vienna Convention on Consular Relations envisages its own modification inter se by subsequent agreement.9

2. History

2The nucleus of Article 41 was introduced in the course of the ILC debate in 1964. The Commission’s main preoccupation was that an inter se-agree- ment could have e ects incompatible with the object and purpose of the treaty.10 The ILC extensively discussed the scope of obligation of informing the other treaty parties of a proposed inter se-modification.11 The ILC Draft 1964 contained a duty to notify other parties of the actual conclusion of such an agreement. However, various Governments considered that notification at that stage would be too late and should occur earlier.12 A further draft was included in 1966 leading to the final ILC Draft which attracted little discussion at the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference.13 Article 41 was adopted by 91 votes to none.14

5

AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1016.

6

Waldock Report III, YBILC 1964 II 49, para. 8, and 50, para. 14.

7

“(1) The present Convention, duly ratified, shall as between the Contracting Powers, be

 

substituted for the Convention of 29 July 1899, respecting the laws and customs of war

 

on land. (2) The Convention of 1899 remains in force as between the Powers which signed

 

it, and which do not also ratify the present Convention”.

8

“The Members of the League severally agree that this Covenant is accepted as abrogating

 

all obligations or understandings inter se which are inconsistent with the terms thereof, and

 

solemnly undertake that they will not hereafter enter into any engagements inconsistent

 

with the terms thereof ”.

9

“Nothing in the present Convention shall preclude States from concluding international

 

agreements confi rming or supplementing or extending or amplifying the provisions

 

thereof ”.

10YBILC 1964 I 189, para. 56; 1964 II 197, in particular para. 1.

11See the discussion in YBILC 1964 I 142 .

12Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 87, paras. 1 and 3.

13YBILC 1966 I/2 217, para. 79; 1966 II 235 f. The Conference adopted a proposal by Bulgaria, Romania and Syria, according to which subpara. 1(a)(iii) of the ILC Draft 1966 was moved to the opening sentence of subpara. 1(a).

14OR 1969 Plenary 72, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

agreements to modify multilateral treaties

533

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 41

 

 

1. Scope

 

 

Article 41 concerns the case of two or more (but not all) parties to a mul-

3

tilateral treaty. According to the entering sentence of para. 1, these parties

 

are in principle entitled to (“may”) conclude an agreement to modify the

 

treaty as between themselves alone.15 Modification may concern the entire

 

treaty or only certain provisions. Henceforth, there will be two separate instru-

 

ments, the original treaty and the modifying agreement.16 Paras. 1 and 2 list

 

the conditions herefor (N. 6–13). They are residual and apply only insofar

 

as the treaty itself provides no specification, as confirmed by subpara. 1(a),

 

the opening sentence of subpara. 1(b), and para. 2. Subsidiarily, the other

 

rules in Part IV will also apply (Article 39, N. 9).

 

 

In practice, there may be di erent reasons for States to modify a treaty inter se. Often,

 

certain parties share common interests, e.g., they may belong to a particular geographical

 

region or enjoy common historical ties. Or they may act on practical grounds, e.g., to

 

achieve treaty changes by means of simpler or speedier proceedings. Occasionally, States

 

parties may wish to reduce treaty relations with certain other treaty parties.17

 

 

Article 41 corresponds with Articles 39 and 40 in that the agreement need not

4

be in writing (Article 39, N. 7). Moreover, all three provisions aim at varying

 

the text of the original treaty, though Article 41 specifically employs the term

 

modification herefor in order to emphasise the e ects inter se. Finally, both

 

Articles 40 and 41 concern multilateral treaties.

 

 

Article 41 di ers from Article 40 in that the latter envisages all States parties

5

being invited to participate in the amendment of the treaty (even if, eventu-

 

ally, not all will do so, or the amended treaty does not attract ratifications by all States parties, Article 40, N. 4). In Article 41, modification concerns a priori certain of the parties only.18 From the outset, these parties—it need not necessarily only be a small group of States19—wish to exclude certain other or the remaining treaty parties from the modifying agreement. The other treaty parties cannot complain about the inter se-agreement as long as they are not a ected.20 Indeed, the modifying agreement remains res inter

15See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 1.

16See the statement by Ruda in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 148, para. 22.

17See the statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 154, para. 24; and in Vienna by Jiménez de Aréchaga of the Uruguayan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 206, para. 42. See also Reuter, Introduction N. 207.

18ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 1.

19T he ILC appeared to proceed from the idea that only a small group of States would wish to do so, YBILC 1964 II 197, para. 1.

20See the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 125, para. 49.

ZACHARIAS

534

article

alios acta for the remaining treaty parties (Article 34, q.v.). While Article 41 concerns treaty parties only, in practice it is not excluded that third States eventually join the modified treaty.

2. Conditions for Modifying a Treaty

a) Stipulations in the Treaty (Subparas. 1[a] and ([b])

6Article 41 lists various conditions for modifying a multilateral treaty. Subparas. 1(a) and (b) refer first of all—in both a positive and negative manner—to any statement in the treaty itself as to its own modification. On the one hand, the possibility of such a modification may be provided for by the treaty

(subpara. 1[a]). Thus, to the extent that the modification at issue is envisaged by the treaty,21 the remaining conditions in Article 41 will not apply.22 On the other hand, if no such statement is made, at least the modification in question shall not be prohibited by the treaty (subpara. 1[b]), in which case modification would not be authorised. Such prohibition must be stated expressly. An implied prohibition may, possibly, be derived from the treaty’s object and purpose as in subpara. 1(b)(ii) (N. 9).23

b) Substantive Conditions (Subpara. 1 [b])

7If the treaty does not express itself on the matter of modification inter se and in particular if it does not expressly prohibit it (N. 6), the two further conditions in subpara. 1(b) (N. 8–9) apply cumulatively. These are substantive (and in fact overlapping) conditions, and it is in this respect that Article 41 di ers mainly from Articles 39 and 40 (q.v.). These conditions may be invoked by the other treaty parties.24

8As the fi rst condition, the modifi cation in question shall not a ect the enjoyment by the other parties of their rights under the treaty or the performance of their obligations (subpara. 1[b][i]). Modification shall not prejudice the rights of the other parties, or add to their obligations.25 As a rule, no such prejudice will arise as long as the execution of the modified

21For instance, Article 73, para. 2 of the 1963 Vienna Convention (cited in N. 1 at n. 9) does not envisage modification contra legem.

22T his is confirmed by the term “or” in subpara. 1(a), and by the entering words of para. 2.

23An early version of the ILC Draft 1964 contained the terms “expressly or impliedly prohibited”, YBILC 1964 I 272, para. 73, though this was eventually dropped. See also Lachs in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 273, para. 93; the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 2.

24See here B. Vukas, Solution définitive de la “question de Trieste” par la conclusion des accords entre l’Italie et la Yougoslavie à Osimo (Ancona), le 10 novembre 1975, AFDI 22 (1976) 77 , 94 f.

25ILC Report 1966 II 235, para. 2.

ZACHARIAS

agreements to modify multilateral treaties

535

 

treaty can be undertaken separately and independently among the di erent

 

treaty parties.26

 

 

Secondly, modification shall not relate to a provision, derogation from

9

which is incompatible with the e ective execution of the object and

 

purpose of the treaty as a whole (subpara. 1[b][ii]). In such a situation,

 

the original treaty in the light of its object and purpose impliedly prohibits

 

modification (N. 6). Thus, even if the treaty can be executed independently

 

by the treaty parties (N. 8), the new agreement may still run counter to the

 

object and purpose of the original treaty (including its aims, intentions and

 

its end, Article 31, N. 11–14). As a result, the object and purpose of the

 

treaty could no longer be implemented in practice and would remain (at

 

least in part) meaningless.27 It may be noted that subpara. 1(b)(ii) enables

 

here a distinction between the various provisions (“a provision”), although

 

in the same sentence it actually refers to the treaty’s object and purpose as

 

a whole.28

 

 

One (prevailing) opinion in the ILC did not exclude a certain likelihood that an inter

 

se-agreement would have an aim and e ect incompatible with the object and purpose of

 

the treaty (N. 2).29 Others pointed out that, if a State had entered the original treaty, it

 

was unlikely that it would later conclude a modifying agreement “designed to frustrate

 

the object of the treaty.30

 

 

c) Notification of Other Parties (Para. 2)

 

10

Para. 2, enshrining the principle of open diplomacy, lists stringent procedural

 

conditions as to notification of modification inter se.31 Their purpose is to

 

protect other States against a fait accompli and, possibly, an encroachment of their rights.32 (Registration in the UNTS occurs only after a considerable period of time and cannot, therefore, serve this purpose.)33 Thus, the parties in question shall notify the other parties of their intention to conclude the agreement and of the modification to the treaty for which it provides.

26Feist, Kündigung 196; Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 507. But see the example given by Sinclair, Vienna Convention 109 (“technical conventions”).

27T he ILC Report 1966 referred to the example of disarmament treaties, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 2. On the object and purpose, see also Crnic-Grotic, Asian YBIL 7 (1997) 149 .

28See the Commentary to the 2007 ILC Guideline of 2007 on the Incompatibility of a Reservation with the Object and Purpose of a Treaty, YBILC 2007/2 66 f, para. 2.

29ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 1; also YBILC 1964 II 197, para. 1.

30Comment by Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 125, para. 52.

31Statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/2 124, para. 37; and Bartos, ibid. 127, para. 77.

32ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 3; statement in the ILC by Castrén, YBILC 1964 I 272, para. 76.

33See the ILC Report 1964, YBILC 1964 II 198, para. 3.

ZACHARIAS

536

article

11All parties of the original treaty must be notified.34 The notification will include both the intention to conclude an agreement and the changes of the original treaty.35 If a State, once notified, wishes to participate in the inter se-agree- ment (or requests the convening of a conference, as in Article 9, q.v.),36 this will depend on whether the inter se-parties accept. Still, a State which objects at least cannot prevent the inter se-agreement. Eventually, however, issues as to breach of treaty (Article 60, q.v.) and State responsibility, in particular in respect of the conditions of subpara. 1(b), may arise (N. 7–9).37

12Good faith governs the procedures and in particular the precise moment when notification shall occur.38 If it is to serve any useful purpose, other parties must have the possibility to express their opinion—in particular whether the inter se-agreement complies with the conditions in subpara. 1(b) (N. 7–9)39—at least before the agreement has been finally concluded. If after notification the treaty negotiations bring about further substantial changes, these will—in good faith—also be notified.

13The procedure foreseen in para. 2 is residual (N. 3), i.e., it applies unless in a case falling under paragraph 1(a) the treaty otherwise provides (N. 3). The two conditions in this respect are: (i) if the treaty envisages the possibility of modification inter se; and (ii) if it specifies the details of notification (the treaty may even dispense with its necessity)—then the procedures envisaged by the treaty will apply.40 The conditions of notification are further explained in Article 78 (q.v.).

34As to the form of notification, see Article 40, N. 6. See also Article 78.

35Reuter, Introduction N. 209, requires notification also of the modifying agreement.

36Statements by Reuter in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 126, para. 56; and at 125, para. 55.

37Also Hutchinson, BYBIL 59 (1988) 192 at n. 154.

38Statements in the ILC by Yasseen, YBILC 1964 I 273, para. 99; and Bartos, YBILC 1966 I/2 125, para. 45.

39Statements in the ILC by Castrèn, YBILC 1964 I 142, para. 26; de Luna, ibid. 200, para. 28; and Yasseen, YBILC 1966 I/2 127, para. 80.

40Some ILC members considered that the conditions in the treaty and in para. 2 should apply cumulatively, e.g., Ago, YBILC 1966 I/2 217, para. 83; hence the ambiguous statement (and postulate) in the ILC Report 1966: “even in such cases [i.e., where the treaty otherwise provides, M.V.], [the ILC] thought, the other parties ought to have a reasonable opportunity of satisfying themselves that the inter se agreement does not exceed what is contemplated by the treaty”, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 3.

ZACHARIAS

agreements to modify multilateral treaties

537

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

A reference to Article 41 can be found in Article 30, para. 5 (q.v., N. 16)

14

according to which its paragraph 4 is without prejudice to Article 41. Article

 

30, enshrining in para. 4 the lex posterior- and the pacta tertiis-rules (q.v.,

 

N. 14–15), reserves in particular the position of the more stringent condi-

 

tions of subpara. 1(b) (N. 8–9).41 In other words, treaty parties modifying a

 

treaty inter se cannot rely solely on Article 30 when determining the relations

 

between the modifying agreement and the original agreement.

 

 

Aust draws a di erent conclusion in this respect, i.e., that “the provisions of Article

 

30 (4) . . . will not apply if an agreement to amend satisfies the conditions in Article 41

 

(see the saving provision in Article 30 [5])”.42

 

 

A parallel situation to Article 41 can be seen in Article 58 on the Suspension

15

of the Operation of a Multilateral Treaty by Agreement Between Certain of

 

the Parties Only (q.v.), and indeed, the formulations employed in Article 41,

 

subpara. 1(b)(i) and (ii) are employed verbatim in Article 58, subpara. 1(b)

 

(q.v., N. 6). Similarly, Article 25 does not exclude the Provisional Application

 

of a treaty between certain States only (q.v., N. 6).

 

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

 

Article 41 is silent on the relationship between the inter se-agreement and

16

the original treaty. It thus di ers from Article 40, para. 4 (q.v., N. 10) which

 

expressly refers to Article 30, subpara. 4(b) (q.v.). While Article 41 contains

 

more stringent conditions than Article 30 (N. 14), there can be no doubt

 

that the latter serves to resolve conflicts between the various instruments

 

also in Article 41. (Separate issues of State responsibility may also arise; see

 

Article 73).43 The ILC confirmed this view.44

 

 

The ILC Draft 1964 contained in Article 68 a provision on the Modification

17

of a Treaty by a Subsequent Treaty, by Subsequent Practice, or by Custom-

 

ary Law. All three means may actually amount to an inter se-modification.

 

41See the ILC Report 1966 (“[n]othing in paragraph 4 [of Article 30] is to be understood as setting aside those provisions [of Article 41])”, YBILC 1966 II 217, para. 11; see also Czaplinski/Danilenko, NYBIL 21 (1990) 22 f.

42Modern Treaty Law 274 f (original italics).

43See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 235, para. 1; the statement by Tsuruoka in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 124, para. 42.

44Statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1964 I 155, para. 24; and Tunkin, ibid. 145, para. 59; see also Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 509.

ZACHARIAS

538

article

However, the first case, envisaging incompatible treaties, is in fact regulated by Articles 30 and 59 (q.v.). The second case concerning subsequent practice was included in Article 38 of the ILC Draft 1966, though it found no favour at the Vienna Conference (Article 39, N. 14). The third case, modification via customary law, was deleted by the ILC in 1966 (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 31).

3. Customary Basis of Article 41

18The principle of modificatory inter se-agreements stipulated in the entering sentence of Article 41 is well established (N. 1) and enjoys a solid basis in customary law.45 Conversely, the various details listed in subparas. 1(a) and

(b) and para. 2 appeared innovatory when the ILC took up its study on the matter. They have since not been called in question by States, for which reason the provision as a whole may be considered as having come to reflect customary international law.46

D. APPRECIATION

19The ILC, when dealing with the amendment of treaties, was particularly wary of inter se-agreements and formulated the conditions in Article 41 “with all the necessary strictness”.47 Indeed, subparas. 1(b)(i) and (ii) (N. 7–9) are more stringent than the conditions, for instance, in Article 40 (q.v.). Article 41 nevertheless appears essential. For if inter se-agreements were not possible, a treaty party would have a right to veto any amendment of the treaty.48 Regrettably, the structure of Article 41 with its double subparagraphs appears confusing, and the provision fails to clarify the relationship between the inter se-agreement and the original treaty (N. 16).

45Feist, Kündigung 197.

46But see Sinclair, Vienna Convention 14.

47Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 87, para. 1.

48Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1964 I 150, para. 35.

ZACHARIAS

PART V

INVALIDITY, TERMINATION

AND SUSPENSION

OF THE OPERATION OF TREATIES

Section . General Provisions

ZACHARIAS

Article 42

Validity and continuance in force of treaties

1.The validity of a treaty or of the consent of a State to be bound by a treaty may be impeached only through the application of the present Convention.

2.The termination of a treaty, its denunciation or the withdrawal of a party, may take place only as a result of the application of the provisions of the treaty or of the present Convention. The same rule applies to suspension of the operation of a treaty.

Article 42 Validité et maintien en vigueur des traités

1.La validité d’un traité ou du consentement d’un Etat à être lié par un traité ne peut être contestée qu’en application de la présente Convention.

2.L’extinction d’un traité, sa dénonciation ou le retrait d’une partie ne peuvent avoir lieu qu’en application des dispositions du traité ou de la présente Convention. La même règle vaut pour la suspension de l’application d’un traité.

Artikel 42 Gültigkeit und Weitergeltung von Verträgen

1.Die Gültigkeit eines Vertrags oder der Zustimmung eines Staates, durch einen Vertrag gebunden zu sein, kann nur in Anwendung dieses Übereinkommens angefochten werden.

2.Die Beendigung eines Vertrags, seine Kündigung oder der Rücktritt einer Vertragspartei kann nur in Anwendung der Bestimmungen des Vertrags oder dieses Übereinkommens erfolgen. Das gleiche gilt für die Suspendierung eines Vertrags.

542

article

ILC Draft 1966

Article 39—Validity and continuance in force of treaties

1.The validity of a treaty may be impeached only through the application of the present articles. A treaty the invalidity of which is established under the present article is void.

2.A treaty may be terminated or denounced or withdrawn from by a party only as a result of the application of the terms of the treaty or of the present articles. The same rule applies to suspension of the operation of a treaty.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Article 2.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 194 , 296 f, 317, 321.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 30.

WALDOCK Report IV: Article 30.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 4 , 123 f; YBILC 1966 I/2 140, 297 , 300 , 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 39.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 215 . 451, 481 f, 488 f; OR 1969 Plenary 73.

Vienna Conference Vote: 90:1:0

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned throughout Part V ):

M.G. Kohen, Article 42, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1593 .

ZACHARIAS

 

validity and continuance in force of treaties

543

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 42 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Scope ................................................................................................

3

 

2.

Validity (Para. 1) ...............................................................................

8

 

3.

Termination, Denunciation, Withdrawal and Suspension

 

 

 

(Para. 2) ............................................................................................

10

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

12

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

12

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

13

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 42 ...........................................................

14

 

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

15

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

General international law circumscribed comparatively clearly the various

1

grounds of invalidity and the termination of treaties, inter alia, error, desue-

 

tude, the impossibility of performing a treaty, clausula rebus sic stantibus, and

 

breach of treaties. However, only a very basic structure of rules, conditions

 

and exceptions existed.1 Moreover, no particular procedure was envisaged for

 

a party to invoke these grounds (Article 65, N. 1); it was assumed that a State

 

could unilaterally assert such grounds of bringing a treaty to an end.

 

2. History

 

 

Waldock Report II of 1963 formulated in its Article 2 the nucleus of

2

today’s Article 42. Its purpose was to prevent “unilateral assertions of a right

 

to avoid or denounce treaties on one or other of the grounds . . .

simply as a

 

pretext to escape from inconvenient obligations”.2 In 1963 the ILC was not

1 See, e.g., A. Verdross, Völkerrecht (1937), 87 , 90 ; Brierly/Waldock, 326 . 2 YBILC 1963 II 39.

ZACHARIAS

544

article

convinced that the provision was necessary;3 there was also some confusion as to its relationship to pacta sunt servanda (N. 5, 12),4 not least as that rule had then not yet been discussed in the ILC. This debate influenced Article 30 of the ILC Draft 1963.5 Waldock Report IV settled the final position of the provision within the Convention, i.e., at the outset of Part V rather than at the beginning of the Convention itself as originally envisaged in 1963.6 In 1966 Waldock squarely put the question to the ILC whether or not the provision should be retained.7 It was eventually regarded as necessary since “[it provided] that the only possible exceptions to the validity and full operation of a treaty were those stated in the draft articles”.8 The final result, Article 39 of the ILC Draft 1966,9 still asserted in its para. 2 that “a treaty the nullity of which is established under the present articles is void”. At the Vienna Conference, this rule was transferred to Article 69 (q.v., N. 2).10 None of the other amendments proposed were adopted.11 Very little was said in Vienna on Article 42 itself. Rather, the discussion gave a first taste of the intense debate to come in respect of Articles 65 and 66 (Article 66, N. 1).12 Article 42 was adopted in 1969 by 90 votes to one, with no abstentions.13

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 42

1. Scope

3The position of Article 42 at the beginning of Part V is not coincidental. It emphasises that a treaty may only be brought to its end through or as a result of the application of the present Convention (or, in para. 2, also as a result of the application of the provisions of the treaty). These terms

3See, e.g., the statements by Castren, YBILC 1963 I 195, para. 74 (“no one disputed that the validity of treaties was the rule”), versus Gros, ibid. para. 79 (“necessary to repeat some

obvious truths”).

4 Statement by Waldock in the ILC, ibid. 196, para. 84.

5“Every treaty concluded and brought into force . . . shall be considered as being in force and in operation with regard to any State that has become a party to the treaty, unless the nullity, termination or suspension of the treaty . . . results from the application of the

present articles”, YBILC 1963 II 189.

6 YBILC 1965 II 65 f, para. 2. The Report also included for the first time the notion of the suspension of the operation of a treaty, i.e., today’s second sentence of para. 2 (N. 10).

7 YBILC 1966 I/1 5, para. 11.

8 Statement by Tunkin, ibid. 7, paras. 39 and 45. 9 ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 236 f.

10OR 1968 CoW 481, para. 68.

11OR Documents 159, para. 350; OR 1968 CoW 481, paras. 68 and 72.

12T he debate is reproduced at OR 1968 CoW 215 , 451, 481 f, and 488 f. See, e.g., the statements by the delegations of Switzerland, Australia, Peru, Ceylon and Turkey.

13OR 1969 Plenary 73, para. 10.

ZACHARIAS

validity and continuance in force of treaties

545

 

lay down the principle of legality (lawfulness) in bringing a treaty to its end.

 

Article 42 a rms that all Convention provisions are relevant,14 in particular

 

those of Part V which list exhaustively all grounds of invalidity, termination,

 

denunciation, withdrawal and suspension. No other grounds are permitted

 

(N. 11).15 Article 42 concerns mainly Sections 2 and 3 (N. 8–11), but also

 

Section 1 and Section 4 on procedure (N. 6).

 

 

Although, according to its title, Article 42 concerns the validity and con-

4

tinuance in force of treaties, perusal of the text discloses that in fact it deals

 

with how a treaty may be brought to an end. The title is a remnant of the fear

 

in the ILC that Part V could open the door to unilateral assertions calling in

 

question the security and stability of treaties (N. 2). It serves as a reminder

 

that the validity and continuance in force of a treaty are considered the normal

 

state and constitute the primary rule.16

 

 

If a treaty has been executed (e.g., all the promised goods have been delivered), there

 

may no longer be an obligation flowing from the treaty, but the treaty itself

 

remains.17

 

 

Thus, Article 42 contains a presumption of the validity of a treaty. In doubt,

5

it is up to a State to demonstrate a ground of invalidity, termination etc. of

 

a treaty, rather than for the other State to show that the treaty remains valid

 

and in force.18 As such, Article 42 represents the “other facet of the pacta

 

sunt servanda rule” (N. 12).19

 

 

As the history of Article 42 (N. 2) confirms, an important aim of this provi-

6

sion is to recall that a treaty may only be brought to an end by means of the

 

procedures in Articles 65–68 (q.v.).20 Unilateral assertion by a State that a treaty is invalid or no longer binding has no e ect.21

14T he ILC Report 1966 pointed out that Article 5 (q.v.) on treaties constituting international organisations might be relevant, YBILC 1966 II 237, para. 4; also Jennings/Watts N. 635 at n. 1. See also Article 80 (q.v.) on the treaty’s registration with the United Nations.

15See the statement in Vienna by Blix of the Swedish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 222, para. 16.

16ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 236, para. 1; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 39; Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 66, para. 3 (“to discourage . . . facile recourse to those provisions for the purpose of repudiating treaties”).

17Kohen, Article 42, N. 32.

18Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 195, para. 76 (“the burden lay on the party wishing to contest the validity of a treaty”); also Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 39.

19Statement in Vienna by the delegation of the then USSR, OR 1968 CoW 220, para. 54.

20See the statements by Sir Humphrey Waldock as Expert Consultant in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 226, para. 64 (“several representatives had emphasized the link between Articles [42] and [65] and rightly so”); and by Sinclair of the UK delegation, ibid. 218, para. 29; Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 446; Jennings/Watts N. 643.

21See the statement in Vienna by Briggs of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 222, para. 10; See the sep. op. of Judge de Castro in the Fisheries Jurisdiction (UK v. Iceland) Case,

ZACHARIAS

546

article

7To the extent that Article 42 contains mere references to the grounds of invalidity, termination etc. as in Part V of the Convention and to the relevance of other treaties, it lacks normative quality. However, to the extent that it provides for the exclusive application of the Convention to all these grounds, it amounts to a rule.

2. Validity (Para. 1)

8Para. 1 provides that the validity of a treaty or of the consent of a State to be bound by a treaty may be impeached, i.e., challenged, only through the application of the present Convention. The principle of legality (lawfulness) implied herein has been referred to above (N. 3).

Interestingly, para. 1 refers only to “the application of the present Convention” and not “of the provisions of the treaty” as in para. 2. The reason for this di erence is most likely practical rather than dogmatic: a treaty will hardly pronounce itself on consent leading to its (in)validity (as in para. 1),22 whereas treaties frequently contain provisions on their termination, denunciation, etc. (as in para. 2).

9The grounds of invalidity of a treaty referred to in para. 1 in application of the present Convention are listed—exhaustively (N. 3)—in Section 2 of Part V as follows:

consent expressed in violation of a provision of internal law (Article 46, q.v.);

specific restrictions on the authority to express the consent of a State (Article 47, q.v.);

error (Article 48, q.v.);

corrupting the representative of a State (Article 50, q.v.);

coercing the representative of a State (Article 51, q.v.);

coercing a State by the threat or use of force (Article 52, q.v.); and

a treaty conflicting with a norm of jus cogens (Article 53, q.v.).

3. Termination, Denunciation, Withdrawal and Suspension (Para. 2)

10Para. 2 has been divided into two sentences, thereby avoiding a certain heaviness of formulation. The first sentence provides that the termination of a

ICJ Reports 1974 75: “in the light of the principles enshrined in Article 42 [of the Convention], it is quite clear that Iceland does not have the right to declare unilaterally that the agreement made in 1961 no longer constitutes an obligation for it”; Malanczuk, Akehurst’s Modern Introduction 36.

22See the statement by Waldock in the ILC in the context of Article 44 (q.v.) on the separability of treaty provisions, YBILC 1966 I/1 103, para. 60: “it was hardly conceivable that a treaty would contain provisions relating to its own invalidity”.

ZACHARIAS

validity and continuance in force of treaties

547

treaty, its denunciation or the withdrawal of a party, may take place only as a result of the application or of the present Convention. The second sentence states that the same rule applies to suspension of the operation of a treaty. These grounds are listed—again exhaustively (N. 3)—in Section 3 of Part V as follows:

terminating, or withdrawing, from a treaty under its provisions or by consent of the parties (Article 54, q.v.);

the reduction of the parties to a multilateral treaty below the number necessary for its entry into force (Article 55, q.v.);

denouncing, or withdrawing from, a treaty containing no provision regarding termination, denunciation or withdrawal (Article 56, q.v.);

suspending the operation of a treaty under its provisions or by consent of the parties (Article 57, q.v.);

suspension of the operation of a multilateral treaty by agreement between certain of the parties only (Article 58, q.v.);

terminating or suspending the operation of a treaty implied by conclusion of a later treaty (Article 59, q.v.);

terminating or suspending the operation of a treaty as a consequence of its breach (Article 60, q.v.);

the supervening impossibility of performance (Article 61, q.v.);

a fundamental change of circumstances (Article 62, q.v.);

the severance of diplomatic or consular relations (Article 63, q.v.); and

the emergence of a new norm of jus cogens (Article 64, q.v.).

Article 42 does not constitute jus cogens, and States are the masters of their 11 own treaties. They may at any time provide for particular rules (i.e., additional to those mentioned in Part V) on the manner in which a treaty ends. Accordingly, para. 2 provides further that the termination of a treaty, its denunciation or the withdrawal of a party, may also take place as a result

of the application of the provisions of the treaty.23

States may reach agreement not only in the treaty text itself, but also, according to Article 31 (q.v., N. 15–23), in agreements or instruments relating to the conclusion of the treaty, or reached thereafter. Such agreements may be oral or even tacit (Article 54, N. 8).24

23ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 237, para. 3.

24Di erently Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 446, 512.

ZACHARIAS

548

article

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

12Article 42 lies at the heart of the entire Convention, though it directly concerns the provisions of Part V of the Convention.25

The ILC saw a special relationship between Articles 42 and 26 (q.v.). The latter enshrines the rule pacta sunt servanda and the obligation of the parties to perform in good faith a treaty which is in force. Article 42, on the other hand, concerns the question whether or not a treaty is in force and thus determines whether the necessary conditions for the application of Article 26 have been fulfilled.26

2. Matters Not Dealt With

13Article 42 is exhaustive in that it excludes all means of ending a treaty which are not mentioned in Part V of the Convention. Any other means of ending a treaty—e.g., that a treaty is void for uncertainty27—may no longer be invoked.

To be distinguished therefrom are additional grounds to end a treaty on which all States or some States inter se may agree (N. 11).

Furthermore, Article 42 remains subject to Article 73 (q.v.) according to which the Convention “shall not prejudge any question that may arise in regard to a treaty from a succession of States or from the international responsibility of a State or from the outbreak of hostilities from States”. Article 73 thus leaves open which legal e ects these areas may have according to general international law on a treaty between State parties. From the point of view of the Convention, however, and having regard to Article 42, para. 2 (q.v.), it is not possible to claim that State succession, State responsibility or the outbreak of hostilities can serve as a ground to terminate a particular treaty or suspend its operation (unless the treaty specifically provides therefor), since such cases are not covered by Part V (Articles 42–72, q.v.).28

A treaty may be terminated by falling into desuetude (obsolescence), i.e., by means of a customary rule (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 30–33).29 It is true that in

25See, e.g., the situation in Article 8, where the representative’s State may at the outset unilaterally repudiate the treaty; in this respect, Section V and the procedures of Articles 65–68 do not apply (q.v., N. 6, 8).

26See the statements in the ILC by Ago, YBILC 1966 I/1 6, para. 24; also Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 196, para. 84.

27Jennings/Watts N. 635 at n. 1, with reference to the Declaration of Judge Lauterpacht in the Sovereignty over Certain Frontier Land Case, ICJ Reports 1959 230 f.

28See the situation in the Gabcikovo-Nagymaros Project (Hungary/Slovakia) Case, ICJ Reports 1997 38, para. 47, regarding State responsibility.

29Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 108, para. 7, and in YBILC 1966 I/1 50, 91. See the criticism by Sinclair, Vienna Convention 163 ; di erently Aust, Modern Treaty Law 306 f.

ZACHARIAS

validity and continuance in force of treaties

549

the Nuclear Tests (Australia/France) Case,30 the joint diss. op. considered that the Convention had intentionally omitted desuetude insofar as it was not covered by Articles 42 and 54. This overlooks that customary law continues to exist independently of the Convention (Preamble, N. 16).

3. Customary Basis of Article 42

 

The customary basis of Article 42 necessarily depends on whether Part V as

14

a whole has developed into customary law. Given that a number of articles,

 

in particular Articles 65–68 on procedures (Article 65, N. 27), must be con-

 

sidered as so far only crystallising into customary international law, the same

 

conclusion must also apply to Article 42.31

 

D. APPRECIATION

 

The travaux préparatoires disclose that Article 42 serves to substantiate quite

15

di erent points of view on Part V of the Convention (and even pacta sunt ser-

 

vanda, N. 5),32 while o ering a strong basis to argue for procedural safeguards

 

according to Articles 65–68 (N. 6). It has also been shown that the purported

 

main value of Article 42—to limit the grounds to end a treaty—is to some

 

extent called in question by the many qualifications arising from the possibili-

 

ties of States to enter into separate agreements on the matter (N. 11).

 

In fact, the strengths of Article 42 lie elsewhere: (i) the provision ostracises

16

unilateral assertions of invalidity and the termination, etc. of a treaty; (ii)

 

it provides for a distribution of proof—a presumption (N. 5)—as to what

 

may be claimed by which State when it is argued that a treaty has come

 

to its end; and (iii) Article 42 introduces a certain systematic order (and with Articles 53 and 64 on jus cogens even a hierarchy) into the provisions of Part V and the Convention as a whole.

30ICJ Reports 1974 337 f.

31Similarly, Kohen, Article 42, N. 7–8.

32T his apparently led Elias in the ILC to observe that “Article (42) [does] not state a very strong rule”, YBILC 1966 I/1 7, para. 43.

ZACHARIAS

Article 43

Obligations imposed by international law independently of a treaty

The invalidity, termination or denunciation of a treaty, the withdrawal of a party from it, or the suspension of its operation, as a result of the application of the present Convention or of the provisions of the treaty, shall not in any way impair the duty of any State to fulfil any obligation embodied in the treaty to which it would be subject under international law independently of the treaty.

Article 43 Obligations imposées par le droit international indépendamment d’un traité

La nullité, l’extinction ou la dénonciation d’un traité, le retrait d’une des parties ou la suspension de l’application du traité, lorsqu’ils résultent de l’application de la présente Convention ou des dispositions du traité, n’a ectent en aucune manière le devoir d’un État de remplir toute obligation énoncée dans le traité à laquelle il est soumis en vertu du droit international indépendamment dudit traité.

Artikel 43 Pflichten, die das Völkerrecht unabhängig von einem Vertrag auferlegt

Die Ungültigkeit, Beendigung oder Kündigung eines Vertrags, der Rücktritt einer Vertragspartei vom Vertrag oder seine Suspendierung beeinträchtigen, soweit sie sich aus der Anwendung dieses Übereinkommens oder des Vertrags ergeben, in keiner Hinsicht die Pflicht eines Staates, eine in dem Vertrag enthaltene Verpflichtung zu erfüllen, der er auch unabhängig von dem Vertrag auf Grund des Völkerrechts unterworfen ist.

obligations imposed by international law

551

ILC Draft 1966

Article 40—Obligations under other rules of international law

The invalidity, termination or denunciation of a treaty, the withdrawal of a party from it, or the suspension of its operation, as a result of the application of the present articles or of the terms of the treaty, shall not in any way impair the duty of any State to fulfil any obligation embodied in the treaty to which it is subject under any other rule of international law.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Article 28, para. 3.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 234 , 282, 318.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 53, para. 4.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 129, 131 f; 1966 I/2 293, 299, 303, 330.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 40.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 227 f, 463; OR 1969 Plenary 73 f.

Vienna Conference Vote: 99:0:1

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Issues of Customary International Law, q.v.):

K. Bannelier-Christakis, Article 43, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1615 .

ZACHARIAS

552

article

 

CONTENTS

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 43 ............................................................

3

C. Context ...............................................................................................

6

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

6

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

7

3.

Customary Basis of Article 43 ...........................................................

8

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

9

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

1 Article 43 drew inspiration from a clause enshrined in the four 1949 Geneva Conventions.1 Thus, Article 63, para. 4 of the Convention (I) for the Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in Armed Forces in the Field provides:

“[t]he denunciation [of the Convention] shall . . . in no way impair the obligations which the Parties to the conflict shall remain bound to fulfil by virtue of the principles of the law of nations, as they result from the usages established among civilized peoples, from the laws of humanity and the dictates of the public conscience.”2

2. History

2The provision was originally part of Article 28 of Waldock Report II of 1963 concerning the Legal E ect of the Termination of a Treaty.3 The ILC

1

See Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 131, para. 31.

2

Also Article 62, para. 3 of the Convention (II) for the Amelioration of the Condition of

 

Wounded, Sick and Shipwrecked Members of Armed Forces at Sea; Article 142, para. 4 of

 

the Convention (III) relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War; and Article 158, para.

 

3 of the Convention (IV) relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War.

 

See further the Martens’ Clause; R. Schircks, Die Martensche Klausel. Rezeption und

 

Rechtsqualität (2002).

3ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 94; already Article 19, subpara. 1(iv) of Fitzmaurice Report II, YBILC 1957 II 31, 54, para. 126, referred in this context to “self-existent” obligations amounting to a limitation of the termination or suspension of a treaty.

ZACHARIAS

obligations imposed by international law

553

discussed the principle in 1963 and generally viewed it as self-evident, the debate focusing more on whether a right to denounce general multilateral treaties should be completely excluded (N. 6).4 Article 53, para. 4 of the ILC Draft 1963, altering the principle only slightly, attracted observations from two States, both supporting the provision.5 In 1966 the ILC incorporated para. 4 in a separate article in order to deal with the cases of bringing a treaty to its end (invalidity, withdrawal, suspension of operation, etc.); eventually, it adopted Article 40 of the ILC Draft 1966.6 At the 1968 Conference three States submitted amendments, none of which were accepted by the Drafting Committee.7 In 1969 comments focused on the wider context of the provision and on drafting matters. Article 43 was adopted by 99 votes to none, with one abstention.8

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 43

 

In the structure of Part V, Article 43 immediately succeeds Article 42 (q.v.,

3

N. 3). This demonstrates both its importance and that it relates to all aspects

 

of Part V, namely the invalidity, termination or denunciation of a treaty,

 

the withdrawal of a party from it, or the suspension of its operation.

 

Article 42 thereby assumes that the invalidity of the treaty has been, or is

 

being, impeached, and that the termination, etc. has taken, or is taking,

 

place as a result of the application of the present Convention or of the

 

provisions of the treaty.

 

Whatever the consequences of the invalidity, termination, etc., this shall not

4

in any way impair the duty of any State to fulfil any obligation which

 

is independent of the treaty and in particular of a contractual obligation.

 

Article 43 refers namely to any other obligations to which the State would

 

be subject under international law. Such obligations derive in particular

 

from customary international law, possibly also from general principles of

 

international law. As the formulation “embodied in the treaty” indicates,

 

Article 43 envisages identical, underlying customary law. The provision

 

thus refers to declaratory treaty rules (Issues of Customary International Law,

 

4 E.g., the statements in the ILC by Tunkin, YBILC 1963 I 235, para. 36; de Luna, Tabibi and Bartos, ibid. 121 ; Ago and Lachs, ibid. 134 ; and Waldock, ibid. 130 f.

5 YBILC 1963 II 216; see the observations to the ILC by the Governments of Portugal, YBILC 1966 II 332; and the US, ibid. 356.

6 YBILC 1966 I/1 129, para. 32; ILC Draft 1966, YBILC 1966 II 237.

7China and the US proposed minor drafting changes, Pakistan suggested mentioning the UN Charter and bona fides, OR Documents 160, para. 362; see OR 1968 CoW 463, paras.

3 .

8 OR 1969 Plenary 74, para. 19. The debate is reproduced ibid. 73 f.

ZACHARIAS

554

article

N. 35), but does not concern other, non-identical customary rules. This result is generally acknowledged in case-law and doctrine.9

By referring to obligations to which a State would be subject (rather than “to which it is subject”, as previous ILC Drafts proposed, N. 2), Article 43 leaves open whether or not in a given case the treaty rule is currently codificatory of, or will eventually generate, new customary international law. The separate legal basis of the customary rule has to be ascertained individually and independently of the contractual obligation (Issues of Customary International Law, N. 2). Note here that the French and German versions (il est soumis; unterworfen ist) still employ the formulations of the ILC Draft of 1966.

5Article 43 does not state how the obligation underlying the impeached treaty rule arises or to what extent it is binding. The situation thus resembles Article 38 (q.v., N. 8) in that Article 43 does not itself constitute a rule. Its function is, ex abundantia cautela, to remind State parties to a treaty that, however the latter disposes of its own denunciation etc. (treaties may indeed be silent on the matter), they remain bound by any customary law existing independently of the treaty.10 In other words the principle remains valid even without the reference in Article 43. A similar clause can be found in Article 317, para. 3 of UN Convention on the Law of the Sea.11

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

6The principle in Article 43 corresponds with Article 38 (q.v.). However, while the latter deals with generation of new customary international law, Article 43 no longer distinguishes between whether the customary rule arose before or after the adoption of the Convention. Finally, Article 43 complements the eighth preambular para. (Preamble, N. 14).12

9See the Military and Paramilitary Activities (Nicaragua/USA) Case, ICJ Reports 1986 113 f, para. 218; ibid. 95, para. 178, where the Court found in respect of a State’s right under Article 60, subpara. 3(b) (q.v., N. 15–16) to terminate or suspend the operation of a treaty: “if the two rules in question also exist as rules of customary international law, the failure of the one State to apply the one rule does not justify the other State in declining to apply the other rule”. See also Barberis, AFDI 36 (1990) 46; Danilenko, Law-Making 142; Schachter, Essays Sh. Rosenne 727; the 1967 Resolution of the Institut, Annuaire IDI

52 (1967 II) 394 , 562 (Article I/2).

10ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 217, para. 5.

11“The denunciation [of the Convention] shall not in any way a ect the duty of any State Party to fulfil any obligation embodied in this Convention to which it would be subject under international law independently of this Convention”.

12See the statement in Vienna by Briggs of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 227, para. 74.

ZACHARIAS

obligations imposed by international law

555

Article 17, para. 4 of the Waldock Report II of 1963 provided that “a treaty shall continue in force indefinitely with respect to each party where the treaty . . . is a general multilateral treaty providing for the codification or progressive development of international law”. The Convention no longer contains such a reference. The omission is fortunate, since it can rarely be stated at the outset whether or not every treaty rule is declaratory of customary international law. Article 43 is better suited in that it requires the ascertainment of the declaratory nature of each individual treaty rule (N. 4 i.f.)

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Originally, the ILC also dealt with, but then dropped, the contractual tem-

7

poral issues arising after the treaty’s termination which are henceforth no

 

longer regulated in the Convention.13

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 43

 

Article 43 possesses no normative quality. It function is solely that of a “gen-

8

eral reservation” (N. 5) on the conditions of existing customary law, without

 

entering into the matter in any detail.14

 

D. APPRECIATION

 

As with Article 38 (q.v., N. 13), the fact that Article 43 merely serves as a

9

“general reservation” does not imply its irrelevance. The provision confirms the

 

continuing role of customary international law. Attracting near-unanimous support in Vienna in 1968/1969, Article 43 discloses a general recognition by the State community of the principle enshrined therein. Indeed, the ILC viewed the article as “axiomatic” and “self-evident”.15

13Article 28 (q.v., N. 2); Article 56 of the ILC Draft 1964, YBILC 1964 II 177, para. 1.

14Differently Bannelier-Christakis, Article 43, N. 11 ([l]e caractère coutumier . . .

semble . . . ne jamais avoir fait de doute.

15ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 217, para. 5; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 237, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

Article 44

Separability of treaty provisions

1.A right of a party, provided for in a treaty or arising under Article 56, to denounce, withdraw from or suspend the operation of the treaty may be exercised only with respect to the whole treaty unless the treaty otherwise provides or the parties otherwise agree.

2.A ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty recognised in the present Convention may be invoked only with respect to the whole treaty except as provided in the following paragraphs or in Article 60.

3.If the ground relates solely to particular clauses, it may be invoked only with respect to those clauses where:

(a)the said clauses are separable from the remainder of the treaty with regard to their application;

(b)it appears from the treaty or is otherwise established that acceptance of those clauses was not an essential basis of the consent of the other party or parties to be bound by the treaty as a whole; and

(c)continued performance of the remainder of the treaty would not be unjust.

4.In cases falling under Articles 49 and 50 the State entitled to invoke the fraud or corruption may do so with respect either to the whole treaty or, subject to paragraph 3, to the particular clauses alone.

5.In cases falling under Articles 51, 52 and 53, no separation of the provisions of the treaty is permitted.

Article 44 Divisibilité des dispositions d’un traité

1.Le droit pour une partie, prévu dans un traité ou résultant de l’article 56, de dénoncer le traité, de s’en retirer ou d’en suspendre l’application ne peut être exercé qu’à l’égard de l’ensemble du traité, à moins que ce dernier n’en dispose ou que les parties n’en conviennent autrement.

separability of treaty provisions

557

2.Une cause de nullité ou d’extinction d’un traité, de retrait d’une des parties ou de suspension de l’application du traité reconnue aux termes de la présente Convention ne peut être invoquée qu’à l’égard de l’ensemble du traité, sauf dans les conditions prévues aux paragraphes suivants ou à l’article 60.

3.Si la cause en question ne vise que certaines clauses déterminées, elle ne peut être invoquée qu’à l’égard de ces seules clauses lorsque:

a)ces clauses sont séparables du reste du traité en ce qui concerne leur exécution;

b)il ressort du traité ou il est par ailleurs établi que l’acceptation des clauses en question n’a pas constitué pour l’autre partie ou pour les autres parties au traité une base essentielle de leur consentement à être liées par le traité dans son ensemble; et

c)il n’est pas injuste de continuer à exécuter ce qui subsiste du traité.

4.Dans les cas relevant des articles 49 et 50, l’Etat qui a le droit d’invoquer le dol ou la corruption peut le faire soit à l’égard de l’ensemble du traité soit, dans le cas visé au par. 3, à l’égard seulement de certaines clauses déterminées.

5.Dans les cas prévus aux articles 51, 52 et 53, la division des dispositions d’un traité n’est pas admise.

Artikel 44 Trennbarkeit von Vertragsbestimmungen

1.Das in einem Vertrag vorgesehene oder sich aus Artikel 56 ergebende Recht einer Vertragspartei, zu kündigen, zurückzutreten oder den Vertrag zu suspendieren, kann nur hinsichtlich des gesamten Vertrags ausgeübt werden, sofern der Vertrag nichts anderes vorsieht oder die Vertragsparteien nichts anderes vereinbaren.

2.Ein in diesem Übereinkommen anerkannter Grund dafür, einen Vertrag als ungültig zu erklären, ihn zu beenden, von ihm zurückzutreten oder ihn zu suspendieren, kann nur hinsichtlich des gesamten Vertrags geltend gemacht werden, sofern in den folgenden Absätzen oder in Artikel 60 nichts anderes vorgesehen ist.

3.Tri t der Grund nur auf einzelne Bestimmungen zu, so kann er hinsichtlich dieser allein geltend gemacht werden,

a)wenn diese Bestimmungen von den übrigen Vertragsbestimmungen getrennt angewendet werden können;

ZACHARIAS

558

article

b)wenn aus dem Vertrag hervorgeht oder anderweitig feststeht, dass die Annahme dieser Bestimmungen keine wesentliche Grundlage für die Zustimmung der anderen Vertragspartei oder Vertragsparteien war, durch den gesamten Vertrag gebunden zu sein, und

c)wenn die Weiteranwendung der übrigen Vertragsbestimmungen nicht unbillig ist.

4.In den Fällen der Artikel 49 und 50 kann ein Staat, der berechtigt ist, Betrug oder Bestechung geltend zu machen, dies entweder hinsichtlich des gesamten Vertrags oder, vorbehaltlich des Absatzes 3, nur hinsichtlich einzelner Bestimmungen tun.

5.In den Fällen der Artikel 51, 52 und 53 ist die Abtrennung einzelner Vertragsbestimmungen unzulässig.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 63—Separability of treaty provisions

1.A right of a party provided for in a treaty to denounce, withdraw from or suspend the operation of the treaty may only be exercised with respect to the whole treaty unless the treaty otherwise provides or the parties otherwise agree.

2.A ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty recognised in the present articles may only be invoked with respect to the whole treaty except as provided in the following paragraphs or in Article 57.

3.If the ground relates to particular clauses alone, it may only be invoked with respect to those clauses where:

(a)the said clauses are separable from the remainder of the treaty with regard to their application; and

(b)acceptance of those clauses was not an essential basis of the consent of the other party or parties to the treaty as a whole

4.Subject to paragraph 3, in cases falling under Articles 46 and 47 the State entitled to invoke the fraud or corruption may do so with respect either to the whole treaty or to the particular clauses alone.

5.In cases falling under Articles 48, 49 and 50, no separation of the provisions of the treaty is permitted.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

559

Materials:

Waldock Report II: Articles 13, para. 3, 26.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 62 , 210 f, 215 , 285, 288 , 294 , 311, 317 , 322.

ILC Draft 1963: Articles 33, para. 2, 34, para. 3, 35, para. 2, 42, para. 4, 43, para. 3, 44, para. 4, 45, para. 2, 46.

Waldock Report V: Article 46.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 14 , 23, 59, 67, 75, 87 , 99 , 116, 132 ; 1966 I/2 317 f, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 41.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 228 , 389 , 482 f; OR 1969 Plenary 74 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 96:0:8

Selected Literature:

M. Bedjaoui/T. Leidgens, Article 44, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1641 .

ZACHARIAS

560

article

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 44 ............................................................

3

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

3

2.

Separability Provided for in a Treaty or Under Article 56

 

 

(Para. 1) ...........................................................................................

6

3.

Principle of Indivisibility (Para. 2) ....................................................

10

4.

Separability as the Exception (Para. 3) ..............................................

12

 

a) Opening Sentence ......................................................................

12

 

b) Notion of Separability (Subpara. 3[a]) ........................................

15

 

c) Essential Basis of Consent (Subpara. 3[b]) ..................................

16

 

d) “Justness” of Continued Performance (Subpara. 3[c]) .................

18

5.

Situation of Articles 49 and 50 (Para. 4) ...........................................

19

6.

Situation of Articles 51–53 (Para. 5) .................................................

20

C. Context ...............................................................................................

21

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

21

2.

Customary Basis of Article 44 ...........................................................

22

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

23

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

1 Utile non debet per inutile vitiari. That which is useful should not be vitiated by that which is useless. It appears legitimate to sever an invalid condition and to regard the rest of the instrument as valid provided that the condition in question does not constitute an essential part of the instrument.1 Traditionally, however, the separability of treaty provisions was considered, if at all, solely in connexion with a party’s right to terminate a treaty on account of its breach, but not on any other grounds.2 Eventually, doctrine came to distinguish between branches of essential and non-essential conditions and

1See the sep. ops. of Judge Lauterpacht in the Norwegian Loans Case, ICJ Reports 1957 56 f; and in the Interhandel Case, ICJ Reports 1959 116 f; the sep. op. of Judge Spender,

ibid. 57.

2 Aust, Modern Treaty Law 304; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

561

to that extent recognised that treaty provisions were to some degree sepa-

rable.3 In 1912 the Institut recognised in its Règlement on the e ects of the

outbreak of war the principle of separability in the case of treaties with “des

clauses de nature diverse”.4 Article 30 of the 1935 Harvard Draft allowed for

separation if “[the] provision [was] clearly independent of other provisions

in the treaty”.5

 

The roots of Article 44 can be traced back to McNair: where a treaty envisaged its

denunciation, he did not regard the severance of provisions as permissible unless the

treaty expressly contemplated the separate denunciation of particular articles. Neverthe-

less, severance was possible in case of breach and, in particular, in cases of invalidity.

Thus, severance could prevent the invalidity of a particular provision from striking

down the entire treaty.6

 

2.

History

 

In 1963 Waldock Report II introduced Article 26 on severance (similar to

2

today’s Article 44), and Article 13, para. 3 on jus cogens with a separate clause

 

on separability.7 The ensuing debate was very much “patchwork”, the ILC

 

discussing seperability in respect of numerous provisions under Part V.8 The

 

ILC Draft 1963 accordingly included specific clauses on separability in various

 

other articles.9 Eight States commented in mostly favourable terms there-

 

upon.10 In 1966 the ILC returned to its original plan of one main provision

 

on separability.11 In Vienna, various amendments were put forward, though

 

only one—by the US proposing subpara. 3(c) (N. 18)—was adopted.12 The

 

 

 

 

 

3

Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 90, para. 1.

 

4

“Toutefois le traité tombe pour le tout quand il présente le caractère d’une acte indivis-

 

 

ible”, Annuaire IDI 25 (1912) 648.

 

5

AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1134.

 

6

Law of Treaties 474–489; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 91, para. 5.

 

7

YBILC 1963 II 52 f, 90 .

 

8

T he debate is at YBILC 1963 I 62 , 210 f, 215 , 285, 288 , 294 , 311, 317 , and

 

 

322.

 

 

9Article 26 is reproduced in ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1963 II 211 f; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 288, para. 8.

10Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 7 .

11See the statements by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 15 (on fraud, Article 49, q.v.); 59, para. 17 (on breach, Article 60, q.v.); 75, para. 50 (on clausula rebus sic stantibus, Article 62, q.v.); and 87, para. 29 (on the emergence of a new rule of jus cogens, Article 64, q.v.). The revised Article 41 is reproduced at ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 237 .

12T he US amendment is reproduced at OR Documents 161, subpara. 369(iii)(a); it was adopted at OR 1968 CoW 389, para. 37. See among other (unsuccessful) amendments: the proposal by the UK which aimed at restructuring the provision, OR Documents 161, subpara. 369(i); and the proposal by Finland, aiming at including the clausula rebus sic stantibus (Article 62, q.v.) as a further exception in para. 2 (N. 11), ibid. subpara. 369(iii)(d).

ZACHARIAS

562

article

debate in 1968/1969 was conducted on an exceptionally high level. Interestingly, some States called for an “impartial body” (as in Article 66, q.v.) to adjudicate in particular the application of subpara. 3 (b) (N. 16–17).13 Article 44 was adopted in 1969 by 96 votes to none, with eight abstentions.14

In 1969 the Conference voted on a Finnish proposal to delete the words “and 53” in para. 5 (N. 20), but it failed to attract the necessary two thirds majority. It was then unclear to the Conference which conclusion to draw therefrom. It next transpired that various delegations had not been quite certain what the vote was actually about. Eventually, a second vote was held on the same matter, whereupon the words “and 53” were retained.15

B.INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 44

1.Scope

3Article 44 concerns the separability of treaty provisions for all cases of invalidity, termination withdrawal from and suspension of the operation of a treaty. This explains its position at the outset of Part V. The provision provides in para. 2 for the principle of the indivisibility of treaty provisions (N. 10), while circumscribing in paras. 3–5 the conditions for the exceptional severance of individual treaty provisions and clauses (N. 12–20). If these conditions are satisfied, Article 44 authorises the separation of the invalid, terminated, denounced or suspended clause from the remainder of the treaty and the maintenance in force of the remainder.16 At the centre of Article 44 lies para. 3 and in particular subpara. 3(c) which must be read together with all other paragraphs.17

4The purpose of Article 44 in the context of invalidity, termination or suspension of the operation of a treaty is to find a balance, on the one hand, between the interest of the parties in the integrity of the treaty, and, on the other, their interest in continuing the treaty despite the “extraction” of certain clauses.18 It follows from the consensual element in all treaties that the basis

13See the statements by the delegations of the UK, OR 1968 CoW 229, para. 14; and Italy, OR 1969 Plenary 75, para. 29. The debate is reproduced at OR 1968 CoW 228 , 389 , and 482 f; and OR 1969 Plenary 74–77.

14OR 1969 Plenary 77, para. 56.

15OR 1969 Plenary 74 ; see the statement by the delegation of Ecuador, ibid. 77, para. 50 (“many delegations had thought they were voting for the retention . . . while many others had believed they were voting for deletion”).

16ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 5.

17Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 216, para. 95; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 304.

18ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 2.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

563

 

of obligation upon which the consents were given should not be altered.19

 

However, a treaty should not be brought to nothing on grounds relating in

 

particular to provisions which were not an essential basis of the consent.20

 

Article 44 provides various criteria to enable the balancing of these di erent

 

interests. Of course, the fact that parts of the treaty can be saved does not

 

mean that the parties thereby condone, for instance, fraud, corruption or a

 

breach of treaty.21

 

 

When concluding treaties, States are free to include their own views on the

5

separability of treaty provisions. This is reflected in para. 1 of Article 44 (N.

 

7). It transpires from subpara. 3(b) that they are furthermore free ad hoc or

 

even post hoc to decide inter se on the separability of particular treaty provisions

 

(N. 16). Finally, if a treaty has been declared invalid or has been terminated,

 

etc., the parties are free to revise the treaty and to let it enter into force again

 

as a new treaty with altered provisions or with only some of the provisions

 

of the previous treaty.22

 

 

2. Separability Provided for in a Treaty or Under Article 56 (Para. 1)

 

At the outset, para. 1 inquires as to the situation of a particular treaty, namely

6

as to whether or not it provides for a right of a party to denounce, with-

 

draw from or suspend the operation of the treaty. Two situations must be distinguished: if the treaty contains no such right, separability will be excluded (though the conditions in paras. 2–5 may apply, N. 10–20). If the treaty does provide for such a right to denunciation, withdrawal or suspension, two further situations must be distinguished: If, despite such a right, the treaty does not specify the seperability of provisions, the presumption is that the right may be exercised only with respect to the whole treaty (though again the conditions in paras. 2–4 may apply, N. 10–20).23 On the other hand, where the treaty may provide otherwise, i.e., not only for denunciation, withdrawal or suspension but also the conditions as to the separability of provisions of the treaty, these particular conditions will prevail.24

19Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 93, para. 10; ILC Report 1966, ibid.

20ILC Report 1966, ibid. See the statements in the ILC by Yasseen, YBILC 1966 I/1 99, para. 3 (“whatever could be saved of the treaty should be saved”); and Lachs, YBILC 1963 I 222, para. 72 (“to try to save the treaty and to make it live longer than it would have done under the rule of indivisibility”).

21Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 104, para. 66.

22In respect of jus cogens, see the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 8; the statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 99, para. 4. Di erently Rüegger of the Swiss delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 231, para. 44 (“if paragraph 3 was retained, it was to be feared that States might multiply separate agreements in order to safeguard, at least partly, the stability of law”).

23ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 3.

24Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 93, para. 11.

ZACHARIAS

25
26
27

564

article

7Even where according to para. 1 (N. 6) the treaty remains indivisible, the parties may otherwise agree to authorise its separability. According to Article 31, paras. 2 and 3 (q.v.), this envisages any agreement reached together with, or subsequent to, the conclusion of the treaty or even practice acquiesced in by the other parties.

8Para. 1 places Article 56 (on the denunciation of or withdrawal from a treaty containing no provision regarding termination, denunciation or withdrawal; q.v., N. 13) on the same level as a treaty providing for its denunciation, withdrawal or suspension (N. 6). Thus, a party’s right under Article 56 may be exercised only with respect to the entire treaty, unless the treaty provides or the parties agree otherwise.25

9In all these situations it is only that party enjoying the right to denounce, withdraw from or suspend the operation of the treaty which may also exercise the right to sever the provisions of the treaty.

3. Principle of Indivisibility (Para. 2)

10Whereas para. 1 concerns particular treaties (N. 6), para. 2 examines the separability of treaty provisions under the Convention generally, in particular where a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty is recognised in the present Convention, in particular in its Part V. Here, para. 2 states the principle that such a ground may be invoked only with respect to the whole treaty. By presuming that in such a case the whole treaty a priori will fall to the ground, the Convention emphasises the integrity and indivisibility of the provisions of the treaty.26

11Para. 2 provides for two exceptions. The conditions for the first are provided in the following paragraphs, in particular paras. 3–5 (N. 12–20). The second relates to Article 60 (q.v., N. 10–11).

A material breach by one party entitles the other party to invoke Article 60 in order to terminate the treaty or to suspend its operation in whole or in part without being obliged to ascertain whether the conditions especially in Article 44, para. 3 (N. 10–18) have been met. Rather, the injured party may itself decide the scope to be given to the e ect of the other party’s conduct.27 Article 60 thus provides States with considerable flexibility.28

Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 464.

ILC Report 1966, YIBLC 1966 II 238, para. 4; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 93, para. 12; Capotorti, ibid. 461 (“intégrité des dispositions du traité”).

See the statements in Vienna by the Romanian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 231, para. 39; and the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, ibid. 237, para. 40 (“breach must have its own régime”); and in the ILC by Jiménéz de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 318, para. 65 (“even if the strict conditions laid down in [Article 44] had not been met”).

28 Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 318, para. 64.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

565

 

4. Separability as the Exception (Para. 3)

 

 

a) Opening sentence

 

 

Para. 3 continues where para. 2 ends (N. 11), namely by stating in its open-

12

ing sentence that separability of treaty provisions is only possible where the

 

three conditions of subparas. 3(a)–(c) have been met. It follows from their

 

structure that subparas. 3(a)–(c) apply cumulatively (N. 3).29

 

 

The opening sentence provides an additional qualification to the separability

13

of treaty provisions, namely that the ground for invalidating, terminating,

 

withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty under the Conven-

 

tion shall relate solely to particular clauses of the treaty. In other words, if the

 

ground for invalidity, termination, withdrawal or suspension relates a priori

 

to the treaty as a whole, that treaty’s provisions will not be separable—even

 

if the other conditions in subparas. (a)–(c) are met.30 On the whole, only the

 

State party which may invoke the ground as such is entitled also to claim

 

separability in respect of particular clauses.

 

 

Interestingly, the term “clause” in paras. 3 and 4 does not coincide with the

14

title of Article 44 which refers to the separability of “treaty provisions”.31

 

The term was chosen on grounds of style and o ers flexibility: the clauses may

 

comprise one or more rules of a provision or an article of the treaty, one or a

 

number of articles of a treaty; and even a part, or parts, of the treaty.32

 

 

b) Notion of Separability (Subpara. 3[a])

 

 

As a fi rst condition, subpara. 3(a) requires that the treaty can in fact be

15

divided into components or constituents, namely that the said clauses are

 

separable from the remainder of the treaty with regard to their application. While “secondary”, i.e., inessential and subordinate clauses obviously lend themselves most easily to severance,33 subpara. 3(a) does not as such

29Note in particular the “and” at the end of subpara. 3(b). Interestingly, Bedjaoui/Leidgens, Article 44, N. 25 , speak in the context of para. 3 of a “divisibilité obligatoire”, and in the context of para. 4 of a “divisibilité facultative”, ibid. N. 36 .

30Statement by Briggs in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 101, para. 28; Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 462.

31Statements by Tsuruoka in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2, 331, para. 64; and in reply thereto by Waldock, ibid. para. 65 (“perfectly legitimate”).

32Statements in the ILC by Waldock, ibid. 61 (“in view of the frequency with which the word ‘provide’ was used in the Article, it had been thought that to use the word ‘provisions’ would be inelegant”); and Bartos, ibid. 63 (“a ‘clause’ was intermediate between a rule and a condition”); also by Sir Humphrey Waldock as Expert Consultant in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 236, para. 38 (“[clauses were] broad enough to cover situations where treaties were divided into chapters, sections or groups of articles”).

33See the early Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 93, para. 10 (“quite inessential points in the treaty”); the statement in Vienna by Rosenne of the Israeli delegation, OR 1968 CoW 230, para. 23 (“it seemed di cult to accept the proposition that a treaty could contain secondary propositions”). ZACHARIAS

566

article

rely for the separability on the importance of the clauses (which may indeed change over time).34 Rather, subpara. 3(a) provides a more general, objective test: in order to be separable, the clause or clauses together shall establish a separate, self-contained régime for a particular matter or matters which have little connexion with or are even independent of other matters regulated in the treaty. The lack of a link is not merely theoretical; it shall concern the practical application of the clauses. Indeed, the clause or clauses could have been the subject of di erent treaties, and they are linked together solely in their negotiation and conclusion and by the general provisions and final clauses of the instrument.35

In 1990 the Austrian Government informed the Governments of the US, the UK, France and the then USSR of the obsolescence in view of the fundamental changes in Europe of certain clauses of the 1955 State Treaty (Staatsvertrag), in particular Articles 12–16 of Part II. In respect of the issue of separability, it may be noted that these provisions related to the military and aviation. The remaining provisions of Part II concerned prisoners of war and military graves. The other Parts of the Treaty concerned the following subjects: I: Political and territorial provisions; III: Withdrawal of military troops; IV: War claims; V: Property rights; VI: General economic relations; VII: Settlement of disputes; VIII: Economic provisions; IX: Final clauses.36

c) Essential Basis of Consent (Subpara. 3[b])

16Asasecondcondition,subpara.3(b)stipulatesthattheacceptanceoftheseclauses was not an essential basis of the consent of the other party or parties to be bound by the treaty as a whole. Whether or not this is the case is a matter of interpretation,37 in particular it will appear from the treaty or will be otherwise established. The intrinsic and extrinsic means of interpretation in Articles 31–32 (q.v.) will disclose whether or not the clause in question was an essential basis of consent to be bound by the treaty as a whole. Reference will be had in particular to the subject-matter of the clauses, their relation with

34See the statement by the Argentinean delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 Cow 228, para. 6 (“some clauses which now appeared secondary might later be regarded as essential”).

35Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 93, para. 13 (mentioning ibid. para. 10, the 1919 Treaty of Versailles as an example, which contained “a series of separate treaties combined in the same instrument”); see the separability of the Compromissory Clause establishing the Court’s jurisdiction in the Fisheries Jurisdiction (UK/Iceland) Case, ICJ Reports 1973 15 f, para. 29; and 17 f, paras. 33 f.

36UNTS 217 (1955), 223; see G. Hafner, “L’obsolescence” de certaines dispositions du Traité d’État autrichien de 1955, AFDI 37 (1991) 239 , 247 f.

37See the statements by Cadieux in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 217, para. 3; and by the UK delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 229, para. 14 (“[para. 3] contained a very large subjective element, for it was impossible for a party to judge accurately what another party considered to be an essential basis of its consent”).

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

567

other clauses38 and the object and purpose of the treaty.39 Extrinsic means of interpretation comprise, inter alia, the circumstances of the conclusion of the treaty, tacit acceptance and subsequent agreements as in Article 31, paras. 2 and 3, and also the travaux préparatoires within the framework of Article 32.40 From all these means it will transpire whether separability was in fact consented upon by the parties. The result is objective in that it encompasses both the intentions of the parties41 and any evolution in the meaning of the terms.42

The test will be whether it is possible to eliminate the clause, or clauses, 17 without materially upsetting the balance of the interests of the parties under

the treaty.43 For instance, concessions made by a State in one part of the treaty may have been made in return for concessions by the other State in other parts of the treaty.44 Put bluntly, the “amputated” treaty must remain of interest to all parties.45

Originally, the ILC envisaged as a test for separability whether or not in respect of the provision at issue “it [was] permissible to make reservations” (see Articles 19–23).46 However, as Tunkin pointed out in the ILC, reservations were less useful as a test in this context, since mutual consent was lacking if other parties objected to a reservation,47 whereas subpara. 3(a) envisaged a treaty to which the parties had consented a priori and as a whole.

38ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 5; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 167.

39Statement by Tunkin in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 225, para. 102 (“the very nature of the treaty”).

40Yasseen in the ILC, ibid. 222, para. 67; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238 para. 5; critically the statement by the US delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 230, para. 18 (“[the] balance . . . would not be reflected by the terms of the treaty or even the preparatory work”).

41See Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 226, para. 7 (“any acceptable theory of severance must have some regard for the intention of the parties, so that it would call for some degree of interpretation”).

42Di erently Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 462 (“la priorité sur les éléments textuels, contrairement à l’orientation accueillie dans les règles de la Convention relatives à l’interprétation des traités”).

43ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 2.

44Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 215, para. 94.

45Ago in the ILC, ibid. 221 f, para. 60.

46Article 26, subpara. 4(b) in Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 90; see the statements in the ILC by Cadieux, YBILC 1963 I 217, para. 3 (“if reservations to one part or one provision of a treaty were allowed, that was evidence that acceptance of that part or provision had not been essential”); and Yasseen, ibid. 222, para. 66 (“most ingenious idea”).

47Ibid. 225, para. 102.

ZACHARIAS

568

article

d) “Justness” of Continued Performance (Subpara. 3[c])

18Finally, as a third (and much criticised)48 condition, subpara. 3(c) requires that the continued performance of the remainder of the treaty would not be unjust. The test is not whether continuing performance of the treaty is just, but whether it is not unjust: even if all the other conditions in subparas. 3(a) and (b) (N. 15–17) have been met, there is still a possibility that continuing performance appears inequitable or unfair to one or more of the parties.49 In such a case, subpara. 3(c) prohibits the separation of the treaty provisions.

5.Situation of Articles 49 and 50 (Para. 4)

19Para. 4 concerns Articles 49 on fraud (q.v.) and 50 (q.v.) on the corruption of a representative of a State. It emphasises that in cases falling under Articles

49and 50 the State entitled to invoke the fraud or corruption may do so with respect either to the whole treaty or to the particular clauses alone. In particular, in case of alleged invalidity according to these provisions, the ground of invalidity may be invoked only by the State which was the victim of the fraud or corruption;50 and that State has the “permissive right”51 either to invalidate the entire treaty or solely the particularly clauses to which the fraud or corruption relate.52 Such separability remains, however, subject to paragraph 3 (N. 12–18).53

6.Situation of Articles 51–53 (Para. 5)

20Finally, para. 5 provides an exception to the exception: even where, according to para. 3 (N. 12–18), separability of treaty provisions would be permissible as an exception, it is stated here categorically that in cases falling under

Articles 51, 52 and 53, no separation of the provisions of the treaty is permitted. Article 51 concerns the coercion of a representative of a State

48See the statement in Vienna by the delegation of the then USSR, OR 1968 CoW 231, para.

31 (“the concept of justice . . . only complicated matters”); Sinclair, Vienna Convention 167 (“does not seem to add much to the underlying basis of condition [b]”); similarly Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 463. Reuters, Introduction N. 244, has pointed out that Article 44, subpara. 3(c) is the only provision in the Convention to refer to the quality of justness.

49See the explanation given by the US delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 230, para. 17.

50ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 6.

51Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 226, para. 10.

52ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 6; Waldock Report V, ibid. 9, para. 5; the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 318, para. 57 (“paragraph 4 simply provided two alternative courses for the State”).

53Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 318, para. 57.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

569

(q.v.), Article 52 the coercion of a State by the threat or use of force (q.v.), and Article 53 treaties conflicting with jus cogens (q.v.).

The ILC considered that in the cases of Articles 51 and 52 there were imperative reasons for regarding the treaty as absolutely void in all its parts. Only thus was it possible to ensure that the coerced State, when deciding upon its future treaty relations with the State which had coerced it, would be able to do so from a position of freedom from coercion.54

In the case of Article 53, the ILC took the view that rules of jus cogens were of so fundamental a character that, when parties concluded a treaty conflicting in any of its clauses with an already existing rule of jus cogens, the entire treaty had to be considered invalid.55 This exception was criticised in the travaux préparatoires, inter alia, as it di ered from Article 64 on emerging rules of jus cogens (q.v.) which is not subject to the prohibition of separability.56

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

Occupying a central position in Part V, the intricate relations between 21 Article 44 and the various provisions may be summarised as follows:

Article 42 (q.v.) emphasises that Article 44 has to be read together with all provisions of Part V;

Article 43 (q.v.) recalls that if a treaty norm is declaratory of customary law, separability cannot distract from its binding force;

Article 45 (q.v., N. 11) may be applied together with (and in fact has priority over) Article 44;57

Articles 46–48 (q.v.) contain grounds of invalidity which are subject to separability according to Article 44;58

Articles 49–50 (q.v.) contain grounds of invalidity which are subject to separability according to Article 44, para. 4 (N. 19);

54ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 238, para. 7.

55Ibid. para. 8.

56See the statements by the UK delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 229, para. 15 (“it seemed illogical to prevent separation in the case of an existing rule, but not in that of a future rule of jus cogens”); and by Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 66, para. 77 (“rather academic”). Originally, the ILC also envisaged separability in the case of Article 53; see the ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 52.

57Statement by Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 187, para. 70.

58Jiménéz de Aréchaga pointed out in the ILC that the term “essential basis” (N. 15–16) was also contained in Article 48, ibid. 228, para. 30; though he was against separability in the case of error, ibid. 224, para. 91; contra Tunkin, ibid. 225, para. 105.

ZACHARIAS

570

article

Articles 51–53 (q.v.) contain grounds of nullity which are excluded from the separability of treaty provisions according to Article 44, para. 5 (N. 20);

Article 54 (q.v., N. 4) is subject to separability according to Article 44;59

Article 55 (q.v.) raises no issue as to separability;

Article 56 (q.v.) is subject to separability under the same conditions as Article 44, para. 1 (N. 8);

Articles 57–59 (q.v.) are subject to separability according to Article 44;60

Article 60 (q.v., N. 10–11) is not governed by Article 44 according to its para. 2 (N. 11);

Articles 61–62 (q.v.) contain grounds of terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty which are subject to separability according to Article 44;61

Article 63 (q.v.) falls to be considered together with Article 44;

Article 64 (q.v., N. 6) contains a ground of invalidity which is subject to separability according to Article 44, contrary to Article 53 (N. 20);

Articles 65–72 (q.v.) concern procedural provisions which shall be applied upon invocation of Article 44.62

2.Customary Basis of Article 44

22Article 44 is a good example of jus scriptum having introduced order, hierarchy, sub-rules and exceptions in an area where customary law could hardly have done so on its own.63 The provision goes further than the traditional rule (N. 1) and allows separability not only for breach of treaty, but also in respect of other provisions.64 As such, Article 44 indubitably constituted progressive

59See in respect of Articles 54, 56, 57 and 58 the statement in Vienna by the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 229, para. 12 (“[the] delegation . . . assumed that the rule in paragraph 1 [of Article 44] applied to the cases dealt with in [Articles 54, 56, 57 and 58] and that paragraph 2 did not apply to them”).

60See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 356 (“the parties were sovereign in the matter of separability and in that of suspension, but Article [44] dealt with rights conferred on the parties individually, whereas Article [57] was concerned with an agreement among the parties”); Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 9, para. 6; Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 501.

61T he ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 207, para. 6, considered separability in Article 61 as “entirely appropriate and desirable”; on Article 62, see the statement in Vienna by the Romanian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 231, para. 39.

62But see Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 463, according to whom, if the provisions are not separable, “le traité cesse d’avoir e et dans son ensemble” (italics added ).

63Villiger, Manual N. 169 .

64Aust, Modern Law 304.

ZACHARIAS

separability of treaty provisions

571

development upon its adoption in Vienna in 1969 (N. 2),65 though it may now be considered as crystallising into customary law.66

D. APPRECIATION

Article 44 is one of the Convention provisions most intricately linked with 23 its wider context, in particular Part V (N. 21). Indeed, Article 44 qualifies

as one of the more complex provisions, a fortiori as it raises fears as to its potential to undermine the stability of treaties.67 However, once its various components have been disentangled, it transpires that Article 44 adopts a generally cautious approach.68 In its own way, it actually contributes to the stability of treaties by describing in detail the principle and the various exceptions (and even an exception to the exceptions, N. 20) in respect of the separability of treaty provisions.69

65See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Finland, OR 1968 CoW 228, para. 1 (“fairly new”); and Greece, ibid. 235, para. 27 (“progressive—and perhaps in the case in point one might say progessist—development”); and in the ILC by Rosenne, YBILC 1963 I 216, para. 104 (“probably . . . de lege ferenda and not de lege lata”); Sinclair, Vienna Convention 166.

66Article 44 was invoked by the Norwegian Government in Case E-6/96 before the EFTA Court, Tore Wilhelmsen AS and Oslo Kommune [1997], EFTA Court report at 62; by Judge Al-Kasawneh in his diss. op. in the Aerial Incident (Pakistan v. India) Case, ICJ Reports 2000 54, para. 23; and by Judges Gölcüklü and Pettiti in their diss. op. in the case of

Loizidou v. Turkey (Preliminary Objections) before the European Court of Human Rights, Series A no. 310, 37 f. See also Bedjaoui/Leidgens, Article 44, N. 13 (“ne bénéficie pas à l’heure actuelle d’un statut coutumier”).

67See the statements in Vienna by Rosenne of the Israeli delegation, OR 1968 CoW 230, para. 23 (“the question of the separability of the provisions of a treaty should be approached with the greatest caution”); and by Rüegger of the Swiss delegation, OR ibid. 231, para. 44 (“if paragraph 3 was retained, it was to be feared that States might multiply separate agreements in order to safeguard, at least partly, the stability of law”).

68Shaw, International Law 661.

69See the statement in Vienna by the Greek delegation, OR 1968 CoW 235, para. 28 (“the conflict [in Article 44] was not so much between integrity and separability but rather between rigidity and elasticity”).

ZACHARIAS

Article 45

Loss of a right to invoke a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty

A State may no longer invoke a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty under Articles 46 to 50 or Articles 60 and 62 if, after becoming aware of the facts:

(a)it shall have expressly agreed that the treaty is valid or remains in force or continues in operation, as the case may be; or

(b)it must by reason of its conduct be considered as having acquiesced in the validity of the treaty or in its maintenance in force or in operation, as the case may be.

Article 45 Perte du droit d’invoquer une cause de nullité d’un traité ou un motif d’y mettre fin, de s’en retirer ou d’en suspendre l’application

Un Etat ne peut plus invoquer une cause de nullité d’un traité ou un motif d’y mettre fin, de s’en retirer ou d’en suspendre l’application en vertu des articles 46 à 50 ou des articles 60 et 62 si, après avoir eu connaissance des faits, cet Etat:

a)a explicitement accepté de considérer que, selon le cas, le traité est valide, reste en vigueur ou continue d’être applicable; ou

b)doit, à raison de sa conduite, être considéré comme ayant acquiescé, selon le cas,

àla validité du traité ou à son maintien en vigueur ou en application.

Artikel 45 Verlust des Rechtes, Gründe dafür geltend zu machen, einen Vertrag als ungültig zu erklären, ihn zu beenden, von ihm zurückzutreten oder ihn zu suspendieren

Ein Staat kann Gründe nach den Artikeln 46 bis 50 oder 60 und 62 nicht länger geltend machen, um einen Vertrag als ungültig zu erklären, ihn zu beenden, von ihm

loss of a right to invoke a ground

573

zurückzutreten oder ihn zu suspendieren, wenn, nachdem dem Staat der Sachverhalt bekannt geworden ist,

a)er ausdrücklich zugestimmt hat, dass der Vertrag—je nach Lage des Falles—gültig ist, in Kraft bleibt oder weiterhin angewendet wird, oder

b)auf Grund seines Verhaltens angenommen werden muss, er habe—je nach Lage des Falles—der Gültigkeit des Vertrags, seinem Inkraftbleiben oder seiner Weiteranwendung stillschweigend zugestimmt.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 42—Loss of a right to invoke a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty

A State may no longer invoke a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty under Articles 43 to 47 inclusive or Articles 57 to 59 inclusive if, after becoming aware of the facts:

(a)it shall have expressly agreed that the treaty, as the case may be, is valid or remains in force or continues in operation; or

(b)it must by reason of its conduct be considered as having acquiesced, as the case may be, in the validity of the treaty or in its maintenance in force or in operation.

Materials:

Waldock Report II: Article 4.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 183 , 280 f, 318, 321.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 47. Waldock Report IV: Article 47.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 93 , 105 ; 133; YBILC 1966 I/2 318 f, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 42.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 237 f, 390 , 483 f; OR 1969 Plenary 72, 78 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 84:17:6

Selected Literature:

M.G. Kohen, Article 45, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1667 .

ZACHARIAS

574

article

 

CONTENTS

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 45 ............................................................

4

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

4

2.

Express Waiver (Para. [a]) ................................................................

7

3.

Implied Conduct (Para. [b]) .............................................................

8

C. Reservations .......................................................................................

10

D. Context ...............................................................................................

11

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

11

2.

Customary Basis of Article 45 ...........................................................

12

E. Appreciation .......................................................................................

13

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

1 Qui tacet consentire videtur si loqui potuisset ac debuisset.1 Conduct, including the failure to protest at another State’s action, may in appropriate circumstances be construed as an expression of consent by which a State is bound.2 This principle, relating to estoppel and derived from good faith, has frequently been invoked by the Court, e.g., in the 1962 Temple of Preah Vihear Case:

“in the light of the subsequent course of events . . . Thailand is now precluded by her conduct from asserting that she did not accept [the frontier indicated on the map]. She has, for fifty years, enjoyed such benefits as the Treaty of 1904 conferred on her, if only the benefit of a stable frontier. France, and through her Cambodia, relied on Thailand’s acceptance of the map . . . It is not now open to Thailand, while continuing

1T he citation stems from Canon law, Decretals V, 12, 43. In the ILC, other citations were also mentioned in this context, e.g., allegans contraria non audiendus est, in the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 1; and nemo contra factum suum proprium venire potest, by de Luna, YBILC 1966 I/1 95, para. 45. See also D. Bowett, Estoppel before International Tribunals and its Relation to Acquiescence, BYBIL 33 (1957) 176 ,

183 .

2 Plender, BYBIL 57 (1986) 167.

ZACHARIAS

loss of a right to invoke a ground

575

to claim and enjoy the benefits of the settlement, to deny that she was ever a consenting party to it”.3

2. History

 

Waldock Report II introduced the topic in 1963, envisaging both an express

2

waiver and preclusion in view of a State’s acts or omissions, though without

 

explaining these terms.4 In its debate in 1963 the ILC was generally agreed on

 

the provision, though there was some discussion as to the meaning of waiver

 

and preclusion.5 The resulting Article 47 of the ILC Draft 1963 was formulated

 

in an exceptionally complex manner.6 Governments generally agreed with

 

the provision; however, one of their preoccupations was the applicability of

 

Article 45 to other Convention provisions.7 In 1966 the debate remained

 

superficial, though again the ILC largely found favour with its final text.8

 

After these rather placid exchanges of views, the heated debate in Vienna

3

came as a surprise. Numerous amendments were tabled, inter alia, one by

 

eight States proposing deletion of para. (b) and two amendments proposing time-limits.9 The sponsors of the eight-State amendment regarded Article 45 as being “extremely dangerous”,10 since the principle of acquiescence would “bind [young developing nations] more closely to their former colonial masters”.11 Article 45 nevertheless found relatively widespread support and was adopted by 84 votes to 17, with seven abstentions.12 This outcome was criticised as being an “antidemocratic gesture”.13

3ICJ Reports 1962 23. See also the case concerning the Arbitral Award made by the King of Spain, ICJ Reports 1960 213 (“Nicaragua’s failure to raise any question with regard to the validity of the Award for several years after the full terms of the Award had become known to it”); and the Eastern Greenland Case, PCIJ (1933) Series A/B no. 53, 68 (“[in] accepting these bilateral and multilateral agreements as binding upon herself, Norway . . . has

 

debarred herself from contesting Danish sovereignty over the whole of Greenland”).

4

YBILC 1963 II 39 f (Article 4).

5

See the statements, e.g., by Tunkin, YBILC 1963 I 187, para. 64; and Waldock, ibid.

 

188, para. 85.

6

YBILC 1963 II 212.

7

Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 5 f.

8

See the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 108, para. 26. For instance,

 

the ILC discussed whether its draft was shifting from preclusion to implied consent,

 

Briggs, ibid. 94, para. 25.

9

OR Documents 163 . The amendment by Guyana and the US envisaged a time-limit

 

of ten years, that by Australia a time-limit of twelve months, within which the right in

 

Article 45 had to be claimed, ibid. 164, subparas. 382(ii)(a) and (b).

10Statement by the Venezuelan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 391, para. 52.

11See the Venezuelan delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 78, para. 1.

12Ibid. 83, para. 58.

13See the statement by the Costa Rican delegation, ibid. 83, para. 57; also Sinclair, Vienna Convention 169 (“it is a matter for ironical comment that a number of this rather disparate

ZACHARIAS

576

article

B.INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 45

1.Scope

4The grounds upon which treaties may be invalidated, terminated or suspended in operation according to Part V of the Convention involve certain risks of abuse. Thus, a State, having discovered a ground of invalidity, termination or suspension, may conduct itself so as to entitle other parties to assume that the treaty was still in force. Then, at a later date, it may raise the matter when wishing for quite di erent reasons to put an end to its obligations under the treaty. Such is the situation which Article 45 serves to prevent.14

5Article 45 lists the conditions when a State may no longer invoke a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or suspending the operation of a treaty under Articles 46 to 50 or Articles 60 and 62. Whether or not the grounds themselves exist, will be determined according to the provisions concerned (q.v.). Article 45 applies to the following articles:

Article 46 on Provisions of Internal Law Regarding Competence to Conclude Treaties (q.v.);

Article 47 on Specific Restrictions on Authority to Express the Consent of a State (q.v.);

Article 48 on Error (q.v.), with a fine distinction between the application of Article 45 and the further exception in Article 48, para. 2 (q.v., N. 11);

Article 49 on Fraud (q.v.);

Article 50 on Corruption of a Representative of a State (q.v.);

Article 60 on the Termination or Suspension of the Operation of a Treaty as a Consequence of its Breach (q.v.); and

Article 62 on the Fundamental Change of Circumstances (q.v.).

Thus, Article 45 does not apply to Articles 51 and 52 on the two forms of coercion (q.v.)15 nor to Articles 53 and 64 on jus cogens (q.v.), since automatic invalidity ensues from all these provisions. It cannot apply ex hypothesi to Article 54, requiring consent of

group of co-sponsoring States were at the time, and still are, involved in territorial disputes raising, sometimes in an acute form, questions concerning the application of the principle of acquiescence”).

14ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 2; the observation by the US Government to the ILC, Waldock Report V, ibid. 5; ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 213, para. 4; the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 183, para. 3. See on the subject also Zoller, Bonne foi 319 .

15See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239 f, para. 5: consent obtained under coercion must be treated as absolutely void to ensure that the victim may afterwards be in a position freely to determine its future relations with the coercing State. To admit Article 45 to these provisions may weaken the protection a orded by these provisions to the victims

of coercion. But see Article 51, N. 10.

ZACHARIAS

loss of a right to invoke a ground

577

 

the parties to terminate or withdraw from a treaty (q.v.); or to Article 61 on supervening

 

impossibility of performance (q.v.).16

 

 

Article 45 is set in motion, if and when a State becomes aware of the facts

6

amounting to a ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from or

 

suspending the operation of a treaty. (Clearly, Article 45 cannot operate if

 

facts existed of which the State in question was, in good faith, not or only

 

partly aware.)17 This requirement governs both paras. (a) and (b) (N. 7–9).18

 

In order to establish whether a State was aware of the facts, an assessment of

 

all factual circumstances will be required. In particular, it may prove di cult

 

to establish precisely when a State obtained knowledge of the facts.19

 

 

2. Express Waiver (Para. [a])

 

 

Once a State has become aware of these facts (N. 6), it may no longer invoke

7

the particular ground for invalidating, terminating, withdrawing from, or

 

suspending the treaty under two conditions (N. 7–8). The first is an express

 

waiver, namely that that State shall have expressly agreed that the treaty

 

is valid or remains in force or continues in operation, as the case may

 

be ( para. [a]). In this obvious (but probably infrequent) case, the State is

 

considered to have given up once and for all its right to invoke the particular

 

ground.20

 

 

3. Implied Conduct (Para. [b])

 

 

As a second, alternative condition, the State must by reason of its conduct

8

be considered as having acquiesced in the validity of the treaty or in

 

its maintenance in force or in operation, as the case may be ( para. [b]). In particular, once a State has become aware of the facts (N. 6), it may be expected in good faith to give notice of its intention to invalidate, terminate, withdraw from or suspend the operation of a treaty. Para. (b) stipulates no time-limit in this respect: the State is requested to act within a reasonable time (and, for instance, to set in motion the procedures under Articles 65–68, q.v.).21 If it could have done, but failed to do so (negative conduct), it must be assumed, by reason of its omission, as having tacitly agreed that

16See the statement in Vienna by the Finnish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 398, para. 45 (“if the treaty becomes impossible . . . nothing further could be done while that situation prevailed”).

17ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 5. A State must have been “fully aware” of the fact; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 188 f, para. 87.

18See the statement in Vienna by Sir Francis Vallat of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 82, para. 41.

19Capotorti, RC 134 (1971 III) 547.

20ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 3.

21Statement in Vienna by the Jamaican delegation, OR 1968 CoW 398, para. 66.

ZACHARIAS

578

article

the treaty is valid, remains in force or continues in operation.22 Conversely, a State’s tacit acceptance may be inferred positively from a particular form of its conduct, for instance, if, after becoming aware of the facts, it accepted benefits or enforced obligations under the treaty.23

The assessment of a State’s conduct (as already of its awareness, N. 6) will very much depend on the factual circumstances of the case, where the interpretation of this conduct may give rise to practical problems.24 Here lies one of the origins of States’ fears in Vienna (N. 3), i.e., that Article 45 contained a “dangerous margin of discretion” and was “liable to impair the stability of international relations”.25

9Where a State, through its positive or negative conduct (N. 8), led other States to believe that it regarded the treaty as valid, or wished to maintain it in force or in operation, that State may not subsequently take up a legal position which (to the detriment of other States)26 is in contradiction to its previous conduct; in particular, it may not subsequently call the treaty in question.27 Conversely, where a State exercised no such conduct since it was not aware of the facts, it cannot be obliged to accept the continuance in force of a treaty. Throughout, the governing consideration will be that of good faith.28

C. RESERVATIONS

10Argentina, Russia (then USSR) and Ukraine have formulated statements in the context of Article 45, para. (b) which reflect the heated discussion in Vienna (N. 4). However, it has not been made clear whether these statements amount to reservations or interpretative declarations (Reservations and Declarations to the Convention and Objections Thereto, q.v.).29

22Article 4, para. (c) of Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 39 f. The State may in one way or another have been hindered from disclosing freely its intention; see the ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 213, para. 5—which in turn explains why Article 45 does not apply to Articles 51 and 52 (N. 5), ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239 f, para. 5.

23Article 4, para. (b), Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 38 f. In fact, the question remains unresolved whether or not Article 45 constitutes a case of implicit consent; see the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 105, para. 87.

24ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 5; statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 398, para. 77.

25Statement in Vienna by the Cuban delegation, OR 1968 CoW 396, para. 45.

26Verdross/Simma N. 538.

27ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 239, para. 4.

28Ibid. para. 5.

29See E.J. Rey Caro, Las reserves de la Republic Argentina a la Convencion sobre el Derecho de los tratados. El “estoppel” y la clausula “rebus sic stantibus”, Anuario de derecho internacional 2 (1975) 229 . On the Russian reservation, see also Ress, Festschrift Doehring 822; Plender, BYBIL 57 (1986) 166 f. In Vienna the Venezuelan delegation announced that it “had received instruction from [its] Government to announce that the Republic of

ZACHARIAS

loss of a right to invoke a ground

579

 

D. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

Article 45 may be applied together with (and in fact has priority over) Article

11

44 (q.v.).30 Also, Article 65, para. 5 (q.v., N. 23) reserves the position of

 

Article 45. A further situation of acquiescence can be found in Article 20,

 

para. 5 (q.v., N. 17).

 

 

2. Customary Basis of Article 45

 

 

Article 45, circumscribing an important aspect of good faith, most likely

12

codifies a customary rule.31 Neither the three interpretative declarations or

 

reservations (N. 10) nor the relatively small number of States voting against

 

the provision in Vienna (N. 3) would appear to su ce to call in question its

 

declaratory character.32

 

 

E. APPRECIATION

 

 

It appears di cult to lay down fixed time-limits for the various grounds of

13

invalidity, termination, withdrawal from or suspension of the operation of a

 

treaty.33 On the other hand, there should be a moment in time when States

 

can be certain that the treaty relationships into which they have entered, and which they have relied upon, will not be disturbed.34 Article 45, based on good faith and acquiescence, neatly resolves these di culties. Good faith also dispels the fears expressed by some States in Vienna, since Article 45 ensures that no State will be obliged to accept against its will the continuance in force of a treaty (N. 9).

Venezuela would enter an express reservation in respect of [Article 45]”; however, to the best of this author’s abilities no trace of this reservation could be found.

30Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 187, para. 70.

31T here is little State practice on the provision. In 1979 the UK Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth A airs invoked Article 45 in the context of continuing British responsibility in Southern Rhodesia, BYBIL 50 (1979) 380. See also the delegation of Guyana in Vienna, OR 1969 Plenary 81, para. 26: (“[para. b] did no more than express the principle that consent might be inferred from conduct, a principle long established in international law”). For A. Haratsch/St. Schmahl, Die Anwendung ratione temporis der Wiener Konvention über das Recht der Verträge, ZöR 58 (2003) 108, Article 45 does not reflect customary law.

32See also the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 400, para. 104.

33Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 7, para. 5.

34Statement in Vienna by Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 391, para. 56.

ZACHARIAS

Section . Invalidity of Treaties

Article 46

Provisions of internal law regarding competence to conclude treaties

1.A State may not invoke the fact that its consent to be bound by a treaty has been expressed in violation of a provision of its internal law regarding competence to conclude treaties as invalidating its consent unless that violation was manifest and concerned a rule of its internal law of fundamental importance.

2.A violation is manifest if it would be objectively evident to any State conducting itself in the matter in accordance with normal practice and in good faith.

Article 46 Dispositions du droit interne concernant la compétence pour conclure des traités

1.Le fait que le consentement d’un Etat à être lié par un traité a été exprimé en violation d’une disposition de son droit interne concernant la compétence pour conclure des traités ne peut être invoqué par cet Etat comme viciant son consentement, à moins que cette violation n’ait été manifeste et ne concerne une règle de son droit interne d’importance fondamentale.

2.Une violation est manifeste si elle est objectivement évidente pour tout Etat se comportant en la matière conformément à la pratique habituelle et de bonne foi.

Artikel 46 Innerstaatliche Bestimmungen über die Zuständigkeit zum Abschluss von Verträgen

1.Ein Staat kann sich nicht darauf berufen, dass seine Zustimmung, durch einen Vertrag gebunden zu sein, unter Verletzung einer Bestimmung seines innerstaatlichen Rechts über die Zuständigkeit zum Abschluss von Verträgen ausgedrückt wurde und daher ungültig sei, sofern nicht die Verletzung o enkundig war und eine innerstaatliche Rechtsvorschrift von grundlegender Bedeutung betraf.

2.Eine Verletzung ist o enkundig, wenn sie für jeden Staat, der sich hierbei im Einklang mit der allgemeinen Übung und nach Treu und Glauben verhält objektiv erkennbar ist.

584

article

ILC Draft 1966

Article 43—Provisions of internal law regarding competence to conclude a treaty

A State may not invoke the fact that its consent to be bound by a treaty has been expressedinviolationofaprovisionofitsinternallawregardingcompetencetoconclude treaties as invalidating its consent unless that violation of its internal law was manifest.

Materials:

Waldock Report II: Article 5.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 3 , 203 , 288 f, 310 f.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 31.

Waldock Report IV: Article 31.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 9 , 124 f; YBILC 1966 I/2 299 f, 303 f, 311.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 43.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 238 , 463 f; OR 1969 Plenary 85 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 94:0:3

Selected Literature:

A-G

I.M. Anghel, Le traité international et l’ordre juridique interne, Revue Roumaine d’Etudes internationales, 22 (1989) 69 ; M. Bothe, Article 46, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1703 ; P. Cahier, La violation du droit interne relatif à la compétence pour conclure des traités comme cause de nullité des traités, RDI 54 (1971) 226 ; L. Ferrari-Bravo, International and Municipal Law: The Complementarity of Legal Systems, in: R.St.J. Macdonald/ D.M. Johnston (eds.), The Structure and Process of International Law: Essays in Legal Philosophy Doctrine and Theory (1983) 715 ; W.K. Geck, The Conclusion of Treaties in Violation of the Internal Law of a Party, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 429 .

H-W

J. Hostert, Droit international et droit interne dans la Convention de Vienne sur le droit des traités du 23 mai 1969, AFDI 15 (1969) 92 ; R.D. Kearney, Internal Limitations on External Commitments—Article 46 of the Treaties Convention, International Lawyer 4 (1969) 1 ; T. Meron, Article 46 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (ultra vires Treaties): Some Recent Cases, BYBIL 49 (1978) 175 ; K.J. Partsch, International Law and Municipal Law, EPIL 2 (1995) 1183 ; B. Simma, Grundvertrag und völkerrechtliches Vertragsrecht, AöR 100 (1975) 4 ; L. Wildhaber, Provisions of Internal Law Regarding Competence to Conclude a Treaty, Virginia JIL 8 (1967) 94; Id., Treaty-Making Power and Constitution (1971).

The basis of this commentary was prepared by Alison Wiebalck.

 

 

provisions of internal law regarding competence

585

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 46 ............................................................

5

 

1.

Scope ................................................................................................

5

 

2.

Rule (Para. 1) ....................................................................................

6

 

3.

Exception (Paras. 1 and 2) ................................................................

11

 

 

a)

Discretionary Right .....................................................................

11

 

 

b)

Manifest Violation .......................................................................

12

 

 

c)

Fundamental Importance ............................................................

16

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

17

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

17

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ...................................................................

18

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 46 ...........................................................

19

 

D. Appreciation ........................................................................................

20

 

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

Constitutions emerging after the French and American Revolutions granted

1

the Head of State competence to declare the will of the State, but gave the

 

legislature the right to the formation of that will and to reserve ratification.1 This separation of powers led to a dichotomy between the necessity of international reliance upon the apparent authority of an agent to commit the State internationally and the constitutional limitations upon that authority to commit the State.2 In the Eastern Greenland and Free Zones cases the Permanent Court indicated that it would not willingly look behind the ostensible authority under international law of a State agent.3

1

Wildhaber, Virginia JIL 8 (1967) 94; see the statement by de Luna in the ILC, YBILC

 

1963 I 3, para. 8; Article 21 of the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 992.

2

Kearney, International Lawyer 4 (1969) 2 f; Ferrari-Bravo International and Munici-

 

pal Law 721 (“[this] shows in the most striking way how evolution of municipal law

 

may impinge on the very content of international law rules”).

3See, respectively, PCIJ (1932) Series A/B no. 46, 169 f; and PCIJ (1933) Series A/B no. 53, 56 , 91. See also Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 44, para. 11.

586

article

Legal doctrine ranged from belief in the absolute supremacy of the Head of State to bind the State, to denying outright the validity of unconstitutionally made treaties.4

In his analysis of the practice of States in applying internal rules on competence to declare the consent of States to treaties, Wildhaber concluded that few internal legal requirements on the competence to conclude treaties went so far as to determine what happened on the international level if those requirements were violated, since the organs securing the performance of treaty obligations were the same as those having the competence to bind the State to those obligations.5 For Wildhaber, international practice did not support the view that provisions of internal law relating to competence to conclude treaties were relevant under international law.6

2. History

2Four Rapporteurs dealt with the subject, each taking a substantially different view.7 Brierly in 1950 took the constitutionalist view that a treaty could not be binding internationally if found to be unconstitutional.8 In 1953 Lauterpacht adopted the doctrine of qualified incorporation.9 Sir Gerald Fitzmaurice in 1963 advocated the doctrine of the supremacy of international law.10

3Waldock Report II started from the premise that, if constitutional provisions were allowed to govern the scope of the authority of a State’s agents to enter into treaties on its behalf, the complexity of constitutional provisions and their uncertain application would be too much of a risk to the security of treaties. Nevertheless, Waldock allowed for a defence of constitutional limitations if the lack of authority was known or manifest.11 Debate in the ILC in 1963 revealed a clear preference in favour of the

4In the 1888 Cleveland Award, Moore, International Arbitrations II 1946, and the 1928 George Pinson case, UNRIAA V 327, certain observations favoured the relevance of constitutional provisions to the international validity of treaties. Wildhaber, TreatyMaking Power 147 , 172 , concluded that, although in the 1930’s the majority of commentators supported the constitutionalist school of thought, later writers took the

more internationalist view. 5 Ibid. 393.

6 Virginia JIL 8 (1967) 140.

7 Kearney, AJIL 64 (1970) 531 (“[t]he history of the article in the Commission reflects a rather uneasy movement of thought between the two extreme positions”).

8Article 4 of Brierly Report I, YBILC 1950 II 230 . On the history, see also Rosenne, Developments 142 .

9I.e., where the other contracting party could not have been cognisant of such constitutional limitations, then the party claiming invalidity would be responsible for any

resulting damage; see Article 11 of Lauterpacht Report I, YBILC 1953 II 141.

10YBILC 1956 II 105 .

11YBILC 1963 II 41 , 45, para. 15.

provisions of internal law regarding competence

587

 

internationalist as opposed to the constitutionalist approach.12 T he ILC

 

Draft 1963 attracted comments from Governments in particular as to the

 

meaning of “manifest”.13 After further discussion in 1966 the ILC adopted

 

its final Article 43.14

 

 

At the Vienna Conference, the “manifest” exception to the rule touched

4

o intense debate driven partly by reference to the respective constitutional

 

processes of individual States,15 partly for fear of undermining the stability

 

of treaties,16 and partly by political sensitivities.17 One amendment, i.e., the

 

addition of the words “of fundamental importance”,18 served to narrow the

 

scope of the exception, and further to clarify the meaning of “manifest”

 

which was formulated as a new paragraph.19 In 1969 a number of States

 

insisted that the application of the provisions be linked to a clause on the

 

settlement of disputes (N. 17).20 Article 46 was adopted by 94 votes to

 

none, with three abstentions.21

 

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 46

 

 

1. Scope

 

 

Article 46 states to what extent constitutional limitations on the power of

5

the executive to conclude a treaty may a ect the validity in international

 

law of consent to a treaty given by a State representative apparently autho-

 

12YBILC 1963 I 3 , 203 , 288 f, and 310 f.

13YBILC 1963 II 190 (Article 31). Of the 17 Governments which expressed themselves on the ILC Draft, seven were opposed and three did not make their position clear, Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 70, para. 2.

14YBILC 1966 II 240 (Article 43); the debates are reproduced in YBILC 1966 I/1 9 , 124 f; and YBILC 1966 I/2 299 f, 303 f, and 311.

15See the statements by the delegations of Venezuela, OR 1968 CoW 239, para. 11, and 464, para. 11; Mexico, ibid. 240, para. 23; Norway, ibid. 243, para. 56; and Italy, ibid. 243, para. 60.

16Statements by the delegations of Colombia, ibid. 243, para. 51; and Switzerland, ibid. 245, para. 75.

17See the statements by the delegations of the then USSR, ibid. 244, para. 66; and the

United Arab Republic, ibid. 246, para. 85.

18By Peru and the then Ukrainian SSR, OR Documents 165, subpara. 394(b).

19Introduced by the UK, OR Documents 166, subpara. 394(f ). See Rosenne, Developments 144 (“[l]eaving aside the San Francisco Conference . . . this is believed to be the first occasion on which a diplomatic conference has, by way of amendment to the basic text before it, inserted a reference to good faith into the treaty under negotiation”).

20See the statements by the delegations of Canada, OR 1969 Plenary 85, para. 14 ;

Greece, ibid. para. 31; Norway, ibid. para. 32 f; New Zealand, ibid. para. 41; Senegal, OR 1968 CoW 241, para. 32; and Sweden (Blix), OR 1968 CoW 242, para. 42.

21OR 1969 Plenary 88, para. 38.

588

article

rised to give that consent.22 In essence, if a State representative who is competent under international law expresses the consent of the State to a treaty, that State is bound to its international obligations under the treaty. Any failure to comply with internal requirements regarding competence to enter into treaties does not prima facie a ect the essential validity of the treaty in international law (though this rule is tempered by the “manifest” exception, N. 12).23 Non-observance of constitutional restraints as a decisive factor in establishing invalidity would otherwise make it possible for States to avoid their treaty obligations merely by appealing to the ground of unconstitutionality.24

Where there has been a violation of internal law, then that is a fault for which only the State whose internal law has been disregarded can be blamed.25 The responsibility to comply with a State’s constitution lies with the State declaring its own unconstitutionality, for only that Government has the means of controlling the acts of its representative and giving e ect to any constitutional requirement.26

2. Rule (Para. 1)

6Article 46 states the rule that a State may not invoke the fact that its consent to be bound by a treaty has been expressed in violation of a provision of its internal law regarding competence to conclude treaties as invalidating its consent. The rule is stated in the negative to emphasise the exceptional character of the cases where this ground of invalidity may be invoked (N. 11).27 The rule applies equally to federal states.28

7The means by which a State expresses its consent to be bound by a treaty are listed in Articles 11–17 (q.v.). Article 46 is concerned with whether this consent has been expressed in violation of a provision of its internal law regarding competence to conclude treaties.

8Internal law on the competence to conclude treaties embraces written and unwritten constitutional law and practice,29 subordinate legal and

22ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 240, para. 1.

23Ibid. 242, para. 10.

24See Lauterpacht Report I, YBILC 1953 II 146.

25See the statement in Vienna by the French delegation, OR 1968 CoW 243, para. 55; Elias, RC 134 (1971 III) 356.

26ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 242, para. 8.

27Ibid. para. 12.

28See the judgment of the Swiss Federal Court of 27 October 1994, ATF 120 I 360 at 365.

29Rosenne, YBILC 1963 I 14, para. 6, and 207, para. 63; see the observation by the Spanish Government to the ILC, Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 69.

provisions of internal law regarding competence

589

 

administrative provisions,30 and obligations in internal law derived from

 

treaties which that State has concluded with other States.31 T he internal

 

law itself is not a ected by Article 46 (though Articles 7 and 8 [q.v.]

 

give some indication as to persons authorised to represent a State).32 The

 

competence to conclude treaties refers to internal procedural as well as

 

substantive rules on treaty-making.33 It does not include the implementa-

 

tion of a treaty once concluded.34

 

 

“The question whether a treaty has been concluded in conformity with the internal

 

law of a State must be examined in the light of the law in force in that country, i.e.,

 

that law as actually interpreted and applied by the organs of the State, including its

 

judicial and administrative organs.”35

 

 

If consent has been expressed in violation of internal law, its provisions

9

have not been complied with.36 It is not necessary that the violation was

 

negligent, or even deliberate, it su ces that the act was at variance with

 

the internal law in question.37

 

 

The rule in para. 1 (N. 6) provides that any such violation of internal law

10

may not in principle serve to invalidate that State’s consent. Despite

 

the violation, therefore, the State’s consent remains valid and the treaty continues to exist.

30See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Peru, OR 1968 CoW 239, para. 9; and Colombia, ibid. 243, para. 53; and in the ILC by Pal, YBILC 1963 I 13, para. 60; also Meron, BYBIL 49 (1978) 178 at n. 1. But see Nahlik, AJIL 65 (1971) 741, who points out that no internal provision below the level of a constitutional law regulating the competence of a State to conclude treaties could claim to be “of fundamental importance”.

31See the statement by Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 205, para. 41; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 44, para. 14. On US executive agreements, see Aust, Modern Treaty Law 196 ; Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 20, para. 74.

32See the statements in Vienna by Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 88, para. 40; and in the ILC by Ago, YBILC 1963 I 5, para. 26 (“it was not for international law to ascertain whether or not [the Head of State] had been granted that authority”).

33Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 71, para. 6; the statements in the ILC by Verdross, Yasseen, de Luna, and Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 288, para. 17 .

34Jennings/Watts N. 636 at n. 9. The competence to terminate a treaty is also not included; see Frankowska, Polish YBILC 7 (1975) 310 f.

35See the 1989 Maritime Frontier (Guinea-Bissau v. Senegal) Case, ILR 83 (1990) 33, para. 56; also The Attorney-General of Israel v. Kamiar, ILR 44 (1966-68) 262 .

36E.g., the disclosure that an ostensibly competent State agent lacked the constitutional authority to commit his State, ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 241, para. 7 f.

37See the statement by Pal in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 14, para. 63.

ZACHARIAS

590

article

3. Exception (Paras. 1 and 2)

a) Discretionary Right

11Exceptionally, a State may invoke such a violation of its internal law as invalidating its consent. Paras. 1 and 2 set out two conditions herefor (N. 12–16). Given their exceptional nature, both must be interpreted narrowly.38 The State whose consent was expressed in violation of a provision of its internal law has a discretionary and exclusive right of invocation.39 The treaty is not void ab initio but voidable (relative nullity).40 The State waives this right if, after becoming aware of such a ground of invalidity, it obtains an advantage therefrom.41 No other State may invoke this defect in order to achieve its invalidation or to dispute the binding character of the treaty since that would amount to interference in internal a airs.42

If a State discovers that it faces constitutional di culties, it may, instead of resorting to a claim of invalidity as provided for by Article 46, promptly notify the other State parties and seek to obtain a revision of its own internal legislation, or even an amendment to the treaty. (Articles 39–41 [q.v.]).43

b) Manifest Violation

12First, according to para. 1, the violation of a provision of the internal law of a State must be manifest. This is an important condition, as limitations on the treaty-making power have to be ascertainable and a matter of common knowledge.44 The word “manifest” needs to be understood according to its ordinary meaning, i.e., clear or obvious and objectively (i.e., to any other State) evident.45

38Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 70, para. 1; the observation by the Dutch Government to the ILC, ibid. 67 f; see also Kearney, International Lawyer 4 (1969) 18 f.

39Wildhaber, Treaty-Making Power 181.

40Wildhaber, Virginia JIL 8 (1967), 147.

41Elias, RC 134 (1971 III) 348; see also Aust, Modern Treaty Law 54 f.

42See Article 11, para. 4 of Lauterpacht Report I, YBILC 1953 II 141. But see Wildhaber, Virginia JIL 8 (1967), 140 at n. 239.

43ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 242, para. 9. For Elias, Modern Law 148, it is good faith which requires that this be done in preference to resorting to a claim of invalidity.

44Rosenne, YBILC 1963 I 207, para. 63. For Wildhaber, Virginia JIL 8 (1967) 149, the 1938 Munich Agreement and the 1941 Greenland Agreement illustrated manifest violations of internal law.

45ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 242, para. 11; Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 70, para. 3 (and ibid. 67, the observation by Israel to the ILC); the statements in the ILC by Elias, YBILC 1963 I 207, para. 62; and in Vienna by the Australian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 239, para. 14; the judgment of the Swiss Federal Court of 27 October 1994, ATF 120 Ib 366.

ZACHARIAS

provisions of internal law regarding competence

591

 

Para. 2 of Article 46 provides for an authentic interpretation of the term

13

“manifest”. It states that the violation must have been objectively evident

 

to any State conducting itself in the matter in accordance with normal

 

practice and in good faith.

 

 

Thus, where a violation would be objectively evident to any State, i.e.,

14

to every State in the same circumstances,46 the other State can no longer legitimately claim to have relied upon the representative’s expression of consent.47 That it was evident in accordance with normal practice implies that acts are presumed to have been done rightly and regularly. Normal practice may be ascertained, at the time when the treaty was concluded, by examining first the constitution of the State in question and then the normal procedure developed by that State of concluding agreements. If the practice has been consistent and the State makes no mention of any constitutional limitation, the other State may believe that the treaty is valid.48

In practice, a State agent, when concluding a treaty, will not interrogate the other agents as to their constitutional authority to bind their respective States. A certain trust will have to be placed in the other Government. When expressions of consent are exchanged, the other State will normally have to accept its partner’s declaration as to competence for it cannot be expected to know the partner’s constitutional law better than the partner’s authorised representative.49 Any closer questioning of another State’s internal handling of a treaty would, in fact, be regarded as interference in State a airs.50

In the Land and Maritime Boundary (Cameroon v. Nigeria) Case, Nigeria argued that it should have been “objectively evident” to Cameroon within the meaning of Article 46, para. 2 that the Head of State of Nigeria did not have unrestricted authority to make legally binding commitments without referring back to the Nigerian Government. Cameroon replied that the alleged violation was not “manifest” and did not concern a rule of internal law of “fundamental importance” within the meaning of Article 46, para. 2.51 Ruling in favour of Cameroon, the Court held:

“a limitation of a Head of State’s capacity . . . is not manifest in the sense of Article 46, paragraph 2, unless or at least properly publicized. This is particularly so because Heads of State belong to the group of persons who, in accordance with Article 7, paragraph 2, of the Convention ‘[i]n virtue of their functions

46Fischer/Köck N. 251, with the further example of the Treaty between Panama and the US concerning the Panama Canal.

47Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 70, para. 1.

48See the 1989 Maritime Frontier (Guinea-Bissau v. Senegal) Case, ILR 83 (1990) 34.

49Reuter, Introduction N. 41.

50On this para, see the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 241 f, paras. 7 f; the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Switzerland (Rüegger), OR 1968 CoW 245, para. 75 (plenipotentiaries could not be obliged to furnish proof of their State’s capacity to enter into contracts); and of Sweden (Blix), ibid. 241, para. 356.

51ICJ Reports 2002 123, paras. 258, 260.

592

article

and without having to produce full powers’ are considered as representing their State”.52

15The exception (N. 11) is based on the principle of good faith (see the third preambular para., Preamble N. 10). The other State is entitled to assume the regularity of what is done by an authorised agent under international law. Nevertheless, where the other State knew, or must be assumed to have known, that in the particular case the authority did not exist, it cannot legitimately claim to have relied upon a consent given in such circumstances.53 In that case, then, the State whose consent breached internal law may regard its consent as having been invalidated.

The burden of showing the manifest lack of competence or defect in procedure falls on the party claiming invalidity of consent.54 It either has to demonstrate that the other party had actual knowledge of the violation, or that the circumstances show that the violation was so obvious that the other party must be deemed to have been aware of it.55

c) Fundamental Importance

16Second, and further narrowing the scope of the exception (N. 11), a State may only invoke the invalidity of its consent vis-à-vis the other treaty parties if the violation concerned a rule of its internal law of fundamental importance. The rule is fundamental if it directly relates to, and provides an essential condition for, the competence to conclude a treaty. This condition was introduced in Vienna (N. 4) in order further to confirm the limited influence of internal law on international law.56 Para. 1 thus excludes manifest (and even grave) violations of internal law which are not of fundamental importance.57

52Ibid., 125, para. 265. See P. d’Argent, Des frontières et des peuples: L’a aire de la frontière terrestre et maritime entre le Cameroun et le Nigéria (arrêt sur le fond), AFDI 48 (2002) 301 .

53ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 241, para. 5. On the topic, see also Rosenne, Developments 135 .

54See the observations by the Burmese Government to the ILC, Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 67.

55Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 70, para. 3.

56See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of the UK (Sinclair), OR 1968 CoW 240, para. 19; and Iraq (Yasseen), ibid. 245, para. 74 (the condition would “reduce still further” the place assigned to internal law by international law); on the debate generally, see ibid. 238 .

57See the statements in Vienna by Yasseen as Chairman of the Drafting Committee, ibid. 463 f, para. 7; and as a member of the Iraqi delegation, ibid. 245, para. 74; and by the Cypriot delegation, ibid. 243, para. 50.

provisions of internal law regarding competence

593

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

Article 46 falls to be distinguished from Article 27 (q.v.). The latter provides

17

that a party may not invoke the provisions of its internal law as justifying

 

its failure to perform a treaty, whereas Article 46 relates to constitutional

 

limitations on the power to conclude a treaty. Once the exception in

 

Article 46 applies, little room remains for Article 27.58 Furthermore, the

 

ground of invalidity in Article 46 is subject to separability of treaty provi-

 

sions according to Article 44 (q.v.). According to Article 45 (q.v.), once a

 

State has become aware of a violation of a provision of internal law within

 

the meaning of Article 46, it must act within a reasonable time (e.g., by

 

setting in motion the procedures under Articles 65–68, q.v.); otherwise it

 

will by reason of its conduct be considered as having acquiesced in the

 

maintenance of the treaty.

 

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

 

Article 46 deals with internal limitations on the competence to conclude

18

treaties, but not with international limitations on the treaty-making com-

 

petence of the State.

 

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 46

 

 

According to the ILC, although the decisions of international tribunals and

19

State practice were neither extensive nor conclusive, they supported the

 

view that international law prevailed over internal law except in those cases where the other State was aware of a failure to comply with internal requirements.59 At the Vienna Conference (N. 4), States generally appeared to accept that Article 46 was “in line with contemporary international law”.60 Significantly, no amendment was based on the position that internal law

58See the diss. op. of Judge Shafeiei in the 1983 Amoco Iran Oil Company v. Islamic Republic of Iran and Others Case, ILR (78) 1988, 647; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 315.

59ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 241, para. 5; statement by Tsuruoka in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 10, para. 26.

60See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of the then USSR, OR 1968 CoW 244, para. 66; Sweden, ibid. 241, para. 36; and Turkey, ibid. 244, para. 64. In the 1989

Maritime Frontier (Guinea-Bissau v. Senegal) Case, ILR 83 (1990) 32 f, the Tribunal held that the applicable norms prior to 1969 were those of customary law which o ered no precedent of a treaty being declared null and void because one of the parties had violated its own internal law in concluding it unless that violation had been “grave and manifest”.

594

article

should be pre-eminent.61 Jennings/Watts regard Article 46 as “probably reflecting rules of customary international law”.62 On the whole, while the “manifest violation” exception in para. 1 may have appeared innovatory when the ILC took up the topic, today it can be assumed that Article 46 is declaratory of customary international law.

D. APPRECIATION

20In the ILC, Waldock referred to Article 46 as “one of the most important provisions of the whole draft”.63 In fact, given the many hurdles to clear, rarely can all the conditions of the exception be fulfilled, so in practical terms Article 46 will probably remain of limited applicability.64 It is indeed di cult to envisage many situations where a State could violate an objectively evident and manifest constitutional provision of fundamental importance without being aware of it, or later be willing to admit its own failure. In the end, what may really undermine the practical application of Article 46 is the growing tendency among States to conclude simplified or executive agreements, adopted largely to overcome the complex procedures associated with the parliamentary approval of an increasing number of ever-more complex treaties.65 While such agreements are no less subject to Article 46, there is less likelihood of a manifest violation of internal law. The significance of Article 46 lies therein that to some extent it has acted as the catalyst for a measured consideration of and a major step towards reconciling, or at least accommodating, the complex relationship between international and internal law.

61Kearney, International Lawyer 4 (1969), 20.

62N. 636. See also the judgment of the Swiss Federal Court of 21 March 1986, ATF 112 Ia 81. But see Schröder, EPIL 4 (2000) 992 (“[the] customary law situation [was] uncertain owing to the infrequent and inconsistent practice”); Simma, AöR 100 (1975) 19 (“Art. 46 [stellt] einen der klaren Fälle dar, in denen die Konvention die völkerrechtliche lex lata in den Worten von Art. 13 Abs. 1 lit. a der UN-Charta ‘fortschreitend entwickelt’”).

63YBILC 1963 I 204, para. 13 (“an extremely complex subject”).

64Verdross/Simma N. 691; Schröder, EPIL 4 (2000) 992.

65Holloway, Modern Trends 126.

Article 47

Specific restrictions on authority to express the consent of a State

If the authority of a representative to express the consent of a State to be bound by a particular treaty has been made subject to a specific restriction, his omission to observe that restriction may not be invoked as invalidating the consent expressed by him unless the restriction was notified to the other negotiating States prior to his expressing such consent.

Article 47 Restriction particulière du pouvoir d’exprimer le consentement d’un Etat

Si le pouvoir d’un représentant d’exprimer le consentement d’un Etat à être lié par un traité déterminé a fait l’objet d’une restriction particulière, le fait que ce représentant n’a pas tenu compte de celle-ci ne peut pas être invoqué comme viciant le consentement qu’il a exprimé, à moins que la restriction n’ait été notifiée, avant l’expression de ce consentement, aux autres Etats ayant participé à la négociation.

Artikel 47 Besondere Beschränkungen der Ermächtigung, die Zustimmung eines Staates zum Ausdruck zu bringen

Ist die Ermächtigung eines Vertreters, die Zustimmung eines Staates auszudrücken durch einen bestimmten Vertrag gebunden zu sein, einer besonderen Beschränkung unterworfen worden, so kann nur dann geltend gemacht werden, dass diese Zustimmung wegen Nichtbeachtung der Beschränkung ungültig sei, wenn die Beschränkung den anderen Verhandlungsstaaten notifiziert worden war, bevor der Vertreter die Zustimmung zum Ausdruck brachte.

596

article

ILC Draft 1966

Article 44—Specific restrictions on authority to express the consent of the State

If the authority of a representative to express the consent of his State to be bound by a particular treaty has been made subject to a specific restriction, his omission to observe that restriction may not be invoked as invalidating a consent expressed by him unless the restriction was brought to the knowledge of the other negotiating States prior to his expressing such consent.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Article 6.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 23 , 207 f, 289, 311, 317.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 32.

WALDOCK Report IV: Article 32.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 11 , 115 f; 1966 I/2 293, 304, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 44.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 246 , 464 f; OR 1969 Plenary 84, 88, 167.

Vienna Conference Vote: 101:0:0

Selected Literature:

P. Martin-Bidou, Article 47, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1723 .

 

specific restrictions on authority

597

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 47 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Scope ................................................................................................

3

 

2.

Principle ...........................................................................................

6

 

3.

Exception .........................................................................................

7

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

8

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

8

 

2.

Customary Basis of Article 47 ...........................................................

10

 

D. Appreciation ........................................................................................

11

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

Where a State representative, when expressing the consent of a State to be

1

bound by a treaty, ostensibly has full powers but fails to observe restric-

 

tions imposed by that State, a conflict of interests arises: the other State

 

wishes bona fide to implement the treaty, whereas the representative’s State is confronted with a treaty which, as such, it did not wish to conclude.1

For a rare example in State practice, see the incident of the Hungarian representative who in 1923 signed part of the text of a draft resolution of the Council of the League of Nations. Later, the Hungarian Government sought to disavow this act by interpreting the scope of his full powers, rather than by contending that he had specific instructions limiting the exercise of those powers. The League of Nations, however, took the view that a State could not disavow the act of an agent done within the scope of the authority apparently conferred upon him by his full powers.2

1On the subject, see also A.P. Sereni, La représentation en droit international, RC 73 (1948 II) 73 ; Zoller, Bonne foi N. 329.

2LNOJ 4, no. 8, 1011; referred to in the ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 194, para. 5; see the statement by Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 304, para. 54.

598

article

2. History

2Article 6 of Waldock Report II set out the first draft in 1963, distinguishing between the situation where the representative ostensibly did not possess any authority to bind the State (para. 1; see N. 8), and where a representative possessing ostensible authority to bind the State had in fact been given instructions restricting particular aspects of his authority (para. 2).3 In 1963 about half the members of the ILC considered the provision unnecessary, inter alia, as it concerned such a rare occurrence.4 In 1966 the ILC decided to divide the article into two parts. para. 1 eventually became Article 8 (q.v., N. 2) while para. 2, the later Article 47, was adopted unanimously.5 In Vienna, the provision was not called into question apart from two amendments concerning textual changes.6 Article 47 was adopted by 101 votes to none.7

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 47

1. Scope

3Article 47 deals with the situation where a representative appears to have full powers to enter into the treaty as provided for in Articles 2, subpara. 1(c) and 7 (q.v.) but his authority has in fact been curtailed by specific

3YBILC 1963 II 46 . Previously, Article 23 of Fitzmaurice Report I, stated that “[various provisions relating to full powers] are, whenever this is relevant, to be read subject to the understanding that the unauthorised acts of an agent are always open to validation on the part of his government, by means of a specific confirmation, or by conduct manifesting an unmistakable intention to adopt them as its own”, YBILC

1956 II 87.

4E.g. statements in the ILC by Ago, YBILC 1963 I 23, para. 22; Tsuruoka, ibid. para. 18; and Briggs, YBILC 1966 I/2 12, para. 14. The main debate is at YBILC 1963 I

22 . Article 32 of the ILC Draft 1963 is reproduced at YBILC 1963 II 193 f.

5YBILC 1966 I/1 115, para. 5; adopted at YBILC 1966 I/2 331; Article 44 of the ILC Draft 1966 is reproduced at YBILC 1966 II 242 f.

6OR 1968 CoW 246 , 464 f; and OR 1969 Plenary 84, 88, and 167. The Spanish and Japanese amendments proposed notification to the other States (rather than bringing the restriction to their knowledge, as in Article 44 of the ILC Draft 1966). The Mexican amendment proposed notification also of the depositary (N. 7). Both were adopted at

OR 1968 CoW 249, paras. 30 f. 7 OR 1969 Plenary 88, para. 50.

specific restrictions on authority

599

instructions.8 However, the representative omits to observe the restrictions and therefore, by concluding the treaty, commits an unauthorised act.9

A priori, Article 47 is limited to cases where States become parties to a

4

treaty by mere signature (Article 12, q.v.).

 

Where a treaty depends on ratification, acceptance or approval, the State in question

 

will have the clear choice at that subsequent stage of repudiating the text established

 

by its representative, or of ratifying, accepting or approving the treaty; if it does the

 

latter, it will necessarily be held to have endorsed the unauthorised act of its repre-

 

sentative and, by doing so, to have cured the original defect of authority.10

 

Article 47 does not concern instructions which a representative may receive on the

 

conduct of the negotiations.11

 

Article 47 envisages a situation where, at the outset, the authority of

5

a representative to express the consent of a State to be bound by a

 

particular treaty has been made subject to a specific restriction. Thus,

 

the representative has been authorised to exchange or deposit a binding

 

instrument (as in Articles 11–17, q.v.) only under certain conditions or

 

subject to certain reservations, but, when concluding the treaty, presents

 

to the other States the appearance of full powers without complying with

 

the conditions or specifying the reservation.12

 

Aust suggests that the restriction at issue must be one of the internal sphere.13 This

 

appears correct to the extent that the restriction concerns the internal or domestic

 

relationship between the State and its representative. However, internal law restrictions

 

on the competence to conclude treaties are examined under Article 46 (q.v.).

 

2. Principle

 

Article 47 provides that the representative’s omission to observe that

6

restriction (N. 5) may not be invoked as invalidating the consent

 

expressed by him or her. A State may not claim that it instructed its

 

8Originally, the ILC employed the term “power” in view of the closeness of Articles 47 and Article 7 (q.v.), Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 72, para. 3. Furthermore, in Vienna, it was decided to employ “representative of a State” rather than “his State” (italics added) since it was possible for a State to be represented by a person who was not a national of that State; see the statement by Yasseen, Chairman of the Drafting

Committee, OR Plenary 1969 84, para. 2, and ibid. 167, para. 26.

9ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 194, para. 5; statement by Rosenne in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 13, para. 20.

10ILC Report 1963, ibid. para. 2; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 2.

11See the statements in the ILC by Yasseen, YBILC 1963 I 26, paras. 56 f; and in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 249, para. 27.

12ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 193 f, para. 2; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 2.

13Modern Treaty Law 315.

600

article

representative not to sign definitively when the powers communicated to the other party were clear and disclose the negotiator’s full powers only.14 In principle, therefore, as long as the other State was not notified of the restrictions (N. 7), the representative’s State may not retract from the treaty. Both States remain bound.

3. Exception

7The representative’s failure to comply with a specific restriction will have no e ect on the conclusion of the treaty unless the restriction was notified to the other negotiating States prior to his expressing such consent.15

This is a strict requirement.16 The form of notification, i.e., a formal communication, is governed by Article 78 (q.v.) and may include transmittal to the depositary of the treaty (Article 76, q.v.).17 Where such notification has occurred, either State may invoke the defect (according to the procedures in Articles 65–68, q.v.) as invalidating the consent expressed by the representative. This also follows e contrario from the first part of Article 47 (N. 6). The provision thus envisages relative nullity the consequences of which are set out in Article 69 (q.v.). Invalidity may not be invoked where notification takes place after consent to be bound has been expressed.

The situations covered by this exception would appear rare. Indeed, as Briggs asked in the ILC, why would the other State agree to conclude a treaty if it was aware that the representative lacked authority?18 Conceivably, other States have been notified of the restrictions, though the representative himor herself is not aware of the restrictions. This situation could also arise where a State becomes aware that its representative intends to go beyond his or her powers and that State “warns” the other States.

14Statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 26, para. 58.

15Originally, Waldock Report IV suggested “a right to invoke the lack of authority as invalidating the expression”, YBILC 1965 II 72, para. 4. However, the ILC phrased the principle in Article 47 positively with the ensuing exception (“unless”). This, in the ILC’s view, disclosed the rarity of cases where a State sought to disavow the act of its representative, ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 3. According to Article 2, subpara. 1(e) (q.v., N. 40–42), a negotiating State is one “which took part in the drawing up and adoption of the text of the treaty”.

16Lack of such notification played a part in the two cases of Amoco Iran Oil Co. and

Phillips Petroleum Company v. Islamic Republic of Iran, ILR 70 (1986) 486, and 492, respectively.

17Originally, the ILC Draft 1966 suggested that the restriction be “brought to the knowledge of” the other State, thereby allowing for “any kind of proof of the restriction”; see the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 249, para. 27. This was altered upon amendments proposed by Spain and Mexico (N. 2), OR Documents 167, subpara. 403(b). The purpose was to emphasise the “seriousness” of the nature of the exception to Article 7; see the statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 247, para. 5.

18YBILC 1963 I 22, para. 5.

specific restrictions on authority

601

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

Article 47 is closely linked with Articles 2, subpara. 1(c) and 7 (N. 3). It

8

has a common background with Article 8 (q.v., N. 7) going back to Wal-

 

dock Report II (N. 2). Article 8 concerns the case where the representative

 

does not possess ostensible authority to bind the State, and provides that

 

any such act relating to the conclusion of the treaty is without legal e ect

 

unless confirmed by the representative’s State.

 

 

Article 47 is covered by Articles 44 and 45 (q.v.). It must further be dis-

9

tinguished from Article 46 (q.v.). That provision is concerned with internal

 

limitations on the competence to conclude treaties, whereas Article 47

 

relates to a situation where the representative has not been furnished with

 

the necessary authority.19 Finally, the invalidity envisaged in Article 47

 

requires that the procedures in Articles 65-68 be set in motion (N. 7).

 

2. Customary Basis of Article 47

When the ILC took up the provision in 1963, it appeared innovatory. 10 Given the widespread support which Article 47 attracted in the ILC (N. 2)

and later in Vienna, it can be assumed that it now reflects customary international law.20

D. APPRECIATION

Modern technology allows for ever more rapid communication between 11 States, enabling them to confirm the full powers of each other’s representatives almost instantaneously. This makes it unlikely that the situation envisaged in Article 47 could arise and probably explains why the provision has attracted very little practice.21 Conversely, it may be argued that misunderstandings could arise precisely because agreements are entered into

so rapidly, and instructions are given, cancelled and altered within a very

19See the statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/1 11f, para. 2; and Yasseen, ibid. 12, para. 13; contra Ago, ibid. para. 7; and in Vienna by the Jamaican delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 247, paras. 70 f; and by Sir Humphrey Waldock as Expert Consultant, ibid. 248 f, para. 26.

20See the observation by the Portuguese Government to the ILC, Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 71; the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Israel, OR 1968 CoW 247 f, para. 11; and Switzerland, ibid. 248, para. 14.

21See the statements in the ILC by Liu, YBILC 1963 I 208, para. 77; and Waldock, ibid. 22, para. 3; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 46, para. 1.

ZACHARIAS

602

article

short period of time.22 Protection appears a fortiori necessary where States dealing in good faith with a representative who acted without authority become bound by mere signature (Article 12, q.v.).23 T hus, Article 47 contributes in its own modest way towards safeguarding the security of international transactions.24 In fact, the provision informs States that, if they wish to benefit from the exception therein (N. 7), they are advised to inform regularly other States, with whom they are negotiating a treaty, of any specific restrictions on their representatives’ authority to express its consent.

22Waldock in the ILC, ibid. 27, para. 68.

23Statement by Liang in the ILC, ibid. 25, para. 42.

24ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 3; statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 24, para. 34.

ZACHARIAS

Article 48

Error

1.A State may invoke an error in a treaty as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty if the error relates to a fact or situation which was assumed by that State to exist at the time when the treaty was concluded and formed an essential basis of its consent to be bound by the treaty.

2.Paragraph 1 shall not apply if the State in question contributed by its own conduct to the error or if the circumstances were such as to put that State on notice of a possible error.

3.An error relating only to the wording of the text of a treaty does not a ect its validity; Article 79 then applies.

Article 48 Erreur

1.Un Etat peut invoquer une erreur dans un traité comme viciant son consentement

àêtre lié par le traité si l’erreur porte sur un fait ou une situation que cet Etat supposait exister au moment où le traité a été conclu et qui constituait une base essentielle du consentement de cet Etat à être lié par le traité.

2.Le paragraphe 1 ne s’applique pas lorsque ledit Etat a contribué à cette erreur par son comportement ou lorsque les circonstances ont été telles qu’il devait être averti de la possibilité d’une erreur.

3.Une erreur ne concernant que la rédaction du texte d’un traité ne porte pas atteinte à sa validité; dans ce cas, l’article 79 s’applique.

Artikel 48 Irrtum

1.Ein Staat kann geltend machen, dass seine Zustimmung, durch den Vertrag gebunden zu sein, wegen eines Irrtums im Vertrag ungültig sei, wenn sich der Irrtum auf eine Tatsache oder Lage bezieht, deren Bestehen der Staat im Zeitpunkt des Vertragsabschlusses annahm und die eine wesentliche Grundlage für seine Zustimmung bildete.

604

article

2.Absatz 1 findet keine Anwendung, wenn der betre ende Staat durch sein eigenes Verhalten zu dem Irrtum beigetragen hat oder nach den Umständen mit der Möglichkeit eines Irrtums rechnen musste.

3.Ein ausschliesslich redaktioneller Irrtum berührt die Gültigkeit eines Vertrags nicht; in diesem Fall findet Artikel 79 Anwendung.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 45—Error

1.A State may invoke an error in a treaty as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty if the error relates to a fact or situation which was assumed by that State to exist at the time when the treaty was concluded and formed an essential basis of its consent to be bound by the treaty.

2.Paragraph 1 shall not apply if the State in question contributed by its own conduct to the error, or if the circumstances were such as to put that State on notice of a possible error.

3.An error relating only to the wording of the text of a treaty does not a ect its validity; Article 79 then applies.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Articles 8 f.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 38 , 210 f, 290, 311, 317.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 34.

WALDOCK Report V: Article 34.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 18 , 116 f; 1966 I/2 304 f, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 45.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 249 , 464 f; OR 1969 Plenary 88 .

Vienna Conference Vote: 95:0:5

Selected Literature:

A. Oraison, L’erreur dans les traités (1972); H. Schulte-Beerbühl, Irrtum bei völkerrechtlichen Verträgen nach der Wiener Vertragsrechtskonvention (1982); E. Wyler, Article 48, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1739 .

 

error

605

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background ........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction ....................................................................................

1

2.

History ...........................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 48 ...........................................................

3

1.

Scope ...............................................................................................

3

2.

General Rule (Para. 1) .....................................................................

5

3.

Exceptions (Para. 2) .........................................................................

10

4.

Relationship to Article 79 (Para. 3) ..................................................

12

C. Context ..............................................................................................

13

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions .....................................................

13

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ..................................................................

14

3.

Customary Basis of Article 48 ..........................................................

15

D. Appreciation .......................................................................................

16

A. BACKGROUND

 

1. Introduction

 

An error is a mistaken impression of facts which invalidates consensus on

1

a treaty. Genuine consent exists only where all essential facts were known equally by all parties.1 Much on error has entered international law via general principles of international law from private domestic law where error occupies a comparatively important position.2 The 1935 Harvard Draft contained a detailed provision on “mutual error”.3 For McNair, “a treaty concluded as a result of a fundamental mistake induced in one party . . . by

1See W. Gehr, Application of the Principles of Free Consent and Good Faith with Regard to the Termination of Treaties. Defects of Consent. Error, in: Http://www

.walter.gehr.net/defects.html (website visited on 1 July 2008).

2ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 1. See the debate in the ILC in 1963, YBILC 1963 I 38 ; e.g., the statements by Paredes, ibid. 38, para. 63; Jiménez de

Aréchaga, ibid. 41, paras. 19 ; and Bartos, ibid. 43, paras. 51 .

3AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1126. Article 29, para. (a) stated: “[a] treaty entered into upon an assumption as to the existence of a state of facts, the assumed existence of which was envisaged by the parties as a determining factor moving them to undertake the obligations stipulated, may be declared by a competent international tribunal or authority not to be binding on the parties, when it is discovered that the state of facts did not exist at the time the treaty was entered into”.

606

article

circumstances involving no negligence on its part . . . is voidable by that party”.4 In the Temple of Preah Vihear (Cambodia v. Thailand) Case, the Court, relying on Thailand’s passive conduct over a long period of time in respect of a map drawing a frontier line, expounded the principle which became the basis for Article 48, para. 2 (N. 10–11) of the Convention:

“[i]t is an established rule of law that the plea of error cannot be allowed as an element vitiating consent if the party advancing it contributed by its own conduct to the error, or could have avoided it, or if the circumstances were such as to put that party on notice of a possible error”.5

2. History

2Based on the Fitzmaurice Report of 1958,6 Waldock presented in his second Report in 1963 two provisions on error, distinguishing between mutual error and error by one party only.7 The main discussion in the ILC took place in 1963 where the Report was criticised for being too close to English private law and that inspiration should be sought from continental European rules.8 It was further debated whether the word “mistake” or “error” should be employed and whether the provision should cover errors of law in addition to errors of facts (N. 6).9 The ILC Draft 1963 streamlined the provision which no longer distinguished between mutual and unilateral error and also contained a clause on separability (Article 44, N. 2).10 After further discussion in 1966, the ILC adopted its final Article 45 constituting today’s Article 48.11 Two proposals for amendments at the Vienna Conference proved unsuccessful.12 The debate in 1969 concentrated

4 Law of Treaties 211.

5ICJ Reports 1962 26; A. Rustemeyer, Temple of Preah Vihear Case, EPIL 4 (2000) 808 . See also the Eastern Greenland (Denmark v. Norway) Case, PCIJ (1933) Series

A/B no. 53, 71, 91.

6 Articles 11 f, YBILC 1958 II 25. On the history, see Schulte-Beerbühl, Irrtum 41 . 7 Articles 8 f, YBILC 1963 II 46 ; Waldock also relied in his report on the 1935

Harvard Draft (N. 1), Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 (1970) 529 f.

8 See the statement in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1963 I 41, para. 21. 9 Statement by Rosenne, ibid. 39, para. 74.

10YBILC 1963 II 195 f.

11ILC Report 1966 II 243 f; the debate is reproduced at YBILC 1966 I/1 18 . See also Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 12 .

12T he US amendment proposed including also error in the performance of a treaty, as well as the formulation that the error “could have been avoided . . . by the exercise of reasonable diligence”, ibid. subpara. 411(a). The Australian amendment suggested a time-limit for invoking the error, OR Documents 168, subpara. 411(b). The amendments were rejected at OR 1968 CoW 255, para. 30 f, and 32, respectively.

error

607

on the issues of Articles 65–68 (Article 65, N. 4).13 Article 48 was adopted by 95 votes to none, with five abstentions.14

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 48

 

1. Scope

 

Para. 1, containing the general rule, prescribes under what conditions a

3

treaty party may invoke an error in a treaty and the consequences (N. 5).15

 

Para. 2 states as an exception the conditions when an error may not be

 

invoked (N. 10). Para. 3 circumscribes the relationship with Article 79

 

(N. 12). Throughout, the terms “error” and “mistake” are treated syn-

 

onymously.16

 

Typically, errors arise in the case of maps, for instance a boundary treaty which is

 

based on an incorrect map,17 as in the Temple of Preah Vihear Case where the frontier

 

line did not follow the watershed as envisaged (N. 1). Further examples would be the

 

incorrect calculation of the capacity of turbines underlying a treaty for the sharing of

 

hydro-electric power between two neighbouring States;18 or an agreement between

 

two States to extradite a particular person who is in reality dead (N. 12).

 

Article 48 does not raise a presumption against errors. On the other hand,

4

the State invoking the factual error bears the burden of proving that the

 

conditions have been met (N. 6–11).19 Also, Article 48 does not distin-

 

guish between biand multilateral treaties, since the issue of error may arise in both.20 Typically, errors may arise in the fast track procedures of bilateral treaties entering into force following conclusion upon signature. Given the thoroughness of treaty-making conferences, it appears unlikely that a multilateral treaty will contain an error.21 Moreover, Article 48 does not regard as relevant whether the error was the result of an intentional act or of negligence, or of bad faith22 (though issues of responsibility may possibly arise). Finally, essential errors within the meaning of Article 48

13OR 1969 Plenary 88 f.

14Ibid. 90, para. 8.

15ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 6.

16Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 13, para. 6.

17Jennings/Watts N. 638; Verdross/Simma N. 744; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 1.

18Sinclair, Vienna Convention 172.

19See the statement in Vienna by the delegation of Ghana, OR 1968 CoW 250, para. 45.

20Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 43, para. 59.

21See the observation by the Brazilian Government to the ILC, Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 12; the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 243, para. 1.

22See the statements by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 42, para. 46; and in Vienna by the Cuban delegation, OR 1968 CoW 251, para. 48; Zoller, Bonne foi 317.

608

article

must be distinguished from errors of motive, judgment and expectation none of which are covered by this provision.23

2. General Rule (Para. 1)

5Article 48, para. 1 circumscribes an error as relating to a fact or situation which was assumed by that State to exist at the time when the treaty was concluded and formed an essential basis of its consent to be bound by the treaty. The notion of an error itself—a mistaken impression of facts (N. 1)—is not explained.

6An error relates to a fact or situation. Article 48 thus excludes the notion of an error of law which would weaken the stability of treaties. Ignorantia facti excusat, ignorantia juris non excusat. Still, Article 48 does not exclude mixed questions of fact and of law, and the line between one and the other may not always be easy to draw.24

An error of law relates to the applicable rule of international law, or to the alleged right of a State in a particular case.25 Conversely, for purposes of Article 48, a mistake over a State’s internal law qualifies as an error of fact, not of law.26

7Furthermore, the State invoking the error must have assumed the error to exist at the time when the treaty was concluded (Articles 11–17, q.v.).

This strict temporal limitation was confirmed at the Vienna Conference when it rejected the US amendment (N. 2), aimed at also covering errors arising in a treaty’s subsequent performance.27

8Finally, the error must have formed an essential basis of its consent to be bound by the treaty. The erroneous treaty provision must have been the (or a) decisive factor in inducing the consent of the States concerned to be bound by the terms of the treaty.28 Without this provision, at least the State invoking the error would not have concluded the treaty. However,

23See Article 12, para. 2 of Fitzmaurice Report III, YBILC 1958 II 25; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 49, para. 5 (“the distinction between an error of fact and of opinion may sometimes call for nice judgment in the light of the particular circumstances of the case”). For instance, where a State concludes an economic treaty with another State, but the expected economic benefits are not forthcoming, Schulte-Beerbühl, Irrtum 49.

24ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 6; Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 21, para. 43.

25Schulte-Beerbühl, Irrtum 51.

26See the statement by Pal in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 41, para. 34.

27By 45 votes to twelve, with 30 abstentions; OR 1968 CoW 254, para. 30. See OR Documents subpara. 411(a).

28Article 8, subpara. 1(c) of Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 48; statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 42, para. 46; Article 34 of the ILC Draft 1963, YBILC 1963 II 196, para. 8 (“fundamental”). See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant,

error

609

 

the “essential” nature of the error transgresses the subjective appreciation

 

of the erring State (which very likely will find the error of central impor-

 

tance).29 Rather, an objective assessment is called for, and the error must

 

also appear essential to the other treaty party or parties; in the same situ-

 

ation the latter would not have concluded the treaty either.

 

 

Error is a vice of consent.30 As to the consequences thereof, Article 48

9

provides that a State may invoke the error in a treaty as invalidating its

 

consent to be bound by the treaty. Any a ected State party to the treaty

 

may do so unilaterally, though no automatic consequences are envisaged:

 

the State may only invoke the error and thereby initiate the procedures in

 

Articles 65–68 (q.v.). These procedures may result in the treaty’s invalidity

 

ab initio with the consequences set out in Article 69 (q.v.).31 Thus, Article

 

48 provides for relative (rather than absolute) nullity. The erring State is

 

o ered di erent possibilities to a rm the treaty. For instance, together

 

with the other treaty parties it may propose modifying the treaty (Articles

 

39–41, q.v.) and correcting the error.32 Or the erring State may through

 

its passive conduct (N. 10) simply continue to accept the treaty.

 

 

3. Exceptions (Para. 2)

 

 

Para. 2 provides for two exceptions where paragraph 1 shall not apply

10

and the State is not entitled to invoke the error, namely: (i) if the State

 

in question contributed by its own conduct to the error; or (ii) if the

 

circumstances were such as to put that State on notice of a possible error. The two exceptions constitute aspects of a venire contra factum proprium (estoppel).33 In respect of the second, the State victim of the error could be expected to have employed all reasonable (rather than all possible)34 means of establishing the facts when concluding the treaty and of having taken precautions to avoid any error.

Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 254, para. 27 (by essential basis of a State’s consent was meant “which was of the essence of its consent”).

29Schulte-Beerbühl, Irrtum 52; statement in Vienna by the delegation of Ghana, OR 1968 CoW 250, para. 45.

30Sinclair, Vienna Convention 161.

31ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 7; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 315 f. But see Zoller, Bonne foi 316, according to whom, rather than sanctioning a State, Article 48 “récompense la conduite ou le comportement de la victime”. On relative nullity, see Cahier, RGDIP 76 (1972) 672 .

32Waldock Report II of 1963, YBILC 1963 II 49, para. 6.

33Ibid. para. 8.

34Contra, the statement by Paredes in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 210, para. 10. See also Zoller, Bonne foi 316 (“cette deuxième condition est particulièrement stricte. Elle aboutit en définitive à ne protéger la croyance de la victime que dans la mesure où

ZACHARIAS

610

article

11These conditions are taken over from the Court’s judgment in the Temple of Preah Vihear Case (N. 1). Interestingly, the third exception mentioned by the Court in that case, namely that the particular treaty party “could have avoided [the error]”, has not been included in para. 2 in order not to stifle completely the application of para. 1. Otherwise, there would be few errors which could not be avoided one way or another.35 Even as it stands today, para. 2 appears comparatively strict and far-reaching.36

Article 48, para. 2 must be distinguished from Article 45, para. 2 (q.v., N. 8–9) whereby a State loses its right to invoke a ground for invalidating at treaty if “it must by reason of its conduct be considered as having acquiesced in the validity of the treaty”. In Article 48, para. 2 the State’s conduct relates to the period of time leading up to the error at the time of concluding the treaty; whereas Article 45, para. 2 concerns the period of time after concluding the treaty. The distinction is a fine one, and there may be situations where the two exceptions coincide.37

4. Relationship to Article 79 (Para. 3)

12According to para. 3, an error relating only to the wording of the text of a treaty does not a ect its validity and Article 79 then applies. Para. 3 thus distinguishes between errors in the wording of the text, covered by Article 79, and errors in the treaty dealt with by Article 48.38 However, this formulation appears imprecise.39 The distinguishing criterion between Articles 48 and 79 would rather be the element of agreement (see Article 79, N. 6). Where States agree on the error and the procedures to correct it, Article 79 applies, otherwise Article 48 comes into play and with it, possibly, the procedures in Articles 65–68 (N. 9).

In cases where the error is not too serious or in borderline cases, parties are advised to reach agreement and follow the path of Article 79. The latter leads to a straight-

celle-ci pourra établir l’existence de circonstances telles que son erreur devait en résulter inévitablement”).

35See the statement in Vienna by the Expert Consultant, Sir Humphrey Waldock, OR 1968 CoW 254, para. 28; ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 8. Article 8, subpara. 3(a) of Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 48, originally included the third exception that the State “could by the exercise of due diligence have avoided [the error]”; see the ensuing discussion in the ILC, e.g., the statement by Rosenne, YBILC 1963 I 39, para. 72.

36Zoller, Bonne foi 315 f.

37See the statement in Vienna by the Italian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 252, para. 65 (“a situation where error was discovered could not be maintained indefinitely while the State concerned made up its mind whether or not to claim invalidity”).

38ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 9.

39T he reason for this situation can perhaps be seen in the fact that para. 3 goes back to Article 10 of Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 50, eventually leading to Article 48, para. 3. These provisions were dealt with in the ILC independently of Article 79 (q.v., N. 1).

ZACHARIAS

error

611

forward, formal correction of the treaty text rather than to the complex procedures of Articles 65–68 and the possible invalidation of the treaty.40

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

In addition to the particular relations between Articles 45 (N. 11) and

13

79 (N. 12), Article 48 also falls to be considered under Article 44 on the

 

separability of treaty provisions (q.v., N. 21). Bad faith in connexion with

 

an error may qualify as fraud according to Article 49 (q.v.).41

 

If the impossibility of performing a treaty unknown to the treaty parties existed already

 

at the time of the treaty’s conclusion, this may raise a question of error according to

 

Article 48. If the impossibility of performance arises after the treaty’s entry into force

 

(e.g., the person to be extradited dies after the extradition agreement is reached), this

 

may raise an issue under Article 61 (q.v., N. 13).42

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

Article 48 deals solely with errors of fact, not of law (N. 6).

14

3. Customary Basis of Article 48

 

Given the sparse practice at the time of its drafting, Article 48 most likely

15

combined codification with progressive development, in particular as regards

 

the precise confines of the exceptions in para. 2 (N. 10–11). In view of

 

the approval by States in Vienna (N. 2), Article 48 today appears to have become declaratory of customary law.43

40See the statement in the ILC by Tunkin, YBILC 1965 I 188, para. 32 (“much simpler methods than those used for errors that a ected substance”); Aust, Modern Treaty Law 336 (“Article 79 . . . deals with corrections only where there is no dispute as to the existence of the error. It is more likely, however, that there will be no dispute that there is an error, merely a di erence of view about how to deal with the matter”).

41See the statement in Vienna by the Cuban delegation, OR 1968 CoW 251, para. 48.

42Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 163, para. 83.

43See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Ghana, OR 1968 CoW 250, para. 45, according to which the provision “represented a re-statement of existing international law combined with a minimal degree of progressive development”; and of the United Kingdom (Sir Francis Vallat), OR 1969 Plenary 89, para. 53 (“the articles [inter alia, on error] contained a substantial element of progressive development, if only as regards their formulation and modalities and the procedures for their application”). See also Sinclair, Vienna Convention 15 (“some measure of progressive development as well as of codification”); but see Wyler, Article 48, N. 7 (“une réponse tranchée s’avérerait pématurée”).

612

article

D. APPRECIATION

16In the light of the prominent position of the doctrine of errors in the domestic law of treaties (N. 1), it was inconceivable that the ILC and the Vienna Conference would have ignored error in the international law on treaties. In practice, given the thoroughness of multilateral treaty-making processes, the relevance of Article 48 appears limited to bilateral treaties (N. 4).44 T he e ectiveness of this provision will depend mainly on the manner in which the exceptions in para. 2 are interpreted (N. 10–11).

44In its observation to the ILC, the Swedish Government asked whether an article on error was really required, Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 12.

Article 49

Fraud

If a State has been induced to conclude a treaty by the fraudulent conduct of another negotiating State, the State may invoke the fraud as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty.

Article 49 Dol

Si un Etat a été amené à conclure un traité par la conduite frauduleuse d’un autre Etat ayant participé à la négociation, il peut invoquer le dol comme viciant son consentement à être lié par le traité.

Artikel 49 Betrug

Ist ein Staat durch das betrügerische Verhalten eines anderen Verhandlungsstaats zum Vertragsabschluss veranlasst worden, so kann er geltend machen, dass seine Zustimmung, durch den Vertrag gebunden zu sein, wegen des Betrugs ungültig sei.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 46—Fraud

A State which has been induced to conclude a treaty by the fraudulent conduct of another negotiating State may invoke the fraud as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty.

614

article

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Article 7.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 27 , 208 f, 289 f, 311, 317.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 33.

WALDOCK Report IV: Article 33.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 14 , 116; 1966 I/2 293, 304, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 46.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 255 , 464 f; OR 1969 Plenary 84 f, 90.

Vienna Conference Vote: 92:0:7

Selected Literature:

G. Niyungeko, Article 49, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1779 ; A. Oraison, Le dol dans la conclusion des traités, RGDIP 75 (1971) 618 .

 

fraud

615

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

Paras.

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 49 ............................................................

3

C. Context ...............................................................................................

7

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

7

2.

Customary Basis of Article 49 ...........................................................

8

D. Appreciation ........................................................................................

9

A. BACKGROUND

 

1. Introduction

 

Fraus omnia corrumpit. Fraud vitiates everything. Fraud leads to a mistaken

1

impression of reality, but unlike error (Article 48, N. 1) it is the consequence of a deception by another treaty party.1 The prohibition of fraud, derived from good faith,2 is well known in domestic law and entered international law via general principles of international law.3 There is virtually no practice on the subject-matter.4 The 1935 Harvard Draft contained a provision on fraud, albeit without further definition.5

1See W. Gehr, Application of the Principles of Free Consent and Good Faith with Regard to the Termination of Treaties. Defects of Consent. Deceit (corruption of a State representative), in: Http://www.walter.gehr.net/defects.html (website visited on

 

1 July 2008).

2

See the statement by the Spanish delegation in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 16.

3

See the statements in the ILC by Gros, YBILC 1963 I 34, para. 16; Tsuruoka, ibid.

 

36, para. 39; and Yasseen, ibid. 37, para. 48.

4

Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 47, para. 1. One well-known and disputed

 

instance of practice—the 1889 Italian/Abyssinian Treaty of Friendship—was discussed

 

in the travaux préparatoires; see the statements by Tunkin and Ago in the ILC, YBILC

1963 I 31, para. 42, and at 33, paras. 14 and 49; and the statement in Vienna by the Ethiopian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 264, paras. 15 . See also Oraison, RGDIP 75 (1971) 641 .

5AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1144. Article 31, para. (a) of the Harvard Draft stated: “[a] State which claims that it has been induced to enter into a treaty with another State by the fraud of the latter State, may seek from a competent international tribunal or authority a declaration that the treaty is void”; see also ibid. 1145 (“a wilful intent to deceive another”).

616

article

2. History

2Lauterpacht and Fitzmaurice dealt with the topic,6 thus prompting Waldock, albeit with much hesitation, to include it in his second Report of 1963.7 However, the ILC supported the provision and introduced a shortened text providing the core of today’s Article 49.8 Henceforth, the provision was undisputed, and Article 46 of the ILC Draft 1966 was adopted unanimously.9 Various amendments introduced in Vienna were rejected or withdrawn.10 Article 49 was discussed together with Article 50 (q.v., N. 2) and adopted by 92 votes to none, with seven abstentions.11

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 49

3Article 49 purposely does not define fraud, its interpretation and application being left to subsequent practice.12 Fraud may take on widely di erent forms and the article envisages a broader, more general concept; therefore, the notion is not (at least not primarily) to be interpreted according to domestic concepts.13 Given the thoroughness of the multilateral treaty-

6Lauterpacht Report II, YBILC 1953 II 90 ; Fitzmaurice Report III, YBILC 1958 II 38 f (“[fraud must have] induced, or contributed to inducing, the other party to conclude or participate in the treaty, in such a way that that party would not otherwise

have done so”).

7Article 7, YBILC 1963 II 47. In the ILC, Waldock left it open whether the provision was necessary, YBILC 1963 I 27, para. 2.

8See the statements, inter alia, by Tsuruoka, Yasseen, Tabibi and Gros, YBILC 1963 I 27 . The revised text is at YBILC 1963 I 208, para. 81 (“[i]f a State has been induced to enter into a treaty by the fraudulent conduct of another contracting State, it may invoke the fraud as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty”). See also Article

33 of the ILC Draft 1963, YBILC 1963 II 194.

9 YBILC 1966 I/1 116, para. 18. The ILC Report 1966 is at YBILC 1966 II 244 f.

10OR Documents 169, para. 422. The Vietnamese amendment proposed “fraudulent devices” (instead of “fraudulent conduct”, as in Article 49); the Congolese amendment envisaged absolute nullity; Chile and Malaysia suggested deletion of the article; the US proposed barring a State from challenging the validity of a treaty after it had been in force for ten years (in fact contained in Article 45, q.v.; see Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 [1970] 527). The votes are at OR 1968 CoW 265 f.

11OR 1969 Plenary 90, para. 58. The discussion is recorded at OR 1968 CoW 255 , and 464 f.

12Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 11, para. 2. See the observation by the Venezuelan Government to the ILC, ibid. (“wise not to attempt to define the word ‘fraud’”). Di erently Sinclair, Vienna Convention 16 (“vagueness and uncertain e ect of the [ILC’s] proposal on fraud”).

13See the statement in Vienna by Jiménez de Aréchaga of the Uruguayan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 21; the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244 f, para. 3.

fraud

617

making processes within the UN and other international organisations,14 cases of fraud, if any, are most likely to be limited to bilateral treaties.

The order chosen in Part V between Articles 48 and 50 (q.v.) was not coincidental. Fraud was considered an “aggravated” form of invalidity more akin to coercion than to innocent forms of misrepresentation such as error and therefore came between Articles 48 and 50.15 Article 49 itself is formulated in the form of a conditional, rather than a positive rule.16

The travaux préparatoires suggest that fraud amounts to “deceit or wilful

4

misrepresentation”.17 One party is under a misapprehension when concluding a treaty and the other party does nothing to remove it.18 However, the fraudulent conduct must take on a certain relevance and go beyond merely inaccurate representations of fact.19 As in the case of Article 48 where error must have been essential to the conclusion of the treaty (q.v., N. 8), Article 49 requires that, without the fraud, the other State would not have given its consent.20 On the whole, fraud is characterised by intention.21 The final test will remain that of good faith22 which will assist, inter alia, in the establishment of any positive obligations, for instance, which pertinent facts should be mutually disclosed by the parties when concluding a treaty.23

Article 7, subpara. 2 of Waldock Report II (N. 2) circumscribed fraud as follows:

“(a) the making of false statements or representations of fact either in the knowledge that they are false or without regard to whether they are true or false, for the purpose of procuring the consent of a State to be bound by the terms of a treaty; or

14Statement Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 30, para. 34.

15Waldock Report V, YBILC 1965 II 11, para. 2.

16Elias, RC 134 (1971 III) 372.

17Statement in Vienna by the Philippines delegation, OR 1968 CoW 258, para. 65. See Reuter, Introduction N. 261 (“élément illicite caractérisé, une tromperie”); Oraison, RGDIP 75 (1971) 622 (“suscitée de mauvaise foi”); the latter mentions as examples, ibid. 630, “une ‘mise en scène’, un mensonge, une réticence ou même un silence”.

18Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 29, para. 31.

19Statements in the ILC by Yasseen, ibid. I 28, para. 12; Ago, ibid. 31, para. 47; and Tunkin, ibid. para. 51; and in Vienna by the Philippines delegation, OR 1968 CoW 258, para. 66.

20Aust, Modern Treaty Law 316 f; Reuter, Introduction N. 262; Oraison, RGDIP 75 (1971) 639 .

21Verdross/Simma N. 746; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 173; Oraison, RGDIP 75 (1971) 626 ; statement in Vienna by Tabibi of the Afghan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 258, para. 2.

22Statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 16. For the Swiss delegation, an independent and impartial tribunal “would easily be able to establish whether or not there had been fraud”, ibid. 262, para. 32.

23Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 48, para. 5.

618

article

(b)the concealment or non-disclosure of a material fact for such a purpose where the information relating to the fact in question is in the exclusive possession or control of one party only and the circumstances of the treaty are such that good faith requires the disclosure of all material facts”.24

As an example the ILC mentioned a treaty between two States of cooperation on the mutual exploitation and use of water resources, where non-disclosure of a material fact, e.g., the existence of an underground stream, would not be consistent with good faith.25

5Article 49 assumes fraudulent conduct of another negotiating State. Fraud can only relate to conduct in the making of a treaty during its negotiation and up to its conclusion, not in its subsequent performance.26 Fraudulent conduct (N. 3–4) includes individual fraudulent acts committed by any of the authorities of another negotiating State.27 Fraudulent conduct of third States falls outside the scope of Article 49.28

6Fraud not merely a ects the consent of the other party or parties to the terms of the agreement; it destroys the whole basis of mutual confidence between the parties.29 Thus, any other State which was induced to conclude the treaty on account of the fraudulent conduct is entitled to invoke the fraud as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty. Article 49 envisages in this situation the relative (rather than automatic) nullity of the treaty, i.e., the latter becomes voidable as from its conclusion (ab initio) if the State so intends.30 However, the defrauded State has the burden of proving that the conditions of Article 49 have been met. It must then invoke the procedures according to Articles 65–68 (q.v). Certain further rights may be derived from Article 69, also in respect of other parties to the treaty, though according to para. 3, the State to which the fraud is imputable is expressly excluded from such rights (q.v., N. 20).31

24YBILC 1963 II 47.

25Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 48, para. 5; statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 28, para. 11.

26Statement in Vienna by the Italian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 262, para. 37. According to Article 2, subpara. 1(e) (q.v., N. 40–42), a negotiating State is one “which took part in the drawing up and adoption of the text of the treaty”.

27See the observation by the Israeli Government to the ILC, Waldock Report IV, YBILC 1965 II 10; the statements in the ILC by El Erian, YBILC 1963 I 28, para. 12; Elias, ibid. 209, para. 9; and Bartos, YBILC 1966 I/1 16, para. 90.

28“[T]he matter would be di erent in the event of complicity”, Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 17, para. 103.

29ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 244, para. 1.

30ILC Report 1963, YBILC 1963 II 47 f, para. 4. See also Reuter, Introduction N. 263 (“cette . . . option présente nettement le caractère d’une sanction”).

31Sinclair, Vienna Convention 174 (“punitive consequences”); see also the statement in Vienna by the Venezuelan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 255, para. 42.

fraud

619

 

According to its interests and as the circumstances of the case require, the defrauded

 

State has three further possibilities: (i) it may insist on performance of the treaty

 

vis-à-vis the defrauding State;32 (ii) it may invoke the fraud in respect of only par-

 

ticular clauses of the treaty (Article 44, para. 4, N. 19); or (iii) it may propose the

 

amendment or the modification of the treaty (Articles 39–41, q.v.).33

 

 

Fraud may not be invoked where the defrauded State, after the fraud was discovered,

 

expressly agreed that the treaty was valid or at least acquiesced in its validity (Article

 

45, q.v.),34 for instance, by ratifying or performing the treaty.

 

 

C. CONTEXT

 

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

 

The implications of Articles 44, 45, 65–68 and 69 have been mentioned

7

above (N. 6). Fraud as in Article 49 di ers from the innocent misrepresenta-

 

tion of error (Article 48, q.v.) in its elements of deliberateness and bad faith

 

(N. 4).35 Article 49 di ers from Article 50 (q.v.) in that fraud relates to the

 

will of the State itself, whereas corruption concerns the representative of a

 

State.36 The supervening impossibility of performance in Article 61 (q.v.,

 

N. 13) arises after a treaty’s entry into force; if disappearance or destruc-

 

tion of the object had been known, but was concealed at the time of the

 

treaty’s conclusion, an issue of fraud according to Article 49 may arise.

 

2. Customary Basis of Article 49

 

 

At the time of its adoption Article 49 most likely contained elements of

8

progressive development.37 In view of the approval by States in Vienna

 

32Statement in Vienna by the Kenyan delegation, ibid. 263, para. 4.

33Statement by Bartos in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 30, para. 32.

34See Article 7, subparas. 3(a) and (b) of Waldock Report III, YBILC 1963 II 47.

35Statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 15, para. 53 (“the e ects of fraud were more serious, because they destroyed the confidence between the parties”).

36Statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 17.

37See the submission by the Bulgarian delegation to the ILC, YBILC 1965 II 10 (“remarkable innovation”); the statement of the delegation of Ghana in Vienna, OR 1968 CoW 259, para. 4 (“[the ILC] had acted as a pioneer”); Castren in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 30, para. 36 (“no new ground would be broken, since references to fraud appeared in all textbooks on international law”); Sinclair, Vienna Convention 16 (“some measure of progressive development”): Combacau, Droit international public 128 (“développement progressif”).

ZACHARIAS

620

article

(N. 2), Article 49—very likely together with Article 48 (q.v., N. 15)—today appears to have become declaratory of customary law.38

D. APPRECIATION

9Fortunately, cases of fraud are rare in international law. Of course, this may also be explained by the fact that charges of fraud between States are not to be taken lightly, and would even suggest a certain naiveté or incompetence on the part of the diplomatic services of the defrauded State.39 Nevertheless, Article 49 rightly assumes its position in the Convention. Had it not been included in the catalogue of grounds of invalidity (Articles 46–53, q.v.), this could have conveyed the impression that fraud and the resulting voidability of a treaty did not exist (N. 6).40

38In the 1992 Southern Pacifi c Properties (Middle East) Ltd v. Arab Republic of Egypt Case, Judge el Mahdi invoked Article 49 in his diss. op., ILR 106 (1997) 706 (“basic principles relating to the issue of fraud”).

39El-Erian in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 33, para. 5; Bleckmann, Völkerrecht N. 321; Combacau, Droit international public 129.

40Yasseen, ibid. 37, para. 50. But see Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 261, para. 24 (“[Article 49] might encourage States to invoke grounds of fraud more frequently”).

ZACHARIAS

Article 50

Corruption of a representative of a State

If the expression of a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty has been procured through the corruption of its representative directly or indirectly by another negotiating State, the State may invoke such corruption as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty.

Article 50 Corruption du représentant d’un Etat

Si l’expression du consentement d’un Etat à être lié par un traité a été obtenue au moyen de la corruption de son représentant par l’action directe ou indirecte d’un autre Etat ayant participé à la négociation, l’Etat peut invoquer cette corruption comme viciant son consentement à être lié par le traité.

Artikel 50 Bestechung eines Staatenvertreters

Hat ein Verhandlungsstaat die Zustimmung eines anderen Staates, durch einen Vertrag gebunden zu sein, mittelbar oder unmittelbar durch Bestechung des Vertreters dieses Staates herbeigeführt, so kann dieser Staat geltend machen, dass seine Zustimmung wegen der Bestechung ungültig sei.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 47—Corruption of a representative of the State

If the expression of a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty has been procured through the corruption of its representative directly or indirectly by another negotiating State, the State may invoke such corruption as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty.

622

article

Materials:

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/2 140 , 156 f, 293 f, 305 , 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 47.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 255 , 464 f; OR 1969 Plenary 84 f, 89.

Vienna Conference Vote: 84:2:14

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 52, q.v.):

J.-P. Cot, Article 50, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1819 .

The basis of this commentary was prepared by Alison Wiebalck.

 

corruption of a representative of a state

623

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 50 ............................................................

3

 

1.

Corruption .......................................................................................

3

 

2.

Consent ............................................................................................

6

 

3.

Ground of Invalidity .........................................................................

7

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

9

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions ......................................................

9

 

2.

Customary Basis of Article 50 ...........................................................

10

 

D. Appreciation ........................................................................................

11

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

The corruption of a State representative perverts the relationship of agency

1

between the representative and the State on behalf of which he or she is

 

authorised to act.1 In relation to the invalidation of a treaty the concept

 

appears relatively new in international law, and no recorded instances of practice transpire.2

1See W. Gehr, Application of the Principles of Free Consent and Good Faith with Regard to the Termination of Treaties. Defects of Consent. Deceit, in: Http://www

.walter.gehr.net/defects.html (website visited on 1 July 2008).

2Menon, Revue DISDP 56 (1978) 236; Schröder, EPIL 4 (2000) 993; Jennings/ Watts N. 640; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 316 f. But see the statements in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 140, para. 85 (“the practice was widespread”); and de Luna, YBILC 1966 I/2 142, para. 7 (“[i]n the period of colonial imperialism, European writers considered that international law governed only the relations between

those States which they described as ‘civilized nations’ . . . [T]reaties obtained by means of corruption were considered perfectly valid in the relations with States outside the club of ‘civilized nations’”).

624

article

2. History

2Only late in preparing the Convention did the ILC identify corruption as a ground of invalidity.3 In 1966 it was felt that a separate provision was important for the protection of weak States against economically stronger States.4 In response, a proposal was put forward equating the corruption of a State representative with the coercion of a State representative (Article 51, N. 2); in both instances the expression of a State’s consent would be without any legal e ect.5 However, the ILC preferred to formulate two distinct grounds of invalidity.6 The result was a separate provision (Article 47 of the ILC Draft 1966) modelled on Articles 48 and 49 (q.v.) concerning error and fraud.7 The various amendments introduced in Vienna were either rejected or withdrawn.8 Article 50 was discussed together with Article 49 (q.v., N. 2).9 Article 50 was adopted by 84 votes to two, with 14 abstentions.10

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 50

1. Corruption

3Article 50 does not define corruption.11 Generally, it can be said that corruption refers to the misuse of a public o ce or a position of trust—in

3

In 1963 the ILC considered corruption to fall under fraud (Article 49, q.v.); see the

 

ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 245 para. 1.

4

See the statement by Tunkin in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 144, para. 34; Nahlik,

 

AJIL 65 (1971)743.

5

Presented at YBILC 1966 I/2 140, para. 81.

6

T he ILC considered that in practice corruption of a representative was more likely than

 

coercion, and that therefore it deserved an independent article; see the ILC Report 1966,

 

YBILC 1966 II 245, para. 3. The discussion is recorded at YBILC 1966 I/2 140 .

7

Introduced at YBILC 1966 I/2 156, para. 2. The ILC Draft 1966 is at YBILC 1966 II

 

245. The provision was adopted by nine votes to three, with two abstentions, YBILC

 

1966 I/2 157, para. 27.

8OR Documents 170, para. 432. Chile, Japan and Mexico proposed the deletion of the article on the ground that it would fall within the rule on fraud; see the statement by the Mexican delegation, OR 1968 CoW 256 f, para. 56. Venezuela and Congo proposed absolute nullity. For Peru, corruption could not be invoked if the State concerned subsequently ratified the treaty (N. 8). Australia proposed a 12 month limit on claiming invalidity once the corruption had been discovered. The votes are at OR 1968 CoW

266, paras. 33 f.

9 OR 1969 Plenary 89, para. 60. The debates are reproduced at OR 1968 CoW 255 .

10OR 1969 Plenary 90, para. 60.

11See the statement by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 261, para. 27 (“very imprecise and di cult to define”).

corruption of a representative of a state

625

 

the context of Article 50 by the representative of a State (Article 7, q.v.)

 

involved in the conclusion of a treaty—for personal gain. There are dif-

 

ferent means leading to corruption, i.e., as a rule financial or professional

 

benefits for the representative or a close person.12 Corruption may occur

 

directly or indirectly, mostly covertly and either in a direct relationship

 

between the State representative and the other State or through a third

 

party (N. 6).13

 

 

Only acts calculated to exercise a substantial influence on the representa-

4

tive to conclude a treaty may be invoked as invalidating the expression

 

of consent purportedly given on behalf of his State.14 A small courtesy or

 

favour shown to a representative in connection with the conclusion of a

 

treaty does not amount to corruption.15

 

 

Corruption must be shown to be directly or indirectly imputable to another

5

negotiating State, rather than a third State or a private person or corpo-

 

ration.16 The mere fact that a representative has taken a bribe from some

 

person is not enough for Article 50 to apply.

 

 

The corruption need not have been e ected by an o cial representative of another

 

negotiating State: it is su cient for it to have been committed by a person acting

 

under its control and on its behalf or merely with State complicity.17

 

 

2. Consent

 

 

Corruption relates to a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty. Such

6

consent may be expressed by the means enunciated in Article 11 (q.v.).

 

Article 50 does not, therefore, concern treaty negotiations, the signature

 

12Corruption covers bribery; see the statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 141, para. 87. Bribery refers to the practice of o ering something (usually money) in order to gain an illicit advantage.

13ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 245, para. 5 (“unlikely to be overt”); Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 156, para. 4; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 176.

14ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 245, para. 4; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 316 f.

15ILC Report 1966, ibid.; See the statement in Vienna by the Mexican delegation, OR 1968 CoW 257, para. 57; Elias, Modern Law of Treaties 166 (“[corruption] cannot be used to cover ordinary civilities and normal exchanges incident to legitimate diplomatic intercourse”). See here also Reisman, Nullity 493 , where he examines, inter alia, the distinction between partiality, which cannot not serve as a ground for nullity, and corruption which goes beyond the bounds of partiality and is not acceptable

16See the statement in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/2 147, para. 77. Article 50 equally does not cover corruption between a State representative and an arbitrator, Jiménez de Aréchaga, ibid. 140 f, para. 86. According to Article 2, subpara. 1(e) (q.v., N. 40–42), a negotiating State is one “which took part in the drawing up and adoption of the text of the treaty”.

17Reuter, Introduction N. 265.

626

article

by a State’s representative of a treaty subject to ratifi cation,18 or the treaty’s subsequent performance. In particular, a negotiating State must have procured—obtained intentionally—a State’s consent through the corruption of the State’s representative. Corruption then undermines the consent which the representative purports to express on behalf of his State.19 Through corruption, the representative of a State loses his status as a representative20 as he negotiates as a private individual rather than as an organ of State.

Given the seriousness of corruption and contrary to error (Article 48, N. 8) or fraud (Article 49, N. 4), it appears irrelevant here whether or not the State representative would anyway have consented to the treaty even in the absence of corruption. Such a test equally does not transpire from the travaux préparatoires.21 In any event, it would appear di cult to distinguish one situation from the other. It is a di erent matter if the State subsequently expressly or tacitly accepts the invalidity of a treaty (N. 8).

To quote one colourful example in this context: “Talleyrand was known to have been corrupted by every Government with which France had negotiated and the Emperor had not been unaware of it, but no one could say that France’s consent to the treaties it had signed had been obtained by corruption”.22

3. Ground of Invalidity

7Fraud undermines the consent which the representative purports to express on behalf of his or her State. Thus, the State for whom the corrupted representative was acting may invoke such corruption as invalidating its consent to be bound by the treaty. As in Article 49 (q.v., N. 6), Article 50 envisages in this situation the relative (rather than automatic) nullity of the treaty, i.e., the latter becomes voidable as from its conclusion (ab initio) if the State so intends.23 However, to challenge the validity the State must invoke the procedures according to Articles 65–68 (q.v.), where the burden of proving that the conditions of Article 50 have been

18Statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/1 27, para. 35; and Briggs, YBILC 1966 I/1 22, para. 57.

19ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 245, para. 3.

20Reuter, Introduction N. 264.

21Contra Reuter, ibid. N. 268 (“il faut que [la corruption] ait été de nature à entraîner l’acceptation du traité tel qu’il est: même si son e et n’a porté que sur une seule clause . . . qui un représentant fidèle de l’Etat n’aurait pas accepté”).

22Statements in the ILC by Reuter, YBILC 1966 I/2 144, para. 32; and de Luna, ibid. 145, para. 51 (“Talleyrand . . . nonetheless acted in accordance with the interests of France, so that despite the bribery he still validly represented . . . the interests of his State”).

23T he Venezuelan amendment at the Conference, i.e., to declare the treaty absolutely void erga omnes (N. 2), was rejected as it would have impaired the legitimate rights of other States; see the statement in Vienna by Jiménez de Aréchaga of the Uruguayan delegation, OR 1968 CoW 261, para. 23.

corruption of a representative of a state

627

met rests on the State alleging corruption.24 Certain further rights may be derived from Article 69, also in respect of other parties to the treaty, though according to its para. 3, the State to which the corruption is imputable is expressly excluded from such rights (q.v., N. 20).

According to its interests and as the circumstances of the case require, the State whose representative has been corrupted has, as in Article 49 (q.v., N. 6), three further possibilities: (i) it may insist on performance of the treaty vis-à-vis the corrupting State;25 (ii) it may invoke the corruption in respect of particular clauses of the treaty only (Article 44, para. 4, N. 19); or (iii) it may propose the amendment or the modification of the treaty (Articles 39–41, q.v.).

Corruption may not be invoked where the State, whose representative was

8

corrupted, expressly agreed after the corruption was discovered that the

 

treaty was valid, or acquiesced in its validity (Article 45, q.v.).

 

Subsequent ratification of a treaty by the State whose representative was corrupted

 

amounts to acceptance of the treaty (Article 45, N. 8–9).26 However, in Vienna a

 

Peruvian amendment proposing to formulate this expressly in the context of Article

 

50 was rejected (N. 2). Still, it transpires from the travaux préparatoires that this

 

amendment merely wished to state more clearly (and indeed more formally) what was

 

already mentioned in Article 45.27 Deletion of the amendment does not, therefore,

 

appear to call in question Article 45 in its relationship to Article 50.

 

C. CONTEXT

 

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

 

The implications of Articles 44, 45, 65–68 and 69 have been mentioned

9

above (N. 7–8). Corruption as in Article 50 di ers from fraud as in Article

 

49 (q.v.): whereas fraud relates to deceiving the State itself, corruption aims at influencing the will of the representative of a State.28 Article 50 must also distinguished from Article 51 (q.v.), for in contrast to coercion, a person cannot be corrupted against his or her will.29 Finally, Article 50 has parallels in Articles 8 and 47 (q.v.).

24In the context of arbitral claims, Reisman, Nullity 505, suggests at least “su cient evidence to establish a prima facie case”.

25Rozakis, AVR 16 (1974/1975) 158.

26Aust, Modern Treaty Law 316 f.

27Statement in Vienna by the Peruvian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 256, para. 55 (“[i]t was therefore preferable to state clearly that if a treaty had been ratified, the corruption of an o cial could no longer be invoked as invalidating the consent of the State”).

28See the statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 17.

29T he Japanese delegation in Vienna, ibid. 259, para. 10.

ZACHARIAS

628

article

2. Customary Basis of Article 50

10It is most likely that, when introduced into the Convention, Article 50 “boldly inaugurated a new institution of international law”.30 Nevertheless, on the strength of the majority vote in its favour (N. 2) and the customary force of the Convention as a whole, it may be considered that Article 50 has since crystallised into customary international law.31

D. APPRECIATION

11Article 50 does not intend to cast doubt on the integrity of representatives but to serve as both a warning and a moral imperative.32 Rare as its application may be, the provision appears all the more necessary as the number of complex technical and economic treaties increases and the role of ratification shrinks.33 Article 50 o ers protection to a State which has been the victim of corruption but which may hesitate to admit that it has been deceived.34 Finally, inclusion of Article 50 in Part V of the Convention confirms that the validity of a treaty on this ground may be impeached solely through the application of the Convention (Article 42, q.v.).35

30Statement in Vienna by the Greek delegation, ibid. para. 5; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 16 (“striking example of progressive development”).

31In the 1992 Southern Pacifi c Properties (Middle East) Ltd v. Arab Republic of Egypt Case, Judge el Mahdi invoked Article 50 in his diss. op., ILR 106 (1997) 706 (“basic principles relating to the issue of . . . corruption”).

32See the statements in Vienna by the Jamaican delegation, ibid. 265, para. 23 (“if no provision were made about fraud and corruption as grounds of invalidity, such reprehensible forms of conduct would be encouraged”); the Greek delegation, ibid. 263, para. 6 (“moral e ect should not be underestimated”); contra Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 141, para. 87 (“it would endanger the stability and security of international relations to open the door to that type of allegation”). Also Carreau, Droit international N. 338 (“‘moralisation’ des relations et a aires internationales”).

33Statement in Vienna by the Spanish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 260, para. 18.

34Lukashuk of the then Ukrainian SSR delegation, ibid. 265, para. 21.

35Statement in Vienna by Nahlik of the Polish delegation, ibid. 257, para. 59.

ZACHARIAS

Article 51

Coercion of a representative of a State

The expression of a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty which has been procured by the coercion of its representative through acts or threats directed against him shall be without any legal e ect.

Article 51 Contrainte exercée sur le représentant d’un Etat

L’expression du consentement d’un Etat à être lié par un traité qui a été obtenue par la contrainte exercée sur son représentant au moyen d’actes ou de menaces dirigés contre lui est dépourvue de tout e et juridique.

Artikel 51 Zwang gegen einen Staatenvertreter

Wurde die Zustimmung eines Staates, durch einen Vertrag gebunden zu sein, durch Zwang gegen seinen Vertreter mittels gegen diesen gerichteter Handlungen oder Drohungen herbeigeführt, so hat sie keine Rechtswirkung.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 48—Coercion of a representative of the State

The expression of a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty which has been procured by the coercion of its representative through acts or threats directed against him personally shall be without any legal e ect.

Materials:

WALDOCK Report II: Article 11.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 46 , 211, 290 f, 311 f, 317.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 35.

WALDOCK Report V: Article 35.

630

article

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 21 , 117 ; YBILC 1966 I/2 140 , 308, 331.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 48.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 266 , 465; OR 1969 Plenary 90.

Vienna Conference Vote: 93:0:4

Selected Literature (in addition to the literature mentioned in Article 52, q.v.):

G. Distefano, Article 51, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1835 .

The basis of this commentary was prepared by Alison Wiebalck.

 

coercion of a representative of a state

631

 

 

CONTENTS

 

 

 

 

Paras.

 

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

 

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

 

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

 

B. Interpretation of Article 51 ...........................................................

3

 

1.

Coercion ...........................................................................................

3

 

2.

Consent ............................................................................................

7

 

3.

Ground of Invalidity ........................................................................

8

 

C. Context ...............................................................................................

11

 

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions .....................................................

11

 

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ..................................................................

12

 

3.

Customary Basis of Article 51 ..........................................................

13

 

D. Appreciation ........................................................................................

14

 

 

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

 

 

1. Introduction

 

 

There was long general agreement that freedom of consent as an essential

1

condition of a binding treaty referred in particular to the freedom of

 

individuals participating in the making of treaties. They were to be free

 

from physical or mental coercion directed against them for the purpose of

 

compelling them to accept a treaty which they would not have done in the

 

absence of such compulsion. In the event of such coercion, the State was entitled to claim invalidity.1 Up until the early 20th century, the exception to the rule applied to treaties “consented” to by the State representative, even though obtained through the threat or use of force against the representative’s State. With the advent of the prohibition of the use of force, these treaties also came to be considered invalid (Article 52, N. 1).

The classic contemporary instance of coercion of a State representative concerned the methods used to obtain the signatures of the President of Czechoslovakia, Hacha, and its Foreign Minister, Chvalkovsky, to a treaty creating a German protectorate

1See the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1151 (N. 10); G. Grosch, Der Zwang im Völkerrecht (1912); A. Cavaglieri, La violenza come motivo di nullità dei trattati, Revue DI 27 (1935) 4 ; G. Wenner, Willensmängel im Völkerrecht (1940) 124 f.

632

article

over Bohemia and Moravia in 1939 e ectively bringing about the end of an independent Czechoslovakia.2

2. History

2While recognising that coercion of a State representative could also entail a grave threat to the State as a whole, Waldock Report II deemed the two addressees of coercion su ciently distinct to be dealt with separately (Article 52, N. 2),3 a view subsequently supported within the ILC.4 A di erent issue hotly discussed in 1963 and in 1966 concerned the consequence of such coercion, the ILC eventually considering that this should be automatic nullity, rather than voidability.5 The ILC Draft 1966 contained in substance today’s Article 51.6 In Vienna, three amendments were tabled proposing that the injured State be allowed the option of determining whether the treaty should be voided.7 In the debates, various States raised similar questions.8 However, all three amendments were rejected9 and the ILC proposal was adopted with only a minor change by 93 votes to none, with four abstentions.10

2I.e., they were incarcerated without food and intimidated by constant threats until they signed; see the statements by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 308, para. 22; and Rosenne, YBILC 1963 I 49, para. 34; also O’Connell, International Law I 240 (“very extreme instance”). For the consequences, see Article 69, N. 13. For other historical examples, see the Harvard Draft, ibid. 1155 ; Fischer/Köck N. 256 (going

back to Richard the Lionheart); Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 50, para. 1.

3Articles 11 and 12, YBILC 1963 II 50 f. See also Tunkin in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 48, para. 27 (“[c]oercion against a representative was also a serious breach of international law, though of a di erent order”). Previously Fitzmaurice Report III, YBILC

1958 II 38.

4Statements in the ILC by Bartos, YBILC 1963 I 48, para. 21; Tunkin, ibid., para. 27; and Waldock, ibid. 51, para. 57.

5T he debate in 1963 is reproduced ibid. 46 ; see for instance the statements by Pessou, ibid. 47, para. 12 f; and Tabibi, ibid. para. 16 (“hardly appropriate to suggest that the illegal use of force could be condoned”). Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 14 f, again maintained that personal coercion of a State representative was not as serious as the forcible compulsion of the State itself and that the injured State should have the choice whether to accept or reject the treaty. For the debate in 1966, see especially

YBILC 1966 I/1 21 . 6 YBILC 1966 II 245.

7 By US, Australia and France; see OR Documents 171, para. 440. See also N. 6.

8Statements by the delegations of the US (Briggs), France (de Bresson) and United Kingdom (Sinclair), respectively, at OR 1968 CoW 266 f, paras. 44 f, and 268, paras.

56 and 3.

9 Ibid. 269, paras. 14 ; see also ibid. 465, para. 23.

10OR 1969 Plenary 90, para. 64. The word “personally” in the ILC Draft 1966 was deleted; see the statement by the Austrian delegation, OR 1969 Plenary 90, para. 64.

coercion of a representative of a state

633

 

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 51

 

 

1. Coercion

 

 

Coercion occurs through acts or threats which may include physical

3

force or moral pressure of di erent kinds (including blackmail) directed

 

against a State representative (Article 7, q.v.) or close persons (e.g., family

 

members).11 The coercive acts induce fear which becomes the motivating

 

factor behind the conclusion of the treaty (as opposed to personal gain in

 

the case of corruption, Article 50, N. 3).12 Persuasion, influence, argument,

 

or advice do not constitute coercion unless carried out to such an extreme

 

as to amount to undue pressure.13

 

 

By contrast, Article 52 defines coercion as a “violation of the principles of interna-

 

tional law embodied in the Charter of the United Nations” and refers in particular

 

to the threat or use of physical, in particular armed, force between States (q.v.,

 

N. 6–10). Violence against a State representative in his formal (rather than his

 

individual or personal) capacity falls under Article 52 as amounting to violence

 

against the interests of the State.14 The two types of coercion in Articles 51 and 52

 

may sometimes coincide.15

 

 

An allegation of coercion must be the subject of precise proof.16 For evi-

4

dence, both the circumstances surrounding the consent to be bound and

 

the content of the treaty must be examined.17 In particular, the content

 

may indicate the use of acts or threats to induce a consent which would not otherwise have been given.18

11E.g., a threat to ruin the representative’s reputation or career by exposing a private indiscretion. See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, para. 2; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 II 50, para. 3; statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 51, para. 58; el-Erian, ibid. para. 53; and Gros, ibid. 291, para. 18 (“intention . . . to cover all forms of threat”); also by Waldock, YBILC 1966 I/1 118, para. 74; Reuter, Introduction N. 179; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 226; Tenekides, AFDI 20 (1974) 85 (“ou aux personnes qui lui sont chères”).

12See the Harvard Draft, AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1151; the 1981 Dubai-Sharjah Border Arbitration, ILR 91 (1993) 543, according to which the United Kingdom “had doubtless exercised its influence and pressure on the Ruler but that was not to be equated with duress in the sense used in Articles 51 and 52 of the Vienna Convention”. See also Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 50, para. 45; de Jong, ibid.

13See A. Pellet, The Normative Dilemma: Will and Consent in International Law-Mak- ing, Australian YBIL 12 (1992) 44 (“threshold of admissible coercion”).

14See de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 232 at n. 86.

15ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 245 f, para. 1.

16See the 1981 Dubai-Sharjah Border Arbitration, ILR 91 (1993) 569.

17But see de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 224, who concentrates mainly on consent.

18Ibid.

634

article

5Article 51 concerns the representative in his personal capacity, not as a representative of State.19 The consent of a State to be bound by a treaty can only be expressed by a State representative in his capacity as an organ of that State.20 If, under coercion, a representative acts not in his o cial capacity as an organ of State but as a private person (i.e., he expresses consent for his own ends), the State can no longer be regarded as having consented to the treaty. Once a representative negotiates as a private individual rather than as an organ of State, he loses his status as a representative: coercion undermines the consent which the representative purports to express on behalf of his State.21

6It is not specified in Article 51 who must have exercised the coercion, though it is to be assumed that the representative of another State party to the treaty is envisaged (whether acting on his or her own accord or upon o cial instructions).22

In Vienna (N. 2) the US delegation unsuccessfully attempted to add that the “acts or threats” be carried out “by another negotiating State”.23 Article 51 thus di ers from Article 50 where the corruption must be imputable to another negotiating State (q.v., N. 5).

2. Consent

7Coercion relates to the expression of a State’s consent to be bound by a treaty. That consent may be expressed by the means enunciated in Article 11 (q.v.). (Article 51 does not, therefore, concern treaty negotiations or the treaty’s subsequent performance.) In particular, the State’s consent must have been procured—obtained intentionally—by the coercion of the State’s representative. There must be a causal link between the coercion and the consent: the State representative must have been forced to sign or ratify a treaty which he or she would never have done in the absence of such threats.24

19Aust, Modern Treaty Law 317; Reuter, Introduction N. 267; also Sinclair, Vienna Convention 176.

20See de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 232.

21Statement in the ILC by Reuter, YBILC 1966 I/2 144, para. 30; Id., Introduction N. 268. de Jong, ibid. 232.

22Reuter, Introduction N. 269; statement in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 141, para. 90.

23OR Documents 171, subpara. 440(a) (emphasis added).

24Statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 50, para. 45 (“the crucial issue was whether the coercion was e ective, in other words capable of compelling a representative to agree to what he would normally have refused”); see the Government of Kuwait v. American Independent Oil Company Case, ILR 66 (1984) 570, para. 44 (“[t]he pressure must be of a kind to inhibit its freedom of choice”); de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 226.

coercion of a representative of a state

635

 

3. Ground of Invalidity

 

 

A State’s consent which was procured by the coercion of its representative

8

shall be without any legal e ect: The State’s consent (and with it the

 

treaty) is void. Thus, in view of the serious nature of coercion, Article 51

 

provides for automatic and absolute nullity.25 In the case of a multilat-

 

eral treaty, only the consent of the State procured by the coercion of its

 

representative is vitiated; the situation of other contracting States remains

 

una ected (Article 69, para. 4, N. 21).26

 

 

Since Article 51 envisages automatic nullity (N. 8), it does not specify which

9

State may invoke the treaty’s nullity (as, for instance, Article 50, N. 7).

 

In principle, impeachment of the treaty and in particular the procedures according to Articles 65–68 (q.v.) can be set in motion by any party to the treaty.27 Indeed, it might be inequitable to expect the coerced State alone to have to do so. The coercing State, on the other hand, would appear to be excluded from doing so (ex turpi causa jus non oritur).28 Article 69 grants further rights to the other parties to the treaty (q.v., N. 10). According to its para. 3, however, the State to which the corruption is imputable is expressly excluded from such rights. (q.v., N. 20).

According to Article 44, para. 5 (q.v., N. 21), the provisions of a coerced treaty remain indivisible.29

It is clear from the travaux préparatoires that subsequent approval of the 10 treaty procured by coercion (e.g., by ratification) is not possible;30 if the State concerned wishes to keep the substance of the coerced treaty, it can

25See the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, para. 3; statements in the ILC by Amado, YBILC 1966 I/1 26, para. 26 (“[a] treaty where . . . another will was substituted for the will of the State, was not a treaty at all and could not produce any e ects in law”); and de Luna, ibid. 117, para. 52.

26See the statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 268, para. 4. It is the coerced State’s participation rather than the treaty which is void, Jennings/Watts N. 641 at n. 6; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 229 at n. 77.

27Article 65 (q.v., N. 11), non-parties being free to raise their case before the organs of the UN; see, e.g., Article 52, N. 14. In any event, amendments at the Vienna Conference aiming at limiting the right to invoke invalidity to the coerced State remained without success (N. 2); di erently Rozakis, AVR 16 (1974/1975) 169.

28Sinclair, Vienna Convention 176; the statement in Vienna by the then Ukrainian SSR delegation, OR 1968 CoW 269, para. 8 (“a State guilty of an act of coercion should not be allowed to benefit . . . by itself claiming that the treaty was invalid if it was in its interests to do so”).

29Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/2 141, para. 93.

30See, e.g., the statements in the ILC by Verdross, YBILC 1963 I 211, para. 24 (“a treaty signed under duress could not be validated by subsequent ratification”); Tunkin, ibid. 48, para. 28; Ago, ibid. 49, para. 39; Bedjaoui, YBILC 1966 I/1 25, para. 11 (“paradoxical . . . that an act without any legal e ect could regain legal e ect simply

ZACHARIAS

636

article

initiate a fresh agreement.31 In this respect, Article 51 di ers from Article 50 (q.v., N. 8) and also, incidentally, from the Harvard Draft.32 T his is confirmed by Article 45 (q.v., N. 5) which, by omitting Article 51 in its introductory sentence, excludes the possibility of a State whose representative was coerced from expressly agreeing to or acquiescing to the treaty’s validity.33

Still, Article 51 is a residual rule. It should not be overlooked that it is not the State but its representative who, in his or her personal capacity, has been coerced (N. 4). It cannot be excluded that the coerced treaty may eventually correspond with the interests of the State itself. Moreover, Article 51 does not constitute jus cogens. States are masters of their own treaties and are free at any time to waive consensually the conditions of Article 51 and revive—formally or informally—treaties previously deemed null and void.

C. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

11The distinction between Articles 51 and 52 has been discussed above (N. 3), as have the implications of Articles 11, 44–45 and 65–69 (N. 7–12). Coercion is to be distinguished from the invalidating e ects of error, fraud and corruption (Articles 48–50, q.v.) which are separable and voidable (N. 8).

2.Matters Not Dealt With

12Article 51 specifies neither who must have exercised the coercion (N. 6) nor which State may invoke the treaty’s nullity (N. 9).

3.Customary Basis of Article 51

13That coercion of a representative, though rare, invalidates the treaty belongs to a legal tradition of long standing rooted in the general prin-

by being confirmed”); and Yasseen, ibid. 22, para. 62. See also Przetacznik, ILJ 15 (1975) 193. Contra Bleckmann, Völkerrecht N. 324.

31Statement by Yasseen in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 22, para. 62.

32AJIL 29 (1935) Supplement 1148 f (“if the coercion has been directed against a person signing a treaty on behalf of a State and if with knowledge of this fact the treaty signed has later been ratified by that State without coercion, the treaty is not to be considered as having been entered into by that State in consequence of duress”).

33Rozakis, AVR 16 (1974/1975) 168 (“to avoid irreversible validation of a defect induced through coercion while the coercion lasts and the coerced State may easily be impelled into validating its consent expressly or impliedly”).

ZACHARIAS

coercion of a representative of a state

637

ciples of international law.34 Upon closer perusal, two elements of progressive development in Article 51 at the time of its adoption transpire: (i) the invalidating factor is the unlawfulness of the coercive acts or threats directed against a representative rather than the lack of consent;35 and (ii) such coercion is subject to absolute, rather than relative, nullity (N. 1).36 On the whole, Article 51 today appears to reflect a rule of customary international law.37

D. APPRECIATION

Article 51 is di cult to grasp as it deals with the State representative in 14 a dual capacity: (i) as an individual; and (ii) as an organ of State. While expressed in terms of lack of consent to protect an essentially private interest, Article 51 functions equally to protect a public interest, namely,

the interest of the international community to prohibit acts or threats of force against a State via the representative.38 At this point, Article 51 approaches Article 52 (q.v.). On the whole, coercion of a representative in his or her capacity as an organ of State a ects all other treaty parties who are entitled to set impeachment procedures in motion and thereby contribute to upholding the international legal order (N. 9).39

34Statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 268, para. 2 (“[t]he idea underlying Article [51] . . . had its source in customary international law”); Id., Vienna Convention 16; McNair, Law of Treaties 207; O’Connell, International Law I 239.

35See the observation by the Portuguese Government to the ILC, Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 14.

36Sinclair, Vienna Convention 16; statement by Elias in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/1 24, para. 87.

37See the 1981 Dubai-Sharjah Border Arbitration, ILR 91 (1993) 569; Bindschedler, Völkerrechtliche Verträge 163 (“unbestrittenermassen . . . geltendes Recht”).

38See the statements in the ILC by Tunkin, YBILC 1963 I 48, para. 29 f; Verdross, ibid. 50, para. 41, Ago, ibid. para. 47; and Amado, YBILC 1966 I/1 24, para. 80.

39Reuter, Introduction N, 268.

Article 52

Coercion of a State by the threat or use of force

A treaty is void if its conclusion has been procured by the threat or use of force in violation of the principles of international law embodied in the Charter of the United Nations.

Article 52 Contrainte exercée sur un Etat par la menace ou l’emploi de la force

Est nul tout traité dont la conclusion a été obtenue par la menace ou l’emploi de la force en violation des principes de droit international incorporés dans la Charte des Nations Unies.

Artikel 52 Zwang gegen einen Staat durch Androhung oder Anwendung von Gewalt

Ein Vertrag ist nichtig, wenn sein Abschluss durch Androhung oder Anwendung von Gewalt unter Verletzung der in der Charta der Vereinten Nationen niedergelegten Grundsätze des Völkerrechts herbeigeführt wurde.

ILC Draft 1966

Article 49—Coercion of a State by the threat or use of force

A treaty is void if its conclusion has been procured by the threat or use of force in violation of the principles of the Charter of the United Nations.

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

639

Materials:

Waldock Report II: Article 12.

ILC Draft 1963: Article 36.

Minutes: YBILC 1963 I 52 , 211 , 312 f, 317.

Waldock Report V: Article 36.

ILC Draft 1966: Article 49.

Minutes: YBILC 1966 I/1 28 , 119 ; YBILC 1966 I/2 308 f, 331.

Minutes: OR 1968 CoW 269 , 328 ; OR 1969 Plenary 84, 90 , 100 , 125, 168 f, 197.

Vienna Conference Vote: 98:0:5

Selected Literature:

A-E

A.C. Arend/R.J. Beck, International Law and the Use of Force (1993); R.L. Bindschedler, Völkerrechtliche Verträge und Zwang, in: Estudios de derecho internacional: Homenaje al Profesor Miaja de la Muela (1968) 161 ; M. Bothe, Consequences of the Prohibition of the Use of Force—Comments on Arts. 49 and 70 of the ILC’s 1966 Draft Articles on the Law of Treaties, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 507 ; H. Brosche, Zwang beim Abschluss völkerrechtlicher Verträge (1974); I. Brownlie, International Law and the Use of Force by States (1968); L. Caflisch, Unequal Treaties, GYBIL 35 (1992) 52 ; J.-H. Conrad, Die Geschichte der ungleichen Verträge im Völkerrecht (1999); O. Corten, Article 52, in: Corten/Klein (eds.) 1867 ; H.G. de Jong, Coercion in the Conclusion of Treaties. A Consideration of Articles 51 and 52 of the Convention on the Law of Treaties, NYBIL 15 (1984) 209 ; I. Delupis, International Law and the Independent State (1974); C.D. Dicke, Economic Coercion, EPIL 2 (1995) 13 ; T. Ehrlich/M.E. O’Connell, International Law and the Use of Force (1993); N. Elaraby, Some Reflections on the Role of the Security Council and the Prohibition of the Use of Force in International Relations: Article 2(4) Revisited in Light of Recent Developments (2003);

F-V

T.J. Farer, Political and Economic Coercion in Contemporary International Law, AJIL 79 (1985) 405 ; S. Malawer, Imposed Treaties and International Law, California WILJ 7 (1977) 1 ; D. Murphy, Economic Duress and Unequal Treaties, Virginia JIL 11 (1970) 51 ; G. Napoletano, Violenza e Trattati nel Diritto Internazionale (1977); H. Neuhold, Peace, Threat to, EPIL 3 (1997) 935 ; E. Partridge, Political and Economic Coercion: Within the Ambit of Article 52 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties? International Lawyer 5 (1971) 755 ; F. Przetacznik, The Validity of Treaties Concluded Under Coercion, IJIL 15 (1975) 173 ; A. Randelzhofer, Use of Force, EPIL 4 (2000) 1246 ; B. Simma, NATO, the UN and the Use of Force: Legal Aspects, EJIL 10 (1999) 1 ; J. Stone, De victoribus victis: The International Law Commission and Imposed Treaties of Peace, Virginia JIL 8 (1968) 356 ; G. Ténékidès, Les e ets de la contrainte sur les traités a la lumière de la Convention de Vienne du 23 Mai 1969, AFDI 20 (1974) 79 ; P. Varma, Unequal Treaties in Modern International Law, Eastern Journal of International Law 7 (1975) 56 .

The basis of this commentary was prepared by Alison Wiebalck.

640

article

 

CONTENTS

 

 

Paras.

A. Background .........................................................................................

1

1.

Introduction .....................................................................................

1

2.

History .............................................................................................

2

B. Interpretation of Article 52 ...........................................................

4

1.

Coercion ...........................................................................................

4

2.

Conclusion of the Treaty .................................................................

10

3.

Invalidity ..........................................................................................

13

C. Reservations ........................................................................................

16

D. Context ...............................................................................................

17

1.

Relationship to Other Provisions .....................................................

17

2.

Matters Not Dealt With ..................................................................

19

3.

Customary Basis of Article 52 ..........................................................

20

E. Appreciation ........................................................................................

21

 

 

 

A. BACKGROUND

1. Introduction

1 Prior to the 1919 League of Nations Covenant and the 1928 KelloggBriand Pact, doctrine maintained that war was a legitimate instrument for the settlement of international disputes and that the threat or use of force did not vitiate the validity of treaties so procured.1 At the turn of the 20th century, a body of opinion developed, expressed for instance in the Stimson Note of 1932, which declared that treaties procured by the use of force should no longer be recognised as legally valid.2 In 1932 the League

adopted a Resolution according to which “[t]he Assembly . . . [declared] that it [was] incumbent upon Members . . . not to recognize any situation, treaty or agreement which [might] be brought about by any means con-

1Stone, Virginia JIL 8 (1968) 365; Malanczuk, Akehurst’s Modern Introduction 139; W.M. Reisman, Coercion and Self-Determination: Construing Charter Article 2(4), AJIL 78 (1984) 642 (“[i]n the absence of organized community structures for

enforcing international rights . . . aggrieved states had no alternative but recourse to their own means”); Jennings/Watts N. 1290 ; Przetacznik, IJIL 15 (1975) 177. See also F. de Visscher, Des traités imposés par la violence, Revue DIDC 12 (1931) 531 ; A. Cavaglieri, La violenza come motivo di nullità dei trattati, RDI 27 (1935) 4 .

2 See Q. Wright, The Stimson Note of January 7, 1932, AJIL 26 (1932) 342 .

 

 

 

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

641

 

trary to the Covenant of the League of Nations or the Pact of Paris [i.e.,

 

the Briand-Kellog Pact]”.3 The 1939 Harvard Draft on the Rights and

 

Duties of States in Case of Aggression proposed that the validity of a treaty

 

brought about by an aggressor’s use of armed force would be “impaired”.4

 

The prohibition of the use of force was finally enshrined in Article 2, para.

 

4 of the UN Charter.

 

 

2.

History

 

 

Both the Lauterpacht Report I of 1953 and the Fitzmaurice Report

2

III of 1958 touched on the subject.5 T he Waldock Report II of 1963

 

proclaimed the invalidity of a treaty procured by unlawful use or threat of

 

force contrary to the UN Charter.6 In the ILC in 1963, there was virtually

 

unanimous agreement on the need to include such a provision; opinion

 

being divided only on whether to restate explicitly the provisions of Article

 

2, para. 4 of the UN Charter, or merely to refer generally to its principles.7

 

Some members of the Commission wished to include other forms of duress

 

such as economic pressure.8 The ILC Draft 1963 rejected an extension of

 

the concept of coercion and adopted a provision limited to a statement of

 

principle.9 In their observations on this provision, a number of Govern-

 

ments favoured extending the article to cover political and economic forms

 

of pressure.10 The debate on economic coercion continued in the ILC in

 

1966.11 Eventually, Article 49 of the ILC Draft 1966 was adopted, largely

 

resembling today’s Article 52.12

 

 

At the 1968/1969 Vienna Conference, the ILC Draft 1966 (N. 2) gave

3

rise to major confrontation, in particular in respect of the interpretation of

 

the expression “threat or use of force”.13 The issue was whether the expres-

 

sion referred exclusively to armed force, as Western States maintained, or

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

Cited in McNair, Law of Treaties 210; and in Wright, ibid. 343.

 

 

4

Article 4, para. 3, AJIL 33 (1939) Supplement 895; see de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984)

 

 

 

223 n. 51.

 

 

5

YBILC 1953 II 151 (see on this Stone, Virginia JIL 8 [1968] 360 ), and YBILC

 

 

 

1958 II 26, respectively.

 

 

6

 

Article 10, YBILC 1963 II 51 f; ibid. 51, para. 5.

 

 

7

 

YBILC 1963 I 52 ; see, e.g., Ago, ibid. 56, paras. 38 .

 

 

8

 

E.g., the statement by Paredes, ibid. 52, para. 69.

 

 

9

 

See Article 36 of the ILC Draft 1963, YBILC 1963 II 198; see also ibid. para. 3.

 

10I.e., Algeria, then Czechoslovakia, Ecuador, Ghana, Hungary, Indonesia, Iraq, Morocco, the Philippines, Poland, Venezuela and then Yugoslavia; see Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 15 .

11YBILC 1966 I/1 28 , 119 ; e.g., the statements by Yasseen, ibid. 32, para. 10 ; and Rosenne, ibid, para. 16.

12Ibid. 331, para. 74; Article 49 is reproduced at YBILC 1966 II 246.

13See generally Kearney/Dalton, AJIL 64 (1970) 532.

642

article

whether it also implied economic and political pressure, as considered, inter alia, by developing countries. Of the latter, a group of 19 States put forward an amendment stipulating that “the threat or use of force” included economic and political pressure.14 When the hardening of positions on both sides threatened to jeopardise the Conference, it was decided to suspend the debates to allow for informal consultations. As a result, and by way of compromise, the Conference adopted the Declaration on the Prohibition of the Threat or Use of Economic or Political Coercion in Concluding a Treaty

(Article 52—Declaration, q.v.).15 In exchange, the 19-State amendment was withdrawn. The Conference adopted a further amendment inserting the words “international law embodied in” in Article 52.16 Following further debate, Article 52 was adopted in Plenary by 98 votes to none, with five abstentions, the vote being taken by roll-call.17

Together with the Declaration, the Conference in 1969 also adopted a Resolution Relating to the Declaration on the Prohibition of Military Political or Economic Coercion in the Conclusion of Treaties (Article 52—Resolution, q.v.).

B. INTERPRETATION OF ARTICLE 52

1. Coercion

4Coercion in Article 52 is circumscribed as the threat or use of force in violation of the principles of international law embodied in the Charter of the United Nations (See Preamble, N. 13). The wording threat or use of force is taken from the Charter’s Article 2, para. 4 which states:18

“[a]ll Members shall refrain in their international relations from the threat or use of force against the territorial integrity or political independence of any state, or in any other manner inconsistent with the Purposes of the United Nations”.

5In squarely adopting the language of the Charter, Article 52 neither restricts nor widens the scope of its meaning, nor does it prejudice in any way the manner in which it might be interpreted by the UN; in fact, it leaves the

14Submitted by Afghanistan, Algeria, Bolivia, Congo (Brazzaville), Ecuador, Ghana, Guinea, India, Iran, Kenya, Kuwait, Mali, Pakistan, Sierra Leone, Syria, then United Arab Republic, Tanzania, then Yugoslavia and Zambia, OR Documents 172, subpara. 449(a).

15OR 1968 CoW 329, para. 4; OR 1969 Plenary 169, para. 6; OR Documents 173, para. 459.

16OR 1968 CoW 329, para. 8; OR Documents 172, para. 449(c). The amendment was adopted by 49 votes to ten, with 33 abstentions.

17OR 1969 Plenary 93, para. 1. The States abstaining were Switzerland, Tunisia, Turkey, UK and Belgium.

18ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, paras. 1 and 3.

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

643

 

meaning undefined.19 According to the travaux préparatoires of the Con-

 

vention, this “open-ended” approach was considered essential, not least as

 

the Convention was engaged in codifying the law of treaties.20

 

 

Thus, the meaning of the expression threat or use of force depends on

6

the interpretation of Article 2, para. 4 of the UN Charter.21 It is generally held (and confirmed by its travaux préparatoires)22 that this provision refers solely to the threat or use of armed force.23 The words “inconsistent with the Purposes of the United Nations” in Article 2, para. 4 mean that the threat or use of force which is consistent with the purposes of the UN appear prima facie to be lawful and compatible with Article 52, in particular self-defence as provided for by Article 51 of the UN Charter, and military enforcement action authorised by the Security Council under Chapter VII.24 In other words, the threat or use of armed force is prohibited unless in self-defence or called for or authorised by the Security Council.25 The

19Malawer, California WILJ 7 (1977) 133. See the statements in Vienna by Blix of the Swedish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 279, para. 57 (“the scope of the notion of the threat or use of force should be left to be settled by practice”); and in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 212, para. 34 (“the way in which the relevant provisions of the Charter were interpreted would naturally have a bearing on the application of the article”).

20See the statement in Vienna by the delegation of New Zealand, OR 1968 CoW 289, para. 25 (“[t]he delegations participating in the Conference . . . were not authorized to settle that question [definition of ‘force’] in the context of a specialized draft convention on the law of treaties”); and in the ILC by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC I 1963 59, para. 71; and Rosenne, YBILC 1966 I/I 32, para. 16.

21See the statements in Vienna by the delegations of Chile, OR 1969 Plenary 91 f, para. 75 (“the corollary to”); and Uruguay (Jiménez de Aréchaga), OR 1968 CoW 277, para. 37 (“the wording used . . . did not prejudge the content of the Charter”); also the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, para. 3; and Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 212, para. 34. For Nahlik, AJIL 65 (1971) 744, Article 52 does nothing more “than restate, in respect to treaties, a general principle by which all Member States of the United Nations were already bound under the Charter”.

22As evidenced in particular by the rejection of a Brazilian amendment to add a reference to economic pressure to Article 2(4), Randelzhofer, Article 2(4), in: Simma (ed.), Charter of the United Nations N. 18. See the statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 283, para. 30 (“the preparatory work of the Charter showed convincingly that Article 2[4] was to be interpreted as referring only to physical force”).

23Randelzhofer, ibid. N. 16.

24See the Legality of the Threat or Use of Force of Nuclear Weapons Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports 1996 247, para. 49. In the Military and Paramilitary Activities (Nicaragua v. United States) Case, ICJ Reports 1986 103 f, para. 195, the Court confirmed that self-defence was lawful, though only as a reaction towards armed attack of a grave or serious nature. See also Aust, Modern Treaty Law 317 f; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 180.

25Simma, EJIL 10 (1999) 10.

644

article

threat of force is linked with its use “in the sense that if the use of force itself in a given case is illegal—for whatever reason—the threat to use such force will likewise be illegal”.26

As the Security Council alone has the authority to determine the existence of any threat to peace, Stone has criticised Article 52 for its “heavy political component”.27 Indeed, Article 52 will fail or succeed in tandem with the potentially variable judgments of the Security Council.28

7In particular, coercion within the meaning of Article 52 does not comprise economic or political coercion. This is confirmed by the travaux préparatoires, inter alia, the proceedings at the Vienna Conference (N. 3).29 It was feared that, if an extended notion of coercion was included in Article 52, States would use it as a pretext to rid themselves of burdensome treaties,30 or that the e cacy of pacta sunt servanda and legal certainty would su er.31

8By referring in addition to the violation of the principles of international law, Article 52 emphasises that the principle underlying the provision is not linked to the entry into force of the Convention (Article 4, N. 6).32 Rather, the principle also exists independently and has been of general application since long before the UN33 (without a precise date being specified when

26Advisory Opinion on the Legality of the Threat or Use of Nuclear Weapons, ICJ Reports 1996 246, para. 47.

27Virginia JIL 8 (1968) 362.

28“[T]he fact is that the Security Council, as a political organ entrusted with the maintenance or restoration of peace and security rather than as an enforcer of international law, will in many instances have to accept or build upon facts or situations based on, or involving, illegalities”, Simma, EJIL 10 (1999) 11.

29See also the debate in the ILC, YBILC 1966 I/I 31 ; some members were of the view that other forms of pressure, such as the threat to strangle the economy or starve the inhabitants of a country, ought to be included. See also the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, para. 3; Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 15 .

30See the statement by Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 292, para. 50; Jiménez de Aréchaga, RC 159 (1978 I) 61.

31See the statements by Riphagen of the Dutch delegation, OR 1968 CoW 275, para. 17 ; Sinclair of the UK delegation, ibid. 283, para. 31 (“the principle pacta sunt servanda would be seriously jeopardized if such a vague concept as economic or political pressure were accepted as a ground for the voidance of treaties”); and the Japanese delegation, ibid. 272, para. 47 (“the terms ‘economic and political pressure’ had not been adequately defined”).

32See the statements by the delegations of then Czechoslovakia, ibid. 271, para. 38; Ecuador, ibid. 273, para. 61; and Cuba, ibid. 274, para. 12 f.

33See the statements by the delegations of then Czechoslovakia, ibid. 271, para. 4; and Bulgaria, ibid. 276, para. 31; also the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 246, para. 5; di erently Kearney of the US delegation, OR 1968 CoW 292 f, para. 52.

ZACHARIAS

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

645

 

the principle became lex lata).34 T he phrase also makes it clear that the

 

application of Article 52 is not restricted to UN Members.35

 

 

Article 51 does not specify who exercises the coercion. It is to be assumed

9

that this will be another State party or non-party to the treaty at issue.

 

2. Conclusion of the Treaty

 

 

Article 52 does not apply to treaty-making in its entirety, but only to the

10

threat or use of force in respect of a treaty at the time of its conclusion.

 

Conclusion covers any act expressing the consent of a State to be bound

 

by an existing treaty or by a provision of a treaty to which it is not a

 

party.36 Article 52 does not, therefore, concern treaty negotiations or the

 

treaty’s subsequent performance.

 

 

The conclusion must not only have been brought about, it must have been

11

procured—obtained intentionally—by the threat or use of force. This

 

condition, aimed at preventing abuse,37 requires a direct causal relationship

 

between coercion and the conclusion of the treaty, i.e., the treaty would not have been concluded if there had not been a threat or use of force.38 For instance, application of force at an earlier stage of a State’s history would not su ce.

In the Government of Kuwait v. American Independent Oil Company Case, the Arbitration Tribunal found that “it is not just pressure of any kind that will su ce to bring about a nullification. There must be a constraint invested with particular characteristics . . . in terms either of the absence of any other possible course than that

34ILC Report 1966, ibid. 247, para. 8. See also the statement in Vienna by Blix of the Swedish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 278, para. 53 (“[Article 52] would not have retroactive e ect. That would not, however, prevent States from invoking the principle laid down in the article, in connexion with any treaty the conclusion of which had been procured by the threat or use of force after that principle had become lex lata, but before the entry into force of the convention”).

35ILC Report 1966, ibid. para. 7; the statement in Vienna by the then Czechoslovak delegation, OR 1968 CoW 271, para. 41; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 328; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 180.

36Waldock Report VI, YBILC 1966 II 67 f, para. 3. Indeed, Waldock wished to include a sentence along these lines as a second paragraph to Article 52, “[but] he [recognized] that the Commission [had] expressed itself definitely, on psychological grounds, in favour of the single short formulation of the rule [in Article 52]”, ibid. See also Vierdag, BYBIL 59 (1988) 76.

37In particular, that the ground of coercion is not employed as a pretext for calling in question a treaty’s validity. See the observation by the Chinese Government to the ILC in Waldock Report V, YBILC 1966 II 17.

38Bothe, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 513 (“[a] treaty is only procured by coercion if the use or threat of force is directly intended to bring about the treaty or if the treaty is aimed at maintaining a situation which was created by an illegal use of force”).

ZACHARIAS

646

article

to which the consent was given, or of the illegal nature of the object in view, or of the means employed”.39

12A priori, it is not the content of a treaty (e.g., that the duties set out therein appear unbalanced or disproportionate) which demonstrates that a treaty has been procured by coercion. Rather, it is the behaviour of the States during the treaty-making process which is relevant and demonstrates the treaty’s conclusion procured by the threat or use of force.40 Still, the content may indicate the use of acts or threats of coercion to conclude a treaty (Article 51, N. 4).

3. Invalidity

13Ex iniuria ius non oritur. The conclusion of a treaty procured by coercion of a State shall be void. In view of the serious nature of coercion, Article 52 provides for automatic nullity. In the case of a multilateral treaty, the treaty continues to be in force between the other parties (Article 69, para. 4, N. 21).41

It is the coerced State’s participation rather then the treaty which is invalid. Article 52 is not concerned with any defect in consent per se, only with the application of a sanction (i.e., nullity) for the breach of a rule of international law.42

14As Article 51 (q.v., N. 9), Article 52 envisages automatic nullity (N. 13), and it does not, therefore, specify which State may invoke the treaty’s nullity (as, for instance, Article 50 [q.v., N. 7]). In principle, impeachment of the treaty and in particular the procedures according to Articles 65–68 (q.v.) can be set in motion by any party to the treaty. Indeed, it might be inequitable to expect the coerced State alone to have to do so. The coercing State, on the other hand, would appear to be excluded from doing so (ex turpi causa jus non oritur).43 Article 69 grants further rights to the other parties to the treaty (q.v., N. 10). According to its para. 3, however, the State to which the corruption is imputable is expressly excluded from such rights (q.v., N. 20).

39ILR 66 (1982) 519.

40Caflisch, GYBIL 35 (1992) 70 , with reference to Napoletano, Violenza 58 .

41See the statement in Vienna by Sinclair of the UK delegation, OR 1968 CoW 268, para. 4. It is the coerced State’s participation rather then the treaty which is invalid, Jennings/Watts N. 641 at n. 6; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 229 at n. 77; see also the ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 247, para. 5.

42Statement by Gros, YBILC 1963 I 57, para. 46; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) ibid. and at 247; Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 61, para. 14 (“international public order was the principle on which [draft] article 12 was based”).

43Frowein, EPIL 3 (1997) 747; Brosche, Zwang 216.

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

647

Coercion can be challenged independently of Articles 65–68 as a violation of the rules of international law and of the UN Charter and be brought before the UN Security Council or General Assembly by any other State, even if the latter has no direct interest in the object of the treaty.44 In addition, the UN can act on its own initiative.45

Article 44, para. 5 (q.v., N. 20) expressly excludes in respect of Article 52 a separation of the provisions of the coerced treaty;46

As in Article 51 (q.v., N. 10), subsequent approval of the treaty procured 15 by coercion does not appear possible. This is confirmed by Article 45 (q.v.,

N. 5) which, by omitting Article 52 in its introductory sentence, excludes the possibility of the coerced State from expressly agreeing to or acquiescing in the treaty’s validity.47 However, once liberated from the influence of force, the aggrieved State is free to conclude a new agreement of similar content.48

The ground of invalidity itself in Article 52, as in Article 51 (q.v., N. 10), does not constitute jus cogens. It is necessary to distinguish between the prohibition on the actual threat or use of force, which is of a peremptory nature, and the conclusion of a treaty procured by such means.49 States are masters of their own treaties and are free at any time to waive consensually the conditions of Article 52 and revive—formally or informally—treaties previously deemed null and void.

44Statements in the ILC by Waldock, YBILC 1963 I 61, para. 14 ; Rosenne, ibid., para. 23 f; and Paredes, ibid. 60, para. 2 (“every member of the international community was entitled to denounce the treaty”).

45Statement by De Luna, YBILC 1963 I 60, para. 80.

46Which may or may not be desirable, Bothe, ZaöRV 27 (1967) 513.

47But see the Government of Kuwait v. American Independent Oil Company Case, ILR 66 (1982) 570 f, where the tribunal observed that an absence of reservations of position or protests by the allegedly coerced State would suggest the non-existence (or abandonment) of duress as a ground of complaint.

48ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 247, para. 6. See Przetacznik, Indian JIL 15 (1975) 193; Jennings/Watts N. 641 with reference at n. 8 to the 1973 treaty between Germany and Czechoslovakia (ILM 13 [1974] 19) wherein it was agreed that the 1938 Munich Agreement was void. Contra S.A. Riesenfeld/D.D. Caron, United States–Iran Agreement of January 19, 1981 (Hostages and Financial Arrangements), EPIL 4 (2000) 1221 (“[a]lthough it was argued that the accords were subject to nullity in view of Article 52 of the [Convention], the parties decided to execute the agreements”); Malawer, California WILJ 7 (1977) 160 f. (“[e]vidence does not support the rule as formulated in article 52 which declares all coerced treaties to be void”).

49ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 247, para. 1; Aust, Modern Treaty Law 317 f; Jennings/Watts N. 642.

648

article

C. RESERVATIONS

16Syria interpreted the provisions in Article 52, in particular the expression “the threat or use of force”, as extending “to the employment of economic, political, military and psychological coercion and to all types of coercion constraining a State to conclude a treaty against its wishes or its interests”.50

Various States, in particular Canada, Egypt, Sweden, the United Kingdom and the US, filed objections thereto (Reservations and Declarations to the Convention and Objections Thereto, q.v.).

The intensity of these objections indicates a distinct lack of acceptance of the stance taken by Syria which appeared to ignore the compromise solution reached at the Conference (N. 3).

D. CONTEXT

1. Relationship to Other Provisions

17In addition to the various provisions mentioned above, e.g., Articles 44–45 and 65–69 (N. 14–15), the relationship between Article 52 and the following provisions may be mentioned:

the sixth preambular para. to the Convention refers expressly to the “[principle] of the prohibition of the threat or use of force” (Preamble, N. 13), thereby emphasising the importance of Article 52;

Article 4 (q.v., N. 4, 6) makes it clear that the Convention has no retroactive application. However, Article 52 appears to be declaratory of customary law (N. 20), and the underlying customary rule exists independently of the Convention—also in time;51

Article 51 (q.v., N. 3) is conceptually distinguishable from Article 52. Coercion directed against a State representative in person implies lack of consent, whereas coercion of a State requires a di erent framework, namely the use of violence against the interests of the State;52

Articles 53 and 64 (q.v.) on jus cogens comprise the prohibition on the threat or use of force contrary to the principles of the Charter most likely as an example of a peremptory norm. Nevertheless, the rule expressed in Article 52 would not itself appear to amount to jus cogens (N. 15 i.f.);

Article 63 (q.v.) provides that severance of diplomatic or consular relations between parties to a treaty does not a ect the legal relations between them established by

50See the statement in Vienna by the Syrian delegation, OR 1968 CoW 329, para. 12. On the subject also Ress, Verfassung 816.

51Malanczuk, Akehurst’s Modern Introduction 139; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 180; do Nascimento e Silva, RC 151 (1977 I) 215 .

52See Ago in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 56, para. 38; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 232 f.

coercion of a state by the threat or use of force

649

 

the treaty. This provision demonstrates that political or psychological pressure alone

 

cannot be regarded as unlawful coercion;53

 

 

Article 75 (q.v.) is an exception to the rule stated in Article 52.54 A treaty imposed

 

upon an aggressor State by a UN Member State in conformity with the Charter with

 

reference to that State’s aggression, does not infringe upon Article 52.

 

 

The Vienna Conference (N. 3) adopted together with Article 52 a Declara-

18

tion (Article 52—Declaration, q.v.) and a Resolution (Article 52—Resolution,

 

q.v.) both of which have to be considered when interpreting Article 52.

 

2. Matters Not Dealt With

 

 

Article 52 does not specify who exercises the coercion (N. 9) and which

19

State may invoke the treaty’s nullity (N. 14). Moreover, Article 52 defines

 

coercion as the threat or use of force, but does not interpret these terms.

 

Their meaning will depend on the interpretation of Article 2, para. 4 of

 

the UN Charter (N. 6).

 

 

3. Customary Basis of Article 52

 

 

The formal prohibition of the threat or use of force enshrined in Article 2,

20

para. 4 of the UN Charter constitutes jus cogens (Article 53, N. 19).55 This

 

rule must be distinguished from the ground of invalidity based thereupon in Article 52 which was unknown to traditional international law (N. 1).56 However, Article 52 profits from this status of jus cogens and is most likely declaratory of customary international law.57 In turn, Article 52 confirms the position of Article 2, para. 4 in international law.

53Brosche, Zwang 191 f. Coercion of a ratifying organ “should probably” be regarded as coercion of the State; see the statement by Waldock in the ILC, YBILC 1963 I 211, para. 27.

54Malawer, California WILJ 7 (1977) 136; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 180; Waldock Report II, YBILC 1963 I 62, para. 19 (“[t]here is all the di erence in the world between coercion used by an aggressor to consolidate the fruits of his aggression in a treaty and coercion used to impose a peace settlement upon an aggressor”).

55ILC Report 1966, YBILC 1966 II 247 (“Article 2, paragraph 4 . . . authoritatively declares the modern customary law regarding the threat or use of force”), and 248, para. 2; Malanczuk, Akehurst’s Modern Introduction 139.

56Nahlik, AJIL 65 (1971) 754; Sinclair, Vienna Convention 177.

57Brownlie, Use of Force, 404 f; de Jong, NYBIL 15 (1984) 244; Przetacznik, IJIL 15 (1975) 180. The provision was invoked by the Court in the Fisheries Jurisdiction (UK v. Iceland) Case ICJ Reports 1973 14, para. 24 (“[t]here can be little doubt, as is implied in the Charter of the United Nations and recognized in Article 52 of the Vienna Convention . . . that under contemporary international law an agreement concluded under the threat or use of force is void”).

650

article

E. APPRECIATION

21As a statement of principle, Article 52 is clear and certainly important, as it puts on record certain limits on the conduct of States in order to prevent abuses.58 As a legal rule, the provision is more ambiguous, since its meaning and scope are linked to Article 2, para. 4 of the UN Charter which in turn remains to be interpreted by the UN Security Council, the General Assembly, or the Court. Still, the matter was (and is) no di erent under customary international law,59 and Article 52 has the advantage of circumscribing the rule precisely and in writing. Not least, Article 52 operates as a signal “[putting] States on notice that any treaty they sought to procure by those prohibited means would constitute a precarious gain”.60 With the fall of the Berlin wall in 1989, criticism that Article 52 fails to include political and economic pressure would appear to have subsided. Together with Articles 65–68 (q.v.) the provision at least o ers the weaker State (and other treaty parties) the recognition of a dispute vis-à-vis the powerful State.61 On the whole, rather than presenting the ideal solution, the provision reflects a compromise hammered out to obtain the widest possible support.62

58See the statement in Vienna by the delegation of Ecuador, OR 1969 Plenary 90, para. 65 (“no article in the draft convention was as important to the future of mankind as article [52]”).

59Stone, Virginia JIL 8 (1968) 372.

60Statement in Vienna by Blix of the Swedish delegation, OR 1968 CoW 278, para. 51.

61Statement by Jiménez de Aréchaga, YBILC 1966 I/2 8 f, para. 55.

62Dhokalia, IJIL 9 (1969) 213.

Соседние файлы в предмете [НЕСОРТИРОВАННОЕ]